Boss Audio Systems Br 1600Cd Users Manual 1600CD_r_e

BR-1600CD to the manual ba6ac5ea-fc21-41e0-a836-7cc84a0f206a

2015-02-03

: Boss-Audio-Systems Boss-Audio-Systems-Br-1600Cd-Users-Manual-475941 boss-audio-systems-br-1600cd-users-manual-475941 boss-audio-systems pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 312 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Owner’s Manual
*03343912-10*
03343912 07-12-AN
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the BOSS BR-1600CD Digital Recording Studio.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT
NOTES” (Owner’s manual p. 2–3; p. 4–5). These sections provide important information concerning the proper
operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Basic Operation and Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety.
The manuals should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
■
How to use this manual
The BR-1600CD Owner’s manual consists of two volumes “
Basic Operation
” and “
Owner’s Manual
.”
“
Basic Operation
” explains the sequence of turning on this unit, recording, playback, mixing down and
making an original Audio CD. To use the BR-1600CD, please read this book first.
“
Owner’s Manual
” covers the functions which are not mentioned in “Basic Operation.” Please read it for
finer settings and more sophisticated use of the BR-1600CD.
■
Printing conventions in this manual
• Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicate buttons.
[PLAY]
PLAY button
[CURSOR]
CURSOR button
• Reference such as (p. **) indicate pages in this manual to which you can refer.
Copyright © 2003 BOSS CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of BOSS CORPORATION.
Section 2
Using
Effects
Section 3
Using
Rhythm
Section 4
Using the
CD-R/RW Drive
Section 5
Using
MIDI
Section 6
Using
USB
Section 7
Other
Convenient
Functions
AppendicesSection 1
Advanced
Use
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
For EU Countries
For Canada
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
NOTICE
AVIS
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
BROWN:
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
NEUTRAL
LIVE
For the U.K.
2
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
...........................................................................................................
002c
• Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit or its
AC adaptor.
...........................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
...........................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
...........................................................................................................
007
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
...........................................................................................................
008c
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with
the unit. Also, make sure the line voltage at the
installation matches the input voltage specified on
the AC adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may
use a different polarity, or be designed for a
different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
..........................................................................................................
008e
• Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements and
short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
..........................................................................................................
010
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,
coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
..........................................................................................................
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
3
012b
• Immediately turn the power off, remove the AC
adaptor from the outlet, and request servicing by
your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or
an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the
“Information” page when:
• The AC adaptor, the power-supply cord, or the
plug has been damaged; or
• If smoke or unusual odor occurs
• Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been
spilled onto the unit; or
• The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise
has become wet); or
• The unit does not appear to operate normally or
exhibits a marked change in performance.
..........................................................................................................
013
• In households with small children, an adult
should provide supervision until the child is
capable of following all the rules essential for the
safe operation of the unit.
..........................................................................................................
014
• Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
..........................................................................................................
015
• Do not force the unit’s power-supply cord to share
an outlet with an unreasonable number of other
devices. Be especially careful when using
extension cords—the total power used by all
devices you have connected to the extension
cord’s outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive
loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat
up and eventually melt through.
..........................................................................................................
016
• Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult
with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service
Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as
listed on the “Information” sheet.
..........................................................................................................
023
• DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a
level that could cause permanent hearing loss.
Damage to speakers or other system components
may result.
..........................................................................................................
101b
• The unit and the AC adaptor should be located so
their location or position does not interfere with
their proper ventilation.
..........................................................................................................
102c
• Always grasp only the plug on the AC adaptor
cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an
outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
103b
• At regular intervals, you should unplug the AC
adaptor and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe
all dust and other accumulations away from its
prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the
power outlet whenever the unit is to remain
unused for an extended period of time. Any
accumulation of dust between the power plug and
the power outlet can result in poor insulation and
lead to fire.
..........................................................................................................
104
• Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming
entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be
placed so they are out of the reach of children.
..........................................................................................................
106
• Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on
the unit.
..........................................................................................................
107c
• Never handle the AC adaptor or its plugs with
wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging
from, an outlet or this unit.
..........................................................................................................
108b
• Before moving the unit, disconnect the AC
adaptor and all cords coming from external
devices.
..........................................................................................................
109b
• Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and
unplug the AC adaptor from the outlet.
..........................................................................................................
110b
• Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning
in your area, disconnect the AC adaptor from the
outlet.
..........................................................................................................
118
• Should you remove the ground terminal, make
sure to put it in a safe place out of children's reach,
so there is no chance of it being swallowed
accidentally.
..........................................................................................................
120
• Always turn the phantom power off when
connecting any device other than condenser
microphones that require phantom power. You
risk causing damage if you mistakenly supply
phantom power to dynamic microphones, audio
playback devices, or other devices that don't
require such power. Be sure to check the specifica-
tions of any microphone you intend to use by
referring to the manual that came with it.
(This instrument’s phantom power: +48 V DC, 7 mA Max)
..........................................................................................................
BR-1600_R_e.book 3 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
4
IMPORTANT NOTES
291a
In addition to the items listed under “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” on page 2–3, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply
301
• Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is
being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by
an inverter (such as a refrigerator, washing machine,
microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a
motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical
appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit
to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not
practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a
power supply noise filter between this unit and the
electrical outlet.
302
• The AC adaptor will begin to generate heat after long
hours of consecutive use. This is normal, and is not a
cause for concern.
307
• Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the
power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions
and/or damage to speakers or other devices.
Placement
351
• Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment
containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To
alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or
move it farther away from the source of interference.
352a
• This device may interfere with radio and television
reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such
receivers.
352b
• Noise may be produced if wireless communications
devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of
this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initi-
ating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience
such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices
so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch
them off.
353
• Observe the following when using the unit’s floppy disk
drive. For further details, refer to “Before Using CD-R/
RW Discs” (p. 7).
• Do not place the unit near devices that produce a
strong magnetic field (e.g., loudspeakers).
• Install the unit on a solid, level surface.
• Do not move the unit or subject it to vibration while
the drive is operating.
354a
• Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near
devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed
vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes.
Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit.
355b
• When moved from one location to another where the
temperature and/or humidity is very different, water
droplets (condensation) may form inside the unit. Damage
or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in
this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must
allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation
has completely evaporated.
Maintenance
401a
• For everyday cleaning wipe the unit with a soft, dry cloth
or one that has been slightly dampened with water. To
remove stubborn dirt, use a cloth impregnated with a
mild, non-abrasive detergent. Afterwards, be sure to wipe
the unit thoroughly with a soft, dry cloth.
402
• Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any
kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or
deformation.
Repairs and Data
452
• Please be aware that all data contained in the unit’s
memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs.
Important data should always be backed up on a storage
device (
e.g., CD-R/RW disk or external computer connected
via USB
), or written down on paper (when possible).
During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data.
However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related
to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not
be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no
liability concerning such loss of data.
Additional Precautions
551
• Please be aware that the contents of memory can be
irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper
operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of
loosing important data, we recommend that you periodically
save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the
unit’s memory on a storage device (e.g., CD-R/RW disk or
external computer connected via USB).
552
• Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents
of data that was stored hard disk once it has been lost.
Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such
loss of data.
553
• Use a reasonable amount of care when using the unit’s
buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks
and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions.
554
• Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display.
556
• When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the
connector itself—never pull on the cable. This way you
will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cable’s
internal elements.
558a
• To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the unit’s
volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use
headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about
those around you (especially when it is late at night).
559a
• When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box
(including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise,
you will need to use equivalent packaging materials.
BR-1600_R_e.book 4 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
5
IMPORTANT NOTES
561
• Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-5, FV-500L, or
FV-500H; sold separately). By connecting any other
expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/or
damage to the unit.
562
• Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using
some other make of connection cable, please note the
following precautions.
• Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use
cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this
unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level
to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For infor-
mation on cable specifications, contact the manufac-
turer of the cable.
982
• No data for the music that is played will be output from
MIDI OUT.
Handling CD-ROMs
801
• Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside
(encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM
discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean
using a commercially available CD cleaner.
Copyright
851
• Unauthorized recording, distribution, sale, lending, public
performance, broadcasting, or the like, in whole or in part,
of a work (musical composition, video, broadcast, public
performance, or the like) whose copyright is held by a
third party is prohibited by law.
852a
• When exchanging audio signals through a digital
connection with an external instrument, this unit can
perform recording without being subject to the restrictions
of the Serial Copy Management System (SCMS). This is
because the unit is intended solely for musical production,
and is designed not to be subject to restrictions as long as
it is used to record works (such as your own composi-
tions) that do not infringe on the copyrights of others.
(SCMS is a feature that prohibits second-generation and
later copying through a digital connection. It is built into
MD recorders and other consumer digital-audio
equipment as a copyright-protection feature.)
853
• Do not use this unit for purposes that could infringe on a
copyright held by a third party. We assume no responsi-
bility whatsoever with regard to any infringements of
third-party copyrights arising through your use of this
unit.
About the License Agreement
• The BR-1600CD and its CD-R/RW capability are designed
to allow you to reproduce material to which you have
copyright, or material which the copyright owner has
granted you permission to copy. Accordingly, repro-
duction of Music CD or other copyrighted material
without permission of the copyright owner avoiding
technical prohibiting features of second-generation and
later copying like SCMS or others constitutes copyright
infringement and may incur penalties even in case such
reproduction is for your own personal use and enjoyment
(private use). Consult a copyright specialist or special
publications for more detailed information on obtaining
such permission from copyright holders.
Disclaimer of liability
• BOSS/Roland will take no responsibility for any “direct
damages,” “consequential damages,” or “any other
damages” which may result from your use of the BR-
1600CD. These damages may include but are not limited
to the following events which can occur when using the
BR-1600CD.
• Any loss of profit that may occur to you
• Permanent loss of your music or data
• Inability to continue using the BR-1600CD itself or a
connected device
204
...........................................................................................................
204
* Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of
Microsoft Corporation.
206e
* The screen shots in this document are used in compliance
with the guidelines of the Microsoft Corporation.
206j
* Windows® is known officially as: “Microsoft®
Windows® operating system.”
207
* Apple and Macintosh are registered trademark of Apple
Inc.
209
* Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Inc.
220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
...........................................................................................................
The explanations in this manual include illustrations
that depict what should typically be shown by the
display. Note, however, that your unit may incor-
porate a newer, enhanced version of the system (e.g.,
includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in
the display may not always match what appears in
the manual.
BR-1600_R_e.book 5 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
6
Precautions Regarding the Hard Disk
The BR-1600CD contains an internal hard disk. This device is of an extremely high-precision design, and it can be easily damaged
if not used and handled correctly. To ensure that the hard disk is being handled properly, you must adhere to the following:
Important Performance and Image Data
Once a hard disk fails to function normally, all data that has been stored on it could be destroyed.
●
All hard disks eventually wear out. Individual differences among hard disks and the conditions under which they are used
have a considerable effect on a hard disk's lifespan. Some devices can be used continuously for many years, while in rare
cases, others break down after a period of several months. We recommend that you consider the hard disk not as a permanent
storage site, but as a place to store data temporarily. We also recommend that you back up important performance and image
data onto the external media that is supported by your device.
For instructions on how to make such backups, refer to “Storing of songs and other hard-disk data to CD-R/RW discs (Backup)” (p. 204).
Note that Roland assumes no liability whatsoever, including monetary compensation, for the loss of any recorded content in
the event of the malfunction of, or physical damage to the hard disk, or for any direct or incidental damages resulting from
the loss of such data.
Precautions Regarding Setup and Use
Certain hard disk setup procedures and usage conditions may result in the corruption of recorded data, malfunctioning, or
physical damage to the disk, so be sure to observe the following precautions.
●
Do not subject the hard disk to vibration or shock, especially while the unit is in operation. Failure to observe this precaution
can result in the hard disk being permanently damaged.
Conditions to be avoided:
• Lifting or moving the BR-1600CD while the power is turned on.
• Transporting the BR-1600CD unprotected in an automobile trunk.
• Knocking the BR-1600CD against table edges when it is being moved.
• Positioning the BR-1600CD close to drums during performances.
• Positioning the BR-1600CD close to amplifiers for guitars and other musical instruments during performances.
●
Do not set up the unit in any location where it may be affected by vibration from external sources, or on any surface that is
not stable and level.
●
If the device includes a cooling fan, ensure that the fan and the side panel air vents remain unobstructed.
●
Do not block the ventilation holes provided in the case as this can result in the temperature inside the BR-1600CD rising, and
this will drastically reduce the hard disk's lifespan.
●
Do not use the unit in conditions of high temperature and humidity or in any location subject to rapid temperature changes.
●
Do not unplug the power cord or switch off any circuit breakers in the circuit to which the unit is connected while the power is turned on.
●
Do not move the unit while the power is turned on or immediately after turning off the power. When transporting the unit,
first turn off the power and confirm that the display screen has gone off, disconnect the power plug, then wait at least two
minutes before moving the device.
●
When you need to transport the unit, package it in the box (including padding) that it came in, if possible. Otherwise, you will
need to use equivalent packaging materials.
Emergency Procedures
* The following procedures are to be used as emergency measures only, and are not recommended for normal operation.
If the device fails to respond to operational commands or does not complete operations, turn off the power. If the power does not
shut off following normal shutdown procedures (Basic Operation; p. 9), disconnect the power plug.
If the unit does not operate normally when the power is turned on again, it may mean that the hard disk has been damaged. In
such instances, consult your dealer or the nearest Roland Service Center. Note, however, that it may not be possible to recover any
data from the hard disk once it has been lost.
In addition, even if the hard disk appears to be operating correctly, carry out a Surface Scan (p. 270) to confirm that it has not been damaged.
BR-1600_R_e.book 6 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
7
Before Using CD-R/RW Discs
Two different types of recordable disc can be used with the
BR-1600CD—namely, CD-R discs and CD-RW discs.
What is a CD-R disc?
CD-R (Compact Disc Recordable) is a CD to which data can
be written. It is not possible to erase or move the data that
has been written.
This type of disc should be used to create audio CDs that will
be played on standard CD players. Playback of CD-RW discs
will not be possible on this type of equipment. In addition,
even if you have created an audio CD using a CD-R disc,
playback will only be possible on players that support the
playback of recordable discs.
What is a CD-RW disc?
CD-RW (Compact Disc ReWritable) is a CD that can be
written and erased. As a result, this type of recordable disc
can be used again and again.
While you can create audio CDs using CD-RW discs, it will
not be possible to play these CDs on a standard CD player.
(You will, however, be able to play these discs using the BR-
1600CD's CD-R/RW drive.)
Handling the CD-R/RW Disc Drive
●
Before being shipped, a cardboard insert was placed in
the disk drive to protect it from vibration during
transport. When you turn on the unit, press the EJECT
button to remove this material before you use the CD-R/
RW drive. This material should be saved, and reinserted
whenever the unit is transported.
●
Install the unit on a solid, level surface in an area free from
vibration. If the unit must be installed at an angle, be sure
the installation does not exceed the permissible range.
●
Avoid using the unit immediately after it has been
moved to a location with a level of humidity that is
greatly different than its former location. Rapid changes
in the environment can cause condensation to form
inside the drive, which will adversely affect the
operation of the drive and/or damage CD-R/RW discs.
When the unit has been moved, allow it to become
accustomed to the new environment (allow a few hours)
before operating it.
●
Avoid using the CD-R/RW drive in locations with high
temperatures. Failure to observe this precaution can
result in the drive becoming unable to operate correctly
or in write errors. In addition, this type of environment
can also reduce the lifespan of the CD-R/RW drive.
●
Remove any disk from the drive before powering up or down.
●
To avoid the risk of malfunction and/or damage, insert
only CD-R/RW discs into the disc drive. Never insert
any other type of disc. Avoid getting paper clips, coins,
or any other foreign objects inside the drive.
●
Do not touch the lens.
●
When the lens is dirty, clean the lens with a commercial
lens blower.
●
If a write error occurs, carry out cleaning using a
commercially available CD-RW drive lens cleaner.
* Note that some commercially available cleaners are intended
for CD-R drives, while others are intended for CD-RW drives.
Be sure to select a cleaner for CD-RW drives.
* Never use commercially available cleaner intended for
standard CD players. This type of cleaner cannot be used to
clean the BR-1600CD's write lens.
* Even if the recommended type of CD-R/RW disc is used in a
perfectly normal CD-R/RW drive, the possibility of write
errors cannot be completely eliminated. Please be aware that
this type of problem can still occur as a result of variations in
CD-R/RW drives and CD-R/RW disc manufacturing
differences.
Handling CD-R/RW Discs
* In addition to the following precautions, please also read the
instructions provided with the CD-R/RW discs.
●
DO NOT play a CD-R/RW disc (CD-R/RW disc on
which song data has been backed up) on a conventional
audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a level
that could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to
speakers or other system components may result.
●
Upon handling the discs, please observe the following.
❍
Do not touch the recorded surface of the disc.
❍
Do not use in dusty areas.
❍
Do not leave the disc in direct sunlight or an enclosed
vehicle.
●
Keep the disc in the case.
BR-1600_R_e.book 7 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
8
Before Using CD-R/RW Discs
Compatibility of CD-R/RW
discs and drives
●
Ensure that the recommended type of CD-R/RW discs
are always used. Failure to observe this precaution can
lead to an increase in the frequency of write errors.
●
Even when the recommended type of disc is used, there
is still a possibility that write errors can occur. Please be
aware that this type of problem can still result from
variations in CD-R/RW drives and CD-R/RW disc
manufacturing differences.
●
The usage of discs with printable labels is not
recommended, even if these discs are of the
recommended type. Certain storage conditions can cause
discs with printable labels to warp, and write errors can
occur as a result.
When you insert a CD-R/RW disc to
built in CD-R/RW drive...
When you insert a CD-R/RW disc to built in CD-R/RW
drive, lock the CD-R/RW disc at correct position according
to “Insert a CD-R/RW disc” below. Please be careful to lock a
CD-R/RW disc correctly. Unless, it is possible that the disc
tray is stuck and unable to remove a CD-R/RW disc.
Inserting a CD-R/RW disc
1.
Press the eject button and open a disc tray.
2.
Pull out a disc tray.
3.
Locate the position of center hole of CD-R/RW disc at
stopper of CD-R/RW drive.
4.
Press the CD-R/RW disc downward. The CD-R/RW
disc will be locked by 3 clips of the stopper.
fig.CD set
* As a certain amount of force must be applied for insertion,
always confirm that the CD-R/RW disc has been correctly
inserted. Failure to properly and fully insert a disc can result
in an inability to carry out writing correctly.
5.
Press disc tray until it is locked in the BR-1600CD.
Removing a CD-R/RW disc
1.
Hold the stopper downward and remove a CD-R/RW
disc from outer rim.
fig.CD eject
If a disc tray does not open
If the power is turned off with the disc still in the drive (such
as due to a power failure), the disc tray cannot be opened by
pressing the eject button. In this case, you can insert a piece
of wire to force the tray open.
fig.Hole
Make sure the BR-1600CD’s power has been turned OFF
before attempting to use the emergency eject hole. If you
insert something while the power is on, the disc could get
damaged, or unexpected problems may occur.
Emergency Eject Hole
BR-1600_R_e.book 8 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
9
About the CD-ROM “Discrete Drums”
A CD-ROM is supplied with the BR-1600CD.
The CD-ROM includes a variety of drum phrases created by Discrete Drums.
These professionally recorded drum parts are saved as Loop Phrases that can easily be imported directly into the BR-1600CD and
used in your songs.
Drum phrases are categorized and sorted under each folder in .WAV format files.
The BR-1600CD allows you to easily use these phrases by using the Loop Phrase Import function.
Since all the data included in this CD-ROM has already been factory-installed in the User bank of the Loop Phrase area of the BR-
1600CD, you can easily use the Loop Phrase functions and add the audio to your tracks without using this CD-ROM.
However, in case you initialize your hard disk drive in the BR-1600CD, or accidentally erase the User Loop Phrases, you can
recover all of the factory-installed Loop Phrases by importing them from this CD-ROM.
To import Loop Phrases from this CD-ROM, refer to “Create Loop Phrase” in “Section 3 Using Rhythm.” (“Using wave
data on a CD-ROM/R/RW disc (Loop Phrase Import)” (p. 180))
For more information about the factory-installed Loop Phrases in the User Bank, which are the original WAV files on this CD-
ROM, please refer to “User Loop Phrase List” (separate sheet).
This CD-ROM is not an Audio CD. This CD-ROM should not be played with a consumer audio CD player. If it is, very loud
noises can be generated and audio equipment such as CD players, amplifiers or speakers can be damaged!!
BR-1600_R_e.book 9 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
10
Contents
USING THE UNIT SAFELY......................................................................2
IMPORTANT NOTES ...............................................................................4
Precautions Regarding the Hard Disk ..................................................6
Before Using CD-R/RW Discs ................................................................7
About the CD-ROM “Discrete Drums” ..................................................9
Introduction to the BR-1600CD............................................................22
Main Features............................................................................................................................ 22
Panel Descriptions................................................................................24
Control Surface......................................................................................................................... 24
CD-R/RW drive .......................................................................................................................... 30
Display ....................................................................................................................................... 31
Rear Panel ................................................................................................................................. 32
Front Panel ................................................................................................................................ 34
Extra information on jacks and connectors .......................................35
Input jacks and connectors ..................................................................................................... 35
GUITAR/BASS jack...................................................................................................................... 35
INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack..................................................................................................................... 35
INPUT 2/MIC 2 jack..................................................................................................................... 35
INPUT 3/MIC 3 jack through INPUT 8/MIC 8 jack ............................................................... 35
DIGITAL IN connector................................................................................................................. 35
Output jacks and connectors .................................................................................................. 36
LINE OUT jacks............................................................................................................................. 36
DIGITAL OUT connector............................................................................................................. 36
PHONES 1 and PHONES 2 jack ................................................................................................. 36
MIDI connectors........................................................................................................................ 36
MIDI IN connector........................................................................................................................ 36
MIDI OUT connector.................................................................................................................... 36
USB connector.......................................................................................................................... 37
Power supply ............................................................................................................................ 37
DC IN (AC adaptor) jack.............................................................................................................. 37
Common operations and display items..............................................38
Top screen................................................................................................................................. 38
Current position........................................................................................................................ 38
FUNCTION buttons ([F1] through [F4])................................................................................... 38
PAGE SCROLL buttons............................................................................................................ 39
Scroll Bar................................................................................................................................... 39
Cursor ........................................................................................................................................ 39
TIME/VALUE dial....................................................................................................................... 40
VALUE 1/PAN, VALUE 2, VALUE 3, and VALUE 4 knobs ..................................................... 40
BR-1600_R_e.book 10 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
11
Contents
Section 1 Advanced Use ............... 41
Re-recording only the portion that is mistaken (Punch In/Out) .......42
Manual punch in and punch out.............................................................................................. 42
Performing manual punch in and punch out using [REC]..................................................... 42
Performing manual punch in and punch out using a foot switch......................................... 43
Auto punch in and punch out.................................................................................................. 43
Specifying the section to be re-recorded.................................................................................... 43
Performing auto punch in and punch out................................................................................. 44
Repeating recording in a specific section (Loop Recording)............................................... 45
Specifying the section to be repeated......................................................................................... 45
Specifying the section to be recorded......................................................................................... 45
Performing loop recording .......................................................................................................... 45
Using V-Tracks......................................................................................46
Switching V-Tracks................................................................................................................... 46
Assigning names to V-Tracks (Track Name).......................................................................... 47
Changing the V-Track to be written to an audio CD (the Final Mastering Track) ............... 47
Placing markers in your song (Marker) ..............................................48
Basic marker operations.......................................................................................................... 48
Positioning a marker..................................................................................................................... 48
Clearing markers........................................................................................................................... 48
Moving to markers........................................................................................................................ 48
Editing markers......................................................................................................................... 49
Moving markers ............................................................................................................................ 49
Naming a marker .......................................................................................................................... 49
Assigning an audio-CD song division to a marker.................................................................. 49
Changing scenes assigned to markers ....................................................................................... 50
Stopping automatically at a marker (Marker Stop) ................................................................. 50
Registering and recalling mixer settings (Scene)..............................51
Registering, recalling, and deleting scenes........................................................................... 51
Recalling a scene without changing track volumes.............................................................. 51
Recalling scenes automatically during recording or playback (Auto Scene)
....52
Setting an Auto Scene.............................................................................................................. 52
Clearing an Auto Scene ........................................................................................................... 52
Disabling Auto Scene............................................................................................................... 53
Setting Auto Scene control of effects and track EQ ............................................................. 53
Finding the start or end of a section of audio (Scrub/Preview)........54
Using Scrub to find the start of a section of audio ............................................................... 54
Changing the scrubbing direction .......................................................................................... 55
Using Scrub and Preview to find the end of a section of audio........................................... 55
Enabling Preview .......................................................................................................................... 55
Using Scrub and Preview............................................................................................................. 55
BR-1600_R_e.book 11 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
12
Contents
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit).....................................56
Precautions when editing tracks............................................................................................. 56
Copying audio data (Track Copy) ........................................................................................... 56
Moving audio data (Track Move) ............................................................................................. 58
Exchanging audio data (Track Exchange) ............................................................................. 60
Inserting a blank space between audio data (Track Insert).................................................. 61
Deleting audio data and closing the resulting gap (Track Cut)............................................ 62
Erasing audio data (Track Erase)............................................................................................ 63
Maximizing the volume levels of data recorded to the tracks
(Normalize) ............................................................................................65
Organizing your songs.........................................................................67
Displaying song details (Song Information) .......................................................................... 67
Copying songs (Song Copy) ................................................................................................... 68
Erasing songs (Song Erase).................................................................................................... 69
Making the most of hard disk capacity (Song Optimize) ...................................................... 70
Protecting a song (Song Protect)............................................................................................ 71
Protecting a song (Song Protect) ................................................................................................. 71
Removing song protection........................................................................................................... 71
Naming a song (Song Name)................................................................................................... 72
Saving your song (Song Save)................................................................................................ 72
Section 2 Using Effects ..................73
Makeup of BR-1600CD effects .............................................................74
Using insert effects...............................................................................76
Effect patches and banks ........................................................................................................76
Makeup of effect patches......................................................................................................... 77
Modifying insert effect settings............................................................................................... 77
Changing the sound of insert effects using the VALUE knobs.............................................. 78
Changing parameters assigned to VALUE knobs.................................................................... 78
Changing effect block connections ............................................................................................. 79
Switching compressors, equalizers, and low-cut filters between stereo and mono ......... 80
Saving insert effect settings (Effect Patch Write).................................................................. 81
Copying insert effect settings (Effect Patch Copy) ............................................................... 82
Changing insert effect connections........................................................................................ 82
Using an expression pedal ...................................................................................................... 84
Insert effect algorithm list ....................................................................85
BANK: GUITAR ......................................................................................................................... 85
1. COSM OD GUITAR AMP ....................................................................................................... 85
2. ACOUSTIC SIM ........................................................................................................................ 85
3. BASS SIM.................................................................................................................................... 85
4. COSM COMP GUITAR AMP.................................................................................................. 86
5. ACOUSTIC GUITAR................................................................................................................ 86
BR-1600_R_e.book 12 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
13
Contents
6. BASS MULTI.............................................................................................................................. 86
7. COSM BASS AMP..................................................................................................................... 86
8. COSM COMP BASS AMP........................................................................................................ 87
BANK: MIC................................................................................................................................. 87
9. VOCAL MULTI ......................................................................................................................... 87
10. VOICE TRANSFORMER ....................................................................................................... 87
11. COSM VOCAL COMP ........................................................................................................... 87
12. MIC MODELING .................................................................................................................... 88
BANK: STEREO ........................................................................................................................ 88
13. STEREO MULTI ...................................................................................................................... 88
14. LO-FI BOX................................................................................................................................ 88
BANK: SIMUL ............................................................................................................................ 88
15. VO+GT.AMP ........................................................................................................................... 88
16. VO+AC.SIM............................................................................................................................. 89
17. VO+ACOUSTIC ...................................................................................................................... 89
BANK: MULTI-CHANNEL ......................................................................................................... 89
18. 8CH COMP EQ........................................................................................................................ 89
Insert effect parameter functions ........................................................90
Acoustic Guitar Simulator .......................................................................................................90
Acoustic Processor .................................................................................................................. 90
3 Band Equalizer....................................................................................................................... 91
4 Band Equalizer....................................................................................................................... 91
Bass Simulator.......................................................................................................................... 92
Bass Cut Filter .......................................................................................................................... 92
Chorus ....................................................................................................................................... 92
2x2 Chorus ................................................................................................................................ 92
Compressor............................................................................................................................... 93
COSM Comp/Limiter (COSM Compressor/Limiter) ............................................................... 94
COSM Overdrive/Distortion ..................................................................................................... 94
COSM PreAmp&Speaker.......................................................................................................... 95
De-esser..................................................................................................................................... 96
Defretter..................................................................................................................................... 96
Delay .......................................................................................................................................... 97
Distance..................................................................................................................................... 97
Doubling .................................................................................................................................... 97
Enhancer ................................................................................................................................... 98
Flanger....................................................................................................................................... 98
Foot Volume .............................................................................................................................. 98
Humanizer ................................................................................................................................. 98
Limiter........................................................................................................................................ 99
Low Cut Filter............................................................................................................................ 99
Lo-Fi Box ................................................................................................................................... 99
Mic Converter.......................................................................................................................... 100
Noise Suppressor ................................................................................................................... 100
Octave...................................................................................................................................... 100
Pan ........................................................................................................................................... 101
Phaser...................................................................................................................................... 101
Pickup Simulator .................................................................................................................... 101
BR-1600_R_e.book 13 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
14
Contents
Pitch Shifter............................................................................................................................. 102
Preamp..................................................................................................................................... 103
Ring Modulator ....................................................................................................................... 104
Short Delay.............................................................................................................................. 104
Slow Gear ................................................................................................................................ 104
Speaker Simulator .................................................................................................................. 104
Sub Equalizer .......................................................................................................................... 105
Tremolo.................................................................................................................................... 105
Tremolo/Pan ............................................................................................................................ 105
Uni-V ........................................................................................................................................ 105
Vibrato ..................................................................................................................................... 106
Voice Transformer .................................................................................................................. 106
Wah .......................................................................................................................................... 106
Using track-specific compressors and equalizers ..........................108
Compressors and equalizers................................................................................................. 108
Compressor and equalizer connections .............................................................................. 108
Adjusting the sound of compressors and equalizers ......................................................... 109
Adjusting a compressor ............................................................................................................. 109
Selecting tracks to be compressed ............................................................................................ 110
Switching compressors between stereo and mono (Stereo Link) ........................................ 110
Adjusting a three-band equalizer ............................................................................................. 110
Switching equalizers between stereo and mono (Stereo Link) ............................................ 111
Using loop effects...............................................................................112
About loop effects .................................................................................................................. 112
About loop effect connections .............................................................................................. 112
Basic loop effect operations.................................................................................................. 113
Adjusting the sound of loop effects.......................................................................................... 113
Adjusting reverb.......................................................................................................................... 113
Adjusting chorus ......................................................................................................................... 114
Adjusting delay ........................................................................................................................... 114
Adjusting doubling..................................................................................................................... 115
Fixing the pitch of vocals/
Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box) .....................116
The Vocal Tool Box ................................................................................................................ 116
Makeup of the Vocal Tool Box............................................................................................... 116
Vocal Tool Box patches ......................................................................................................... 117
Fixing the pitch of vocals (Pitch Correction) ....................................................................... 117
Setting the correction method for vocal pitch (Pitch Correction Edit).............................. 118
Applying a backing chorus to vocals (Harmony Sequence) .............................................. 119
Inserting rests in a backing chorus ...................................................................................... 120
Setting the application method for backing choruses (Harmony Sequence Edit) ........... 120
Saving Vocal Tool Box settings (Patch Write) ..................................................................... 121
Copying Vocal Tool Box settings (Patch Copy) .................................................................. 122
BR-1600_R_e.book 14 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
15
Contents
Recreating the characteristics of
different monitor speakers (Speaker Modeling) ..............................123
Makeup of Speaker Modeling ................................................................................................ 123
Connecting external monitor speakers ................................................................................ 123
Speaker Modeling patches .................................................................................................... 124
Using Speaker Modeling ........................................................................................................ 124
Turning off Speaker Modeling.................................................................................................. 124
Modifying Speaker Modeling settings .................................................................................. 124
Saving Speaker Modeling settings (Patch Write) ................................................................ 125
Copying Speaker Modeling settings (Patch Copy).............................................................. 126
Speaker Modeling parameter functions............................................127
SP Modeling (speaker modeling) .......................................................................................... 127
Bass Cut Filter ........................................................................................................................ 128
Low Freq Trimmer .................................................................................................................. 128
High Freq Trimmer.................................................................................................................. 128
Limiter...................................................................................................................................... 128
Using the Mastering Tool Kit .............................................................129
The Mastering Tool Kit ........................................................................................................... 129
Makeup of the Mastering Tool Kit ......................................................................................... 129
Modifying Mastering Tool Kit settings (Edit) ....................................................................... 130
Saving Mastering Tool Kit settings (Patch Write)................................................................ 131
Copying Mastering Tool Kit settings (Patch Copy) ............................................................. 131
Performing automatic fade-in and fade-out (Auto Fade In/Out)......................................... 132
Performing automatic fade-in (Auto Fade In) ........................................................................ 132
Performing automatic fade-out (Auto Fade Out)................................................................... 133
Mastering Tool Kit parameter functions ...........................................134
Equalizer.................................................................................................................................. 134
Bass Cut Filter ........................................................................................................................ 135
Enhancer ................................................................................................................................. 135
Input ......................................................................................................................................... 135
Expander ................................................................................................................................. 135
Compressor............................................................................................................................. 136
Mixer ........................................................................................................................................ 136
Limiter...................................................................................................................................... 136
Output ...................................................................................................................................... 136
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs.................................137
BR-1600_R_e.book 15 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
16
Contents
Section 3 Using Rhythm ..............145
Makeup of Drum/Bass/Loop Phrase .................................................146
Drums ...................................................................................................................................... 146
Bass ......................................................................................................................................... 146
Loop Phrases .......................................................................................................................... 147
Rhythm arrangements........................................................................148
Pattern mode and Arrangement mode ................................................................................. 148
Using drums ........................................................................................149
Setting the track type ............................................................................................................. 149
Playing drum sounds ............................................................................................................. 149
Selecting a drum kit................................................................................................................ 150
Selecting drum patterns......................................................................................................... 150
Changing the drum pattern tempo........................................................................................ 151
Setting the tempo using [TAP].................................................................................................. 151
Creating drum patterns ......................................................................152
Preparing for recording.......................................................................................................... 152
Creating drum patterns using real-time recording.............................................................. 153
Practicing before recording (Rehearsal)................................................................................... 154
Recording in perfect time (Quantize)....................................................................................... 154
Creating drum patterns using step recording ..................................................................... 155
Correcting drum patterns (Microscope) ............................................................................... 157
Changing the drum pattern’s groove (Swing)...................................................................... 159
Changing a drum pattern’s name.......................................................................................... 160
Copying drum patterns .......................................................................................................... 160
Deleting drum patterns .......................................................................................................... 161
Loading drum patterns from the CD-R/RW drive (SMF Import) ......................................... 161
Using bass...........................................................................................163
Setting the track type ............................................................................................................. 163
Playing bass............................................................................................................................ 163
Selecting bass sounds........................................................................................................... 164
Selecting bass patterns ......................................................................................................... 164
Specifying bass pattern chords ............................................................................................ 165
Changing the bass pattern’s tempo...................................................................................... 165
Creating bass patterns .......................................................................166
Preparing for recording.......................................................................................................... 166
Creating bass patterns using real-time recording............................................................... 167
Practicing before recording (Rehearsal)................................................................................... 168
Recording in perfect time (Quantize)....................................................................................... 168
Creating bass patterns using step recording ...................................................................... 169
Correcting bass patterns (Microscope)................................................................................ 170
Changing the bass pattern’s groove (Swing) ...................................................................... 172
Changing a bass pattern’s name .......................................................................................... 173
BR-1600_R_e.book 16 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
17
Contents
Copying bass patterns ........................................................................................................... 173
Deleting bass patterns ........................................................................................................... 174
Loading bass patterns from the CD-R/RW drive (SMF Import) .......................................... 174
Using Loop Phrases ...........................................................................176
Setting the track type ............................................................................................................. 176
Playing Loop Phrases ............................................................................................................ 176
Selecting a Loop Phrase ........................................................................................................ 177
Changing the Loop Phrase tempo ........................................................................................ 178
Setting the tempo using [TAP].................................................................................................. 178
Creating Loop Phrases.......................................................................179
Using a portion of an audio track.......................................................................................... 179
Using wave data on a CD-ROM/R/RW disc (Loop Phrase Import) ..................................... 180
Reading all files at once.............................................................................................................. 181
Specifying and modifying the source loop phrase (Time Modify) ..................................... 182
Modifying Loop Phrase settings ........................................................................................... 183
Assigning Loop Phrases to track buttons ........................................................................... 184
Copying Loop Phrases........................................................................................................... 184
Erasing Loop Phrases............................................................................................................ 185
Setting the Universal Beat for Drums, Bass, and Loop Phrases ...186
Using rhythm arrangements ..............................................................187
Selecting a rhythm arrangement........................................................................................... 187
Changing the rhythm arrangement tempo ........................................................................... 187
Setting the tempo using [TAP].................................................................................................. 188
Creating rhythm arrangements .........................................................189
Assembling drum and bass patterns.................................................................................... 189
Canceling pattern allocations................................................................................................ 189
Inserting patterns ................................................................................................................... 190
Inputting chords ..................................................................................................................... 190
Changing and moving chords ............................................................................................... 191
Deleting chords....................................................................................................................... 191
Inserting chords...................................................................................................................... 191
Assembling Loop Phrases..................................................................................................... 192
Canceling Loop Phrase allocations ...................................................................................... 193
Inserting Loop Phrases.......................................................................................................... 193
Copying a Loop Phrase from a rhythm arrangement to an audio track............................ 193
Modifying all of the loop phrases in the current rhythm arrangement (Arrangement Modify)
....... 195
Naming and saving rhythm arrangements........................................................................... 196
Copying a rhythm arrangement ............................................................................................ 196
Deleting a rhythm arrangement............................................................................................. 197
Setting tempos and beats for individual measures (Tempo Map/Beat Map)
...198
Setting tempos for individual measures (Tempo Map) ....................................................... 198
Setting beats for individual measures (Beat Map) .............................................................. 199
BR-1600_R_e.book 17 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
18
Contents
Using a metronome ............................................................................200
Setting the track type ............................................................................................................. 200
Playing a metronome ............................................................................................................. 200
Selecting metronome sounds ............................................................................................... 201
Selecting outputs for the metronome................................................................................... 201
Section 4 Using the CD-R/RW Drive
.. 203
Using the CD-R/RW drive to exchange data.....................................204
Storing of songs and other hard-disk data to CD-R/RW discs (Backup) .......................... 204
Backing up a song (Song Backup) ............................................................................................ 204
Backing up user data (User Backup) ........................................................................................ 205
Backing up all data on the hard disk (HDD Backup) ............................................................ 206
Reading songs and other backup data back into the hard disk (Recover)....................... 207
Reading backup songs back into the hard disk (Song Recover) .......................................... 207
Reading backup user data back into the hard disk (User Recover)..................................... 208
Reading backed-up hard disk contents back into the hard disk (HDD Recover) ............. 209
Copying and writing waveform data .................................................210
Copying waveform data from a computer to the audio tracks (WAV/AIFF Import).......... 210
Copying audio track waveform data to computers (WAV/AIFF Export) ............................ 211
Playing SMFs using external MIDI instruments (SMF Player) ............................................ 213
Erasing data from a CD-RW disc........................................................................................... 214
Setting the time until the CD-R/RW drive stops (CD Hold Time)........................................ 215
Convenient functions for audio CD creation....................................216
Precautions ............................................................................................................................. 216
Setting the time between songs (Pre-Gap) .......................................................................... 216
Erasing CD-RW discs (CD-RW Erase) .................................................................................. 217
Enabling playback on CD players (Finalize) ........................................................................ 218
Importing songs from CDs to audio tracks (Audio CD Import).......................................... 219
Section 5 Using MIDI................... 221
MIDI fundamentals ..............................................................................222
What is MIDI? .......................................................................................................................... 222
MIDI connectors...................................................................................................................... 222
MIDI channels.......................................................................................................................... 222
MIDI Implementation Charts .................................................................................................. 222
Playing drum and bass patterns on external MIDI sound module
............223
Drum sounds and note numbers .......................................................................................... 224
Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines...225
Synchronizing a MIDI device to the rhythm’s tempo using the MIDI timing clock........... 225
BR-1600_R_e.book 18 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
19
Contents
Synchronizing a MIDI sequencer to the playback time using MTC ................................... 226
Changing the TIME field display.............................................................................................. 228
Synchronizing a MIDI device by recording its tempo changes on the BR-1600CD (Sync Track)
.......... 228
Setting the starting time of synchronization (Sync Offset) ................................................ 230
Controlling MMC-compatible devices from the BR-1600CD...........231
Controlling track volumes via MIDI (MIDI Fader) .............................232
Turning MIDI Fader on and off............................................................................................... 232
Setting the MIDI channel for MIDI Fader............................................................................... 233
Confirming the current fader positions ................................................................................ 233
Inputting drum and bass patterns
from a MIDI keyboard (MIDI Recording)............................................234
Using MIDI to Control the Switching
of the Insert Effects (Effects Program Change) ...............................235
Controlling external video devices from the BR-1600CD (V-LINK)
...........236
What is V-LINK?...................................................................................................................... 236
What can V-LINK do? ............................................................................................................. 236
Connecting V-LINK devices................................................................................................... 236
Using V-LINK........................................................................................................................... 236
Changing V-LINK function assignments .............................................................................. 237
Recording and playing V-LINK control operations ............................................................. 238
Recording control operations .................................................................................................... 238
Playing recorded control operations........................................................................................ 238
Erasing recorded control operations ........................................................................................ 238
Section 6 Using USB.................... 239
Before Using USB (Overview)............................................................240
Operations that can be performed via USB ......................................................................... 240
Compatible OS ........................................................................................................................ 240
Connecting a computer.......................................................................................................... 241
Structure of data on the BR-1600CD’s hard disk................................................................. 241
Backing up the BR-1600CD’s data ....................................................242
With Windows ......................................................................................................................... 242
With Macintosh ....................................................................................................................... 243
Reading backup data
back into the BR-1600CD from the PC (Recover) ............................245
With Windows ......................................................................................................................... 245
With Macintosh ....................................................................................................................... 246
BR-1600_R_e.book 19 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
20
Contents
Saving BR-1600CD track data
in WAV/AIFF format (WAV/AIFF Export) ...........................................248
With Windows ......................................................................................................................... 248
With Macintosh ....................................................................................................................... 250
Loading WAV/AIFF files
in BR-1600CD tracks (WAV/AIFF Import)..........................................252
With Windows ......................................................................................................................... 252
With Macintosh ....................................................................................................................... 253
Section 7 Other Convenient Functions
.....255
Tuning instruments (Tuner) ...............................................................256
Setting the reference pitch .................................................................................................... 256
Tuning...................................................................................................................................... 256
Automatically adjusting the input volume balance (Level Calibration)
.....258
Automatically adjusting the volume balance....................................................................... 258
Restoring the original volume balance................................................................................. 258
Manually adjusting the input volume balance ..................................................................... 259
Muting individual inputs.....................................................................260
Inputting audio with no loss of quality (Digital In Assign)..............261
Creating a master tape protected from digital copying ..................262
Changing the content of the level meter display (Pre/Post Fader)
...........263
Using condenser microphones (Phantom Power)...........................264
Mixing audio-device output
with the BR-1600CD’s output (Audio Sub Mix) ................................266
Initializing all BR-1600CD settings (Initialize) ..................................267
Performing hard disk operations ......................................................269
Viewing information about the hard disk (Hard Disk Information) .................................... 269
Initializing the hard disk (Disk Initialize)............................................................................... 270
Initializing only one of multiple partitions............................................................................ 271
BR-1600_R_e.book 20 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
21
Contents
Appendices ................................ 273
Troubleshooting..................................................................................274
Error Messages ...................................................................................277
Operation of the INPUT SELECT buttons .........................................280
Internal connection diagrams for each INPUT SELECT condition .................................... 281
When [GUITAR/BASS] is selected .......................................................................................... 281
When [VOCAL] is selected........................................................................................................ 282
When [SIMUL] is selected.......................................................................................................... 282
When [MULTI-TRACK] is selected.......................................................................................... 283
When [STEREO TRACKS] is selected ...................................................................................... 284
REC MODE (Recording Mode) Operations .......................................285
Internal connection diagrams for each recording mode .................................................... 286
When INPUT or BOUNCE is selected ..................................................................................... 286
When MASTERING is selected................................................................................................. 287
MIDI Implementation...........................................................................288
Specifications......................................................................................295
Index.....................................................................................................297
BR-1600_R_e.book 21 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
22
Introduction to the BR-1600CD
Main Features
■
Ease of use
The BR-1600CD has been designed so that even
beginners will be able to use it in the same way as a
standard tape recorder. In addition, it features a large
LCD screen for the presentation of all types of
information in graphic format. Regardless of whether
you want to record your band, put together a demo, or
create a finished audio CD, you will be able to put the
BR-1600CD to use as soon as you take it out of the box.
Novices and experts alike can fully enjoy the thrilling
world of digital recording using this advanced digital
audio workstation.
■
Digital processing of audio
In addition to a digital mixer and a digital hard-disk
recorder, the BR-1600CD also features a programmable
drum and bass sequencer and comes with a full
complement of digital effects. All the steps needed for
professional-level music recording, such as the editing of
recorded performances, track bouncing, the application
of effects, and mix-down can be carried out completely
within the digital domain, thus ensuring that there will
be no degradation in the quality of your audio.
■
CD-quality digital sound
The BR-1600CD records and plays back digital audio at a
sampling rate of 44.1 kHz and with an uncompressed
linear bit depth of 16 bits—exactly the same as
commercially available music CDs. Thanks to this, you
can record musical performances with no loss of audio
quality whatsoever.
■
16-track simultaneous playback
The BR-1600CD digital audio workstation features 8
tracks for mono recording and playback in addition to 8
tracks for recording and playback in stereo; furthermore,
all 16 of these tracks can be played back at the same time.
■
8-track simultaneous recording
Equipped with 8 independent input channels, the BR-
1600CD can simultaneously record the input from each
of these channels onto 8 independent audio tracks—an
excellent feature when you are recording drums or other
performances using multiple microphones.
■
V-Tracks
Each of the BR-1600CD’s audio tracks provides 16 V-
Tracks (or virtual tracks), allowing you to record as
many as 256 (16 x 16) different performances. If, for
example, you want to record multiple takes of a guitar
solo so that the best can be chosen later on, this feature
allows you to do so with ease.
■
A host of digital effects
The BR-1600CD provides you with a full range of
powerful effects for many different situations. In specific
terms, Insert Effects are used during recording, Loop
Effects work like standard send/return effects, the
Mastering Tool Kit allows you to master finished songs,
the Vocal Tool Box cleans up vocal tracks, and Speaker
Modeling allows you to hear how your songs would
sound on different speaker systems. With this arsenal at
your disposal, you will be able to make professional-
sounding recordings using just the BR-1600CD—without
having to rely on external effects processors. In addition
to COSM amplifier modelings inherited straight from
the BOSS GT-6, the Insert Effects feature a wealth of
other modelings and effects algorithms. And rather than
being restricted to use with guitars alone, the Insert
Effects also provide wide-ranging support for 8-track
simultaneous recording, microphone modeling, and
many other applications. What’s more, the Loop Effects
include spatial effects such as chorus, delay and reverb,
which are vital for proper stereo mixdown.
■
Vocal Tool Box for better-sounding
vocals
The BR-1600CD’s Vocal Tool Box empowers you with
the ability to fix incorrect pitches in recorded vocal
performances and to automatically apply vocal
harmonies to your vocal tracks.
■
Mastering Tool Kit for professional-
sounding CDs
The Mastering Tool Kit integrated into the BR-1600CD
allows you to make final adjustments to the volume and
other characteristics of mixed songs. Featuring an
equalizer and limiter in addition to a 3-band compressor,
this tool kit makes it easy to balance the volume and
power of songs before they are written to an audio CD.
■
Powerful editing functions
With the BR-1600CD, you can copy, move, and erase
audio, and perform many other editing operations that
are only possible with full digital recorders. For example,
you could repeat a certain four-measure drum pattern
over and over to create a break-beats sound;
alternatively, you could easily position the exact same
chorus section at the beginning and end of a song.
What’s more, the BR-1600CD uses a process known as
Non-Destructive Editing to store the data from before a
edit, and as a result, you can use functions known as
Undo and Redo to cancel and restore edits.
“Rectifying recording mistakes (Undo/Redo)” (Basic
Operation; p. 42)
BR-1600_R_e.book 22 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
23
Introduction to the BR-1600CD
■
Saving of mixer settings
The term Scene is used to describe a batch of BR-1600CD
mixer and effect settings, and up to 100 scenes can be set
up and stored for each song. Accordingly, these settings
can be conveniently recalled whenever you are
balancing volumes during mix-down, comparing the
sound of different effects, or performing other similar
operations. In addition, another BR-1600CD function
known as Auto Scene allows registered scenes to be
recalled automatically during playback.
“Registering and recalling mixer settings (Scene)” (p. 51)
■
Rapid relocation of the current position
The BR-1600CD’s Marker function allows you to position
as many as 100 different markers at various points
within your song. For example, if you position markers
at the end of the intro, the beginning of the guitar solo,
and other similar points, you will be able to jump to
these points in an instant whenever you want to listen to
the corresponding sections again. You can also assign
names to any or all of these markers, and this proves
extremely helpful during involved editing sessions.
“Placing markers in your song (Marker)” (p. 48)
■
PCM Drum/Bass
A PCM Drum/Bass (p. 146) capable of sequencing drum
and bass patterns has been integrated into the BR-
1600CD, and you will find this extremely useful
whenever you need to put together songs based on
phrases or other ideas that can come to you at any time.
Once you have chosen the drum and bass patterns that
best suit your idea, you can easily set the tempo to the
right speed. What’s more, you can also combine different
drum and bass patterns to create a rhythm-section
performance with interesting variations at appropriate
points during your song, and the PCM Drum/Bass also
allows you to set up chord progressions for the bass part.
Once you have played and recorded tracks along with
the BR-1600CD’s PCM Drum/Bass, it will then be very
easy to perform edits at measure positions.
“Section 3 Using Rhythm” (p. 145)
■
Loop phrase functionality
The BR-1600CD lets you import commercially available
loop phrase data using the CD- R/RW drive and then
save this data on the internal hard disk. The tempo for
these loop phrases can then be freely set to the required
speed so that they can be played in sync with your
recorded tracks. Using this function, you can easily
create songs by layering performances over break beats
or other rhythm patterns.
■
Creation of audio and backup CDs
The BR-1600CD comes with its own CD-R/RW drive
already installed, and you can use this to easily create
audio CDs by burning your finished songs onto CD-R
discs. In addition, the CD-R/RW drive also allows you
to use CD-R/RW discs to conveniently back up songs
and song data.
Before you use the CD-R/RW drive, it is important that
you first of all read “Before Using CD-R/RW Discs” (p.
7).
■
Chromatic tuner
Featuring a chromatic tuner covering the range from C1
to B6, the BR-1600CD allows you to quickly tune any
guitar or bass guitar connected to it (p. 256).
■
Automatic level calibration
Using a function called Level Calibration, the BR-
1600CD Digital Recording Studio can detect and
automatically balance the volumes of its various input
(p. 258).
BR-1600_R_e.book 23 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
24
Panel Descriptions
Control Surface
fig.05-01a
1. INPUT SENS knobs
These knobs are used to adjust the sensitivity of the
corresponding input jacks. Note that the INPUT SENS 1
knob also adjusts the sensitivity of the GUITAR/BASS jack.
2. PEAK indicators
These indicators allow you to confirm whether or not the
audio being input via the corresponding input jack is
distorting, and they do this by lighting up when the volume
reaches the distortion level of -6 dB. Use the INPUT SENS
knobs to adjust the input sensitivity in such a way that each
PEAK indicator only lights up occasionally when the
corresponding instrument is being played hard.
3. LEVEL CALIBRATION button
When a number of instruments are connected to different
input jacks, you can use [LEVEL CALIBRATION] to
automatically adjust and balance the corresponding input
volumes.
“Automatically adjusting the input volume balance
(Level Calibration)” (p. 258)
4. INPUT SELECT buttons
Use these buttons to select the input source (input jack) that
you wish to record. The indicater of the selected button will
light. If a lit INPUT SELECT button is pressed, it will turn off
and the corresponding input source(s) will be muted.
GUITAR/BASS:
This button is used to select either the GUITAR/BASS jack
for recording guitar or bass or the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack for
recording from a line-in or a microphone. Note that the
GUITAR/BASS jack will be selected automatically when an
instrument is connected to it.
* When either [GUITAR/BASS] or [VOCAL] is alone selected,
Adaptive Focus (AF) will be activated for recording.
What is AF method (Adaptive Focus method)?
Adaptive Focus is a unique Roland technology that
allows the signal noise (S/N) ratios of AD and DA
converters to be vastly improved.
VOCAL:
This button is used to select the INPUT 2/MIC 2 jack for
recording from a line-in or a microphone.
SIMUL:
SIMUL mode is activated by holding down [GUITAR/BASS]
and pressing [VOCAL]. In this condition, either the
GUITAR/BASS or the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be selected
together with the INPUT 2/MIC 2 jack. In other words, two
inputs will be simultaneously selected. Note that the
GUITAR/BASS jack will be selected automatically when an
instrument is connected to it.
1
2
3
4
5
7
68
9
10
BR-1600_R_e.book 24 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
25
Panel Descriptions
MULTI-TRACK:
All input sources are selected in MULTI-TRACK mode.
When this mode is used, each source will be recorded on the
corresponding track (i.e., 1 through 8 or 9/10 through 15/16).
STEREO TRACKS:
All input sources are selected in STEREO TRACKS mode. In
this case, the audio from the input sources will be mixed in
stereo and then recorded on the track selected for recording.
If you wish to read more about the operation of the INPUT
SELECT buttons, refer to “Operation of the INPUT SELECT
buttons” (p. 280).
5. EFFECTS button
Use this button to select an insert effects’ patch (p. 74) and to
call up the screen for editing effects settings and the like.
6. INPUT LEVEL knob
Adjusts the volume of all input sources, and the volumes
determined using this knob are the actual volumes that will
be recorded on tracks.
When either [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO TRACKS] has
been selected from INPUT SELECT, you can use this knob to
adjust the overall volume while maintaining the balance of
volumes set up for the various input sources.
7. TUNER ON/OFF button
Use this button to turn the tuner (p. 256) on and off.
8. REC MODE (recording mode) button
This is used to prepare the BR-1600CD for recording. In
addition, it also allows you to select one of the following
three recording modes:
INPUT:
Allows you to record the instruments and microphones
connected to the input jacks. The units is normally used in
this mode.
BOUNCE:
Allows you to mix the audio from several tracks and to
record it on one or two different tracks.
MASTERING:
Allows you to master your finished songs using the BR-
1600CD’s Mastering Tool Kit.
If you wish to read more about the various recording modes,
refer to “REC MODE (Recording Mode) Operations” (p. 285).
9.
REC MODE (recording mode) indicators
Allow you to confirm which recording mode is currently
selected. Whenever you change the recording mode using
the REC MODE button, the INPUT, BOUNCE, or
MASTERING indicator will light up accordingly.
10. MARKER
The MARKER section is used to make settings for the marker
function.
MARK button:
Use this button to position a marker at any point within your
song. Each time this button is pressed, the BR-1600CD will
place a marker at the current position.
Markers are numbered in sequence from the beginning of the
song. In addition, you can also assign names to individual
markers. If a marker has been placed at the current position,
the corresponding number will appear in the display’s
Marker box; if no marker has been placed here, the Marker
box will show the number of the last marker before the
current position. Appropriately placed markers allow you to
quickly confirm which section of the song is being played.
“Placing markers in your song (Marker)” (p. 48)
SEARCH button:
Use this button to jump back to the previous marker before
the current position.
SEARCH button:
Use this button to jump forward to the next marker after the
current position.
CLEAR button:
Use this button to delete markers. Specifically, the marker
currently being shown in the display’s Marker box will be
deleted when this button is pressed.
BR-1600_R_e.book 25 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
26
Panel Descriptions
fig.05-01b
11. AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT
The AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT section is used to make settings
for the auto punch in/out function.
ON/OFF button:
This button is used to turn the auto punch function on and
off. The button’s indicator will light up when auto punch is
on.
IN button:
Sets the punch-in position. When pressed, the current
position is registered as the punch-in position and the
button’s indicator lights up. Once a punch-in position has
been registered, you can jump to this position at any time by
pressing [IN].
OUT button:
Sets the punch-out position. When pressed, the current
position is registered as the punch-out position and the
button’s indicator lights up. Once a punch-out position has
been registered, you can jump to this position at any time by
pressing [OUT].
DELETE button:
Deletes the current punch-in or punch-out position. To do
this, hold down [DELETE] and then press either [IN] or
[OUT] to delete the corresponding auto punch position.
When the [IN] or [OUT] setting is cleared in this way, its
indicator will be turned off.
12. ZERO button
Press to jump to the very beginning of the song.
13. REW button
The song will rewind while you hold down this button.
14. FF button
The song will fast-forward while you hold down this button.
15. REPEAT button
Selects a section of your song to listen to repeatedly (“Playing
back repeatedly (Repeat Function)” (Basic Operation; p. 17)).
This function is useful when you want to record several
times using punch-in and punch-out (p. 42) before saving the
best performance.
16. STOP button
This button stops song playback or recording.
17. PLAY button
Starts playback of your song. Alternatively, if [REC] has been
pressed and its indicator is flashing, you can also start
recording by pressing [PLAY]. During playback or recording,
this button’s indicator will light up in green.
11
15
14
12 13
16 17 18
21
22
20
19
23
24
25
26
27
BR-1600_R_e.book 26 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
27
Panel Descriptions
18. REC (record) button
This is the BR-1600CD’s record button, and in addition to
normal recording, it is also used to perform manual punch-in
and punch-out. This button’s indicator will turn red and
begin to flash when the BR-1600CD is standing by to start
recording, and this will change to a steady red when
recording is actually started.
19. PAN button
This calls up a screen that allows settings to be made for the
pan (i.e., the left-right position) of each playback track and
input source (Basic Operation; p. 46).
20. COMP (compressor) button
This calls up a screen for setting of each track’s compressor
parameters so that variations in volume may be suppressed
(p. 109).
21. EQ (equalizer) button
This calls up a screen that allows setting of each track’s
equalizer parameters so that the sound of the corresponding
track can be adjusted (p. 110).
22. CHORUS/DELAY button
This calls up either a screen for setting of the send level from
each track to the loop effects chorus/delay, or a screen that
allows selection of chorus or delay effects and the setting of
parameters for these effects (p. 114).
23. REVERB button
This calls up either a screen for setting of the send level from
each track to the loop effect reverb, or a screen that allows
reverb parameters to be set (p. 113).
24. AUDIO TRACK MIXER faders 1–8,
9/10–15/16
These faders are used to control the volumes of the
corresponding tracks during playback.
Since tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are fixed as stereo tracks, a
single fader controls the volume of both tracks in the stereo
pair simultaneously. In addition, the faders for tracks 11/12
through 15/16 are also used to control the volume of rhythm
arrangement components such as loop phrases, bass, and
drums.
In this manual, the term “track faders” is used to refer to
the AUDIO TRACK MIXER faders.
25. Track buttons 1–8, 9/10–15/16
Track buttons 1 through 8 and 9/10 through 15/16 are used to
select tracks for recording or for the setting of parameters.
Furthermore, they can also be used to select drum and/or bass-
guitar sounds when you are creating a drum pattern or a bass
pattern. Since tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are fixed as stereo
tracks, a single button simultaneously selects both tracks in the
stereo pair. When a track has been selected for recording, its
track button will turn red and start to flash, and when recording
is started, this will change to a steady red lighting pattern. Then,
when recording has ended, the track button will flash in orange
and green. The relationship between the type of illumination
and the track status is as follows:
Off:
The track contains no audio data (i.e., it has not been
recorded on).
Steady green:
The track contains (recorded) audio data.
Flashing green:
The track contains (recorded) audio data but is currently
muted.
Flashing red:
The track has been selected for recording and the BR-1600CD
is in standby mode for recording.
Steady red:
The track is being recorded to.
Flashing orange and green:
The track contains recorded audio data and is currently
selected for recording.
Flashing orange:
The track contains recorded audio data, is selected for
recording, but is currently muted.
26. VOCAL TOOL BOX button
Use this button to turn the Vocal Tool Box on and off, and
also to call up a screen for setting of its parameters.
“Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to
vocals (Vocal Tool Box)” (p. 116)
27. MASTERING TOOL KIT button
Use this button to turn the Mastering Tool Box on and off,
and also to call up a screen for setting of its parameters.
“Using the Mastering Tool Kit” (p. 129)
BR-1600_R_e.book 27 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
28
Panel Descriptions
fig.05-01c
28. SPEAKER MODELING button
Use this button to turn the Speaker Modeling on and off, and
also to call up a screen for setting of its parameters.
“Recreating the characteristics of different monitor
speakers (Speaker Modeling)” (p. 123)
29. V-LINK button
The V-Link function is used to control external video
equipment, and this button turns it on and off. In addition,
you can also press [V-LINK] to call up a setting screen for V-
Link parameters.
“Controlling external video devices from the BR-1600CD
(V-LINK)” (p. 236)
30.
V-LINK REC (V-Link recording) button
If you are using the V-Link function to control external video
equipment, this button allows you to replay and/or playback
video-control operations.
“Controlling external video devices from the BR-1600CD
(V-LINK)” (p. 236)
31. ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN button
Use this button to switch between Arrangement mode and
Pattern mode for rhythm arrangements. For more detailed
information regarding these modes, refer to p. 148.
32. EDIT button
Used to input and set parameters for Drum, Bass, Loop
Phrase and rhythm arrangements (p. 145).
When [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lit up:
Press [EDIT] to call up a screen for creating rhythm
arrangements and editing the relevant parameters.
When [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is not lit:
Press [EDIT] to call up a screen for creating drum and/or
bass patterns and editing the relevant parameters.
33. TAP button
By tapping this button along with your song, you can set the
tempo for the Drum, Bass and Loop Phrases (p. 151).
34. V-TRACK button
Calls up a screen for selecting V-Tracks (p. 46).
35. TRACK MUTE button
If you hold down [TRACK MUTE] and press a track button
that is currently lit in green, the corresponding track will be
muted (or silenced) during playback. You can then perform
the same procedure once again to cancel muting. While a
track is muted, its track button will flash in green (Basic
Operation; p. 20).
• If a track being recorded is muted, the BR-1600CD will
automatically cancel muting when recording has ended.
• Track Mute is not enabled for tracks other than those
whose Track Type is set to AUDIO (p. 149). The Track
Mute is also cancelled with the track type is changed.
28
41
33
35
29 31
30 32
34
47
48
36
37
38
39
40
44
43
42
45 46
BR-1600_R_e.book 28 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
29
Panel Descriptions
36. TRACK TYPE SELECT button
Calls up a screen for selecting track types. Tracks 11/12
through 15/16 can each be set to one of two track types—
namely, tracks used for recording audio or tracks used for
rhythm arrangement components such as Loop Phrases, Bass,
and Drums. Possible settings for these tracks are as follows:
“Section 3 Using Rhythm” (p. 145)
37. TRACK TYPE indicators
These indicators allow you to confirm the current track types
for Tracks 11/12 through 15/16.
38. VALUE knobs
When the icons for these knobs are displayed on-screen, use
these knobs to change setting values. In addition, use these
knobs to control the video on external video equipment
when you are using V-Link.
39. UTILITY button
Calls up a wide range of functions such as track editing,
organization of songs, and the like.
40. UNDO/REDO button
Use this button to restore your song’s previous condition by
canceling the last audio recording or editing operation. In
addition, pressing [UNDO/REDO] a second time restores
the canceled audio or edit (“Rectifying recording mistakes
(Undo/Redo)” (Basic Operation; p. 42)).
41. TIME/VALUE dial
This dial is normally used to move the current position
within the song (i.e., to perform fast forward or rewind).
However, it is also used to modify values of the various
function settings.
42. CURSOR buttons
Press these buttons to move the cursor in the corresponding
direction.
43. ENTER/YES button
Press this button to confirm a selection or a value being
entered.
44. EXIT/NO button
Press this to return to the previous screen or to reject an
operation.
45. MASTER fader
Controls the overall volume of your song.
46. CD-R/RW
AUDIO CD WRITE/PLAY button
This button is used when you want to create or play an audio
CD.
DATA SAVE/LOAD button
Use this button whenever you want to save recorded songs
to a CD-R/RW disc or to reload the saved songs to the BR-
1600CD.
LOOP PHRASE IMPORT button
Use this button to import break-beats and various other
types of Loop Phrase.
47. MIDI indicator
This indicator will light up whenever the BR-1600CD
receives MIDI data via the MIDI IN connector.
48. HD ACCESS indicator
This indicator will light up whenever the BR-1600CD is
reading or writing on the hard disk.
You should never turn off the power while this indicator
is lit. Failure to observe this precaution can result in any
or all of the data on the hard disk being permanently
damaged or lost completely.
Track 11/12
Audio track or Loop Phrase track
Track 13/14
Audio track or Bass track
Track 15/16
Audio, drum or metronome track
Lit Unlit
Track 11/12
Loop Phrase Audio track
Track 13/14
Bass Audio track
Track 15/16
Drum or metronome Audio track
BR-1600_R_e.book 29 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
30
Panel Descriptions
CD-R/RW drive
fig.05-02
The BR-1600CD uses this drive unit to read from, write to, and play CD-R/RW discs.
Before you use the CD-R/RW drive, it is important that you first of all read “Before Using CD-R/RW Discs” (p. 7).
1. Disc tray
Place the CD-R/RW discs on this tray.
2. Access indicator
This indicator will light up whenever data is being read from
or written to a CD-R/RW disc.
3. EJECT button
Press this button to eject a CD-R/RW disc from the drive
unit. Note that it will only be possible to eject the CD-R/RW
disc while the BR-1600CD is powered up.
If you need to eject the disc after the power has been turned
off, turn the BR-1600CD back on and then press the EJECT
button. If excessive force is used to extract a disc, you risk
causing damage to the drive.
4. Emergency eject hole
This hole is used when the disc tray must be opened in an
emergency.
It must not, therefore, be used on a regular basis and should
be treated as a last resort only when the disc cannot be
ejected in any other way (p. 8).
1
2
3
4
BR-1600_R_e.book 30 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
31
Panel Descriptions
Display
fig.05-03
Displays the menu screen, parameter setting screen, or other information, depending on the type of settings being made.
If the screen content is difficult to see, refer to “Adjusting the display’s contrast” (Basic Operation; p. 10).
1. Song Name
This box displays the name of the currently selected song. If
protection has been turned on for the song (Song Protect: p.
71), the letter “ ” will also be displayed.
2. Metronome icon
This icon is displayed when the metronome is being used.
3. Marker
This box displays the number of the marker at the current
position. If no marker has been placed at this position, the
number of the last marker before the current position is
shown. If, however, the current position is in front of Marker
No. 001 or if no markers have been registered, “- - -” will be
displayed here.
4. Measure
This box displays the current position in the song in terms of
measures and beats. The measures are shown on the left; the
beats, on the right.
5. Time
This box displays the current position in terms of hours,
minutes, and seconds.
6. Frames
This box displays the current position in terms of the number
of frames. At the time of purchase, the number of frames per
second will initially be set to 30 (non-drop). This represents
one type of MIDI Time Code (MTC) specification, and if you
want to operate the BR-1600CD and other MIDI devices in
synchrony with each other, all must be set to the exact same
MTC specification.
“Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm
machines” (p. 225)
7. Information
The Information box displays various items of song data
(such as effect patch, marker names, tempo, chord, and the
remaining time available for recording).
8. Input/Track level meters
This area provides a graphic display of the volume levels,
both of instruments connected to input jacks and of recorded
tracks. At the time of purchase, these level meters will be set
to show the volume levels after the corresponding audio has
passed through the INPUT LEVEL knob or the track faders
(i.e., the post-fader volume levels).
If you would like the level meters to show the volumes
before passing through the faders (i.e., the pre-fader volume
levels), refer to “Changing the content of the level meter
display (Pre/Post Fader)” (p. 263).
9. Master level meter
This level meter provides a graphic display of the overall
stereo volume after audio has passed through the MASTER
fader.
1
78
3 4 5 6 2
9
BR-1600_R_e.book 31 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
32
Panel Descriptions
Rear Panel
fig.05-04
1. POWER switch
Use this switch to turn the BR-1600CD on and off (Basic
Operation; p. 8).
2. DC IN (AC adaptor) jack
Connect the BR-1600CD’s AC adaptor to this jack.
In order to prevent accidents, avoid using any AC adaptor
other than the AC adaptor supplied with this unit.
3. Cord hook
Loop the AC adaptor’s cord around this hook in order to
prevent its plug from being pulled out accidentally. If the AC
adaptor should be disconnected while you are using the BR-
1600CD, there is a danger of important audio data being
permanently lost.
4. MIDI IN connector
The BR-1600CD receives MIDI data via this connector.
Connect the MIDI OUT connector of external MIDI devices
such as sequencers to this connector using a MIDI cable.
“MIDI connectors” (p. 36)
“Section 5 Using MIDI” (p. 221)
5. MIDI OUT connector
The BR-1600CD transmits MIDI data via this connector.
Connect the MIDI IN connector of external MIDI devices
such as rhythm machines, sequencers, and sound modules to
this connector using a MIDI cable.
“MIDI connectors” (p. 36)
“Section 5 Using MIDI” (p. 221)
6. USB connector
Plug a USB cable into this connector when you want to
exchange data between the BR-1600CD and a PC.
“USB connector” (p. 37)
“Section 6 Using USB” (p. 239)
7. DIGITAL IN connector
This coaxial-type connector is used to input digital audio
signals into the BR-1600CD. Connect it the digital output of a
BOSS GT-8, a CD player, or another similar device to allow
digital audio to be input.
“DIGITAL IN connector” (p. 35)
“Inputting audio with no loss of quality (Digital In
Assign)” (p. 261)
8. DIGITAL OUT connector
This coaxial-type connector is used to output digital audio
signals from the BR-1600CD, and its output is identical to
that of the LINE OUT jack. You can use the DIGITAL OUT
connector to record the BR-1600CD’s output on CD-R or MD
recorders. In addition, it can also be used to make
connections with amplifiers, speakers, and other devices
with digital inputs.
“DIGITAL OUT connector” (p. 36)
1
10
4 6 95
2
3
7
8
1314
11 12
BR-1600_R_e.book 32 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
33
Panel Descriptions
9. FOOT SW jack
Use this jack to connect a separately sold foot switch (such as
the Roland DP-2 or BOSS FS-5U). With a foot switch
connected, you can use it to carry out remote-control
operations such as the start and stop of playback or punch-
in/out.
“Using a foot switch” (Basic Operation; p. 12)
10. EXP PEDAL jack
Use this jack to connect a separately sold expression pedal
(such as the Roland EV-5 or BOSS FV-500L/FV-500H). When
connected, an expression pedal allows you to use the internal
effects processor’s pedal wah and other similar effects.
“Using an expression pedal” (p. 84)
11. LINE OUT jacks
The LINE OUT jacks are used to output an analog audio
signal. Connect these jacks to a device such as a CD-R, MD,
or tape recorder to make an analog recording of the BR-
1600CD’s output.
“LINE OUT jacks” (p. 36)
If necessary, you can make a setting that mixes the
signals being input via INPUT 7/MIC 7 and INPUT 8/
MIC 8 with the signal being output via the LINE OUT
jacks. (Audio Sub Mix: p. 266)
12. INPUT/MIC jacks (1 through 8)
These input jacks and connectors are used with line sources
and microphones. Each input can accept two different types
of connections—namely, an unbalanced connection using the
1/4” phone mono jack, and a balanced connection using the
XLR connector. In addition, phantom power at +48 V can be
supplied via the XLR connectors.
“Using condenser microphones (Phantom Power)” (p. 264)
• If a connection is made to both the 1/4” phone mono
jack and the XLR connector, priority will be given to the
1/4” phone mono jack.
• The INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack (or XLR connector) and the
GUITAR/BASS jack share the same internal circuitry,
and when a connection has been made to both of these
input jacks, the GUITAR/BASS jack will be selected
automatically.
13. Security Slot ( SECURITY LOCK)
http://www.kensington.com/
Depending on the circumstances of a particular setup,
you may experience a discomforting sensation, or
perceive that the surface feels gritty to the touch when
you touch this device, microphones connected to it, or
the metal portions of other objects, such as guitars.
This is due to an infinitesimal electrical charge, which is
absolutely harmless. However, if you are concerned
about this, connect the ground terminal (see figure )
with an external ground. When the unit is grounded, a
slight hum may occur, depending on the particulars of
your installation.
If you are unsure of the connection method, contact the
nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” sheet.
Unsuitable places for connection
• Water pipes (may result in shock or electrocution)
• Gas pipes (may result in fire or explosion)
• Telephone-line ground or lightning rod (may be
dangerous in the event of lightning)
14
BR-1600_R_e.book 33 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
34
Panel Descriptions
Front Panel
fig.05-05
1. GUITAR/BASS jack
This high-impedance input jack is used to directly connect
guitar or bass.
The INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack (or XLR connector) and the
GUITAR/BASS jack share the same internal circuitry,
and when a connection has been made to both of these
input jacks, the GUITAR/BASS jack will be selected
automatically.
2. PHONES 1 jack
Use this jack to connect separately sold headphones.
3. PHONES 1 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume for headphones connected to the
PHONES 1 jack.
4. PHONES 2 jack
Use this jack to connect a second set of separately sold
headphones.
5. PHONES 2 VOLUME knob
Adjusts the volume for headphones connected to the
PHONES 2 jack.
12
3
4
5
BR-1600_R_e.book 34 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
35
Extra information on jacks and connectors
Input jacks and connectors
These jacks and connectors are used to input audio to the BR-
1600CD.
GUITAR/BASS jack
This high-impedance input jack (1/4” phone plug type) is
used to directly connect guitar or bass.
You can use this jack whenever INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/
BASS], [MULTI-TRACK], or [STEREO TRACKS] is currently
turned on. Note that this input uses the same internal
circuitry as the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack and its volume can be
adjusted using the INPUT SENS 1 knob. When an instrument
is connected to the GUITAR/BASS jack, this input source
will be given priority and the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be
deactivated. If you want to use the BR-1600CD’s guitar bank
effects as an insert effect for a guitar or bass, connect the
instrument to this jack, and then press INPUT SELECT
[GUITAR/BASS].
When a guitar or bass is connected, noise may be
generated if its pickup is moved close to the BR-1600CD.
In addition, a similar type of noise can also occur if the
instrument is located close to fluorescent lights, a CRT, a
PC, or any other type of electronic device. This noise
occurs when the instrument picks up magnetic noise
generated in electronic devices via its pickup, and if it
becomes noticeable, move the pickup away from the
electronic device.
INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack
These inputs (1/4” phone plug and XLR connector types) are
used with line sources and microphones. The 1/4” phone
plug-type jack is used to input unbalanced signals; the XLR
type connector, to input balanced signals. In addition, the
XLR connector can also supply phantom power.
You can use this input whenever INPUT SELECT [GUITAR/
BASS], [MULTI-TRACK], or [STEREO TRACKS] is currently
turned on.
Note that this input uses the same internal circuitry as the
GUITAR/BASS jack, and when an instrument is connected to
the GUITAR/BASS jack, that input source will be given
priority and the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be deactivated.
INPUT 2/MIC 2 jack
These inputs (1/4” phone plug and XLR connector types) are
used with line sources and microphones. The 1/4” phone
plug type jack is used to input unbalanced signals; the XLR
type connector, to input balanced signals. In addition, the
XLR connector can also supply phantom power.
You can use this input whenever INPUT SELECT [VOCAL],
[MULTI-TRACK], or [STEREO TRACKS] is currently turned on.
If you want to use the BR-1600CD’s MIC bank effects as an
insert effect for a vocal mic, connect the microphone to this
input, and then press [VOCAL] from INPUT SELECT.
INPUT 3/MIC 3 jack through
INPUT 8/MIC 8 jack
These inputs (1/4” phone plug and XLR connector types) are
used with line sources and microphones. The 1/4” phone
plug type jack is used to input unbalanced signals; the XLR
type connector, to input balanced signals. In addition, the
XLR connector can also supply phantom power.
You can use this input whenever INPUT SELECT [MULTI-
TRACK] or [STEREO TRACKS] is currently turned on.
Note that the INPUT 7/MIC 7 and INPUT 8/MIC 8 jacks can
also be used to input audio signals for an Audio Sub Mix.
Whenever Audio Sub Mix is turned on, the audio signals
being input via the INPUT 7/MIC 7 and INPUT 8/MIC 8
jacks will be output directly via the MASTER track L/R.
“Mixing audio-device output with the BR-1600CD’s
output (Audio Sub Mix)” (p. 266)
DIGITAL IN connector
This coaxial-type connector is used to input digital audio to
the BR-1600CD. Connect the digital audio output of a CD
player, BOSS GT-8, or BOSS GS-10 to this connector if you
want to record from that device with no deterioration of
sound quality as would occur in analog lines.
Only digital audio data of the S/PDIF format can be input via this
connector; furthermore, the data must have a sample rate of 44.1
kHz and a bit depth of 16 or 24 bits. The destination for audio
entering via the DIGITAL IN connector is determined by system
parameter settings. Note that the INPUT SENS knobs cannot be
used to adjust the volume of the audio being input via this
connector. To do this, either adjust the volume of the digital device
providing the audio signal or use the BR-1600CD’s INPUT LEVEL
knob or LEVEL CALIBRATION function.
It is important to note that standard audio cables cannot be
used with the DIGITAL IN connector and that a
commercially available digital-audio cable or video cable
should be used for this purpose.
BR-1600_R_e.book 35 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
36
Extra information on jacks and connectors
Output jacks and connectors
These jacks and connectors are used to output audio from the
BR-1600CD.
LINE OUT jacks
The LINE OUT jacks (stereo RCA phono plug type) are used
to output audio in stereo and at line level. The BR-1600CD’s
playback audio, performance of drum, bass, Loop Phrase,
and monitored input will all be mixed into this output signal.
In addition, playback from the CD-R/RW drive built into the
BR-1600CD will also be output here. Use the LINE OUT jacks
to make connections with external audio amplifiers.
Note that the audio output via the LINE OUT jack is also
output via the PHONES 1 jack.
DIGITAL OUT connector
This coaxial-type connector is used to output digital audio
signals, and its output is identical to that of the LINE OUT
jack.
Since digital signals do not suffer from the same type of
deterioration as occurs in analog lines, they can be recorded
without degradation in the quality of your audio on external
digital audio devices such as CD-R, MD, and DAT recorders.
In addition, if you are using Roland DS-30A Bi-Amp Monitor
to monitor your sound, audio signals can be output to the
speakers via this connector.
It is important to note that standard audio cables cannot be
used with the DIGITAL OUT connector and that a
commercially available digital-audio cable or video cable
should be used for this purpose.
PHONES 1 and PHONES 2 jack
Allow you to connect a pair of headphones (with a 1/4”
phone stereo plug).
MIDI connectors
The BR-1600CD features both MIDI OUT and MIDI IN
connectors in order that MIDI data may be transmitted and
received.
MIDI IN connector
This 5-pin DIN type connector is used to receive MIDI data
from other MIDI devices such as rhythm machines and
sequencers. Connect the MIDI OUT connector of the external
device to this connector using a MIDI cable.
MIDI OUT connector
This 5-pin DIN type connector is used to transmit MIDI data
from the BR-1600CD. Connect the MIDI IN connector of
external MIDI devices such as rhythm machines, sequencers,
and sound modules to this connector using a MIDI cable.
In order to ensure that the BR-1600CD operates correctly,
do not create such a loop by, for example, connecting a
single MIDI cable between its MIDI IN and MIDI OUT
connectors. A MIDI loop is created when MIDI data
transmitted from a MIDI OUT connector is returned
without modification to the MIDI IN connector in the
same system, and this can cause devices to operate
abnormally.
BR-1600_R_e.book 36 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
37
Extra information on jacks and connectors
USB connector
This B-type connector is used to connect with a host
computer. (USB: Universal Serial Bus)
The BR-1600CD is compatible with USB version 1.1. By
connecting it with the USB connector of a PC using a
commercially available USB cable, you can transfer song
data, .wav files and other similar information between the
PC and the BR-1600CD. In addition, this also allows you to
backup song data and the like on your PC’s hard disk.
“Section 6 Using USB” (p. 239)
When a connection is made using USB, you will be able
to access the data on the BR-1600CD’s hard disk from
your PC. Accordingly, there is an increased danger of
accidentally damaging or deleting the BR-1600CD data.
Extra special care must be taken in such a situation as
data damaged or lost in this way cannot be restored.
Please also note that BOSS/Roland will accept no
responsibility for the repair of damaged data or for
compensation for lost or damaged data.
The BR-1600CD can be used neither as a USB host nor a
USB hub. As a result, you will not be able to use the USB
connector to access external hard disks, CD-R/RW
drives, or other similar types of USB device.
Furthermore, this USB connector cannot be used with an
audio interface or the like.
Power supply
DC IN (AC adaptor) jack
Connect the BR-1600CD’s AC adaptor to this jack.
In order to prevent accidents, avoid using any AC
adaptor other than the AC adaptor supplied with this
unit. Failure to observe this precaution can result in the
outbreak of fire or electrical shock. Note also that usage
of any other type of AC adaptor can result in the
permanent damage of the BR-1600CD itself, the hard
disk, or the CD-R/RW drive. It is important, therefore,
that the appropriate care be taken.
If you disconnect the AC adaptor while the BR-1600CD
is reading from or writing to its hard disk (i.e., when the
HD ACCESS indicator is lit), the hard disk will be
irrepairably damaged. If a hard disk is damaged in this
way, you will be no longer able to use it for recording,
playback, song saving, or song loading; furthermore,
there is a high probability that valuable data will be lost.
Be sure, therefore, to loop the AC adaptor’s cord around
the cord hook to prevent it being accidentally pulled out
during operation of the BR-1600CD.
BR-1600_R_e.book 37 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
38
Common operations and display items
Top screen
fig.06-01d
Displayed shortly after the power is turned on, this is the
main BR-1600CD screen. Among other important
information, the top screen presents the name of the
currently selected song, the current position within the song,
the level meters, and remaining recording time on the hard
disk.
Regardless of the screen that you are currently in, you will
always be able to return to this screen by pressing [EXIT/
NO] several times (although you may sometimes have to
wait until the BR-1600CD completes the current process).
Unless otherwise specified, all procedures described in this
manual will require you to return first of all to the top screen.
In Mastering mode only, the top screen changes to the screen
like that shown to the left.
Current position
fig.06-02d
The current position within the song is indicated in terms of
time at the top right of the display. In addition, this position
is also indicated in terms of measures and beats to the left of
this time value.
The displayed time is based on MIDI Time Code (MTC), and
as such, it is presented in terms of hours, minutes, seconds,
frames, and sub-frames. Note that different devices use
different MTC specifications.
If you want to synchronize the BR-1600CD with another
MIDI device using MTC, you will first of all need to set both
to the same MTC specification. At the time of purchase, the
number of frames per second will initially be set to 30 (non-
drop) on the BR-1600CD. (p. 227)
FUNCTION buttons ([F1] through [F4])
fig.06-04
[F1] through [F4] are called the FUNCTION buttons. At the
bottom of the display, you will find the names of the
functions that are assigned within the current screen to each
of these buttons.
If an explanation from this manual were to refer to “[F1]
(WRITE)”, you would know that pressing [F1] would select
the “WRITE” function as displayed immediately above the
button.
Song Name Current Position
Level Meters
Selected Effect Patch Name
Remaining Recording Time
Name of Mark at Current Position
Chord
Tempo
Mastering Mode Top Screen
Function buttons
BR-1600_R_e.book 38 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
39
Common operations and display items
PAGE SCROLL buttons
fig.06-06
When “ ” and/or “ ” is displayed on the left and right of
the screen, respectively, it will indicate that the BR-1600CD
could not fit all of the relevant content on-screen and that
some content is hidden in the direction of the arrow. The
PAGE SCROLL buttons [ ] and [ ] are used to
display this hidden content. Press [ ] to scroll the screen
to the left, and press [ ] to scroll the screen to the right.
Although you can also scroll the screen by holding down
[ ] or [ ] from CURSOR, this can be done much quicker
using the PAGE SCROLL buttons.
Scroll Bar
fig.06-01d
When you see a scroll bar at the right of the screen, it means
that the BR-1600CD could not fit all of the relevant content in
one screen, and there is additional content hidden at the top
or the bottom.
The white portion of the scroll bar represents the entire
display content, and the black portion represents the range of
that content that is currently being displayed.
The view the hidden content, press [ ] or [ ] from
CURSOR to move the display area up or down, respectively.
When the display area is moved up, the black area in the
scroll bar will also move up, and when the display area is
moved down, the black area moves down.
Cursor
fig.06-03
The BR-1600CD’s cursor is represented either as an inverted
character, a frame, or an underline in a section of the screen
that allows settings to be made. When represented as a knob
icon, the knob is shown in black.
If the current screen contains a number of such sections, you
can use [CURSOR] to move between the corresponding
setting items.
In addition, when you press and hold down [CURSOR], the
on-screen cursor will move continuously in the
corresponding direction.
If you need to speed up the motion of the cursor, press and
hold the CURSOR arrow for the required direction of
movement, and then press the CURSOR arrow for the
opposite direction. This action will cause the cursor to move
more quickly around the screen.
Example: To move the cursor quickly to the right
Press and hold CURSOR [ ], and then press [ ].
Example: To move the cursor quickly downward
Press and hold CURSOR [ ], and then press [ ].
Page scroll buttons(Left) (Right)
Scroll bar
(Up)
(Left) (Right)
(Down)
BR-1600_R_e.book 39 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
40
Common operations and display items
TIME/VALUE dial
fig.06-05
The TIME/VALUE dial is used to change the cursor position,
values, or characters. In the case of values, these are
increased when the dial is turned clockwise, and reduced
when the dial is turned counterclockwise.
VALUE 1/PAN, VALUE 2, VALUE 3, and VALUE 4 knobs
fig.06-07
These knobs can be used to change the values of parameters
indicated by knob icons ( ) on-screen.
Turn clockwise to increase a value and counterclockwise to
decrease it.
In addition, you can also use these knobs to make large changes in
pattern and loop phrase numbers when a pattern selection screen
for rhythm patterns, bass patterns, or loop phrases is displayed.
BR-1600_R_e.book 40 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
41
Section 1 Advanced Use
Section 1
Advanced
Use
BR-1600_R_e.book 41 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
42
Re-recording only the portion that is mistaken (Punch In/Out)
You may occasionally make a mistake during a recording, or
the performance may not turn out the way the musician
intended. In such cases, you can use functions known as
punch in and punch out to re-record specific parts of the
performance. Specifically, punch in refers to an action where
recording is started while listening to playback of a track,
and punch out refers to the reverse situation where recording
is stopped but playback of the track can still be heard. In
other words, you punch in at the start of the section you
want to re-record, and you punch out at the end of that
section.
fig.10-01
• If you are still not happy with the track after re-
recording with punch in and punch out, you can use
Undo (Basic Operation; p. 42) to restore the track to its
original condition.
• Even if a portion of a track has been re-recorded using
punch in and punch out, the replaced audio data will
remain on the BR-1600CD’s hard disk. If this data will
not be used again, Song Optimization (p. 70) allows you
to delete it together with other unneeded data, thus
ensuring that you make the most of the hard disk’s
storage capacity.
The BR-1600CD supports two different types of punch in/
out procedures—namely, manual punch in/out and auto
punch in/out.
Manual punch in and punch out
Use [REC] or a foot switch to activate punch in and punch
out. If you are both playing the instrument and operating the
BR-1600CD, it can often be difficult to press [REC] at the
right time. In such a case, a foot switch (such as the optional
Roland DP-2 or BOSS FS-5U) can be used to activate punch
in and punch out conveniently by foot.
Performing manual punch in and
punch out using [REC]
The following section will describe using manual punch in
and punch out to re-record a portion of Track 1, which was
recorded earlier.
1.
Press the TRACK [1].
This track button will start to flash orange and green.
2.
Move the fader for Track 1 to the position shown
below.
fig.10-02
3.
Confirm that [ON/OFF] from AUTO PUNCH is not lit
up.
If this button is lit, it will need to be pressed to turn it off.
4.
Start playback of your song and use the INPUT LEVEL
knob to adjust the volume of the input to an
appropriate level.
If you want to mute Track 1 during playback, hold down
[TRACK MUTE] and press the track button for this track.
You can then perform the same procedure once again to
cancel muting.
Listen to both the recorded audio and the input to
compare their volumes. If necessary, use the INPUT
LEVEL knob to adjust the volume of the input so it is
identical to that of the recording.
5.
When the volume levels have been matched, confirm
that Track 1 is not being muted before proceeding.
6.
Move to a position before where you want to start re-
record and press [PLAY] to start playback.
7.
When playback reaches the beginning of this section,
press [REC] to punch in and start recording.
To punch out after recording, press either [REC] or
[PLAY].
[REC] can be used to punch in and punch out
repeatedly, and if any other sections need to be re-
recorded, you can use the same procedure described
above without having to stop playback.
8.
Press [STOP] when re-recording has been completed.
9.
Listen to the performance with the re-recorded section.
Make sure that you move the current position to a point
before the re-recorded section before starting playback.
If necessary, use the fader for Track 1 to adjust its
volume.
Time
Punch-in Stop
Start
[PLAY] [REC] [REC] [STOP]
Punch-out
Playback PlaybackRecording
BR-1600_R_e.book 42 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
43
Re-recording only the portion that is mistaken (Punch In/Out)
Section 1
Performing manual punch in and
punch out using a foot switch
If you intend to use a foot switch (such as the optional
Roland DP-2 or BOSS FS-5U) to activate punch in and punch
out, it should be connected to the BR-1600CD at this time.
Use the following procedure to set the appropriate action for
the foot switch jack.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “Foot Switch” and select PUNCH
IN/OUT using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.10-04d
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
5.
Start the recorder.
6.
Operate the foot switch.
Each time the foot switch is depressed, the BR-1600CD
either punches in or punches out.
Auto punch in and punch out
The BR-1600CD supports a function known as Auto Punch In/
Out, which will automatically activate punch in and punch out
at specified locations within a song. This function is extremely
useful in situations where punch in and punch out must be
activated at exactly the right time, and where you need to
concentrate on your performance, not the pressing of buttons.
Specifying the section to be re-
recorded
In order to activate punch in and punch out automatically,
you will first of all need to set up the punch in and punch out
positions as described below.
●
Registering the punch in position
1.
Move the current position to the point at which you
want the BR-1600CD to activate punch in and press
AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [IN].
The current position will now be registered as the
position for punch in, and [IN] will light up to indicate
that a punch in position has been registered.
fig.10-05
* Once a punch in position has been registered, you can jump to
this position at any time by pressing [IN].
* If you want to cancel this position and/or register a new point
for punch in, hold down [DELETE] and press [IN]. The punch
in position will be cleared and [IN] will turn off.
●
Registering the punch out position
2.
Move the current position to the point at which you
want the BR-1600CD to activate punch out and press
AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [OUT].
The current position will now be registered as the
position for punch out, and [OUT] will light up to
indicate that a punch out position has been registered.
fig.10-06
* Once a punch out position has been registered, you can jump
to this position at any time by pressing [OUT].
BR-1600_R_e.book 43 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
44
Re-recording only the portion that is mistaken (Punch In/Out)
* If you want to cancel this position and/or register a new point
for punch out, hold down [DELETE] and press [OUT]. The
punch out position will be cleared and [OUT] will turn off.
* Note that the punch in and punch out positions must be at
least 0.5 seconds apart. Accordingly, the punch out position
cannot be set up within 0.5 seconds of the punch in position.
If you want to activate punch in and punch out at
marker positions, first of all move the current position to
the marker for punch in and press [IN]. Then, move to
the marker for punch out and press [OUT]. For a
description of the procedure for moving to marker
positions, refer to “Moving to markers” (p. 48).
Performing auto punch in and
punch out
For this example, we will use auto punch in and punch out to
re-record a portion of Track 1, which was recorded earlier.
1.
Press the TRACK [1].
This track button will start to flash orange and green.
2.
Move the fader for Track 1 to the position shown
below.
fig.10-02
3.
Confirm that AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [ON/OFF] is not lit up.
If this button is lit, it will need to be pressed to turn it off.
4.
Start playback of your song and use the INPUT LEVEL
knob to adjust the volume of the input to an
appropriate level.
5.
When the volume levels have been matched, confirm
that Track 1 is not being muted before proceeding.
6.
Move to a position before where you want to start re-
record and press AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [ON/OFF].
This button will light up to indicate that auto punch in/
out has been turned on.
7.
Press [REC] to prepare the BR-1600CD for recording
and then press [PLAY].
Punch in will be activated automatically at the beginning
of the section to be re-recorded so that you can perform
your part without having to worry about pressing
buttons. Similarly, when the end of this section has been
reached, the BR-1600CD will automatically activate
punch out and continue normal playback.
8.
Press [STOP] when re-recording has been completed.
9.
Listen to the performance with the re-recorded section.
Make sure that you move the current position to a point
before the re-recorded section before starting playback.
If necessary, use the fader for Track 1 to adjust its
volume. You can press [IN] at this time to jump straight
to the punch in position.
10.
To clear the settings for the auto punch in/out section,
hold down [DELETE], press [IN] or [OUT].
BR-1600_R_e.book 44 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
45
Re-recording only the portion that is mistaken (Punch In/Out)
Section 1
Repeating recording in a
specific section (Loop Recording)
When the BR-1600CD’s repeat function is used in
combination with punch in and punch out, the recorded
section will be played back automatically so you can hear
what you have recorded. In addition, if you find that you are
not happy with your recording, simply press [REC] without
stopping playback to re-record once again. The combination
of auto punch in/out with the repeat function in this way is
referred to as Loop Recording.
For more detailed information regarding the repeat
function, refer to “Playing back repeatedly (Repeat
Function)” (Basic Operation; p. 17).
Specifying the section to be repeated
Before you start recording, you will first of all have to set up
the start and end points of the section to be repeated.
At this time, it is important that you set up the section in
such a way that it contains the section to be re-recorded (i.e.,
the section between the punch in and punch out positions). If
the repeat section does not fully enclose the re-record section,
recording may not start as required at the specified position
or it may end abruptly in the middle of the re- record section.
fig.10-07
Specifying the section to be recorded
Use “Auto punch in and punch out” (p. 43) to register the
positions where the punch-in and punch-out are to be
performed.
Performing loop recording
As an example, the following section will describe usage of
the repeat function together with auto punch in and punch
out to re-record a portion of Track 1, which was recorded
earlier.
1.
Press the TRACK [1].
This track button will start to flash orange and green.
2.
Move the fader for Track 1 to the position shown
below.
fig.10-02
3.
Press AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [ON/OFF].
This button will light up to indicate that auto punch in/
out has been turned on.
4.
Start playback of your song using the repeat function
and use the INPUT LEVEL knob to adjust the volume
of the input to a suitable level.
5.
With repeat playback in progress, press [REC] just
before the punch-in position.
The BR-1600CD automatically switches to record mode
at the punch-in position; recording stops automatically
at the punch-out position, and the BR-1600CD reverts to
playback mode.
After repeating, confirm the results just recorded.
If you were unable to get the recording to sound the way
you wanted, press [REC] and record the passage over
again.
If you press [REC] within the segment between the
punch-in and punch-out positions, the BR-1600CD
immediately switches to record mode at that point, then
automatically stops recording at the punch-out position.
6.
Press [STOP] when re-recording has been completed.
Press [REPEAT]. This button will turn off, indicating that
playback will not be repeated.
7.
Press AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [ON/OFF].
This button will turn off, indicating that the auto punch
in/out has been deactivated.
PlaybackPlayback
Repeat
Repeat Start
(A)
Punch-in Punch-out Repeat end
(B)
Time
Recording
BR-1600_R_e.book 45 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
46
Using V-Tracks
Although the BR-1600CD is a 16-track multi-track recorder,
you can select any one of sixteen V-Tracks for each of these
tracks. In this way, you can use the BR-1600CD as if it were
actually a 256-track multi-track recorder. In other words, V-
Tracks can be used to make multiple recordings of guitar
solos, vocals, etc. without having to delete any of these takes,
and this ensures that the best performance can be selected
later on. What’s more, you can also choose the best parts
from takes on a number of different V-Tracks and combine
them onto a single track.
“Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)” (p. 56)
Switching V-Tracks
1.
Press [V-TRACK].
The V-Track screen will appear.
fig.11-01d
The currently selected track is shown on the top left of the
display, together with the number of the V-Track that is
selected for it. In addition, the name of the currently
selected V-Track is shown on the middle left of the display.
( ): Currently selected V-Track (containing
recorded audio data)
( ): Currently selected V-Track (not containing
recorded audio data)
( ): V-Track containing recorded audio data
( ): V-Track not containing recorded audio data
( ): The V-Track from Track 9/10 last used for
mastering (Final Mastering Track)
2.
Move the cursor to the track containing the V-Track
you want to change.
fig.11-02d
In addition to the cursor, the track buttons can also be used to
directly choose the track whose settings are to be changed.
3.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to change the V-Track setting.
The “ ” is displayed when the V-Track containing
recorded audio data is selected.
fig.11-03d
4.
When you have finished selecting V-Tracks, press
[EXIT/NO] to return to the top screen.
5.
If you wish to store the currently selected V-Tracks,
save the current song (p. 72).
• If V-Tracks are changed during playback, this
playback will be interrupted momentarily. Note,
however, that this is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction.
• You cannot use the track buttons in the V-Track
screen to select tracks to be recorded.
BR-1600_R_e.book 46 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
47
Using V-Tracks
Section 1
Assigning names to V-Tracks
(Track Name)
Names can be assigned to any or all of the BR-1600CD’s 256
V-Tracks. Although a name corresponding to the Input Select
(i.e., Track Name) used for a V-Track is assigned
automatically when it is initially recorded to, you can easily
edit this name later on.
1.
Press [V-TRACK].
The V-Track screen will appear.
fig.11-01d
2.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to choose
the V-Track that you are going to name.
fig.11-05d
In addition to the cursor, the TRACK buttons can also be
used to directly choose the track selected.
The name of the currently selected V-Track is shown on
the middle left of the display.
3.
Move the cursor to the letter in the name that you want
to change, and then use the TIME/VALUE dial to select
a new letter.
fig.11-06d
4.
When you have finished editing names, press [EXIT/
NO] to return to the top screen.
5.
If you wish to store the edited names, save the current
song (p. 72).
Changing the V-Track to be written to an
audio CD (the Final Mastering Track)
When in Mastering mode, the symbol [ ] will be
automatically placed on the right of the V-Track from Track
9/10 that was most recently used for mastering. This V-Track
is referred to as the Final Mastering Track. This V-Track is
automatically selected for writing to a CD-R/RW disc during
the creation of an audio CD, and you can speed up the entire
process by setting the final mastering track correctly.
For more detailed information regarding mastering,
refer to “Adjusting volume and compression for CD
writing (Mastering Tool Kit)” (Basic Operation; p. 58).
Although the final mastering track is set automatically when
mastering is carried out, you can change this to any other V-
Track later on. Use the following procedure to do so.
1.
Press [V-TRACK].
The V-Track screen will appear.
fig.11-07d
2.
Move the cursor to the “MASTER V-TRACK,” and
then use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the final
mastering track.
fig.11-08d
3.
If you wish to store the new setting for the final
mastering track, save the current song (p. 72).
Only V-Tracks from Track 9/10 can be set as the
final mastering track.
BR-1600_R_e.book 47 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
48
Placing markers in your song (Marker)
The BR-1600CD’s Marker function allows you to place
markers at the required points in a song. You can then jump
quickly to any registered marker position by simply
indicating its number. In addition, this function also proves
extremely useful during the editing process. Up to 100
markers can be positioned within a song, and these are
numbered 1 to 100 from the beginning of the song. For this
reason, whenever a new marker is positioned between two
pre-existing markers, the number of all subsequent markers
will increase by one. For example, numbers will change as
follows when a new marker is inserted after Marker No. 2.
fig.12-01
In addition, you can also assign names to individual markers.
For more detailed information, refer to “Naming a marker”
(p. 49).
Basic marker operations
Positioning a marker
Press [MARK] to place a marker at the current song position.
fig.12-02
Note that markers must be at least 0.1 seconds apart.
Accordingly, it will not be possible to position a new
marker within 0.1 seconds of a pre-existing marker.
Clearing markers
The marker box of the display will indicate the marker
located earlier than the current position.
Press [CLEAR] if you want to delete this marker.
fig.12-03
Moving to markers
Use the SEARCH buttons to move forwards or backwards to
the next nearest marker. Alternatively, if you press the
CURSOR [ ] while on the following screen (i.e., the top
screen), you will be able to change the marker number
shown in the display’s Marker box.
fig.12-04
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of the
marker you want to move to.
Time
Time
Marker
1
Marker
2
Marker
1
Marker
2
Marker
3
Marker
3
Marker
4
Marker
4
Marker
5
Marker number
BR-1600_R_e.book 48 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
49
Placing markers in your song (Marker)
Section 1
Editing markers
Moving markers
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the MARKER icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
If the MARKER icon is not currently being shown on the
display, use the [ ] and [ ] PAGE SCROLL
buttons to move to the page containing this icon.
The Marker screen will appear.
fig.12-05d
3.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of the
marker you want to edit.
fig.12-06d
4.
Move the cursor to “Location”, and then use the TIME/
VALUE dial to specify a position for that marker.
fig.12-07d
If you move the cursor to the measure display, you will
be able to specify a marker position in terms of
measures. Alternatively, you can move the cursor to the
time display to move the marker based on the song time.
Naming a marker
A name (Marker Name) can be assigned to any marker from
the Marker screen.
1.
On the Marker screen, move the cursor to “No.” and
then use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of
the marker to be named.
fig.12-08d
2.
Move the cursor to “Name”, and then use [CURSOR]
and the TIME/VALUE dial to change the marker name.
fig.12-09d
Assigning an audio-CD song
division to a marker
When writing stereo tracks to an audio CD, you can use a
special procedure to position markers within a track so that
these markers can indicate the song division points on the
finished CD. This method of creating audio CDs is referred
to as Disc At Once By Marker.
For more detailed information regarding Disc At Once By
Marker, refer to “Dividing long tracks and writing as multiple
songs (Disc At Once By Marker)” (Basic Operation; p. 66).
When on the Marker screen, even normal markers that you have
already positioned can be designated as song division markers.
1.
On the Marker screen, move the cursor to “No.” and
then use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of
the marker to be designated as a song division.
2.
Move the cursor to “CD Track” and select “ON” using
the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.12-10d
The selected marker will be designated as a song
division marker for the audio CD. At the same time, the
name to be displayed for the corresponding song on the
audio CD (i.e., CD01 to CD99) is automatically set as the
marker name.
Measure Time
BR-1600_R_e.book 49 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
50
Placing markers in your song (Marker)
Note that if a marker that has already been named is
designated as a song division marker, the original name
will be deleted.
3.
Save the current song (p. 72).
Changing scenes assigned to markers
The BR-1600CD allows you to assign scenes to markers so
that they can be recalled automatically during playback. This
operation is referred to as Auto Scene.
For more detailed information regarding Auto Scene,
refer to “Recalling scenes automatically during
recording or playback (Auto Scene)” (p. 52).
The allocation of scenes to markers can be modified from the
Marker screen at any time.
1.
On the Marker screen, move the cursor to “No.” and
then use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of
the marker in question.
2.
Move the cursor to “Scene” and select the number of the
scene to be assigned using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.12-11d
The selected scene will be assigned to the marker.
3.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Stopping automatically at a
marker (Marker Stop)
The BR-1600CD can be made to automatically stop recording
or playback at marker positions. If the operation (i.e.,
recording or playback) is then restarted, it will continue to
the next marker, where it will again be stopped
automatically.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “Marker Stop” and select “ON”
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.12-14d
If you set this to “OFF”, the Marker Stop function will be
deactivated.
• Be sure to save your song before creating an audio
CD. Settings will not be stored until your song is
saved, and this can result in song divisions not being
recognized correctly during the writing process.
• A maximum of 99 songs can be written to a single
audio CD. If you try to set a song division marker
that will result in this number being exceeded, the
message “Marker Memory Full!” will be displayed
and you won’t be able to set it.
• Audio CD standards require that a CD track be at
least four second long. CD track markers that define
a CD track lasting less than four seconds are
disregarded when the CD is being created.
If you do not save the song, your settings will not be stored.
BR-1600_R_e.book 50 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
51
Section 1
Registering and recalling mixer settings (Scene)
The BR-1600CD allows you to register up to 100 batches of
mixer and effect settings per song. Each of these batches of
settings is referred to as a Scene, and they can be quickly and
easily recalled whenever needed.
For example, if you wish to compare different mix balances
during mixdown, it is convenience to register each of the
different mixer setting as a scene.
In addition, you can also assign scenes to markers (p. 48) to
have them recalled automatically during recording or
playback, and this function is referred to as Auto Scene.
Registering, recalling, and
deleting scenes
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SCENE icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (SCENE) if the SCENE
icon is currently displayed.
The Scene screen will appear.
fig.13-02d
3.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of the
scene to be registered, recalled, or deleted.
fig.13-03d
If you select the number of a scene that has already been
registered, an asterisk (*) will be displayed before the
number to inform you of this fact.
4.
Register, recall, or delete a scene.
To recall:
Press [F4] (CALL).
To register:
Press [F3] (SAVE).
An asterisk (*) indicates that a scene has already been
registered. If you select such a scene, it will be
overwritten using the current settings.
To delete:
Press [F2] (DELETE).
The asterisk (*) indicating a registered scene will
disappear to show that the scene is no longer registered.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
6.
If you wish to store the scene settings, save the current
song (p. 72).
Recalling a scene without
changing track volumes
When you recall a scene, the track volumes change to the
levels stored in that scene, but the positions of the faders
remain the same. As a result, fader positions and actual
volumes will no longer match. However, the following
procedure can be used in situations where you want to recall
a scene without changing the track volumes from those
matching the current fader positions.
1.
Move to the Scene screen.
2.
Move the cursor to “Track Level” and select “FADER”
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.13-04d
Track Level
This setting determines how track volumes will be
treated when a scene is recalled.
SCENE:
When a scene is recalled, the track volumes will change
to the levels stored in that scene. As a result, it is quite
possible that the front panel’s fader positions will no
longer match the actual track volumes.
FADER:
Even if a scene is recalled, the track volumes will stay at
the levels matching the positions of the front panel’s
faders.
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
4.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
If you do not save the song, your settings will not be
stored.
BR-1600_R_e.book 51 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
52
Recalling scenes automatically during recording or playback (Auto Scene)
The BR-1600CD allows you to assign scenes to markers so
that they can be recalled automatically when recording or
playback reaches the corresponding marker positions.
Referred to as Auto Scene, this function makes it possible for
track faders, effects, etc. to be controlled automatically.
Setting an Auto Scene
1.
With the top screen displayed, move to the position in the
song where you want settings to be changed automatically.
2.
Hold down [STOP] and press [MARK].
A new marker will be created at the current position.
Also at this time, a new scene will be created and
assigned to the marker. All settings for track faders,
effects, and the like will be stored in this scene.
In addition, an “S” will appear in the Marker name area
on the top screen to indicate that a scene has been
assigned to the marker.
fig.13-05
3.
Press [ZERO] to return to the beginning of the song and
then press [PLAY] to start playback.
When playback reaches the position of the new marker,
the scene that you have assigned to it will be
automatically recalled. In addition, an “S” will appear in
the top screen’s Marker name area.
Automatic recalling of scenes is not restricted to
playback and recording; in fact, scenes are recalled
automatically whenever the current position is moved to
the position of the corresponding marker, even if
playback is stopped at the time. It is important to note
that not all parameter settings stored in a scene will be
restored when it is recalled automatically. Settings are
restored for the following parameters.
• Faders for Tracks 1 through 15/16
• Track mute
• The MASTER fader
• Pan (for Tracks 1 through 15/16)
• Compressors and limiters
• EQ (for Tracks 1 through 15/16) (p. 74)
• Insert effects (p. 74), Vocal Tool Box (p. 75), Speaker
Modeling (p. 75), Mastering Tool Kit (p. 75)
• Chorus/delay sends (for Tracks 1 through 15/16)
• Reverb sends (for Tracks 1 through 15/16)
* Settings can be made to indicate whether or not EQ and effect
parameters will be restored by Auto Scene (p. 53). This is set
to OFF in the factory settings.
4.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
• A maximum of 100 markers can be created in a single song,
and this includes both markers with scenes assigned and
those without. Furthermore, a maximum of 100 scenes can
be registered. If you try to create a marker or scene that will
result in the corresponding limit being exceeded, the
message “Marker Memory Full!” or “Scene Memory Full!”
will be displayed and this action will not be possible.
• When a new marker and scene are created as described
in Step 2, the lowest available number will be assigned to
this new scene.
• Markers cannot be created within 100 ms of one another.
In such instances, first clear the existing marker, and
then carry out Step 2 (p. 48).
• When a scene is recalled, there may be a delay of several
hundredths of a second before the stored settings are
actually applied to your song. Please note that this delay
is intentional and is intended to prevent noise being
generated as a result of sudden changes in parameters.
• If you do not save the song as indicated in Step 4, your
settings will not be stored.
Clearing an Auto Scene
1.
Press MARKER [SEARCH ] or [SEARCH ] to
move to the marker with the scene assignment you
wish to clear.
This marker will be shown in the display’s Marker box.
2.
Press MARKER [CLEAR].
The current marker will be cleared together with the
scene that was assigned to it.
If a scene has also been assigned to some other marker,
the scene itself won’t be erased; only the current marker
will be erased.
The allocation of scenes to markers for Auto Scene
can be modified later on. For more detailed
information regarding the modification of scene
assignments, refer to “Changing scenes assigned to
markers” (p. 50).
BR-1600_R_e.book 52 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
53
Recalling scenes automatically during recording or playback (Auto Scene)
Section 1
Disabling Auto Scene
Auto Scene can actually hinder your work in certain
situations if settings are automatically restored while you are
manually operating track faders and the like.
In such cases, use the following procedure to disable Auto
Scene and prevent it from changing your settings.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “Auto Scene” and select “OFF”
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Auto Scene will now be disabled.
fig.13-07d
To enable Auto Scene once again, return the above
setting to “ON.”
4.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Setting Auto Scene control of
effects and track EQ
Use the following procedure to allow or forbid the control of
effects (i.e., insert effects, Vocal Tool Box, Speaker Modeling,
and Mastering Tool Kit) and of track EQ by Auto Scene.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System Parameter screen will appear.
3.
Move the cursor to “Effects” or “Track Equalizer” and
select “ON” or “OFF” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.10-03d
ON:
Control by Auto Scene is allowed.
OFF:
Control by Auto Scene is forbidden.
4.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Take care not to forget if “Auto Scene” is set to
“OFF” when saving a song, or Auto Scene will not
function afterwards. We recommend returning this
setting to “ON” as often as possible when saving
songs.
• When playback reaches a location where a marker
has been set, the scene assigned to the marker is
called up automatically, and the settings change to
those recorded in the scene, including the track EQ
and effects patch parameters.
• Be sure to note that application of the effects in the
performance may be delayed from several hundred
milliseconds to one second from the point at which
the marker is set.
• Patch switching will be possible for similar types of
effects (for example, patches from insert effects), but
not for different types. In addition, this type of
change will not be possible for different insert effect
connections (p. 82).
• Depending on the sounds used in a performance
recorded on a track, noise may be audible when the
EQ is being adjusted.
BR-1600_R_e.book 53 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
54
Finding the start or end of a section of audio (Scrub/Preview)
The Scrub function:
When you are editing a song, you will often need to know
exactly where a section of audio starts or exactly where to set
up the punch in position for the automatic start of recording.
the BR-1600CD provides a convenient Scrub function that
you can use to locate these positions.
When you play back your song using Scrub, an extremely
short section of audio (i.e., 45 ms) either immediately before
or immediately after the current position will be played back
repeatedly. Furthermore, when Scrub is combined with
another function known as Preview, you can search for
breaks between phrases using a longer repeat time (i.e., 1.0 s).
The Preview function
Preview is a function that allows you to play the one-second
section of audio either before or after the current position.
By combining Preview and Scrub, you can move the current
position in small increments to easily locate breaks between
phrases.
For more detailed information regarding the usage of
Preview, refer to “Using Scrub and Preview to find the end of
a section of audio” (p. 55).
Using Scrub to find the start
of a section of audio
1.
Hold down [STOP] and press [PLAY].
[PLAY] will start flashing and scrubbing will begin.
The level meter for the currently selected track will also
be shown on the display at this time.
In addition, the track that is currently being scrubbed
will be indicated at the top of the screen.
The BR-1600CD will display either [ ] (SCRUB TO) or
[ ] (SCRUB FROM) beside “SCRUB” to indicate
whether scrubbing is being performed to or from the
current position. For more detailed information
regarding changing of this scrubbing direction, refer to
“Changing the scrubbing direction.”
fig.14-01d
2.
Press the TRACK button for the track you want to
scrub.
3.
Move the current position little by little using the
TIME/VALUE dial, searching for the point at which the
next phrase begins (i.e., the start of the section of
audio).
4.
When you have located the start of the section of audio,
press [STOP] to stop scrubbing.
In order that this point may be easily found again later
on, it is a good idea to press [MARK] at this time to place
a marker at the current position.
Muting of all tracks will be canceled whenever you
use the Scrub function.
BR-1600_R_e.book 54 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
55
Finding the start or end of a section of audio (Scrub/Preview)
Section 1
Changing the scrubbing direction
The BR-1600CD allows you to perform scrubbing either to or
from the current position.
Use the following procedure to change this scrubbing
direction.
fig.14-02
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-50d
2.
Move the cursor to the SCRUB/PRV. icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (SCRUB/PRV.) if the
SCRUB/PREVIEW icon is currently displayed.
The Scrub/Preview screen will appear.
fig.14-003d
3.
Move the cursor to “Scrub FROM/TO” and use the
TIME/VALUE dial to change the scrubbing direction.
FROM:
Scrubbing is performed from the current position.
TO:
Scrubbing is performed to the current position.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Using Scrub and Preview to find
the end of a section of audio
Enabling Preview
You must first of all set up the BR-1600CD to use the Preview
function.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
2.
Move the cursor to the SCRUB/PRV. icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (SCRUB/PRV.) if the
SCRUB/PREVIEW icon is currently displayed.
The Scrub/Preview screen will appear.
3.
Move the cursor to “Preview Switch” and select “ON”
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.14-04d
The Preview function will be enabled.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
Using Scrub and Preview
1.
Hold down [STOP] and press [PLAY].
[PLAY] will start flashing and scrubbing will begin.
2.
While scrubbing, press either [REW] or [FF].
If you press [REW], the one-second period of audio in front
of the current position will be played (PREVIEW TO); if
you press [FF], the one-second period of audio after the
current position will be played (PREVIEW FROM).
3.
Use Scrub and Preview to find the end of the section of audio.
4.
Move the current position little by little using the
TIME/VALUE dial, searching for the point at which the
phrase ends (i.e., the end of the section of audio).
If you press [REW] at this time, you can check whether
or not the phrase cuts in suddenly during playback.
5.
When you have located the end of the section of audio,
press [STOP] to stop scrubbing.
2, 3
4
1
In order that this point may be easily found again
later on, it is a good idea to press [MARK] at this
time to place a marker at the current position.
BR-1600_R_e.book 55 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
56
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
The BR-1600CD allows you to edit the makeup of your song
using a host of functions such as the copying or moving of
sections of audio within a track or to different tracks.
Precautions when editing tracks
Remember to always save your song if you want to store the track
edits that you have made. In the BR-1600CD, edited track data is
only temporarily stored on the hard disk, and unless the
corresponding song is saved, it will be lost when the power is
turned off or a new song is loaded.
If audio data exists at the copy or move destination, it will be
overwritten.
Be sure to set the length of audio to be copied or moved to more
than 0.5 seconds. If a section of audio of less than this length is
copied or moved, you will not be able to hear it upon playback.
Please ensure that no audio of less than 0.5 seconds in length is left
behind after a move, insert, delete, or erase operation. If a section
of audio of less than this length is created in front of or behind this
type of edit, you will not be able to hear it upon playback.
Copying audio data (Track Copy)
The Track Copy function allows you to copy a specified
section of audio data to a new location.
In addition, you can copy audio data to multiple tracks in a single
operation, and you can also copy data repeatedly, creating a sequence
of identical audio sections starting at the specified location.
This function allows you to create songs quickly and
conveniently when, for example, you want to reuse a
recorded phrase from a certain track or when you want to
repeat the same phrase again and again.
When copying audio data, you will normally want the start
of the copied section to be aligned with the destination that
you specify. However, it may sometimes be necessary to
align a point somewhere along the section of copied audio
data with this destination point. The BR-1600CD allows you
to copy data in this way using the “FROM” parameter.
For example, if you are copying an effect sound comprising a
ticking bomb followed by an explosion, you will probably
want to align the start of the explosion sound with the
specified destination. Normally, you would have to calculate
the length of time from the start of the sound effect until the
explosion before you could determine the correct copy
destination. With this function, however, you can specify the
start point of the explosion in the original data using
“FROM,” and the copy destination where you want the
explosion to be heard using “TO.” As a result, it is easy to
copy the entire sound effect with the explosion positioned
exactly where you want it.
Example 1: Copying to the same track twice
fig.15-01
Example 2: Copying to a different track twice
fig.15-02
Example 3: Copying audio data using “FROM”
fig.15-03
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the TRACK icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TRACK) button if the
TRACK icon is currently displayed.
The Track screen will appear.
fig.15-05d
3.
Move the cursor to the COPY or COPY + INS icon and
press [ENTER/YES].
COPY
fig.15-06d
AA'A"
START END TO Time
B
B' B"
START END TO Time
BR-1600_R_e.book 56 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
57
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
Section 1
COPY + INS (insert)
fig.15-07d
The Track Copy screen will appear, allowing you to
select the tracks and V-Tracks to be used as the copy
source and destination.
If you select COPY + INS, an empty space of the required
length will first of all be inserted at the copy destination,
and then the source audio will be copied.
Example 4: Copying audio data with COPY + INS
fig.15-08
If you are using COPY + INS, it will not be possible to specify
the same track as the source and destination of copying.
4.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to choose
the tracks and V-Tracks to be used as the copy source
and destination.
If a name has been assigned to the selected track, it will
be displayed at this time.
fig.15-09d
5.
If you want to copy audio on other tracks using the same
settings (for range, position, etc.), move the cursor to the
position shown below and turn the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.15-20d
You will now be able to specify other tracks as the source
and destination of other copy operations.
In this case, it is not possible to specify a copy destination
track that coincides with another copy source track.
If you want to cancel the copy for a specific track, turn the
TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise until a question
mark (?) is displayed. Copying will not be performed for
any line containing one or more question marks.
As Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are stereo tracks, it will
not be possible to select either of their mono tracks
independent of the other.
6.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and
specify the copy range and copy destination positions.
fig.15-21d
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you to
select how positions will be specified (i.e., by measure,
time, or marker).
The following parameters should now be set.
START (Start point):
This parameter is used to specify the start point of the
audio data to be copied.
END (End point):
This parameter is used to specify the end point of the
audio data to be copied.
TO (To point):
This parameter is used to specify the basic destination point.
TIMES (copy time):
This parameter is used to specify the number of copies to
be made (between 1 and 99).
FROM (From point):
This parameter is used to specify the point within the
source audio data to be aligned with the To point.
Normally, this is set to the same value as the Start point.
• If time values are used to specify the above points and you then
switch the specification method to measures or markers, a plus
(+) character may be displayed to warn that the indicated
positions and actual positions are not the same. If you want to
specify points using measures or markers, this discrepancy can
be eliminated by using the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings
in each of the relevant screens.
• If you want to set the copy range as extending from the
start to the end of the song, press [F3] (SELECT ALL).
7.
When you have made all of the necessary settings,
press [F4] (GO).
The audio data will now be copied, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
8.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
A
START/FROM
END TO
A'
Time
BR-1600_R_e.book 57 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
58
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
Moving audio data (Track Move)
The Track Move function allows you to move a specified
section of audio data to a new location.
When audio data has been moved from its original position,
a blank space will be left behind.
You can also use this function to move audio data from a
number of tracks in a single operation.
When moving audio data, you will normally want the start
of the relocated section to be aligned with the destination
that you specify. However, it may sometimes be necessary to
align a point somewhere along the section of relocated audio
data with this destination point. The BR-1600CD allows you
to move data in this way using the “FROM” parameter.
For example, if you are moving an effect sound comprising a
ticking bomb followed by an explosion, you will probably
want to align the start of the explosion sound with the
specified destination. Normally, you would have to calculate
the length of time from the start of the sound effect until the
explosion before you could determine the correct destination.
With this function, however, you can specify the start point
of the explosion in the original data using “FROM,” and the
destination where you want the explosion to be heard using
“TO.” As a result, it is easy to move the entire sound effect
with the explosion positioned exactly where you want it.
Example 1: Moving data within a specific track
fig.15-22
Example 2: Moving data to a different track
fig.15-23
Example 3: Moving data using “FROM”
fig.15-24
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the TRACK icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TRACK) if the TRACK
icon is currently displayed.
The Track Menu screen will appear.
fig.15-05d
3.
Move the cursor to the MOVE or MOVE + INS icon and
press [ENTER/YES].
MOVE
fig.15-27d
MOVE + INS (insert)
fig.15-28d
The Track Move screen will appear, allowing you to
select the tracks and V-Tracks to be used as the source
and destination.
If you select MOVE + INS, an empty space of the
required length will first of all be inserted at the
destination, and then the source audio will be moved.
AA
START/FROM
END TO Time
B
B
START/FROM
END TO Time
C
C
START END TO Time
FROM
BR-1600_R_e.book 58 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
59
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
Section 1
Example 4: Moving audio data with MOVE + INS
fig.15-29
If you are using MOVE + INS, it will not be possible to
specify the same track as the source and destination.
4.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to choose
the tracks and V-Tracks to be used as the source and
destination.
fig.15-30d
If a name has been assigned to the selected track, it will
be displayed at this time.
5.
If you want to move audio on other tracks using the
same settings (for range, position, etc.), move the cursor
to the position shown below and turn the TIME/
VALUE dial.
fig.15-31d
You will now be able to specify other tracks as the source
and destination of other move operations.
In this case, it is not possible to specify a destination
track that coincides with another source track.
If you want to cancel the move for a specific track, turn
the TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise until a
question mark (?) is displayed.
• A move operation will not be performed for any line
containing one or more question marks.
• As Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are stereo tracks, it will
not be possible to select either of their mono tracks
independent of the other.
6.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and
specify the move range and destination positions.
fig.15-32d
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you to
select how positions will be specified (i.e., by measure,
time, or marker).
The following parameters should now be set.
START (Start point):
This parameter is used to specify the start point of the
audio data to be moved.
END (End point):
This parameter is used to specify the end point of the
audio data to be moved.
TO (To point):
This parameter is used to specify the basic destination
point.
FROM (From point):
This parameter is used to specify the point within the
source audio data to be aligned with the To point.
Normally, this is set to the same value as the Start point.
• If time values are used to specify the above points and
you then switch the specification method to measures or
markers, a plus (+) character may be displayed to warn
that the indicated positions and actual positions are not
the same. If you want to specify points using measures
or markers, this discrepancy can be eliminated by using
the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings in each of the
relevant screens.
• If you want to set the move range as extending from the
start to the end of the song, press [F3] (SELECT ALL).
7.
When you have made all of the necessary settings,
press [F4] (GO).
The audio data will now be moved, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
8.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
START/FROM
END TO
A'A'
A
Time
BR-1600_R_e.book 59 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
60
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
Exchanging audio data
(Track Exchange)
The Track Exchange function allows you to exchange the all
recorded data between two different tracks.
Example: Exchanging all data between Tracks 1 and 2
fig.15-33
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the TRACK icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TRACK) if the TRACK
icon is currently displayed.
The Track Menu screen will appear.
fig.15-05d
3.
Move the cursor to the EXCHANGE icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (EXCHANGE) if the
EXCHANGE icon is currently displayed.
The Track Exchange screen will appear, allowing you to
select the tracks and V-Tracks to be used as the exchange
source and destination.
fig.15-36d
4.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to choose
the tracks and V-Tracks between which you want to
exchange audio data.
If a name has been assigned to the selected track, it will
be displayed at this time.
fig.15-37d
5.
If you want to exchange audio data between other
tracks, move the cursor to the position shown below
and turn the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.15-38d
You will now be able to specify other tracks as the source
and destination of another exchange operation.
In this case, it is not possible to specify a destination
track that coincides with another source track.
If you want to cancel the exchange of data between
specific tracks, turn the TIME/VALUE dial
counterclockwise until a question mark (?) is displayed.
• Data exchange will not be performed for any line
containing one or more question marks.
• As Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are stereo tracks, it will
not be possible to select either of their mono tracks
independent of the other.
6.
When you have made all of the necessary track
selections, press [F4] (GO).
The audio data will now be exchanged, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
7.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Track 1
Track 2
Track 1
Track 2
A
A
B
B
C
C
D
D
E
E
Time
BR-1600_R_e.book 60 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
61
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
Section 1
Inserting a blank space between
audio data (Track Insert)
The Track Insert function allows you to insert a blank space
at a specific location. If you want to add a new phrase to the
middle of a section of audio data, use this function to add a
blank space of the same length as the new phrase, and then
record the phrase into this space.
fig.15-39
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the TRACK icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TRACK) if the TRACK
icon is currently displayed.
The Track Menu screen will appear.
fig.15-05d
3.
Move the cursor to the INSERT icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (INSERT) if the INSERT
icon is currently displayed.
The Track Insert screen will appear, allowing you to
select the track and V-Track where the blank space will
be inserted.
fig.15-42d
4.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the
track and V-Track where you want to insert a blank space.
If a name has been assigned to the selected track, it will
be displayed at this time.
fig.15-43d
5.
If you want to insert a blank space into other tracks
using the same settings (for position, length, etc.), move
the cursor to the position shown below and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.15-44d
You will now be able to specify other tracks for insertion
of the same blank space. If you want to cancel the
insertion for a specific track, turn the TIME/VALUE dial
counterclockwise until a question mark (?) is displayed.
• Insertion will not be performed for any line containing
one or more question marks.
• If you want to insert the same blank space into all V-
Tracks or all tracks, turn the TIME/VALUE dial
clockwise until “*” is selected.
• If you want to select all V-Tracks from all tracks, select
“*- *.”
• As Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are stereo tracks, it will
not be possible to select either of their mono tracks
independent of the other.
6.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and specify
the position and length of the blank space to be inserted.
fig.15-45d
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you to
select how the position will be specified (i.e., by measure,
time, or marker).
The following parameters should now be set.
START (Start point):
This parameter is used to specify the position at which
the blank space will be inserted.
LENGTH:
This parameter is used to specify the length of the blank space.
TimeTO
Blank
LENGTH
BR-1600_R_e.book 61 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
62
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
If a time value is used to specify the Start point and you
then switch the specification method to measures or
markers, a plus (+) character may be displayed to warn that
the indicated position is not the same as the actual position.
If you are specifying these items as measure locations, you
can eliminate this discrepancy by using the TIME/VALUE
dial in measures screen to specify the location.
7.
When you have made all of the necessary settings,
press [F4] (GO).
The blank space will be inserted, and when the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that this operation has
been completed.
8.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
Deleting audio data and closing
the resulting gap (Track Cut)
The Track Cut function allows you to delete audio data from
a specified range, and when audio data is deleted in this
way, the section of audio data positioned behind it is moved
forwards to fill the resulting gap.
fig.15-46
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the TRACK icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TRACK) if the TRACK
icon is currently displayed.
The Track Menu screen will appear.
fig.15-05d
3.
Move the cursor to the CUT icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (CUT) if the CUT icon
is currently displayed.
fig.15-49d
The Track Cut screen will appear, allowing you to select the
track and V-Track from which audio data is to be deleted.
4.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to choose the
track and V-Track containing the unwanted audio data.
If a name has been assigned to the selected track, it will
be displayed at this time.
fig.15-50d
5.
If you want to delete audio data from other tracks using
the same settings (for range, etc.), move the cursor to the
position shown below and turn the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.15-51d
You will now be able to specify other tracks for deletion of
audio data over the same range. If you want to cancel the
deletion for a specific track, turn the TIME/VALUE dial
counterclockwise until a question mark (?) is displayed.
• Deletion will not be performed for any line containing
one or more question marks.
• If you want to delete audio data from all V-Tracks or all tracks,
turn the TIME/VALUE dial clockwise until “*” is selected.
• Alternatively, if you want to select all V-Tracks from all
tracks, select “*- *.”
• As Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are stereo tracks, it will
not be possible to select either of their mono tracks
independent of the other.
6.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and
specify the deletion range.
TimeSTART END
A
BR-1600_R_e.book 62 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
63
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
Section 1
fig.15-52d
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you to
select how the positions will be specified (i.e., by
measure, time, or marker).
The following parameters should now be set.
START (Start point):
This parameter is used to specify the start point of the
audio data to be deleted.
END (End point):
This parameter is used to specify the end point of the
audio data to be deleted.
• If time values are used to specify the above points and
you then switch the specification method to measures or
markers, a plus (+) character may be displayed to warn
that the indicated positions and the actual positions are
not the same. If you want to specify points using
measures or markers, this discrepancy can be eliminated
by using the TIME/VALUE dial to make settings in each
of the relevant screens.
• If you want to set the deletion range as extending from
the start to the end of the song, press [F3] (SELECT ALL).
7.
When you have made all of the necessary settings,
press [F4] (GO).
The audio data will now be deleted, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
8.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Erasing audio data (Track Erase)
The Track Erase function allows you to erase audio data from
a specified range; however, when audio data is erased in this
way, the section of audio data positioned behind it is not
moved forwards to fill the resulting gap.
fig.15-53
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the TRACK icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TRACK) if the TRACK
icon is currently displayed.
The Track Menu screen will appear.
fig.15-05d
3.
Move the cursor to the ERASE icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (ERASE) if the ERASE
icon is currently displayed.
fig.15-56d
The Track Erase screen will appear, allowing you to
select the track and V-Track from which audio data is to
be erased.
START END Time
A
BR-1600_R_e.book 63 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
64
Editing a recorded performance (Track Edit)
4.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to choose
the track and V-Track containing the unwanted audio
data.
If a name has been assigned to the selected track, it will
be displayed at this time.
fig.15-57d
5.
If you want to erase audio data from other tracks using
the same settings (for range, etc.), move the cursor to
the position shown below and turn the TIME/VALUE
dial.
fig.15-58d
You will now be able to specify other tracks for the
removal of audio data over the same range.
If you want to cancel the erase operation for a specific
track, turn the TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise
until a question mark (?) is displayed.
• Erase will not be performed for any line containing one
or more question marks.
• If you want to erase audio data from all V-Tracks or all
tracks, turn the TIME/VALUE dial clockwise until “*” is
selected.
• Alternatively, if you want to select all V-Tracks from all
tracks, select “*- *.”
• As Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are stereo tracks, it will
not be possible to select either of their mono tracks
independent of the other.
6.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and
specify the erase range.
fig.15-59d
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you to
select how the positions will be specified (i.e., by
measure, time, or marker).
The following parameters should now be set.
START (Start point):
This parameter is used to specify the start point of the
audio data to be erased.
END (End point):
This parameter is used to specify the end point of the
audio data to be erased. If you want to set the erase
range as extending from the start to the end of the song,
press [F3] (SELECT ALL).
7.
When you have made all of the necessary settings,
press [F4] (GO).
The audio data will now be erased, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
8.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
BR-1600_R_e.book 64 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
65
Section 1
Maximizing the volume levels of data recorded to the tracks (Normalize)
The Normalize function raises the volume of prerecorded
track data to the highest level possible.
1.
Press [UTILITY]
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the TRACK icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TRACK) if the TRACK
icon is currently displayed.
The Track Menu screen will appear.
fig.15-05dI
3.
Move the cursor to the NORMALIZE icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (NORMALIZE) if the
NORMALIZES icon is currently displayed.
The Normalize screen will appear.
fig.15-72d
4.
Select the track you want to normalize with the TIME/
VALUE dial.
fig.15-72ad
You can select mono or stereo tracks. With stereo tracks
selected, you can increase the volume level while
maintaining the balance between the left and right
tracks.
5.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and
specify the start point and end point for the segment
you want to normalize using [CURSOR] and the TIME/
VALUE dial.
The Normalize Time Setting screen will appear.
fig.15-73d
BR-1600_R_e.book 65 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
66
Maximizing the volume levels of data recorded to the tracks (Normalize)
If you are normalizing the entire track from beginning to
end, press [F3] (SELECT ALL).
6.
Use [CURSOR] to move the cursor to “PERCENT” then
set the normalization volume with the TIME/VALUE
dial.
fig.15-74d
PERCENT:
This parameter sets the amplitude (1 to 100%) with
respect to the digital maximum. When set to 100%, the
amplitude of the wave data is digitally converted to the
maximum value that can be handled. A setting of 50%
cuts the amplitude in half.
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
“Track: Normalize...” appears in the screen, and
normalization begins. The process is finished when
“Complete!” is displayed.
If you don’t like the results of the normalization, you can
undo them (Basic Operation; p. 42).
8.
Save the song to store the results of the normalization
in memory (p. 72).
BR-1600_R_e.book 66 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
67
Section 1
Organizing your songs
Displaying song details
(Song Information)
Use Song Information to display the following information
for the currently selected song.
●
Song number
●
Song name
●
Song protection (on or off)
●
Whether recording or editing has been carried out
●
Disk memory used for the song
Disk memory is displayed in units of 1 MB (i.e., 1,048,576
bytes) and should be treated as a general guide rather
than an exact figure.
fig.16-01
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SONG icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SONG) if the SONG
icon is currently displayed.
The Song Menu screen will appear.
fig.16-03d
3.
Move the cursor to the INFO icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (INFO) if the INFO icon
is currently displayed.
The Song Information screen will appear.
fig.16-04d
No.:
Shows the song’s number.
Name:
Shows the song’s name.
If song protection is turned on, “PROTECTED” will be
displayed here.
If the song is recorded or edited, “EDITED” will be
displayed here.
Size:
Shows the disk memory used for the current song (in
MB).
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
2, 3
4
1
BR-1600_R_e.book 67 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
68
Organizing your songs
Copying songs (Song Copy)
Songs that you have saved on your hard disk can be copied
to create new songs.
fig.16-05
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SONG icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SONG) if the SONG
icon is currently displayed.
The Song Menu screen will appear.
fig.16-03d
3.
Move the cursor to the COPY icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (COPY) if the COPY
icon is currently displayed.
A list of the songs currently stored on the hard disk will
appear.
In addition, an asterisk (*) is used to indicate the song
that is currently loaded.
fig.16-08d
4.
Move the cursor to the song to be copied and press [F4]
(GO).
The message “Sure?” will appear.
fig.16-09d
5.
Press [ENTER/YES].
Copying of the selected song will now begin.
The lowest unused song number will be assigned to the
song newly created in the copy process.
When copying has finished, the message “Complete!”
will appear and the display will automatically return to
the top screen.
2, 3
1
4
5
BR-1600_R_e.book 68 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
69
Organizing your songs
Section 1
Erasing songs (Song Erase)
Use this function to erase songs from your hard disk.
fig.16-05
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SONG icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SONG) if the SONG
icon is currently displayed.
The Song Menu screen will appear.
fig.16-03d
3.
Move the cursor to the ERASE icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (ERASE) if the ERASE
icon is currently displayed.
A list of the songs currently stored on the hard disk will
appear.
In addition, an asterisk (*) is used to indicate the song
that is currently loaded.
fig.16-12d
4.
Move the cursor to the song to be erased and press [F4]
(GO).
The message “Erase Song OK?” will appear.
fig.16-13d
5.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The selected song will be erased.
If you erase the song that is currently loaded, the BR-
1600CD will select and load the song with the lowest
song number.
If no songs remain on the hard disk, a new song will be
created automatically.
2,3
5
1
4
BR-1600_R_e.book 69 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
70
Organizing your songs
Making the most of hard disk
capacity (Song Optimize)
When you overwrite or erase audio data by overdubbing,
punch in/out recording, or track editing, this audio data will
not actually be deleted from the BR-1600CD’s hard disk. In
certain cases, the amount of hard disk space used to store this
unneeded audio data may become quite large, and you will
not be able to record as much new audio data as you would
expect.
Use the Song Optimize function to increase the amount of
free space on your hard disk by permanently erasing this
type of unneeded data.
fig.16-05
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SONG icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SONG) if the SONG
icon is currently displayed.
The Song Menu screen will appear.
fig.16-03d
3.
Move the cursor to the OPTIMIZE icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (OPTIMIZE) if the
OPTIMIZE icon is currently displayed.
The message “Optimize Song?” will appear.
fig.16-16d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The song optimization process will now begin, and
when the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that
this has been completed.
2,3
4
1
BR-1600_R_e.book 70 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
71
Organizing your songs
Section 1
Protecting a song (Song Protect)
Even if you have saved an important song to the BR-1600CD’s
hard disk, there is always a possibility that you can
accidentally overwrite audio data and loose irreplaceable
recordings. However, you can use the Song Protect function to
ensure that valuable audio data is protected from being
overwritten.
The message “Save Current?” may be displayed during
the following process. This occurs when the current song
contains audio data, edits, or settings that have not been
saved, and you should press [ENTER/YES] if you want
to save these now. If this will not be necessary, press
[EXIT/NO]. It is important to note, however, that if you
do not save the song at this time, all such audio data,
edits, and settings will be lost and the song will be
restored to its last saved condition.
Protecting a song (Song Protect)
fig.16-05
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SONG icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SONG) if the SONG
icon is currently displayed.
The Song Menu screen will appear.
fig.16-03d
3.
Move the cursor to the PROTECT icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (PROTECT) if the
PROTECT icon is currently displayed.
The message “Protect On?” will appear.
fig.16-20d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The current song will be protected.
Up to this point, the message “Save Current?” is
displayed when recorded and edited material is added
to songs. If you want to turn on the Song Protect
function after saving changes to a recording or settings,
press [ENTER/YES] to undo the changes to the
recording or settings, or press [EXIT/NO] to turn on the
protection.
When finished, the message “Complete!” will appear
and the display will automatically return to the top
screen.
When a song has been protected in this way, the song
protection mark ( ) will be shown on the display.
Removing song protection
1.
Carry out Steps 1 through 3 as described above in
“Protecting a song.”
The message “Protect Off?” will appear.
fig.16-21d
2.
Press [ENTER/YES].
Protection will be removed from the current song.
When this process has finished, the message
“Complete!” will appear and you’ll automatically be
returned to the top screen.
3.
If you wish to store the Protect Off setting, save the
current song (p. 72).
2,3
4
1
BR-1600_R_e.book 71 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
72
Organizing your songs
Naming a song (Song Name)
When you create a new song, the BR-1600CD will automatically
name it “SONG 001” or something similar. If all songs are named in
this way, however, it will be difficult to tell them apart. It is
recommended that you name your songs appropriately so that they
can be conveniently managed later on.
fig.16-05
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SONG icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SONG) if the SONG
icon is currently displayed.
The Song Menu screen will appear.
fig.16-03d
3.
Move the cursor to the NAME icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (NAME) if the NAME
icon is currently displayed.
The Song Name screen will appear.
fig.16-25d
4.
Move the cursor to the character you want to change
and select a new character using the TIME/VALUE dial.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Saving your song (Song Save)
Note, however, that the BR-1600CD stores the following
when songs are saved.
●
Audio data
●
Mixer settings
●
The Insert Effects’ song patch (i.e., S001 through S050*)
* S001 through S100 in the case of the Guitar Bank
* S001 through S010 in the case of the Multi Channel Bank
●
The Vocal Tool Box’s song patch (i.e., S01 through S10)
●
The Mastering Tool Kit’s song patch (i.e., S01 through S19)
●
The Speaker Modeling’s song patch (i.e., S01 through S33)
●
Rhythm Arrangement settings (i.e., S001 through S010)
●
Loop Phrase sequence (i.e., S001 through S050)
●
Bass pattern (i.e., S000 through S999)
●
Drum pattern (i.e., S000 through S999)
●
Loop Effect settings (i.e., S001 through S050)
●
3 Band EQ and Compressor settings
●
Tuner settings
●
Utility settings (with the exception of LCD contrast,
phantom, sub mixer and Digital In Assign)
1.
With the top screen displayed, hold down [STOP] and
press [REC].
The message “Save Current?” will appear.
fig.16-30d
2.
Press [ENTER/YES]. (If you do not want to save, press
[EXIT/NO].)
The message “Storing Current...” will appear on the
screen and saving of the song will begin. When saving
has been completed, the message “Complete!” will
appear.
2,3
5
4
1
In addition to the above method, songs can also be
saved from the Utility screen. Please refer to “Saving
your song from the Utility screen” (Basic Operation;
p. 57).
BR-1600_R_e.book 72 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
73
Section 2 Using Effects
Section 2
Using
Effects
BR-1600_R_e.book 73 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
74
Makeup of BR-1600CD effects
The BR-1600CD contains the following types of effects.
●
Insert effects (p. 76)
Insert effects are applied to input audio and are capable of
changing the sound in a wide range of different ways. By
changing the way an insert effect is connected, you can have
it be applied not only to the input audio, but also to a track’s
playback or to the Master output. Furthermore, a host of
different insert effects can be chosen to match the instrument
or input in question.
GUITAR/BASS effects:
These effects are used with audio from guitars and bass
guitars. In addition to COSM amp modeling and COSM
overdrive for electric guitars, the BR-1600CD features
acoustic guitar simulators, bass guitar simulators, and many
other effects for a range of different purposes.
MIC effects:
These effects are used with audio from solo vocal microphones.
The BR-1600CD features COSM compressors, COSM
microphone modeling, de-esser, and a variety of other MIC
effects that will prove very useful when recording from
microphones.
SIMUL effects:
These effects are used to record a guitar track and a vocal
track simultaneously. For this reason, they allow effects for
electric guitar or acoustic guitar to be used at the same time
as vocal effects.
In terms of guitar effects, you can make use of amplifier
modeling, acoustic guitar simulators, acoustic processors,
and many other algorithms.
And in terms of vocal effects, compressors, equalizers, noise
suppressors, delay, and the like have been made available.
Note that when SIMUL effects are used, the guitar effect will
be applied to the INPUT 1/MIC 1 audio source; the vocal
effect, to the INPUT 2/MIC 2 audio source.
MULTI-CHANNEL effects:
These effects are used independently and simultaneously on
8 input sources. In order to provide for situations where you
are recording from a number of different microphones, the
BR-1600CD features eight-channel equalizers, compressors
and low-cut filters.
STEREO effects:
As the name suggests, these effects are applied to stereo
inputs. The STEREO bank features stereo compressors, Lo-Fi
processor, ring modulators, and a range of other effects.
What is COSM (Composite Object Sound Modeling)?
Technology that virtually reconstructs an actually
existing structure or material using a different means is
called “modeling” technology. COSM is proprietary
Roland technology that creates new sounds by
combining various sound modeling technologies.
●
Track-specific equalizers and
compressors (p. 108)
These effects are applied to the playback from individual tracks
so that sounds can be made more compatible with each other.
Compressors:
This type of effect is used to suppress variations in volume. If
the volume of a track fluctuates widely, you can make it more
uniform using a compressor. In addition, when compressors
are applied heavily, they can suppress the dynamic volume
variations that are characteristic of musical instruments, thus
allowing you to create distinctive new sounds.
Compressors can be used on either 1 through 8 tracks or
9/10 through 15/16 tracks.
Three-band equalizers:
This type of effect is used to modify the tone of an audio
signal. To do this, it separates the range of frequencies that
make up a sound into low, mid, and high bands, allowing the
volume of each of these bands to be adjusted independently.
Three-band equalizers (or EQs) can be used on all tracks (i.e.,
1 through 8 and 9/10 through 15/16). Note also that the EQs
for Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are stereo effects.
●
Loop effects (p. 112)
Applied to playback from tracks and to input audio being
monitored, loop effects are used to add a sense of
spaciousness and depth. The following types of loop effects
are available on the BR-1600CD.
Reverb:
By adding reverberation to a sound, this effect imbues the
sound with a sense of spaciousness and depth.
Chorus:
A chorus effect copies the original (direct) sound, changes its
pitch slightly, and then adds this back to the original to make
it swell or feel more like a stereo sound.
BR-1600_R_e.book 74 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
75
Makeup of BR-1600CD effects
Section 2
Delay:
A delay is a little bit like an echo. It can add a sense of
spaciousness and depth to the sound. In addition, when this
effect is applied to instruments that play melodies, it can
make their performance sound smoother or can add an extra
bounce to their rhythm.
Doubling:
This effect sets up a tiny time deviation (or delay) between the
left and right sides of a signal to give the sound a stereo feel.
●
Vocal Tool Box (p. 116)
The Vocal Tool Box is used with the playback from tracks on
which solo vocal performances have been recorded, and it
allows you to correct variations in pitch and to add a backing
chorus.
The following two effects can be selected from the Vocal Tool
Box.
Pitch Correction
The pitch correction function allows you to correct the
pitches of vocal performances recorded on a track in real
time and in units of semitones.
Harmony Sequence
This effect adds a backing chorus to the playback of a vocal
performance recorded on a track based on the chord
sequence specified for your rhythm arrangement (p. 148).
If this effect is applied to a track not containing a solo
vocal performance, it will not be possible to achieve the
desired result.
●
Mastering Tool Kit (p. 129)
The BR-1600CD’s Mastering Tool Kit is used during the
creation of an audio CD to improve the quality of the
finished songs by balancing volumes and compression levels.
When commercially available CDs are originally created,
data is written to them in such a way that the loudest point in
each song is close to the maximum volume that can be
recorded on the CD. A good balance among the volumes of
different performances is the most important factor in
allowing data to be written in this way. However, a special
process known as Mastering is generally carried out to adjust
the overall volume. The Mastering Tool Kit provided in the
BR-1600CD allows you carry out this special processing
simply and quickly.
A good balance of the volumes of different performances is
the most important factor when creating audio CDs that
sound loud and powerful. If performances have not been
mixed and balanced well, no amount of processing using
the Mastering Tool Kit will produce the desired effect.
●
Speaker Modeling (p. 127)
This effect allows the acoustical characteristics of various
types of monitor speakers to be modeled for playback.
In professional recording studios, recorded audio is played
through various types and sizes of monitor speakers so that
the sound from each can be compared, and this ensures that
the final mix-down will sound good on any type of speaker.
Even if you only use one set of monitor speakers with the BR-
1600CD, the Speaker Modeling effect allows you to compare
the sound of different speakers in the same way.
Supported combinations of effects
Loop effects can always be used together with any
track's compressor or EQ.
Of the insert effects, the Vocal Tool Box, the Mastering
Tool Box, and Speaker Modeling, only one of them can
be used at a time.
BR-1600_R_e.book 75 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
76
Using insert effects
This section will provide a description of the methods for
changing and saving the various parameters for insert effects.
Rather than being restricted to usage only during recording,
the BR-1600CD’s insert effects can also be used with a
specific track during playback or with the mix created from
various tracks. For more detailed information, refer to
“Changing insert effect connections” (p. 82).
Effect patches and banks
The specific effect used as an insert and the parameters set
for this effect are changed by selecting what is called as an
Effect Patch. The BR-1600CD contains a wide range of preset
effect patches that have been set up for guitars, vocals, and
many other instruments. These patches are grouped by input
source, and each grouping is referred to as a Bank. The
makeup of banks is as follows:
fig.31-00
Whenever you press INPUT SELECT buttons, the
appropriate bank of effects will be automatically selected.
For example, when you press [GUITAR/BASS], a patch from
the Guitar bank will be automatically loaded, and when you
press [VOCAL], a patch from the MIC bank will be
automatically selected. The relationship between INPUT
SELECT buttons and the selected bank is as follows:
[GUITAR/BASS] Guitar bank
[VOCAL] MIC bank
[SIMUL] Simul bank
[MULTI-TRACK] Multi-channel bank
[STEREO TRACKS] Stereo bank
Furthermore, each of these banks contains various different
patches, as shown below.
Preset patches
Guitar bank P001 through P100
MIC bank P001 through P050
Simul bank P001 through P050
Multi-channel bank P001 through P010
Stereo bank P001 through P050
Preset patches contain data that has been set up in advance,
and it will not be possible to write new settings to them.
User patches
Guitar bank U001 through U100
MIC bank U001 through U050
Simul bank U001 through U050
Multi-channel bank U001 through U010
Stereo bank U001 through U050
User patches are stored on the BR-1600CD’s hard disk, and
their settings can be modified and saved. As a result, you
will be able to access these patches from any song. If you
have created an effect patch that you also want to use in a
different song, you should save it as a user patch.
Song patches
Guitar bank S001 through S100
MIC bank S001 through S050
Simul bank S001 through S050
Multi-channel bank S001 through S010
Stereo bank S001 through S050
Song patches can be modified and saved in the same way as
user patches; however, their data is stored on the hard disk
as part of the song that they are used in. As a result, these
patches prove extremely useful when you want each song to
maintain the specific effect settings that were used during
recording of its tracks.
At the time of purchase, the user patches in each of the
BR-1600CD’s effect banks will contain the same settings
as the corresponding preset patches. Furthermore, when
you create a new song (Song New), the song patches in
each effect bank will be set up by copying the
corresponding user patches.
GUITAR
Bank
P01–100
U01–100
S01–100
GUITAR / BASS
STEREO
Bank
P01–50
U01–50
S01–50
STEREO TRACKS
MIC
Bank
P01–50
U01–50
S01–50
VOCAL
SIMUL
Bank
P01–50
U01–50
S01–50
SIMUL
MULTI-CHANNEL
Bank
P01–10
U01–10
S01–10
MULTI-TRACK
BR-1600_R_e.book 76 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
77
Using insert effects
Section 2
Makeup of effect patches
An effect patch is a named set of data that specifies the
various audio parameters for a single effect algorithm.
Meanwhile, each effect algorithm consists of a series of effect
blocks that have been combined in a manner that achieves
the algorithm’s purpose. For example, the COSM OD
GUITAR AMP algorithm is configured as follows:
Example: COSM OD GUITAR AMP algorithm
fig.31-01a
OD•DS: COSM Overdrive / Distortion
AMP•SP: COSM Amp Modeling
EQ: 4-band Equalizer
:
As another example, let’s look at the 8CH COMP EQ
algorithm that is used when recording from eight inputs
simultaneously. This algorithm is configured as follows:
Example: 8CH COMP EQ algorithm
fig.31-01bÅ@(Algorithm diagram)
L.CUT1-8: Low-cut Filters
COMP1-8: Compressors
EQ1-8: Three-Band Equalizers
In total, the BR-1600CD contains 18 such algorithms.
Modifying insert effect settings
To create a new effect, find the preset patch that is closest to
what you are looking for, and then change the settings to get
the sound just right. When you are saving a preset patch with
modified settings, you should save it as a user patch or a
song patch.
1.
Press [EFFECTS].
The Effects Patch screen will appear.
fig.31-01d
2.
Move the cursor to the patch number field and select a
patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
When you move the cursor to the bank field and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial, you will be able to select a bank
other than that specified with the INPUT SELECT
button.
3.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Effects Edit screen will appear.
fig.31-02d
The left half of this screen will display the way in which
effect blocks are connected in this patch; the right half
will display the parameter settings for the effect block
currently highlighted by the cursor.
4.
Move the cursor to the effect block you want to edit.
fig.31-02ad
If the TIME/VALUE dial is turned counterclockwise at
this time, the solid lines indicating the effect block at the
current cursor position will switch to dotted lines,
indicating that the corresponding effect has been turned
off. Similarly, if the TIME/VALUE dial is turned
clockwise, the dotted lines will switch back to solid lines,
indicating that the effect has been turned on.
Patch number
Bank
BR-1600_R_e.book 77 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
78
Using insert effects
5.
Press [F3] (=>PRM.).
The cursor will jump to the parameter area on the right
of the screen, and you will now be able to change the
parameter settings.
fig.31-03d
6.
Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you
want to change and select a new value using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
7.
If you also want to edit other effect blocks, press [F2]
(BLOCK<=) to move the cursor to the left of the screen,
and then repeat Steps 4 and 5.
Note that you can press CURSOR [ ] or [ ] while on a
parameter setting screen to jump to the parameter setting
screen for the next effect block to the left or right, respectively.
8.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Effects Patch screen.
fig.31-04d
In order to indicate that the effect settings have been
temporarily changed, the bank number will be displayed
as “*TMP.” If you select a different patch, load a different
song, or turn off the BR-1600CD while “TMP” is being
displayed, all of the patch settings will return to their
previous condition. As it may not be possible to restore
these settings, the appropriate care should be taken.
9.
To save your modified settings, carry out the procedure
described in “Saving insert effect settings (Effect Patch
Write)” (p. 81).
Changing the sound of insert
effects using the VALUE knobs
The following four knob icons are displayed on the insert
effects' patch screen.
fig.31-60
The text above each icon indicates the parameter that has
been assigned to it, and the text below each icon indicates the
current value of that parameter.
The value knobs VALUE 1 through VALUE 4 can now be
used to directly edit the values of the corresponding
parameters.
1.
Press [EFFECTS].
The Effects Patch screen will appear.
fig.31-01d
2.
Move one of the value knobs VALUE 1 through
VALUE 4.
The icon for that knob will change in response to this
movement. In addition, the value of the parameter
assigned to the knob will also change, and this will
modify the sound of the effect accordingly.
3.
To save the modified sound, carry out the procedure
described below in “Saving insert effect settings (Effect
Patch Write)” (p. 81).
Changing parameters assigned
to VALUE knobs
Use the following procedure to change the effect parameters
that are assigned to each of the VALUE knobs.
1.
Press [EFFECTS].
The Effects Patch screen will appear.
fig.31-01d
2.
Move the cursor to the text above the icon whose
parameter assignment is to be changed.
fig.31-61d
3.
Select the parameter to be assigned using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
4.
To save the settings, carry out the procedure described
below in “Saving insert effect settings (Effect Patch
Write)” (p. 81).
Parameters
Value
Patch number
Bank
Patch number
Bank
BR-1600_R_e.book 78 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
79
Using insert effects
Section 2
Changing effect block connections
When you have selected the COSM OD GUITAR AMP
effects algorithm, you will be able to freely modify the way in
which the algorithm's internal effect blocks are connected. As
a result, you will be able to try out a wide range of different
effect sequences in the same way as if you were using
compact pedal effects and audio cables.
In order to change sequences in this way, you will first of all
need to select a patch using the COSM OD GUITAR AMP
algorithm.
1.
Press [EFFECTS].
The Effects Patch screen will appear.
fig.31-01d
2.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Effects Edit screen will appear.
fig.31-02d
3.
Move the cursor to the effect block whose connection
sequence is to be modified, and then press [F2] (MOVE).
The effect block's icon will change and “
▲
” will appear
at the current connection position.
fig.31-52d
4.
Using [CURSOR], move the “
▲
” to the new connection
position.
fig.31-53d
If you want to cancel the operation, press [EXIT/NO] or
[F1] (CANCEL).
5.
Press [ENTER/YES] or [F2] (INSERT).
The effect block will be connected at the new position.
fig.31-54d
6.
If you want to reposition any of the other effect blocks,
repeat Steps 3 through 5.
7.
To save your modified connections, carry out the
procedure described in “Saving insert effect settings
(Effect Patch Write)” (p. 81).
The parameters that can be assigned will depend on
the selected effect algorithm. For more detailed
information, refer to “Effect parameters assigned to
VALUE knobs” (p. 137).
Patch number
Bank
BR-1600_R_e.book 79 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
80
Using insert effects
Switching compressors, equalizers, and
low-cut filters between stereo and mono
When the 8CH COMP EQ algorithm has been selected, you
will be able to set the effect blocks for adjacent inputs (e.g.,
INPUT 1 and INPUT 2, or INPUT 3 and INPUT 4) to stereo
operation (Stereo Link).
As a result, the BR-1600CD allows you to apply exactly the
same effect to stereo sounds that are input on a left and right
channel.
1.
Start off by selecting a patch that uses the 8CH COMP
EQ algorithm.
2.
Press [EFFECTS].
The Effects Patch screen will appear.
fig.31-01d
3.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Effects Edit screen will appear.
fig.31-102d
4.
Move the cursor to the effect for which Stereo Link is to
be turned on.
fig.31-54ad
To turn on Stereo Link for INPUT 1 and INPUT 2, move
the cursor to an effect block displayed on a row with
either 1 or 2 on the left-hand side.
Similarly, to turn on Stereo Link for INPUT 7 and INPUT
8, move the cursor to an effect block displayed on a row
with either 7 or 8 on the left-hand side.
5.
Press [F2] (LINK ON).
Stereo Link will turn on and the display for [F2] will
change to (LINK OFF).
fig.31-55d
6.
Press [F2] (LINK OFF) if you want to turn Stereo Link
off.
Stereo Link will turn off and the display for [F2] will
change to (LINK ON).
fig.31-56d
7.
To save the Stereo Link settings, carry out the
procedure described in “Saving insert effect settings
(Effect Patch Write)” (p. 81).
Patch number
Bank
BR-1600_R_e.book 80 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
81
Using insert effects
Section 2
Saving insert effect settings
(Effect Patch Write)
Modified effect settings are saved by writing them together
with a new patch name.
1.
Press [F1] (NAME) on the Effects Edit screen.
fig.31-05d
2.
Move the cursor to the characters in the patch name you
want to change and select new characters using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
At this time, the FUNCTION buttons operate as follows.
[F1] (INSERT):
An empty space of one character in length will be
inserted.
[F2] (DELETE):
A single character will be deleted.
[F3] (123...):
The character type will switch to numbers.
[F4] (A<=>a):
The character type will toggle between uppercase and
lowercase.
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Effects Edit screen.
4.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY).
The Effects Patch Write/Copy screen will appear.
fig.31-06d
5.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.31-07d
FROM:
This field should be left unchanged at
“*TMP(CURRENT)” If a different message is displayed,
however, move the cursor to this field and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise to restore
“*TMP(CURRENT).”
TO:
This field sets the effect patch to which your new settings
are to be written. Whenever you call up the Effects Patch
Write/Copy screen, the cursor will be automatically
positioned here. Note that you can also move the cursor
to the bank field and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to
select a new destination bank.
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
The effect patch will be written. When finished, the
message “Complete!” will appear and the display will
automatically return to the Effects Patch screen. If you
selected a different destination bank than that specified
with the INPUT SELECT button, this new bank selection
will be maintained after writing has been completed.
7.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
BR-1600_R_e.book 81 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
82
Using insert effects
Copying insert effect settings
(Effect Patch Copy)
The BR-1600CD’s function for copying patches proves
extremely useful when you want to create a number of effect
patches with slightly different settings.
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY) on the Effects Edit screen.
The Effects Patch Write/Copy screen will appear.
fig.31-06d
2.
Move the cursor to the “FROM:” field and select the
effect patch to be copied using the TIME/VALUE dial.
FROM:
This field selects the effect patch to be copied. Although
“*TMP(CURRENT)” may be displayed in this field when
you call up the Effects Patch Write/Copy screen after
modifying patch settings, this may be freely changed.
Note that you can also move the cursor to the bank field
and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select a source bank.
3.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
TO:
This field selects the patch to be overwritten by copying.
Whenever you call up the Effects Patch Write/Copy
screen, the cursor will be automatically positioned here.
Note that you can also move the cursor to the bank field
and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select a new
destination bank.
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
The effect patch will be copied. When finished, the
message “Complete!” will appear and the display will
automatically return to the Effects Patch screen.
If you selected a different destination bank than that set by
pressing the INPUT SELECT button, this new bank selection
will be maintained after copying has been completed.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
It is important to remember that the destination patch
will be completely overwritten by the patch specified
with “FROM:”. Care should be taken to ensure that
important patches are not accidentally overwritten in
this way.
Changing insert effect connections
Whenever you create a new song, the insert effects will be
initially inserted into the input channels, and this is done to
ensure that performances can be monitored and recorded
with the effects applied. You can, however, modify this
connection pattern if so required. By changing the insert
effect connections as described below, you can set up the BR-
1600CD for use in various different situations.
1.
Press [EFFECTS].
The Effects Patch screen will appear.
fig.31-01d
2.
Press [F3] (LOCATION).
The Effects Location screen will appear.
fig.31-10d
3.
Change the connection using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Refer to “About insert effect connections.”
fig.31-11d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES] to close the message.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
If you wish to store the modified connections, save the
current song (p. 72).
If you load another song or turn off the BR-1600CD
without saving the current song, your changes will be
lost.
Patch number
Bank
BR-1600_R_e.book 82 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
83
Using insert effects
Section 2
About insert effect connections
You can select any of the following connection patterns for
the insert effects.
INPUT 1–INPUT 8, INPUT 1/2–INPUT 7/8,
INPUT 1-8, INPUT MIX (NORMAL):
This setting inserts the effect into the corresponding input channel(s).
This is the standard connection pattern, and it allows you to monitor and
record performances after they have passed through the insert effects.
INPUT 1–INPUT 8, INPUT 1/2–INPUT 7/8,
INPUT 1-8, INPUT MIX (REC DRY):
This setting also inserts the effect into the corresponding input
channel(s). Although you’ll be able to monitor your input
sources after they’ve passed through the insert effects with this
type of connection, the corresponding performances will be
recorded dry—in other words, without the insert effects being
applied. After recording these dry performances, you will then
be able to experiment with different effects on your tracks to
find out which ones best suit the overall sound of your song.
TRACK 1–TRACK 8, TRACK 1/2–TRACK 15/16,
TRACK 1-8, TRACK 9-16:
This setting inserts the effect into the corresponding tracks.
You can use this type of connection to apply insert effects to
the playback from the selected tracks.
MASTER:
This setting inserts the effect in the Master output. With this
type of connection, you can adjust the sound of the complete
song during mix-down, apply special acoustic effects, and
process the final output sound in many other ways.
The available types of connection will depend on the current
Input Select condition and on the algorithm that is used in
the currently selected effect patch.
When connecting to inputs:
If the Input Select condition is changed immediately after
Song New is performed, the underlined connections will be
automatically selected.
When connecting to the Track output:
When connecting to the Master channel output:
Although the Master channel output is always available for
selection, in the case of the 8CH COMP EQ algorithm, only
CH1 and CH2 are connected to the corresponding left
channel and right channel, respectively.
Whenever you insert effects into Track 1 through 8 or Track
1/2 through 15/16, the audio will pass through these
effects between the compressors and equalizers (p. 108).
Input Select
condition Available connections
[GUITAR/
BASS]
INPUT 1 (NORMAL)
INPUT 1 (REC DRY)
* Only CH1 is connected to INPUT 1 in the case of
the 8CH COMP EQ algorithm.
[VOCAL]
INPUT 2 (NORMAL)
INPUT 2 (REC DRY)
* Only CH1 is connected to INPUT 1 in the case of
the 8CH COMP EQ algorithm.
[SIMUL]
INPUT 1/2 (NORMAL)
INPUT 1/2 (REC DRY)
* Only CH1 and CH2 are connected to INPUT 1
and INPUT 2, respectively, in the case of the 8CH
COMP EQ algorithm.
[MULTI-
TRACK]
When algorithm other than “8CH COMP EQ” is selected
INPUT 1 (NORMAL)–INPUT 8 (NORMAL)
INPUT 1/2 (NORMAL)–INPUT 7/8 (NORMAL)
INPUT 1 (REC DRY) –INPUT 8 (REC DRY)
INPUT 1/2 (REC DRY)–INPUT 7/8 (REC DRY)
When algorithm “8CH COMP EQ” is selected
INPUT 1-8 (NORMAL)
INPUT 1-8 (REC DRY)
[STEREO
TRACKS]
When algorithm other than “8CH COMP EQ” is selected
INPUT 1 (NORMAL)–INPUT 8 (NORMAL)
INPUT 1/2 (NORMAL)–INPUT 7/8 (NORMAL)
INPUT MIX (NORMAL)
INPUT MIX (REC DRY)
When algorithm “8CH COMP EQ” is selected
INPUT 1-8 (NORMAL)
INPUT MIX (NORMAL)*
INPUT MIX (REC DRY)*
* CH1 and CH2 from the 8CH COMP EQ
algorithm are connected to the left channel and
right channel, respectively, after stereo mixing.
Available connections
When algorithm other than “8CH COMP EQ” is selected
TRACK 1–8, TRACK 1/2–15/16
When algorithm “8CH COMP EQ” is selected
TRACK 1–8, TRACK 9–16
Track
REVERB
CHORUS/
DELAY
EQUALIZERCOMPRESSOR
LMIX
MIX
MIX
R
L
R
L
R
Chorus/Delay
Send
Reverb Send
Track Pan
INSERT
EFFECTS
BR-1600_R_e.book 83 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
84
Using insert effects
Using an expression pedal
When you connect an expression pedal (such as the Roland
EV-5 or BOSS FV-500L/FV-500H) to the rear panel’s EXP
PEDAL jack, you will be able control certain effect
parameters using your feet.
fig.53-00
• It is important that you use the specified type of
expression pedal (such as the separately available
Roland EV-5 or BOSS FV-500L/FV-500H). Connection of
any other product can cause the BR-1600CD to
malfunction.
• Both the Roland EV-5 and BOSS FV-500L/FV-500H have
a minimum volume setting of 0.
Depending on effect settings, the following operations can be
carried out using an expression pedal. Refer to the indicated
pages for more detailed information regarding setting
methods.
• Wah pedal (“Wah” (p. 106)
• Volume pedal (“Foot Volume” (p. 98))
• Pitch Shifter pedal (“Pitch Shifter” (p. 102))
• Vibrato pedal (“Vibrato” (p. 106))
Expression Pedal
(Roland EV-5)
BR-1600_R_e.book 84 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
85
Section 2
Insert effect algorithm list
The algorithms (the available effects and their connection
order) that can be used as an insert effect are shown below.
The algorithms that can be selected will differ for each bank. To
select the algorithm that you wish to use, first select the effect bank
that includes that algorithm, and then refer to the separate “Effect
Patch List” and select a patch that uses the desired algorithm.
For details on selecting banks and patches, refer to
“Modifying insert effect settings” (p. 77).
If you would like to know more about each effect, refer to
“Insert effect parameter functions” (p. 90).
BANK: GUITAR
1. COSM OD GUITAR AMP
This multi-effect is used with electric guitars. Utilizing COSM
Amplifier Modeling and COSM Overdrive/Distortion as
featured on the BOSS GT-6, this effect allows you to recreate a
host of distortion and guitar amplifier sounds. In addition, the
BR-1600CD also allows you to freely change the way in which
this algorithm's internal effect blocks are connected.
fig.31-12
COSM Overdrive/Distortion
COSM PreAmp&Speaker
Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
FX
- Compressor
- Limiter
- Acoustic Guitar Simulator
- Pickup Simulator
- Tremolo
- Slow Gear
- Defretter
- Phaser
- Flanger
- Pitch Shifter
- 2x2 Chorus
- Pan
- Vibrato
- Uni-V
- Short Delay
- Humanizer
- Ring Modulator
- Sub Equalizer
Delay
Chorus
2. ACOUSTIC SIM
This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitars. It allows
you to use an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to
those of an acoustic guitar.
fig.31-13
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
3. BASS SIM
This simulates the sound of a bass, and you can use it to
obtain the sound of a bass while playing an electric guitar.
* You should avoid playing chords when using the Bass
Simulator.
fig.31-14
Bass Simulator
Compressor/Defretter
- Compressor
- Defretter
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
BR-1600_R_e.book 85 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
86
Insert effect algorithm list
4. COSM COMP GUITAR AMP
This is a multi-effect designed for electric guitars. In addition
to a COSM compressor/limiter, it uses a preamp and speaker
simulator to produce characteristic amp sounds.
fig.31-15
COSM Comp/Limiter
PreAmp
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay
5. ACOUSTIC GUITAR
This is a multi-effect designed for acoustic guitars. Even
when an electric-acoustic is connected at line level, this
provides a warm sound similar to that obtained through a
microphone.
fig.31-16
Acoustic Processor
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay
6. BASS MULTI
This is a multi-effect designed for bass, and it is suitable for
creating standard bass sounds.
fig.31-17
Compressor/Defretter
- Compressor
- Defretter
Octave
Enhancer
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
7. COSM BASS AMP
This is a multi-effect designed for bass. It features an amp
sound created using a preamp and speaker simulator.
fig.31-18
Compressor
PreAmp
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
BR-1600_R_e.book 86 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
87
Insert effect algorithm list
Section 2
8. COSM COMP BASS AMP
This is a multi-effect designed for bass.
In addition to a COSM compressor/limiter, it uses a preamp
and speaker simulator to produce characteristic amp sounds.
fig.31-19
COSM Comp/Limiter
PreAmp
Speaker Simulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay
BANK: MIC
9. VOCAL MULTI
This is a multi-effect designed for vocals. It provides the
basic effects needed for vocal parts.
fig.31-20
Compressor
De-esser
Enhancer
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
10. VOICE TRANSFORMER
This is a multi-effect designed for vocals. It allows you to
produce unique effects using a voice transformer.
fig.31-21
Voice Transformer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
11. COSM VOCAL COMP
This is a multi-effect designed for vocals. The COSM
compressor/limiter is perfect for creating basic sounds.
fig.31-22
COSM Comp/Limiter
De-esser
Enhancer
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Delay
BR-1600_R_e.book 87 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
88
Insert effect algorithm list
12. MIC MODELING
This modifies the sound recorded using a conventional
dynamic mic, lapel mic, or direct line, making it sound as
though it had been recorded using an expensive condenser
mic or a special studio mic.
The mic simulator can also simulate proximity effects.
fig.31-23
Mic Converter
Bass Cut Filter
Distance
Limiter
BANK: STEREO
13. STEREO MULTI
This algorithm connects seven types of effects, all in full
stereo.
fig.31-24
Compressor
Ring Modulator
4Band Equalizer/Wah
- 4Band Equalizer
- Wah
Noise Suppressor
Foot Volume
Modulation
- Flanger
- Chorus
- Phaser
- Pitch Shifter
- Doubling
- Tremolo/Pan
Delay
14. LO-FI BOX
This allows you to simulate the sound of audio being played
on an AM radio, the sound of old records played on an old-
fashioned gramophone, and even extreme sound
degradation produced by Lo-Fi digital.
fig.31-25
Lo-Fi Box
Noise Suppressor
BANK: SIMUL
15. VO+GT.AMP
This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a
vocal part and electric guitar.
You can create an amp sound for the guitar using a preamp
and speaker simulator.
fig.31-26
(MIC)
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay
(GUITAR)
Compressor
PreAmp
Speaker Simulator
Noise Suppressor
Delay
BR-1600_R_e.book 88 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
89
Insert effect algorithm list
Section 2
16. VO+AC.SIM
This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a
vocal part and electric guitar.
It allows you to make the electric guitar sound like an
acoustic guitar.
fig.31-27
(MIC)
Compressor
4Band Equalizer
Noise Suppressor
Delay
(GUITAR)
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
Delay
17. VO+ACOUSTIC
This algorithm is for use when simultaneously recording a
vocal part and acoustic guitar.
You can create a warm sound for the guitar and make it
sound as if a mic were being used, even when an electric-
acoustic is connected using a direct line.
fig.31-28
(MIC)
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
(GUITAR)
Acoustic Processor
Compressor
Noise Suppressor
BANK: MULTI-CHANNEL
18. 8CH COMP EQ
This algorithm is used when recording up to 8 microphones
simultaneously, and it provides all of the basic effects needed
to make great simultaneous recordings.
fig.31-29
Low-Cut Filter
Compressor
3Band Equalizer
BR-1600_R_e.book 89 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
90
Insert effect parameter functions
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
This simulates the sound of an acoustic guitar. It allows you
to use an electric guitar to produce sounds similar to those of
an acoustic guitar.
It will be easier to achieve the desired effect if you set the
pickup selector of your guitar to the front position.
* This effect can be used when “COSM OD GUITAR AMP,”
“ACOUSTIC SIM,” or “VO+AC.SIM” algorithms are selected.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the acoustic guitar simulator effect on and off.
Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the acoustic guitar simulator.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
* This effect can be used when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “AC.”
Top 0–100
This adjusts the interference to the strings made by the top plate.
That is, it adjusts the attack sense or harmonic contents.
Body 0–+100
This adjusts the resonance of the sound caused by the body. That is,
it adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound which is the typical
characteristics of acoustic guitars.
■
When “ACOUSTIC SIM” or
“VO+AC.SIM” algorithm is selected
Pickup Type SINGLE, HUMBUCK
Set this to the type of pickup on the guitar being played.
Character
This selects one of four sound types.
STD (STANDARD):
A normal acoustic guitar.
JUMBO:
An acoustic guitar with a body that is bigger than that of the
STANDARD guitar. This guitar has a more powerful bass sound.
ENHANCE:
An acoustic guitar with a more responsive attack. With this setting,
the guitar will retain a higher degree of presence in almost any
situation.
PIEZO:
Simulates the sound you would get from a pickup installed on an
electric-acoustic guitar. With this setting, a certain amount of
compression will be applied during the attack.
Top-Hi -100–+100
This adjusts the level of the direct sound from the strings—in other
words, it adjusts the harmonic content.
Top-Mid -100–+100
This adjusts the way in which the top plate affects the strings—in
other words, it adjusts the sense of attack.
Body -100–+100
This adjusts the resonance generated by the body—in other words, it
adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound to simulate the typical
characteristics of acoustic guitars.
* If Top-Hi, Top-Mid, and Body are all set to “-100,” there will be no
sound.
Acoustic Processor
This processor allows you to change the sound produced by
the pickup on an electric-acoustic guitar, creating a richer
sound similar to that obtained with a microphone placed
close to the guitar. Best results will be achieved when stereo
output is used.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the acoustic processor effect on or off.
Body 0–100
This adjusts the resonance generated by the body—in other words, it
adjusts the softness and fatness of the sound to simulate the typical
characteristics of acoustic guitars.
Mic Distance 0–100
This adjusts the simulated distance between the acoustic guitar and
the microphone used to capture its sound.
Level 0–100
This adjusts the overall volume of the acoustic processor.
The trademarks listed in this document are the property
of their respective companies. Said companies are not
affiliated with BOSS and have neither licensed nor
authorized the BOSS BR-1600CD. Their trademarks are
used solely to identify equipment whose sound is
simulated by the BR-1600CD.
BR-1600_R_e.book 90 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
91
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
3 Band Equalizer
This is the 3-band equalizer.
* This effect can be used when “8CH COMP EQ” algorithm is selected.
High Type SHLV, PEAK
Sets the equalizer type for the high range.
SHLV:
This selects the shelving type equalization.
PEAK:
This selects the peaking type equalization.
High Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the high-
range equalizer.
High Freq 800 Hz–16.0 kHz
This parameter sets the frequency for the high range equalizer.
High Q 0.5–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by “High Freq.” A larger value results in a narrower range of
change.
This parameter is only valid when “High Type” has been set to “PEAK.”
Mid Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the
midrange equalizer.
Mid Freq 200 Hz–4.0 kHz
This parameter sets the central frequency for the midrange equalizer.
Mid Q 0.3–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by “Mid Freq.” A larger value results in a narrower range of change.
Low Type SHLV, PEAK
Sets the equalizer type for the low range.
SHLV:
This selects the shelving type equalization.
PEAK:
This selects the peaking type equalization.
Low Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the low
range equalizer.
Low Freq 40 Hz–800 Hz
This parameter sets the frequency for the low range equalizer.
Low Q 0.3–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by “Low Freq.” A larger value results in a narrower range of change.
This parameter is only valid when “Low Type” has been set to “PEAK.”
4 Band Equalizer
This is the 4-band equalizer.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP,” “BASS
MULTI,” “COSM BASS AMP” or “STEREO MULTI” algorithm
when 4 Band Equalizer/Wah “Effect Type” parameter is set to “EQ.”
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the equalizer on or off.
Low Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the low
range equalizer.
Low-Mid Freq 100 Hz–10.0 kHz
This parameter sets the central frequency for the low-midrange
equalizer.
Low-Mid Q 0.5–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by “Low-Mid Freq” A larger value results in a narrower range of
change.
Low-Mid Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the low-
midrange equalizer.
Hi-Mid Freq 100 Hz–10.0 kHz
This parameter sets the frequency for the high-midrange equalizer.
Hi-Mid Q 0.5–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set
by “Hi-Mid Freq” A larger value results in a narrower range of
change.
Hi-Mid Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the high-
midrange equalizer.
High Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the high-
range equalizer.
Level -20–+20 dB
This sets the overall volume level after equalization.
BR-1600_R_e.book 91 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
92
Insert effect parameter functions
Bass Simulator
This simulates the sound of a bass guitar. You can use it to
recreate the sound of a bass guitar while playing an electric
guitar. Note that you should avoid playing chords when
using the Bass Simulator.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the bass simulator effect on or off.
Character LOOSE, TIGHT
This sets the bass tone characteristic. LOOSE produces the sound of a
thicker string gauge.
Level 0–100
This adjusts the overall volume of the bass simulator.
Bass Cut Filter
This filter cuts out vocal pop and other unwanted lower
range noise. In this, it simulates the bass cut switch found on
certain microphones.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns the Bass Cut Filter on or off.
Freq Thru, 20–2000 Hz
Thru will generally be used; however, you can use this parameter to
adjust the frequency if the attack contains an unwanted low-band
component.
Chorus
This effect adds a sound with a subtly shifted pitch to the
direct sound, which gives the final output sound greater
breadth and depth. Best results will be achieved when stereo
output is used.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the chorus effect on or off.
Rate 0–100
This adjusts the rate of the chorus.
Depth 0–100
This adjusts the depth of the chorus.
Effect Level 0–100
This parameter adjusts the overall volume of the effect sound.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Mode MONO, STEREO
Selection for the chorus mode.
MONO:
This chorus effect outputs the same sound from both L and R.
STEREO:
This is a stereo chorus effect that adds different chorus sounds to L and R.
Pre Delay 0.0 ms–40.0 ms
Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the
direct sound has been output. By setting a longer pre delay time, you
can obtain an effect that sounds like more than one sound is being
played at the same time (doubling effect).
Hi Cut Freq 700 Hz–11.0 kHz, Flat
This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high-end
component above the set frequency.
When “Flat” is selected, the high cut frequency will have no effect.
■
When algorithm other than “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” is selected
* This effect can be used when the Modulation “Effect Type” parameter is
set to “CHORUS.”
Pre Delay 0.5–50.0 ms
Adjusts the time needed for the effect sound to be output after the
direct sound has been output.
2x2 Chorus
Two separate stereo chorus units are used for the low-
frequency and high-frequency ranges in order to create a
more natural chorus sound.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “2CE.”
Xover Freq 100 Hz–4.00 kHz
This parameter sets the frequency at which the frequency components of
the direct sound are divided into bass and treble bands.
Low Rate 0–100
This adjusts the speed of the chorus effect for the low frequency range.
Low Depth 0–100
This adjusts the depth of the chorus effect for the low frequency range. If
you wish to use this as a doubling effect, use a setting of “0.”
Low Pre-Dly 0.0 ms–40.0 ms
This adjusts the time from when the low frequency range direct sound is
output until the effect sound is output. Extending the pre-delay will
produce the sensation of multiple sounds (doubling effect).
Low Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the low frequency range.
BR-1600_R_e.book 92 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
93
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
High Rate 0–100
This adjusts the speed of the chorus effect for the high frequency
range.
High Depth 0–100
This adjusts the depth of the chorus effect for the high frequency
range. If you wish to use this as a doubling effect, use a setting of
“0.”
High Pre-Dly 0.0 ms–40.0 ms
This adjusts the time from when the high frequency range direct
sound is output until the effect sound is output. Extending the pre-
delay will produce the sensation of multiple sounds (doubling
effect).
High Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the high frequency range.
Compressor
This effect can be used to produce a long sustain sound by
evening out volume levels in the input signal.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “CS.”
On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the compressor effect on or off.
Sustain 0–100
This adjusts the range (or time) over which the low-level signals are
boosted. Larger values will produce a longer sustain.
Attack 0–100
This adjusts the strength of the attack. Larger values will result in a
sharper attack, creating a more clearly defined sound.
Tone -50 –+50
Adjusts the tone.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the effect.
■
When “8CH COMP EQ” algorithm is
selected
On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the compressor effect on or off.
Threshold -48 dB–0 dB
Adjust this parameter to match the input signal. Compression will be
applied to input levels in excess of this level. The smaller the value
set here, the lower the level at which the compressor kicks in.
Knee SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
This parameter affects the way in which compression is applied (i.e.,
the knee) in the vicinity of the threshold.
SOFT:
With this knee setting, compression is applied gently and is
gradually increased as the level of the audio signal approaches the
threshold.
MEDIUM:
With this knee setting, compression is applied a little gently and is a
little gradually increased as the level of the audio signal approaches
the threshold.
HARD:
With this knee setting, no compression whatsoever is applied until
the level of the audio signal reaches the threshold, and once the
threshold has been crossed, compression will be applied fully in
accordance with the ratio setting.
Ratio 2.0: 1–40.0: 1, INF: 1
This adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios produce a stronger
compression effect.
Attack 0–100
This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the
compression ratio set by “Ratio” to be reached once the input level
exceeds the set threshold level and compression begins. The larger
the value set here, the more rapidly compression will be applied.
Release 0–100
This adjusts the time it takes for compression to be removed once the
signal level drops below the threshold. Lower values cause the
compression to be released more rapidly, making it easier to
distinguish the sound from successively played strings.
Level 0.0 dB–24.0 dB
This adjust the volume of the effect sound.
■
When algorithm other than “8CH COMP
EQ” is selected
On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the compressor effect on or off.
Sustain 0–100
This adjusts the range (or time) over which the low-level signals are
boosted. Larger values will produce a longer sustain.
Attack 0–100
This adjusts the strength of the attack. Larger values will result in a
sharper attack, creating a more clearly defined sound.
Level 0.0 dB–24.0 dB
This adjust the volume of the effect sound.
BR-1600_R_e.book 93 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
94
Insert effect parameter functions
COSM Comp/Limiter
(COSM Compressor/Limiter)
This effect can be used to produce a long sustain sound by
evening out volume levels in the input signal. In addition,
you can also use it as a limiter to suppress only peaks in the
volume and prevent distortion.
A limiter is an effect that prevents distortion by suppressing
input signals in excess of a specific value (i.e., the threshold).
You can also get the same effect achieved with a compressor
by setting the threshold to a low value.
The BR-1600CD uses COSM technology to model four types
of compressor/limiter effects, which combine the functions
of a compressor and a limiter.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
Sets the compressor/limiter to ON or OFF.
Type
Selects the compressor/limiter type.
Attack 0–100
(Active when BOSSCmp or D-Comp is selected.)
This parameter adjusts the strength of the picking attack produced
when the strings are played. Larger values will result in a sharper
attack, creating a more clearly defined sound.
Sustain 0–100
(When set to BOSSCmp, D-Comp)
Boosts low-level signals, adjusting the time over which sounds are
sustained. Higher values deepen the effect, resulting in a longer
sustain.
Threshold 0–100
(Active when Rack160 is selected.)
Adjust this parameter to match the input signal from your bass.
Compression will be applied to input levels in excess of this level.
The smaller the value set here, the lower the level at which the
limiter kicks in.
Input 0–100
(Active when VtgRack is selected.)
This parameter controls the input level. Increasing the value will
produce a deeper effect.
Ratio (Rack160) 1:1–20:1, inf:1 (VtgRack) 4:1–20:1
(When set to Rack160, VtgRack)
This adjusts the limiter compression ratio. Higher ratios produce a
stronger compression effect.
Attack Time 0–100
(Active when VtgRack is selected.)
This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the
compression ratio set by “Ratio” to be reached once the input level
exceeds the set threshold level and compression begins. The larger
the value set here, the more rapidly compression will be applied.
Release Time 0–100
(Active when VtgRack is selected.)
This adjusts the time it takes for compression to be removed once the
signal level drops below the threshold. Higher values cause the
compression to be released more rapidly, making it easier to
distinguish the sound from successively played strings.
Tone -50–+50
(Active when BOSSCmp is selected.)
This parameter adjusts the tone. Higher values cause the high
frequencies to be boosted more, and this results in a harder sound.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the effect.
COSM Overdrive/Distortion
This effect distorts the sound to create long sustain
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
Turns the Overdrive/Distortion effect on or off.
Type
Selects the type of distortion.
Drive 0–100
Adjusts the depth of distortion.
Bass -50–+50
Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range.
BOSSCmp
Models the BOSS CS-3 compact effects
processor.
D-Comp
Models the MXR dyna comp.
Rack160
Models the dbx 160x.
VtgRack
Models the UREI 1178.
BLUES OD
This is a crunch sound of the BOSS BD-
2.
TURBO OD
This is the high-gain overdrive sound of
the BOSS OD-2.
BOOSTER
This is a booster that works very well
with COSM amps.
DISTORT
This gives a basic, traditional distortion
sound.
AMERCAN
This models a Proco RAT.
GUV DS
This models an Marshall GUV’ NOR.
OD-1
This is the sound of the BOSS OD-1.
TSCREAM
This models an Ibanez TS-808.
DST+
This models an MXR DISTORTION+.
60S FUZ
This models a FUZZFACE.
OCT FUZ
This models an ACETONE FUZZ.
MUF FUZ
This models an Electro-Harmonix Big
Muff
π
.
MT-2
This is the sound of the BOSS MT-2.
R-MAN
This models a ROCKMAN.
HVY MTL
This creates a heavier distortion sound.
BR-1600_R_e.book 94 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
95
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
Treble -50–+50
Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the overdrive/distortion sound.
COSM PreAmp&Speaker
COSM technology plays an indispensable role in simulating
the distinguishing characteristics of various guitar amps in
the “Preamp” section, and is also used to simulate various
speaker sizes and cabinet constructions in the “Speaker
Simulator.”
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
Turns the Preamp/Speaker Simulator effect on or off.
Type
This sets the type of the guitar preamp. The distortion and tone
characteristics of each amp are as shown below:
Gain 0 –100
Adjusts the distortion of the amp.
Bass 0 –100
Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range.
Middle 0–100
Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range.
Treble 0–100
Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range.
Presence 0–100
Adjusts the tone for the ultra high frequency range.
* If you have selected “VO DRV,” “VO LEAD,” “VO CLEAN,” “MCH
DRV,” “MCH LEAD,” or “FAT MCH” as the type, raising the
presence will cut the high range (the value will change from 0 to -100).
Level 0 –100
Adjusts the overall volume of the entire preamp.
* Be careful not to raise the Level setting too high.
Bright OFF, ON
Turns the bright setting on or off.
OFF:
No brightness is added.
ON:
Brightness is added to create a lighter, crisper tone.
* This will not be displayed for certain Type settings.
Gain SW LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
Adjusts the distortion generated by the amp, with the level
increasing in sequence for LOW, MIDDLE, and HIGH.
* The sound of each type is created with the assumption that gain is set to
MIDDLE. It is normal, therefore, to use this setting.
Speaker SW OFF, ON
Turns the speaker simulator on or off.
JC-120
The sound of the Roland JC-120.
JAZZCMB
The sound suited to jazz.
FULLRNG
This is a sound with flat response.
CLEANTW
This models a Fender Twin Reverb.
PROCRNC
This models a Fender Pro Reverb.
TWEED
This models a Fender Bassman 4 x 10” Combo.
CRUNCH
This is a crunch sound that can produce
natural distortion.
BLUES
This is a sound suited to blues.
STKCRNC
This is a crunch sound with high gain.
VO DRV
This models the drive sound of a VOX AC-
30TB.
VO LEAD
This models the lead sound of the VOX AC-
30TB.
VO CLEAN
This models the clean sound of the VOX AC-
30TB.
MCH DRV
This models the sound input to left input on a
Matchless D/C-30.
MCH LEAD
This models the sound input to right input on
a Matchless D/C-30.
FAT MCH
This models the sound of a MATCHLESS with
a modified high gain.
BG LEAD
This models the lead sound of the MESA/
Boogie combo amp.
BG DRV
This models a MESA/Boogie with TREBLE
SHIFT SW on.
BG RHY
This models the rhythm channel of a MESA/
Boogie.
MS (1)
This models the sound input to Input I on a
Marshall 1959.
MS (1+2)
This models the sound of a Marshall 1959 with
Inputs I and II connected in parallel.
MS HI-G
This models the sound of a Marshall with a
modified midrange boost.
RF RED
This models the lead channel of a MESA/
Boogie Dual Rectifier.
RF ORNG
This models the rhythm channel of a MESA/
Boogie Dual Rectifier.
RF VNTG
This models a MESA/Boogie Rectifier with
VINTAGE SW on.
SLDN
This models a Soldano SLO-100.
DRV STK
This is a drive sound with high gain.
LEADSTK
This is a lead sound with high gain.
5150DRV
This models the lead channel of a Peavey EVH
5150.
MTL STK
This is a drive sound suited to metal.
MTLLEAD
This is a lead sound suited to metal.
BR-1600_R_e.book 95 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
96
Insert effect parameter functions
Speaker Type
Mic Setting CENTER, 1 cm–10 cm
This simulates the microphone position. “CENTER” simulates the
condition that the microphone is set in the middle of the speaker
cone. “1-10 cm” means that the microphone is moved away from the
center of the speaker cone.
Mic Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the microphone.
Direct Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
* When the FULLRNG type of preamp has been selected, “Mic Level”
should be set to 100, and “Direct Level” should be set to 0.
Amb Pre-Dly 0.5 ms–50.0 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay between the original sound and the
output of ambience (i.e., room reflections).
Amb Size 5.0 m–15.0 m
This parameter adjusts the sound of the ambience by varying the
room size. Larger values produce longer ambience and increase the
sense of spaciousness.
Amb Density 0–10
This parameter adjusts the density of the ambience. Larger values
produce a denser sound.
Amb HF Damp DARK, NORMAL, BRIGHT
This parameter adjusts the tone of the ambience.
DARK:
High frequencies decay relatively quickly, producing a darker
sounding ambience.
NORMAL:
This setting produces ambience with a standard sound.
BRIGHT:
High frequencies decay relatively slowly, producing a brighter
sounding ambience.
Amb Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of ambience.
De-esser
This effect is useful for reducing sibilance (or harsh ‘S’
sounds) produced by vocalists.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the de-esser effect on or off.
Sibilant Level 0–100
This adjusts the sensitivity with respect to the input volume, and it
controls the way in which the effect is applied.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the effect.
Defretter
This effect simulates the sound of a fretless bass.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the defretter effect on or off.
Sensitivity 0–100
This controls the input sensitivity of the defretter. Adjust this
parameter until your guitar’s harmonic changes sound natural.
Attack 0–100
This parameter controls the attack of the defretter. Increasing the value
will cause the harmonics to change more slowly, thus producing a
relatively attack-less sound, similar to that of a fretless bass.
Depth 0–100
This controls the ratio of harmonics. Increasing the value will increase the
harmonic content and therefore will create a more unusual sound.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Tone -50–+50
Adjusts the amount of blurring between the notes.
Resonance 0–100
Adds a characteristically resonant quality to the sound.
Effect Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the defretter sound.
Direct Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
■
When algorithm other than “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” is selected
Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the defretter sound.
1x10”
This is a compact open-back speaker
cabinet with one 10-inch speaker.
1x12”
This is a compact open-back speaker
cabinet with one 12-inch speaker.
2x12”
This is a general open-back speaker cab-
inet with two 12-inch speakers.
4x12”
This is an optimal speaker cabinet for a
large enclosed amp with four 12-inch
speakers.
8x12”
This is a double stack of two cabinets,
each with four 12-inch speakers.
ORG
This is the built-in speaker of the amp
you selected with “Type.”
BR-1600_R_e.book 96 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
97
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
Delay
This effect creates a thicker sound by applying a delayed
sound to the direct sound.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the delay effect on or off.
Type SINGLE, PAN
This parameter selects the type of delay to be used.
SINGLE:
A simple delay.
Pan:
The delayed sound is panned across the left and right channels. This
type of delay will be effective when stereo output is used.
Feedback 0–100
This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback. Changing the
amount of feedback also causes the number of individual repetitions
of the delayed sound to change.
Effect Level 0–120
Adjusts the overall volume of the delay sound.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Delay Time 0 ms–1800 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).
Tap Time 0%–100% (Type = Pan)
Adjusts the delay time of the right channel delay. This setting adjusts
the R channel delay time relative to the L channel delay time
(considered as 100%).
Hi Cut Freq 700 Hz–11.0 kHz, Flat
This sets the frequency at which the high cut filter begins to take
effect. This allows you to get a mild effect sound by cutting the high-
end component above the set frequency.
When it is set to “Flat,” the high cut frequency is off or has no effect.
■
When algorithm other than “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” is selected
Delay Time SINGLE: 1–1400 ms, PAN: 1–700 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval over which
sound is delayed).
Distance
Microphones often exhibit a boost in the volume of the lower
frequencies when they are positioned close to the sound
source, and this is referred to as proximity effect.
The Distance effect is used to simulate this phenomenon.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns Distance on or off.
Prox.Fx -12 dB–+12 dB
This parameter is used to adjust the proximity effect, as described above.
Adjustment in the [+] direction will move the microphone closer to the
sound source; adjustment in the [-] direction, away from the sound source.
Time 0–3000 cm
This simulates the time difference occurring as a result of distance
from the sound source.
Doubling
By adding a slightly time-delayed sound to the direct sound,
a doubling effect gives the impression that multiple sources
are being played together. Best results will be achieved when
stereo output is used.
* This effect can be used when the Modulation “Effect Type” parameter is
set to “DOUBL’N.”
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the doubling effect on or off.
Delay Time 0.5–50.0 ms
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval for which
sound is delayed).
Separation -100–+100
This parameter adjusts the diffusion—in other words, the panning of
the direct sound and the effect sound to left and right. This will be
effective when stereo output is used.
Effect Level 0–120
This adjusts the overall volume of the delay sound.
BR-1600_R_e.book 97 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
98
Insert effect parameter functions
Enhancer
By adding sounds that are out-of-phase with the direct
sound, this effect enhances the definition of the sound and
makes it more present in the mix.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the enhancer effect on or off.
Sensitivity 0–100
Adjusts the manner in which the enhancer will be applied with
respect to input signals.
Frequency 1.0–10.0 kHz
Adjusts the frequency at which the enhancer will begin to be applied.
The effect will be noticeable in frequencies above the frequency set here.
Mix Level 0–100
Adjusts the amount of phase-shifted sound of the range set by
“Frequency” that is to be mixed with the input.
Low Mix Level 0–100
Adjusts the amount of phase-shifted sound in the low-frequency
range that is to be mixed with the input. The extent of this low-
frequency range is fixed.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the enhanced sound.
Flanger
This algorithm produces a flanging effect, which makes a
sound seem as if it is twisting.
* If the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this effect can
be used if “FL” is selected for the “FX Select” of the FX. If other than
“COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this effect can be
used if “FLANGER” is selected for the “Effect Type” of the Modulation.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the flanger effect on or off.
Rate 0–100
Determines the rate of the flanging effect.
Depth 0–100
Determines the depth of the flanging effect.
Manual 0–100
This parameter adjusts the center frequency at which the effect will
be applied.
Resonance 0–100
Determines the amount of resonance (or feedback). Increasing this
value will emphasize the flanging effect, producing a more unusual
sound.
Separation 0–100
This parameter adjusts the diffusion. Large values produce greater
diffusion, and this will be effective when stereo output is used.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Effect Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the flanger sound.
Direct Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
Foot Volume
Specify the volume between effects. By using an expression
pedal to control the foot volume, you can smoothly change
the volume of the output sound. For a detailed explanation,
see “Using an expression pedal” (p. 84).
Foot Volume On/Off OFF, ON
Switches the foot volume on or off.
Humanizer
This can create human vowel-like sounds.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “HU.”
Vowel1
A, E, I, O, U
This selects the first vowel.
Vowel2
A, E, I, O, U
This selects the second vowel.
Rate 0–100
This adjusts the cycle for changing the two vowels.
Depth 0–100
This adjusts the depth of the effect.
Manual 0–100
This determines the point where the two vowels are switched. When it is
set to “50,” vowel 1 and vowel 2 are switched in the same length of time.
When it is set to lower than “50,” the time for vowel 1 is shorter. When it
is set to higher than “50,” the time for vowel 1 is longer.
Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the humanizer sound.
BR-1600_R_e.book 98 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
99
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
Limiter
A limiter is an effect that prevents distortion by suppressing
input signals in excess of a specific value (i.e., the threshold).
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the limiter effect on or off.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Threshold 0–100
Adjust this parameter to match the input signal. Limiting will be
applied to input levels in excess of this level.
Release 0–100
This adjusts the time it takes for limiting to be removed once the
signal level drops below the threshold.
Tone -50–+50
Adjusts the tone.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the effect.
■
When algorithm other than “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” is selected
Threshold -60–0 dB
Adjust this parameter to match the input signal. Limiting will be
applied to input levels in excess of this level.
Attack 0–100
Adjusts the time it takes for the effect to become active once the
input level exceeds the threshold level.
Release 0–100
This adjusts the time it takes for limiting to be removed once the
signal level drops below the threshold.
Detect HPF THRU, 20–2000 Hz
Adjusts the cutoff frequency for level detection. When “Thru” is
selected, this will operate as a conventional limiter.
Level -60–+24 dB
Adjusts the overall volume of the effect.
Low Cut Filter
This filter is used to eliminate unwanted low-band sounds such as
microphone pop noises.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
Turns the low cat filter on and off.
Invert OFF, ON
This parameter switches the microphone phase between OFF (phase
same as input) and ON (phase is opposite of input).
Freq 40–800 Hz
This parameter adjusts the cutoff frequency of the low-cut filter.
Lo-Fi Box
This effect is used to produce a lo-fi sound.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the lo-fi box effect on or off.
Effect Type
Select the operating mode for the lo-fi box.
RADIO:
The audio will sound as if it is being played on an AM radio.
By adjusting “Tuning,” you can simulate the transient sounds that
would occur as you adjust the radio’s tuning frequency.
PLAYER:
The audio will sound as if it is being played on a gramophone. Needle
noise caused by scratches and dust on the record is also simulated.
DIGITAL:
This setting allows you to create a lo-fi sound by lowering the sample
rate and/or decreasing the number of bits. A bank of series-connected
real-time modify filters allow the sound to be freely reshaped.
■
When “RADIO” or “PLAYER” is selected
Tuning 0–100
This parameter is used with the RADIO setting. It simulates the transient
sounds that would occur as you adjust the AM radio’s tuning frequency
Wow Flutter 0–100
This parameter is used with the PLAYER setting. It simulates the wow
and flutter that occur when the speed of the turntable is not constant.
Noise 0–100
This parameter is used to simulate noise.
Filter 0–100
This parameter adjusts the filter.
D:E Balance 100:0–0:100
This adjusts the balance of the direct and effect volumes.
■
When “DIGITAL” is selected
Pre Filter OFF, ON
This filter reduces the amount of digital distortion. When turned off, it
allows you to create an intense lo-fi sound that includes digital distortion.
Sample Rate OFF, 1/2–1/32
This parameter allows you to modify the sampling rate.
Bit OFF, 15–1
Modifies the number of data bits. When turned off, the number of
data bits will remain unchanged.
If an extremely low number of bits is selected, certain input sources
may result in loud noises being input, even when there is no input
sound. In such a case, raise the noise suppressor’s threshold.
Post Filter OFF, ON
This filter reduces the amount of digital distortion produced by the
lo-fi. By turning this off, you can create an extremely lo-fi sound.
BR-1600_R_e.book 99 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
100
Insert effect parameter functions
Effect Level 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the lo-fi sound.
Direct Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
Modify Filter
This parameter selects the filter type.
Cutoff Freq 0–100
This parameter adjusts the cutoff frequency.
Resonance 0–100
This parameter adjusts the resonance.
Gain 0– +24 dB
Adjusts the volume level of the sound that has passed through the
modify filter.
Mic Converter
This effect can convert the characteristics of an inexpensive
general-purpose microphone into those of an expensive
studio microphone (i.e., Microphone Conversion).
Furthermore, when used with a part that has already been
recorded, it can reproduce the same tonal changes as would
occur if the microphone type or distance had been changed.
In doing so, it adds the sense of an acoustic space to an
instrumental that was recorded by direct line input, making
it seem as if it had been recorded with a microphone (i.e.,
Line
→
Microphone Conversion).
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns the Mic converter on or off.
Input
Selects the type of microphone that was actually used to record the part.
Output
Specifies the microphone to be simulated.
* The low-range response will be extended when a condenser-type microphone
model is selected for “Output”, and this may boost any low-range noise that
is transmitted through the microphone stand. In such a case, either use a
bass cut filter to remove the unwanted low-range noise or use an isolation
mount* with your microphone stand while recording. (*:A microphone
holder that uses a material such as rubber to absorb vibrations.)
Phase
Specifies the phase of the mic.
NORMAL
Output has the same phase as the input
INVERSE
Output has the opposite phase to the input
Noise Suppressor
This effect is used to reduce noise and hum. Since it does this in
accordance with the sound’s envelope (i.e., the way in which the
volume rises and falls over time), it has very little effect on the
sound itself and does not affect its natural character.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the noise suppressor effect on or off.
Threshold 0–100
Adjust this parameter to match the volume of the noise. If the noise
is relatively loud, a higher setting will be appropriate. If the level of
the noise is low, select a lower setting. Adjust this value until the
way in which the sound decays is as natural as possible.
* High settings for “Threshold” may result in no sound being output
when the instrument is played with the volume turned down.
Release 0–100
Adjusts the time from activation of the noise suppressor until the
volume is reduced to zero.
Octave
This effect duplicates parts at one octave lower down to
create a richer sound.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the octave effect on or off.
Octave Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the sound one octave below.
Direct Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
OFF
No modify filter will be used.
LPF
A low-pass filter will be used.
BPF
A band-pass filter will be used.
HPF
A high-pass filter will be used.
DR-20
Roland DR-20
Sml.Dy
Small dynamic microphone
Hed.Dy
Head-worn dynamic microphone
Min.Cn
Miniature condenser microphone
Flat
Line input
AKGC3K
AKG C3000B
Sml.Dy
A general-purpose dynamic microphone
for use with instruments or vocals. This is
ideal for guitar amps or snare drums.
Voc.Dy
A popular dynamic microphone used for vo-
cals and featuring an extended midrange.
Lrg.Dy
A dynamic microphone with an extended low
end. This is effective when used with bass
drums, toms, and other similar sounds.
Sml.Cn
A small condenser microphone used with various
instruments and featuring a sparkling high end.
This is particularly effective when used with met-
al percussion instruments and acoustic guitars.
Lrg.Cn
A flat-response condenser microphone that
is effective when used with vocals, narrated
parts, acoustic instruments, and the like.
Vnt.Cn
VA vintage condenser microphone that is
effective when used with vocals, acoustic
instruments, and the like.
Flat
A microphone with a flat frequency response.
This can be selected to eliminate the charac-
teristics of the microphone used for recording.
BR-1600_R_e.book 100 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
101
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
Pan
With the volume level of the left and right sides alternately
changing, when playing sound in stereo, you can get an
effect that makes the guitar sound appear to fly back and
forth between the speakers.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “PAN.”
Wave Shape 0–100
This adjusts changes in volume level.
Rate 0–100
Adjusts the frequency (speed) of the change.
Depth 0–100
Adjusts the depth of the effect.
Phaser
By adding varied-phase portions to the direct sound, the
phaser effect gives a whooshing, swirling character to the
sound.
* If the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this effect can
be used if “PH” is selected for the “FX Select” of the FX.
If other than “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this
effect can be used if “PHASER” is selected for the “Effect Type” of the
Modulation.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the phaser effect on or off.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Type
Selects the number of stages that the phaser effect will use.
Rate 0–100
Sets the rate of the phaser.
Depth 0–100
Sets the depth of the phaser.
Manual 0–100
Adjusts the center frequency of the phaser.
Resonance 0–100
This parameter sets the amount of resonance (or feedback).
Increasing the value will emphasize the effect, producing a more
unusual sound.
Step OFF, ON
This sets on or off of the step function. When the step function is
turned on, the change of a sound will be in steps.
Step Rate 0–100
This sets the cycle of the step function that changes the rate and
depth. When it is set to a higher value, the change will be finer.
Effect Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the phaser.
Direct Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
■
When algorithm other than “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” is selected
Rate 0–100
This sets the rate of the Phaser effect.
Depth 0–100
Determines the depth of the Phaser effect.
Manual 0–100
Adjusts the center frequency of the phaser effect.
Resonance 0–100
Determines the amount of resonance (feedback). Increasing the value
will emphasize the effect, creating a more unusual sound.
Pickup Simulator
This produces the sound of different types of pickup. You
can produce thick humbucking-style sounds even with a
single-coil guitar.
* If the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this effect can
be used if “PIC” is selected for the “FX Select” of the FX.
Type
Select the pickup type.
Tone -50–+50
Adjusts the tone.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume.
4STAGE
This is a four-phase effect. A light phaser ef-
fect is obtained.
8STAGE
This is an eight-phase effect. It is a popular
phaser effect.
12STAGE
This is a twelve-phase effect. A deep phase
effect is obtained.
BIPHASE
This is the phaser with two phase shift cir-
cuits connected in series.
S TO H
(Single to Hum)
This converts the sound of a single coil pick-
up to the sound of a humbucking pickup.
H TO S
(Hum to Single)
This converts the sound of a humbucking
pickup to the sound of a single coil pickup.
H TO HF
(Hum to Half-tone)
This converts the sound of a humbuck-
ing pickup to the half-tone sound of a
single-coil pickup.
BR-1600_R_e.book 101 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
102
Insert effect parameter functions
Pitch Shifter
This effect moves the pitch of the original sound up or down
within a range of two octaves.
* If the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this effect can
be used if “PS” is selected for the “FX Select” of the FX. If other than
“COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this effect can be
used if “P.SHIFT” is selected for the “Effect Type” of the Modulation.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the pitch shifter effect on or off.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Voice 1-VOICE, 2-MONO, 2-ST, 1-PEDAL
This selects the number of voices for the pitch shift sound.
1-VOICE:
One-voice pitch-shifted sound output in mono.
2-MONO:
Two-voice pitch-shifted sound (PS1, PS2) output in mono.
2-ST (2-stereo):
Two-voice pitch-shifted sound (PS1, PS2) output through left and
right channels.
1-PEDAL:
The pitch-shifted sound for a single source is output in mono. When
the expression pedal is depressed, the pitch can be varied by the
amount of pitch shift set using “Pitch.” For more detailed
information, refer to “Using an expression pedal” (p. 84).
Mode FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW
Selection for the pitch shifter mode.
FAST, MEDIUM, SLOW:
The response is slower in the order of FAST, MEDIUM and SLOW,
but the modulation is lessened in the same order.
Pitch -24–+24
Adjusts the amount of pitch shift (the amount of pitch change) in
semitone steps. If the “1-PEDAL” is selected for the “Voice”, the
pitch can be varied by the amount of pitch shift set using this
parameter when the expression pedal is depressed.
Fine -50–+50
Make fine adjustments to the pitch shift.
* The amount of the change in the Fine “100” is equivalent to that of the
Pitch “1.”
Pre Delay 0 ms–300 ms
Adjusts the time from when the direct sound is heard until the pitch
shifted sounds are heard. Normally you can leave this set at “0 ms.”
Feedback 0–100
This adjusts the feedback amount of the pitch shift sound.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the pitch shift sound.
Direct Level 0–100
This adjusts the volume of the direct sound.
■
When algorithm other than “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” is selected
P.Shift Type
Selects either a manual or pedal-type pitch shifter.
MANUAL:
A simple pitch shifter.
PEDAL:
The effect of the pedal-type pitch shifter can be replicated by
operating an expression pedal. When the expression pedal is
depressed, the pitch can be varied by the amount of pitch shift set
using “Pitch.” For more detailed information, refer to “Using an
expression pedal” (p. 84).
Pitch -24–DETUNE–24
Adjusts the amount of pitch shift (i.e., the degree of change in pitch)
in units of one semitone. By selecting DETUNE, you can add a
slightly pitch-shifted sound to the input sound to produce a detune
effect. If the “PEDAL” is selected for the “P.Shift Type”, the pitch can
be varied by the amount of pitch shift set using this parameter when
the expression pedal is depressed.
D:E Balance 100:0–0:100
This adjusts the balance of the direct and effect volumes.
Separation -100–+100
This parameter adjusts the diffusion—in other words, the panning of
the direct sound and the effect sound to left and right. This will be
effective when stereo output is used.
BR-1600_R_e.book 102 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
103
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
Preamp
This effect is used to adjust the distortion and tone of guitar
sounds.
* When Bass, Middle, and Treble are all set to 0, certain Amp Type
settings may result in no sound being output.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
Turns the preamp effect on or off.
Amp Type
This sets the type of preamp to be used. The distortion and tone
characteristics of each amp are as shown below:
■
With “COSM COMP GUITAR AMP,” or
“VO+GT.AMP” algorithms
■
With “COSM BASS AMP” or “COSM
COMP BASS AMP” algorithms
Volume 0–100
Adjusts the volume and distortion of the amp.
Bass GUITAR AMP: 0–100, BASS AMP: -100–+100
Adjusts the tone for the low frequency range.
Middle GUITAR AMP: 0–100, BASS AMP:-100–+100
Adjusts the tone for the middle frequency range.
* If you have selected “MATCH” or “VO DRV” as the preamp type, the
middle control will have no effect.
Treble GUITAR AMP: 0-100, BASS AMP: -100–+100
Adjusts the tone for the high frequency range.
Presence 0–100
Adjusts the tone of the ultra-high frequency range.
* This is not displayed when the algorithm is “COSM BASS AMP” or
“COSM COMP BASS AMP.”
* If you have selected “MATCH” or “VO DRV” as the preamp type,
raising the presence will cut the high range (i.e., the value will change
from “0” to “-100”).
Master 0–100
Adjusts the overall volume of the preamp.
Bright OFF, ON
Turns the bright setting on or off.
OFF:
No brightness is added.
ON:
Brightness is added to create a lighter, crisper tone.
* This will not be displayed for certain Amp Type settings.
Gain LOW, MIDDLE, HIGH
Adjusts the distortion generated by the amp, with the level
increasing in sequence for LOW, MIDDLE, and HIGH.
* The sound of each type is created with the assumption that gain is set to
MIDDLE. It is normal, therefore, to use this setting.
JC-120
The sound of the Roland “JC-120,” a favor-
ite of pro musicians around the world.
CLEAN
The sound of a conventional built-in tube
amp.
CRUNCH
Allows you to reproduce a crunch effect
and recreate natural distortion.
MATCH
The latest tube-amp sound widely used in
all styles from blues and rock.
VO DRV
The Liverpool sound of the 60’s.
BLUES
A lead sound with a rich middle ideal for
blues.
BG LEAD
The sound of a tube amp typical of the late
‘70s to ‘80s and characterized by a distinc-
tive midrange.
MS
The sound of a large tube-amp stack that
was indispensable to the British hard rock
of the 70’s and is still used today by many
hard rock guitarists.
1
A trebly sound created by using in-
put I of the guitar amp.
2
A trebly sound created by using in-
put II of the guitar amp.
1+2
The sound achieved by connecting
Inputs I and II on the guitar amp in
parallel, and giving a stronger low
end than can be achieved with Input
I alone.
SLDN
A tube amp sound with versatile distortion,
usable in a wide range of styles.
METAL
The sound of a large tube amp, suitable for
heavy metal.
METAL D
A powerful, high-gain metal sound.
AC
The vintage sound of an early transistor
amp.
AMG
The sound of a large double-stack, vacuum-
tube amp with ultra-lows and a crisp edge.
BR-1600_R_e.book 103 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
104
Insert effect parameter functions
Ring Modulator
This creates a bell-like sound by ring-modulating the guitar
sound with the signal from the internal oscillator. The sound
will be unmusical and lack distinctive pitches.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the ring modulator effect on or off.
Frequency 0–100
This adjusts the frequency of the internal oscillator.
Effect Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the effect sound.
Direct Level 0–100
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.
Short Delay
This is a delay with the maximum delay time of 400 ms. This
effect is useful for making the sound fatter.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “SDD.”
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the short delay effect on or off.
Delay Time 0 ms–400 ms
Adjusts the delay time.
Feedback 0–100
Feedback refers to returning the delayed signal back into the input of
the delay. This parameter adjusts the volume that is returned to the
input. Higher settings will result in more delay repeats.
Effect Level 0–120
Adjusts the volume of delay sound.
Slow Gear
This produces a volume-swell effect (“violin-like” sound).
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “SG.”
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the slow gear effect on or off.
Sensitivity 0–100
This adjusts the sensitivity of the slow gear. When it is set to a lower
value, the effect of the slow gear can be obtained only with a stronger
picking, while no effect is obtained with a weaker picking. When the
value is set higher, the effect is obtained even with a weak picking.
Rise Time 0–100
This adjusts the time needed for the volume to reach its maximum
from the moment you begin picking.
Speaker Simulator
This effect simulates the characteristics of various types of
speakers. When the output from the BR-1600CD is connected
directly to a mixer or similar device, this effect can be used to
create the sound of your favorite speaker system.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the speaker simulator effect on or off.
Speaker Type
Selects the type of speaker that will be simulated.
“On Mic” simulates the sound obtained using a dynamic
microphone; “Off Mic” simulates the sound obtained using a
condenser microphone.
■
With “COSM COMP GUITAR AMP,” or
“VO+GT.AMP” algorithms
fig.S03-01
■
With “COSM BASS AMP” or “COSM
COMP BASS AMP” algorithms
fig.S03-02
Mic Setting CENTER, 1–10 cm
This adjusts the simulated microphone position. CENTER
reproduces the sound obtained by setting the microphone in the
middle of the speaker cone. 1 to 10 cm represents the distance of the
microphone from the center of the speaker cone.
Mic Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume of the microphone.
Direct Level 0–100
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.
CommentsCabinet
A setting suitable for Clean
On Mic
Roland JC-120 Simulation
10 inch
12 inch
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (four units)
Small open-back enclosure
Open-back enclosure
Large Sealed enclosure
Large sealed enclosure
Large dual stack
On Mic
On Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
OnMic
Off Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
Off Mic
Open-back enclosure
Open-back enclosure
Open-back enclosure
Open-back enclosure
Open-back enclosure
Large sealed enclosure
Large sealed enclosure
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (four units)
12 inch (four units)
A setting suitable for Clean
A setting suitable for Match
A setting suitable for Match
A setting suitable for BG Lead
A setting suitable for BG Lead
SMALL
MIDDLE
JC-120
TWIN
twin
MATCH
match
BG STK
bg stk
MS STK
ms stk
METAL
A setting suitable for MS
A setting suitable for MS
On Mic
Off Mic
Open-back enclosure
Open-back enclosure
12 inch (two units)
12 inch (two units)
A setting suitable for Vo
A setting suitable for Vo
VO DRV
vo drv
Microphone
Setting
Speaker
Unit
SP Simulator
Type
Comments
Microphone
Setting
Speaker
Unit
SP Simulator
Type
Cabinet
A setting suitable for AMG
A setting suitable for AMG
On Mic
15 inch (two units)
15 inch (two units)
10 inch (eight units)
Large sealed enclosure
Large sealed enclosure
Off Mic
On Mic
Off Mic
Large sealed enclosure
Large sealed enclosure
10 inch (eight units)
A setting suitable for AC
A setting suitable for AC
AC
ac
AMG
amg
BR-1600_R_e.book 104 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
105
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
Sub Equalizer
This adjusts the tone as a sub equalizer. A parametric type is
adopted for the high-middle and low-middle range.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “SEQ.”
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the sub equalizer effect on or off.
Low Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the bass
equalizer.
Low-Mid Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the low-
midrange equalizer.
Low-Mid Freq 100 Hz–10.0 kHz
This parameter sets the central frequency for the low-midrange equalizer.
Low-Mid Q 0.5–16
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by
“Low-Mid Freq.” A larger value results in a narrower range of change.
Hi-Mid Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the high-
midrange equalizer.
Hi-Mid Freq 100 Hz–10.0 kHz
This parameter sets the central frequency for the high-midrange equalizer.
Hi-Mid Q 0.5–16
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the frequency set by
“Hi-Mid Freq.” A larger value results in a narrower range of change.
High Gain -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the treble equalizer.
Level -20–+20 dB
This parameter adjusts the volume after the equalizer stage.
Tremolo
Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume.
* This effect can be used when “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm is
selected.
Wave Shape 0–100
This adjusts changes in volume level.
Rate 0–100
Adjusts the frequency (speed) of the change.
Depth 0–100
Adjusts the depth of the effect.
Tremolo/Pan
Tremolo is an effect that creates a cyclic change in volume,
and pan moves the stereo position in a cyclic manner
between left and right (when stereo output is used).
* This effect can be used when the Modulation “Effect Type” parameter is
set to “TRM/PAN.”
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the tremolo/pan effect on or off.
Mode
This parameter selects tremolo or pan, and it also selects how the
effect will be applied.
TRM-TRI:
The volume will change cyclically and smooth changes will be
produced.
TRM-SQR:
The volume will change cyclically and abrupt changes will be
produced.
PAN-TRI:
The sound will be moved cyclically between the left and right.
Smooth changes will be produced.
PAN-SQR:
The sound will be moved cyclically between the left and right.
Abrupt changes will be produced.
Rate 0–100
Adjust the rate at which the effect will operate.
Depth 0–100
Adjusts the depth of the effect.
Uni-V
Although this resembles a phaser effect, it also provides a
unique undulation that you can’t get with a regular phaser.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “UV.”
Rate 0–100
Adjusts the rate of the Uni-V effect.
Depth 0–100
Adjusts the depth of the Uni-V effect.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume.
BR-1600_R_e.book 105 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
106
Insert effect parameter functions
Vibrato
This effect creates vibrato by slightly modulating the pitch.
* This effect can be used in the “COSM OD GUITAR AMP” algorithm
when FX “FX Select” parameter is set to “VB.”
Type MANUAL, PEDAL
This parameter sets whether or not vibrato is to be controlled using
the pedal.
MANUAL:
Vibrato is applied normally.
PEDAL:
The depth of vibrato can be controlled by the degree to which the
expression pedal is applied.
Rate 0–100
This adjusts the rate of the vibrato.
Depth 0–100
When “PEDAL” has been selected for “Type,” full application of the
expression pedal will produce vibrato at this depth.
Voice Transformer
This effect controls the formants in a vocal part, allowing a
variety of different voice characters to be created.
Specifically, it adds two voice characters with differing
formants to the direct sound.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the voice transformer effect on or off.
Formant1 -100–+100
Adjust the formant of the voice character 1.
Formant2 -100–+100
Adjust the formant of the voice character 2.
Effect Level1 0–100
Adjust the volume of the voice character 1.
Effect Level2 0–100
Adjust the volume of the voice character 2.
Direct Level 0–100
Adjust the volume of the direct sound.
Wah
The wah effect creates a unique tone by changing the
frequency response characteristics of a filter.
Auto wah modifies the filter in a cyclic fashion or in response
to the volume of the input source in order to create automatic
wah effects.
Touch wah creates an automatic wah by changing the filter
in response to the volume of the input. Pedal wah lets you
use an Expression pedal or the like to obtain real-time control
of the wah effect.
* If the “BASS MULTI,” “COSM BASS AMP,” or “STEREO MULTI”
algorithms are selected, this effect can be used if “WAH” is selected for
the “Effect Type” of the 4Band Equalizer/Wah. If the “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” algorithm is selected, this effect can be used if “WAH”
or “AW” is selected for the “Effect Type” of the EQ/Wah.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
Turns the touch wah effect on or off.
■
When “COSM OD GUITAR AMP”
algorithm is selected
Effect Type WAH, AW
Selects either pedal wah “WAH” or auto wah “AW.”
WAH:
The effect will function as a pedal wah.
AW:
The effect will function as an auto wah.
●
When “WAH” is selected
The expression pedal can be used to operate the wah effect.
Type
This selects the wah type.
Pedal Pos 0–100
This adjusts the position of the wah pedal.
Level 0–100
Adjusts the volume.
CRY WAH
This models the sound of the CRY BABY
wah pedal popular in the `70s.
VO WAH
This models the sound of the VOX V846.
FAT
This a wah sound featuring a bold tone.
LIGHT
This wah has a refined sound with no
unusual characteristics.
7STRING
Wah featuring a broader range of variations
for the seven-string guitar.
BR-1600_R_e.book 106 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
107
Insert effect parameter functions
Section 2
●
When “AW” is selected
The effect will be applied automatically based on the volume of the
performance. Alternatively, it is also possible to apply wah in a
cyclic fashion.
Mode LPF, BPF
Selection for the wah mode.
LPF:
This creates a wah effect over a wide frequency range.
BPF:
This creates a wah effect in a narrow frequency range.
Polarity DOWN, UP
Selection for the direction in which the filter will change in response
to the input.
UP:
The frequency of the filter will rise.
DOWN:
The frequency of the filter will fall.
Sensitivity 0–100
Adjusts the sensitivity of the filter in the direction specified by the
polarity setting. Higher values will result in a stronger response.
When the setting is 0, the strength of the picking will have no effect.
Frequency 0–100
Adjusts the center frequency of the wah effect.
Peak 0–100
Adjusts the way in which the wah effect is applied to the area
around the center frequency. Lower values will produce a wah effect
over a wider area; higher values, a wah effect over a narrower area.
When the setting is 50, a standard wah sound will be produced.
* With a value of “50” a standard wah sound will be produced.
Rate 0–100
Adjusts the frequency of the auto wah.
Depth 0–100
Adjusts the depth of the auto wah effect.
Level 0–100
This parameter adjusts the volume.
■
When algorithm other than “COSM OD
GUITAR AMP” is selected
Wah Type
Selects either touch wah “TOUCH” or pedal wah “PEDAL.”
TOUCH:
The effect will function as a touch wah.
PEDAL:
The effect will function as a pedal wah.
●
When “TOUCH” is selected
Polarity UP, DOWN
Selects the direction in which the filter will change in response to input.
UP:
The frequency of the filter will rise.
DOWN:
The frequency of the filter will fall.
Sensitivity 0–100
Adjusts the sensitivity of the filter in the direction specified by the
polarity setting. Higher values will result in a stronger response.
When the setting is 0, the strength of the picking will have no effect.
Frequency 0–100
Adjusts the center frequency of the wah effect.
Peak 0–100
Adjusts the way in which the wah effect applies to the area around
the center frequency. Lower values will produce a wah effect over a
wide area around the center frequency. Higher values will produce a
wah effect in a narrow area around the center frequency. With a
value of “50” a standard wah sound will be produced.
Level 0–100
This parameter adjusts the volume.
●
When “PEDAL” is selected
The effect of the wah pedal can be reproduced by operating an
expression pedal.
For a more detailed explanation, see “Using an expression pedal” (p.
84).
Peak 0–100
Adjusts the way in which the wah effect is applied to the area
around the center frequency. Lower values will produce a wah effect
over a wider area; higher values, a wah effect over a narrower area.
When the setting is 50, a standard wah sound will be produced.
Level 0–100
This parameter adjusts the volume.
BR-1600_R_e.book 107 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
108
Using track-specific compressors and equalizers
Compressors and equalizers
Each of the BR-1600CD’s tracks contains its own independent three-band equalizer and compressor, and these effects can be used
to adjust the sound of playback from just that track.
Compressors:
A compressor is used to smooth out volume fluctuations in the track’s playback, thus making it easier to hear at all times.
A maximum of 8 different compressors can be used, and these can be selected for use on Tracks 1 through 8 or Tracks 9/10
through 15/16.
Three-band equalizers:
A three-band equalizer separates the track’s playback sound into low, middle, and high frequency bands, allowing the volume of
each of these bands to be adjusted independently of the others.
Compressor and equalizer connections
Each track’s compressor and equalizer are connected as shown below.
fig.32-01
Track
REVERB
CHORUS/
DELAY
EQUALIZERCOMPRESSOR
LMIX
MIX
MIX
R
L
R
L
R
Chorus/Delay
Send
Reverb Send
Track Pan
BR-1600_R_e.book 108 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
109
Using track-specific compressors and equalizers
Section 2
Adjusting the sound of
compressors and equalizers
The sound of compressors and equalizers can even be
adjusted during playback so that you can listen to the
results and choose the best settings for your tracks.
Adjusting a compressor
For details regarding basic compressor operations, refer to
“Suppressing variations in volume (Compressor)” (Basic
Operation; p. 47).
The following section will deal with the finer points of
compressor setting methods.
1.
Press [COMP].
The Compressor screen will appear.
fig.32-05d
2.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Compressor Edit screen will appear.
fig.32-06d
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to
change and select a new setting using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new settings change
the sound.
THRESHOLD -48 dB–0 dB
Adjust this parameter to match the input signal. Compression
will be applied to input levels in excess of this level. The smaller
the value set here, the lower the level at which the compressor
kicks in.
RATIO 2.0: 1–40.0: 1, INF: 1
This adjusts the compression ratio. Higher ratios produce a
stronger compression effect.
ATTACK 0–100
This parameter adjusts the amount of time it takes for the
compression ratio set by “Ratio” to be reached once the input
level exceeds the set threshold level and compression begins.
The smaller the value set here, the more rapidly compression
will be applied.
RELEASE 0–100
This adjusts the time it takes for compression to be removed
once the signal level drops below the threshold. Lower values
cause the compression to be released more rapidly, making it
easier to distinguish the sound from successively played
strings.
KNEE SOFT, MEDIUM, HARD
This parameter affects the way in which compression is applied
(i.e., the knee) in the vicinity of the threshold.
SOFT:
With this knee setting, compression is applied gently and is
gradually increased as the level of the audio signal approaches
the threshold.
MEDIUM:
With this knee setting, compression is applied a little gently and
is a little gradually increased as the level of the audio signal
approaches the threshold.
HARD:
With this knee setting, no compression whatsoever is applied
until the level of the audio signal reaches the threshold, and
once the threshold has been crossed, compression will be
applied fully in accordance with the ratio setting.
LEVEL
This adjust the volume of the compression.
4.
Press [F1] (ON/OFF) to switch the compressor on and
off.
[F1] is used to toggle between on and off.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Only one set of compressor settings can be saved per song.
BR-1600_R_e.book 109 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
110
Using track-specific compressors and equalizers
Selecting tracks to be compressed
A maximum of 8 different compressors can be used, and
these can be selected for use on Tracks 1 through 8 or Tracks
9/10 through 15/16. At the time of purchase, Tracks 1
through 8 will be selected for compression.
Let's now change the settings to have compression applied to
Tracks 9/10 through 15/16.
1.
Press [COMP].
The Compressor screen will appear.
fig.32-05d
2.
Press [F3] (TRACK 9-16).
Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 will now be selected for compression.
Each time you press [F3], the tracks for compression will toggle
between Tracks 1 through 8 and Tracks 9/10 through 15/16.
3.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Switching compressors between
stereo and mono (Stereo Link)
If you intend to apply a compressor to a stereo-recorded
track, you will need to align the left and right compressor
settings in order to prevent differences in volume occurring
on the left and right (Stereo Link). Use the following
procedure to turn Stereo Link on and off.
1.
Press [COMP].
The Compressor screen will appear.
fig.32-05d
2.
Use the track buttons or [CURSOR] to select one or
both tracks from a stereo pair.
3.
Press [F4] (LINK ON).
Stereo Link will be toggled between on and off.
4.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Adjusting a three-band equalizer
For details regarding basic equalizer operations, refer to “Adjusting
the sound of each track (Equalizer)” (Basic Operation; p. 48).
The following section will deal with the finer points of
equalizer setting methods.
1.
Press [EQ].
The Equalizer screen will appear.
fig.32-03d
2.
Press [F1] (ON/OFF) to toggle the equalizer between on and off.
3.
Press the FUNCTION button ([F2], [F3], or [F4])
corresponding to the band (HIGH, MID, or LOW)
whose settings you want to modify.
The Equalizer Edit screen for that band will appear.
When pressing [F2] (HIGH):
fig.32-04cd
When pressing [F3] (MID):
fig.32-04bd
When pressing [F4] (LOW):
fig.32-04ad
4.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to change
and select a new setting using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new settings change
the sound.
■
When “HIGH” is selected
HIGH TYPE SHLV, PEAK
Sets the equalizer type for the high range.
SHLV
This selects the shelving type equalization.
PEAK
This selects the peaking type equalization.
Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are fixed as stereo tracks,
and therefore, Stereo Link will always be on for the
corresponding compressors. It will not be possible to
turn Stereo Link off for these tracks.
BR-1600_R_e.book 110 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
111
Using track-specific compressors and equalizers
Section 2
HIGH GAIN -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the
high-range equalizer.
HIGH FREQUENCY 800 Hz–16000 Hz
This parameter sets the frequency for the high range equalizer.
HIGH Q 0.5–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the
frequency set by “HIGH FREQUENCY.” A larger value results
in a narrower range of change.
This parameter is only valid when “HIGH TYPE” has been set to “PEAK.”
■
When “MID” is selected
MID GAIN -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the
midrange equalizer.
MID FREQUENCY 200 Hz–4000 Hz
This parameter sets the central frequency for the midrange equalizer.
MID Q 0.3–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the
frequency set by “MID FREQUENCY.” A larger value results in
a narrower range of change.
■
When “LOW” is selected
LOW TYPE SHLV, PEAK
Sets the equalizer type for the low range.
SHLV
This selects the shelving type equalization.
PEAK
This selects the peaking type equalization.
LOW GAIN -20–+20 dB
This parameter sets the gain (amount of boost or cut) for the low
range equalizer.
LOW FREQUENCY 40 Hz–800 kHz
This parameter sets the frequency for the low range equalizer.
LOW Q 0.3–16.0
This parameter sets the range of change in gain for the
frequency set by “LOW FREQUENCY.” A larger value results
in a narrower range of change.
This parameter is only valid when “LOW TYPE” has been set to “PEAK.”
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
6.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Switching equalizers between
stereo and mono (Stereo Link)
If you intend to apply an equalizer to a stereo-recorded track,
you will need to align the left and right EQ settings in order
to prevent differences in tone occurring on the left and right
(Stereo Link).
Use the following procedure to turn Stereo Link on and off.
1.
Press [EQ].
The Equalizer screen will appear.
fig.32-03d
2.
Simultaneously press two adjacent track buttons.
Both of these track buttons will light up and Stereo Link
will be turned on for the corresponding tracks.
Stereo Link can be turned on for Tracks 1 and 2, Tracks 3
and 4, Tracks 5 and 6, and Tracks 7 and 8. It will not be
possible to turn Stereo Link on for any other
combination of tracks, such as Tracks 2 and 3. In
addition, it will not be possible to turn on Stereo Link for
non-adjacent tracks.
3.
If you want to turn Stereo Link off, press either one of
the two track buttons that are currently lit.
Stereo Link will be turned off.
The pressed track button will remain on, and the other
track button will turn off.
Whenever Stereo Link is turned on, the parameters for
the equalizers on both of the linked tracks will use the
same values. When one of these parameters is modified,
the same parameter for the adjacent track will be
automatically and simultaneously modified.
4.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Only one set of equalizer settings can be saved per song.
Tracks 9/10 through 15/16 are fixed as stereo tracks,
and therefore, Stereo Link will always be on for the
corresponding equalizers. It will not be possible to
turn Stereo Link off for these tracks.
BR-1600_R_e.book 111 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
112
Using loop effects
About loop effects
Effects that are connected between the effect-send and effect-
return points of input channels and tracks are referred to as
loop effects. This type of effect is generally used to change
the spatial nature of a song using reverberation, stereo
processing, and the like. You can specify how much of an
input or track to send to a loop effect by setting the
corresponding send level, and naturally, this will change the
degree to which the effect is applied to that input or track.
And since send levels can be set independently for each
different input and track, it is easy to set up conditions
where, for example, a lot of reverb is applied to a vocal line
but only a little is applied to the drums.
The BR-1600CD features CHORUS/DELAY/DOUBLING
and REVERB as loop effects, and using these, you can easily
and effectively add breadth and depth to the sound.
Reverb:
Reverb (or reverberation) is the result of countless reflections from the floor,
walls, and ceiling of the room in which the musician is performing. Think of
the sound that lingers and fades away after you clap your hands in a
church—this is reverb. The actual sound of this effect can vary widely as a
result of factors such as the size of the performance space (whether it be a
room, hall, etc.), the shape of this space, and the material of the walls or
other surfaces that reflect the sound waves.
Chorus:
A chorus effect creates a copy of the original sound with a very
slight change in pitch, and by superimposing this on top of the
original sound, it lets you add fatness and breadth to the sound.
Delay:
A delay is a little bit like an echo, and by repeating the original
sound after it is played, this effect can add a sense of spaciousness
and depth to the sound. In addition, when this effect is applied to
instruments that play melodies, it can make their performance
sound smoother or can add an extra bounce to their rhythm.
Doubling:
A doubling effect sets up a tiny time deviation (or short
delay) between the left and right sides of a signal to give the
sound a stereo feel.
You can only select and use one chorus, delay, or doubling
effect—two or more of these effects cannot be used at the
same time. Note, however, that reverb can be used at the
same time as a chorus, delay, or doubling effect.
About loop effect connections
You can select any of the following loop-effect connection patterns for your input sources and tracks.
fig.34-01
Even if you record an input source to which a loop effect has
been applied, only the direct sound (i.e., without the effect)
will actually be recorded on the track. After recording an
input source, however, the setting for its loop-effect send
level will be automatically copied to the loop-effect send
level of the recorded track. As a result, when the track is
played back, it will sound exactly the same as the input
source with the loop effect applied.
Note that the BR-1600CD can only use one chorus, delay, or
doubling effect together with a reverb effect. Accordingly,
you will not be able to use different types of loop effects for
each input source or track. Only the send level can be set
independently for each input source and track.
Input
REVERB
Record
to Track
Playback Track
Sound
CHORUS/
DELAY
LMIX
MIX
R
L
R
Chorus/Delay
Send
Input Pan
Reverb Send
INSERT
EFFECTS
REVERB
CHORUS/
DELAY
EQUALIZERCOMPRESSOR
LMIX
MIX
MIX
R
L
R
L
R
Chorus/Delay
Send
Reverb Send
Track Pan
INSERT
EFFECTS
* When the Insert Effects
apply to the Track
BR-1600_R_e.book 112 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
113
Using loop effects
Section 2
Basic loop effect operations
Adjusting the sound of loop effects
For more detailed information regarding the setting of send
levels for each individual input source or track, refer to
“Enhancing the sound (Loop Effects)” (Basic Operation; p. 50).
In addition to the send level, a number of other settings can
be made for loop effects to finely tune their sound. The
following section will describe how settings can be made to
do just this.
Since the sound of the loop effects can even be adjusted
during playback, you can listen to the results in real time
and choose the best settings for your song.
Adjusting reverb
Use the following procedure (Reverb Edit) to make fine
adjustments to the reverb sound.
1.
Press [REVERB].
The Reverb Send screen will appear.
fig.34-02d
Pressing [F3] (MIN) at this time sets the reverb send level
to the minimum value (0). Conversely, pressing [F4]
(MAX) sets the reverb send level to the maximum value
(100).
2.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Reverb Edit screen will appear.
fig.34-02ad
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to
change and select a new setting using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new settings change
the reverb sound.
TYPE
ROOM, HALL, PLATE (default: HALL)
Selects the type of reverb to be used.
ROOM:
Simulates the reverberation of a small room.
HALL:
Simulates the reverberation of a concert hall.
PLATE:
Simulates the reverberation of reverb devices using large metal
plates that have been constant favorites in professional studios.
TIME
0.1 s – 10.0 s (Default:2.0 s)
This parameter adjusts the duration (time) of the reverb.
PRE-DELAY
1 ms –100 ms (Default: 15.0 ms)
This parameter adjusts the delay between the direct sound and
the start of the reverb.
TONE
-12–+12 (Default: 0)
This parameter adjusts the overall tone of the reverb sound.
Negative values produce a darker tone; positive values, a
brighter tone.
DENSITY
0–10 (Default: 5)
This parameter adjusts the density of the reverb, with larger
values producing a denser sound.
HF DAMP
DARK, NORMAL, BRIGHT (Default: NORMAL)
This parameter sets the brightness of the reverb sound.
DARK:
High frequencies die away relatively quickly to produce a
darker sounding reverb.
NORMAL:
This setting produces reverb with a standard sound.
BRIGHT:
High frequencies die away relatively slowly to produce a
brighter sounding reverb.
LOW CUT
FLAT, 40 Hz–800 Hz (Default: FLAT)
This parameter sets the low-band cutoff characteristic of the
reverb sound.
LEVEL
0–100 (Default: 50)
This parameter adjusts the volume of the reverb.
If [F4] (DEFAULT) is pressed, the selected parameter is
set to the default value marked above.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
5.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Only one set of reverb settings can be saved per song.
BR-1600_R_e.book 113 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
114
Using loop effects
Adjusting chorus
Use the following procedure (Chorus Edit) to make fine
adjustments to the chorus sound.
1.
Press [CHORUS/DELAY].
The Chorus/Delay Send screen will appear.
fig.34-03d
Pressing [F3] (MIN) at this time sets the chorus send
level to the minimum value (0). Conversely, pressing
[F4] (MAX) sets the chorus send level to the maximum
value (100).
2.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Chorus/Delay Edit screen will appear.
fig.34-04d
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to
change and select a new setting using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new settings change
the chorus sound.
TYPE
CHORUS, DELAY, DOUBLING
This parameter selects the type of effect. Be sure to set this to
CHORUS here.
PRE-DELAY
0.5–50.0 ms (Default: 20.0 ms)
This adjusts the delay between output of the direct sound and
output of the effect sound.
RATE
0–100 (Default: 50)
Adjusts the rate of the chorus.
DEPTH
0–100 (Default: 50)
Adjusts the depth of the chorus.
LOW CUT
FLAT, 40 Hz–800 Hz (Default: FLAT)
This parameter sets the low-band cutoff characteristic of the chorus sound.
LEVEL
0–100 (Default: 50)
Adjusts the overall volume of the effect sound. If you set this to
0, the chorus will have no effect.
If [F4] (DEFAULT) is pressed, the selected parameter is
set to the default value marked above.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
5.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Adjusting delay
Use the following procedure (Delay Edit) to make fine
adjustments to the delay sound.
1.
Press [CHORUS/DELAY].
The Chorus/Delay Send screen will appear.
fig.34-03ad
Pressing [F3] (MIN) at this time sets the delay send level to
the minimum value (0). Conversely, pressing [F4] (MAX)
sets the delay send level to the maximum value (100).
2.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Chorus/Delay Edit screen will appear.
fig.34-04ad
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to change
and select a new setting using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new settings change
the delay sound.
TYPE
DELAY
This parameter selects the type of effect. Be sure to set this to DELAY here.
TIME
10–1000 ms (Default: 500 ms)
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval over
which sound is delayed).
FEEDBACK
0–100 (Default: 0)
This parameter adjusts the amount of feedback. Changing the
amount of feedback also causes the number of individual
repetitions of the delayed sound to change.
If the feedback is set to too large a value, individual delays will
overlap, the delay volume will increase, and distortion may
occur as a result. In such a case, lower the feedback level.
HF DAMP
0–100 (Default: 0)
This parameter adjusts the speed at which the high frequency
portion of the delay sound dies away. Higher values cause the high
frequencies to die away quicker, and this produces a darker sound.
LEVEL
0–100 (Default: 50)
This adjusts the overall volume of the delay sound.
Only one set of chorus settings can be saved per song.
BR-1600_R_e.book 114 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
115
Using loop effects
Section 2
REVERB SEND
0–100 (Default: 0)
Adjusts the amount of reverb that is applied to the delayed sound.
If [F4] (DEFAULT) is pressed, the selected parameter is
set to the default value marked above.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
5.
Press [PLAY] to start playback.
The delay will now be applied to the track’s playback.
6.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Adjusting doubling
In situations where professional engineers want to make a
strummed guitar performance sound equally present on both
the left and right speakers, they generally use a technique
called doubling. Specifically, this involves recording the
same performance twice on different tracks and then
panning one of the tracks to the left and the other to the right.
The BR-1600CD provides you with a doubling-type send
effect that allows you to achieve the same effect without
having to make two separate recordings. And since this
makes it possible to apply doubling even to single-track
mono performances, you can make more effective use of
your available tracks.
This type of doubling is achieved by copying the original
sound (or direct sound), panning the copied sound away
from the original sound, and playing back both of these
with the copied sound delayed slightly, thus creating a
pseudo-stereo sound. When using this effect, therefore,
you will need to pan the playback track to either the left
or the right. The copied sound will then be played with a
short delay on the opposite side. Doubling will have no
effect if the track pan is set to the center, and the
appropriate care should be taken.
1.
Before you start, pan the track to be doubled to the left
or right.
“Setting the left-right position of each track (Pan)” (Basic
Operation; p. 46)
2.
Press [CHORUS/DELAY].
The Chorus/Delay Send screen will appear.
fig.34-103d
3.
Move the cursor to the track to be doubled and select a
send level using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You can also select a track by pressing its track button. In
order to make the effect of doubling clearly audible, it is
advisable to initially set the send level to 100. You will
then be able to make a new setting while listening to the
playback.
Pressing [F3] (MIN) at this time sets the doubling send level
to the minimum value (0). Conversely, pressing [F4] (MAX)
sets the doubling send level to the maximum value (100).
4.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Chorus/Delay Edit screen will appear.
fig.34-04d
5.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to change
and select a new setting using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new settings change
the doubling sound.
TYPE
DOUBLING
This parameter selects the type of effect. Be sure to set this to
DOUBLING here.
DELAY TIME
0.5–50.0 ms (Default: 17.0 ms)
This parameter adjusts the delay time (i.e., the interval over
which sound is delayed).
LEVEL
0–100 (Default: 50)
This parameter adjusts the volume of the delayed sound.
If [F4] (DEFAULT) is pressed, the selected parameter is
set to the default value marked above.
If the delay time is too short, the left and right sides of the
doubled track will begin to sound identical, producing a
thicker version of the original sound. On the other hand, if
the delay time is too long, the left and right sides will stand
out too much and will sound like two separate performances.
6.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
7.
Press [PLAY] to start playback.
Doubling will now be applied to the track’s playback.
8.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Only one set of delay settings can be saved per song.
Only one set of doubling settings can be saved per song.
BR-1600_R_e.book 115 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
116
Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box)
The Vocal Tool Box
The term Vocal Tool Box is used to describe a group of effects that are used on recorded vocal tracks to fix incorrect pitches and to
automatically apply a backing chorus. When compared with guitars, pianos, and other musical instruments, the human voice
generally produces a relatively unstable tone. And when recording unprepared vocalists, this can often lead to considerable
difficulties in the form of notes sung out of tune and poor sound quality.
Even if you have recorded a skilled vocalist, however, applying a backing chorus can further enhance the level of the overall
performance. When properly used, the BR-1600CD’s Vocal Tool Box will help to ensure that your vocal tracks will always sound great.
Makeup of the Vocal Tool Box
The following two types of effects make up the BR-1600CD’s Vocal Tool Box.
●
Pitch Correction
This effect automatically fixes incorrect pitches in solo vocal tracks. Specifically, it detects incorrect pitches within (50 cents and
adjusts them to the correct pitch in real time and in units of semitones.
●
Harmony Sequence
In order to apply a simple backing chorus, this effect creates a three-piece harmony by modifying the pitch of the original solo
vocal track. Furthermore, the harmony pitches are automatically created in accordance with the chord sequence specified for your
rhythm arrangement (p. 190).
Both of these effects are intended for use with the playback of recorded audio tracks and cannot be used on input sources.
The Vocal Tool Box and audio tracks are connected as shown below.
fig.35-01
Track
REVERB
CHORUS/
DELAY
VOCAL
TOOL BOX
COMPRESSOR
LMIX
MIX
MIX
R
L
R
L
R
Chorus/Delay
Send
Reverb Send
• Pitch Correction
• Harmony Sequence
Track Pan
EQUALIZER
BR-1600_R_e.book 116 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
117
Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box)
Section 2
Vocal Tool Box patches
In the case of both pitch correction and harmony sequence,
you can set up the way in which the effect is to be applied
and can then save these settings. A group of such settings is
referred to as a Patch.
At the time of purchase, a total of 10 pitch correction and
harmony sequence patches (i.e., preset patches) will be
stored in the BR-1600CD. In addition, 10 user patches can be
freely set up and used within any song, and 10 song patches
can be set up for use within a specific song.
Precautions for Vocal Tool Box usage
• When you are using the Vocal Tool Box, you will not be
able to use insert effects, the Mastering Tool Kit, or
speaker modeling.
• The Vocal Tool Box is intended for use with recorded
vocal tracks and it cannot be applied to input sources or
the Master output.
• Pitch correction and harmony sequence are separate
effects. For this reason, they cannot both be used at the
same time.
• These effects will function when applied to solo
performances other than vocals; however, the
fundamental differences between the character of the
human voice and that of musical instruments makes it
highly unlikely that the desired result will be achieved.
• In the following situations, the Vocal Tool Box may not
be able to accurately detect the pitch, and normal
operation will not be possible.
- When other sounds are mixed in with the solo vocal
part.
- When the volume of the vocal part is excessively
loud or quiet.
- When the vocal part contains a lot of sibilance or is
very breathy (such as a singer that whispers, or one
with a husky voice).
- When the vocal part contains an excessive number
of different pitches (such as fast, deep vibrato or fast
speech)
- When the part is sung with a very low voice
containing a lot of harmonics.
* If the BR-1600CD is frequently incorrect when detecting
the pitch, either change the “Type” setting for the pitch
correction function or the “Input Type” setting for the
harmony sequence function. In certain cases, this will
reduce the number of incorrect detections.
Fixing the pitch of vocals
(Pitch Correction)
Let’s now use the BR-1600CD’s pitch correction feature to
clean up some mistakes in a solo vocal part.
Using this feature, we will be able to correct pitches in real
time and in semitone units.
1.
Before using pitch correction, record a solo vocal track
to work with.
2.
Press [REC MODE] several times until the BOUNCE
indicator lights up.
The BR-1600CD will now enter Bounce mode.
3.
Press [VOCAL TOOL BOX].
This button will light up to indicate that the Vocal Tool
Box is turned on.
The Vocal Tool Box’s patch selection screen will appear.
fig.35-06d
4.
Move the cursor to the patch number field and select a
patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You should select a patch for which “PITCH
CORRECTION” is displayed on-screen as the algorithm
name here.
5.
Press [F3] (LOCATION).
fig.35-08d
6.
Use TIME/VALUE dial to select the track containing
the solo vocal recording.
The following tracks can be selected at this time:
Tracks 1 through 8, or Tracks 9/10 through 15/16
7.
Start playback on the BR-1600CD.
Pitches will be corrected in the solo vocal part as it is
played. A real-time display of the amount of pitch
correction in units of cents will be provided at the top
right of the screen. Listen to the part to confirm that it is
now completely in tune, and if necessary, adjust the
volume of the part using the corresponding track fader.
Press [STOP] to end playback.
BR-1600_R_e.book 117 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
118
Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box)
8.
Press a track button to select the track for recording the
corrected vocal part.
The track button will turn red and start flashing to
indicate selection as the recording track.
Although the tracks will be selected as the stereo tracks
when track buttons are first pressed, if one of the flashing
buttons for Tracks 1 through 8 is pressed while flashing, the
corresponding track will be selected as a mono track.
9.
Move the faders for all tracks except the track
containing the solo vocal recording all the way down.
Note that this also applies to faders for Drums, Bass, and
Loop Phrases.
10.
Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song and then
press [REC].
[REC] will turn red and start to flash, indicating that the
BR-1600CD is now ready for recording.
11.
Press [PLAY].
Both [PLAY] and [REC] will light up and recording will
start. The solo part will be played and any incorrect
pitches will be fixed. At the same time, the corrected part
will be recorded on the selected track.
12.
Press [STOP] at the point where you want to stop recording.
The BR-1600CD will stop playback.
13.
Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song once again
and then start playback of the recorded track.
Move the fader for the track containing the original vocal
part all the way down, and raise the fader for the track
containing the corrected vocal part to an appropriate
point. As you listen to the corrected part, confirm
whether or not you are happy with the corrections.
If you do not like the way the vocal part was corrected,
use Undo (Basic Operation; p. 42) to cancel the recording.
14.
If you wish to store the corrected track, save the current
song (p. 72).
Setting the correction method for
vocal pitch (Pitch Correction Edit)
Each of the preset patches 1 through 5 uses a slightly
different method for correcting pitches. Normally, it will be
sufficient to select the patch that gives the results you like
best; however, if you cannot achieve favorable results using
any of these patches, you can change the pitch correction
settings to create a patch of your own.
1.
Select a preset patch to base your new patch on.
2.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Pitch Correction Edit screen will appear.
fig.35-04d
3.
Move the cursor to the setting you want to change and
select a new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.35-05d
Type
LO.MALE, HI.MALE, LO.FEML, HI.FEML
Set this parameter to match the type of voice in the original
vocal part. If this parameter is not set correctly, problems will be
more likely to occur in pitch detection and correction.
LO.MALE (Low Male)
Select this setting for a low-pitched, male voice.
HI.MALE (High Male)
Select this setting for a high-pitched, male voice.
LO.FEML (Low Female)
Select this setting for a low-pitched, female voice.
HI.FEML (High Female)
Select this setting for a high-pitched, female voice.
* If the BR-1600CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the
pitch, either change the type setting. In certain cases, this will
reduce the number of incorrect detections.
Smooth 0–100
This setting determines how quickly pitch correction will react to
changes of pitch in the original vocal part. Large values result in a
longer time before correction is applied; consequently, changes in pitch
will be more gradual. Small values produce rapid changes in pitch.
4.
To save your modified settings, carry out the procedure
described in “Saving Vocal Tool Box settings (Patch
Write)” (p. 121).
BR-1600_R_e.book 118 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
119
Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box)
Section 2
Applying a backing chorus to
vocals (Harmony Sequence)
Lets now use the BR-1600CD’s harmony sequence feature to
apply a backing chorus to a solo vocal performance. A three-
part backing chorus will be created based on the chord
sequence specified for your rhythm arrangement.
Backing chorus parts are created by modifying the pitch
of the original solo vocal track. As a result, it will not be
possible to create a backing chorus that uses different
lyrics or a different rhythm than the original part.
1.
Before using harmony sequence, record a solo vocal
track to work with.
2.
Enter a chord sequence for your rhythm arrangement.
“Inputting chords” (p. 190)
3.
Press [REC MODE] several times until the BOUNCE
indicator lights up.
The BR-1600CD will now enter Bounce mode.
4.
Press [VOCAL TOOL BOX].
This button will light up to indicate that the Vocal Tool
Box is turned on. The Vocal Tool Box’s patch selection
screen will appear.
fig.35-06d
5.
Move the cursor to the patch number field and select a
patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You should select a patch for which “HARMONY
SEQUENCE” is displayed on-screen as the algorithm
name here.
6.
Press [F3] (LOCATION).
fig.35-108d
7.
Use TIME/VALUE dial to select the track containing
the solo vocal recording.
The following tracks can be selected at this time:
Tracks 1 through 8, or Tracks 9/10 through 15/16
8.
Start playback on the BR-1600CD.
Listen to the backing chorus that will now be applied to
the solo vocal part during playback. If necessary, adjust
the volume using the corresponding track fader. Press
[STOP] to end playback.
9.
Press a track button to select the track on which the
backing chorus will be recorded.
The track button will turn red and start flashing to
indicate selection as the recording track.
10.
Move the faders for all tracks except the track including
solo vocal recording all the way down.
Note that this also applies to faders for Drums, Bass, and
Loop Phrases.
11.
Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song and then
press [REC].
[REC] will turn red and start to flash, indicating that the
BR-1600CD is now ready for recording.
12.
Press [PLAY].
Both [PLAY] and [REC] will light up and recording will
start. The solo part will be played and the backing
chorus will be applied. At the same time, the backing
chorus will be recorded on the selected track.
13.
Press [STOP] on the point where you want to stop
recording.
The playback on the BR-1600CD will stop.
14.
Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song once again
and then start playback of the recorded track.
Move the fader for the track containing the original vocal
part all the way down, and raise the fader for the track
containing the backing chorus to an appropriate point.
You will now be able to hear just the backing chorus.
If you do not like the way the backing chorus was
applied, use Undo (Basic Operation; p. 42) to cancel the
recording.
15.
If you wish to store the backing chorus, save the
current song (p. 72).
Algorithm name
BR-1600_R_e.book 119 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
120
Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box)
Inserting rests in a backing
chorus
Whenever you use Harmony Sequence, a continuous backing
chorus is played from the beginning to the end of the song. In
certain cases, however, you will probably need the backing
chorus to stop at certain points within your song. To do this,
specify “non-chord” for corresponding chords input in the
chord input screen (p. 190).
Non-chord can be specified by selecting “- - -” (N.C.) during
Step 5 in the procedure described in “Inputting chords” (p.
190).
Playback of the backing chorus will be stopped for chords
that have been specified as “non-chord,” and this makes it
possible to set up rests.
Example: Inputting the chords Cmaj
→
C - - -
→
Fmaj
fig.35-09a
Setting the application method for backing
choruses (Harmony Sequence Edit)
Each of the preset patches 6 through 10 uses a slightly
different method for applying harmonies. Usually it will be
sufficient to select the patch that gives the results you like
best; however, if you cannot achieve favorable results using
any of these patches, you will be able to change harmony
sequence settings to create a patch of your own.
1.
Select a preset patch to base your new patch on.
2.
Press [F2] (EDIT).
The Harmony Sequence edit screen will appear.
fig.35-09d
If the TIME/VALUE dial is turned counterclockwise at
this time, the solid lines indicating the effect block at the
current cursor position will switch to dotted lines,
indicating that the corresponding effect has been turned
off. Similarly, if the TIME/VALUE dial is turned
clockwise, the dotted lines will switch back to solid lines,
indicating that the effect has been turned on.
3.
Press [F3] (=>PRM.).
The cursor will jump to the parameter area on the right
of the screen, and you will now be able to change the
parameter settings.
Note that you can press CURSOR [ ] or [ ] while on a
parameter setting screen to jump to the parameter setting
screen for the next effect block to the left or right, respectively.
fig.35-10d
4.
Move the cursor to the setting you want to change and
select a new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
VOICE1–VOICE3
These parameters are used to make settings for each of the
voices comprising the backing chorus.
On/Off OFF, ON
This is used to turn each of the voices in the backing chorus on
or off. When a voice is turned off, it will produce no audio.
Note that if all voices 1 through 3 are turned off, no audio will
be produced for the backing chorus.
Pre Delay 0.0 ms–50.0 ms
This sets the amount of time that passes between the original
vocal part and the backing chorus voice. By setting longer
delays and setting a different delay for each of the voices, you
can make the backing chorus sound more realistic.
By setting shorter delay times, the backing chorus can be made
to sound more artificial.
Pan L100–R100
This adjusts the left-right position of the corresponding voice.
By setting a different pan value for each voice, a backing chorus
with a wider sound can be produced.
Human Feel 0–100
This adjusts the degree of pitch instability that is unique to human voices.
The higher this setting, the greater the degree of pitch instability in the backing
chorus voice, and the more like a human voice it will sound. If settings are
excessively high, however, the backing chorus will sound amateurish.
With lower settings, the pitches of the voice become more stable and the overall
backing chorus starts to sound more artificial.
COMMON
These parameters are used to make settings for the overall backing chorus.
Input Type
LO.MALE, HI.MALE, LO.FEML, HI.FEML
Set this parameter to match the type of voice in the original
vocal part. If this parameter is not set correctly, problems will be
more likely to occur in pitch detection and correction.
LO.MALE (Low Male)
Select this setting for a low-pitched, male voice.
Chord
Chorus Rest
Cmaj
backing chorus
Cmaj FmajC - - -
Fmaj
backing chorus Time
BR-1600_R_e.book 120 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
121
Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box)
Section 2
HI.MALE (High Male)
Select this setting for a high-pitched, male voice.
LO.FEML (Low Female)
Select this setting for a low-pitched, female voice.
HI.FEML (High Femail)
Select this setting for a high-pitched, female voice.
* If the BR-1600CD is frequently incorrect when detecting the pitch,
either change the type setting. In certain cases, this will reduce the
number of incorrect detections.
Balance 100:0–0:100
This sets the balance of volumes between the original vocal part
and the backing chorus. A setting of 0:100 results in only the
backing chorus being heard. Similarly, a setting of 100:0 results
in only the original vocal being heard.
Chorus Send 0–100
This adjusts the amount of the backing chorus that is sent to
chorus, delay, or doubling. Higher values result in a larger
amount of the backing chorus being sent to the selected effect.
Alternatively, a value of 0 should be used when no chorus,
delay, or doubling is to be applied to the backing chorus.
Reverb Send 0–100
This adjusts the amount of the backing chorus that is sent to
reverb. Higher values cause reverb to be applied to a greater
degree. Alternatively, a value of 0 should be used when no
reverb is to be applied to the backing chorus.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Pitch Correction or
Harmony Sequence patch selection screen.
In order to indicate that the effect settings have been temporarily
changed, the bank number will be displayed as “*TMP.”
If you select a different patch, load a different song, or
turn off the BR-1600CD while “*TMP” is being
displayed, all of the patch settings will return to their
original condition. As it may not be possible to restore
these settings, due caution should be observed.
6.
To save your modified settings, carry out the procedure
described below in “Saving Vocal Tool Box settings
(Patch Write).”
Saving Vocal Tool Box
settings (Patch Write)
Modified Vocal Tool Box settings are saved by writing them
together under a new patch name.
1.
Press [F1] (NAME) on the Pitch Correction or Harmony
Sequence screen.
The patch name setting screen will appear.
fig.35-11d
2.
Move the cursor to the characters in the patch name you want to
change and select new characters using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.35-11ad
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Pitch Correction or
Harmony Sequence edit screen.
4.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY).
The Vocal Tool Box Write/Copy screen will appear.
fig.35-12d
5.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.35-13d
FROM:
This field should be left unchanged at “*TMP(CURRENT).”
If a different message is displayed, however, move the
cursor to this field and turn the TIME/VALUE dial
counterclockwise to restore “*TMP(CURRENT).”
TO:
This field sets the patch to which your new settings are to be written.
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
The Vocal Tool Box patch will be written. When this
process has been completed, the Vocal Tool Box patch
screen will be displayed once again.
7.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
BR-1600_R_e.book 121 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
122
Fixing the pitch of vocals/Adding a backing chorus to vocals (Vocal Tool Box)
Copying Vocal Tool Box
settings (Patch Copy)
The BR-1600CD’s function for copying patches proves
extremely useful when you want to create a number of effect
patches with slightly different settings.
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY) on the Pitch Correction or
Harmony Sequence screen.
The Vocal Tool Box Write/Copy screen will appear.
fig.35-14d
2.
Move the cursor to the “FROM:” field and select the
patch to be copied using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.35-14ad
FROM:
This field selects the patch to be copied. Although
“*TMP(CURRENT)” may be displayed in this field when
you call up the Patch Write/Copy screen after modifying
patch settings, this may be freely changed.
3.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.35-14bd
TO:
This field selects the patch to be overwritten by copying.
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
The patch will be copied. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that copying has been
completed.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
It is important to remember that the destination
patch will be fully overwritten by the patch specified
with “FROM:”.
BR-1600_R_e.book 122 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
123
Section 2
Recreating the characteristics of different monitor speakers (Speaker Modeling)
In order to allow you to recreate the characteristics of various
different types of monitor speakers, the BR-1600CD provides
a function known as Speaker Modeling. Using this function,
you can hear how your songs will sound on different
monitoring systems; furthermore, by comparing these
different sounds as you search for the best balance, you can
achieve mix-downs of a much higher quality.
Makeup of Speaker
Modeling
Speaker Modeling comprises the following effect blocks.
fig.37-13d
SP Modeling
Bass Cut Filter
Low Freq Trimmer
High Freq Trimmer
Limiter
The most important of these is SP MODELING, and it is this
effect block that actually performs the modeling of speaker
characteristics.
The BASS CUT FILTER block is used to filter out any
unwanted low-band signals resulting from, for example, pop
noise produced by the vocalist in an otherwise fine
performance.
The LOW FREQUENCY TRIMMER and HIGH
FREQUENCY TRIMMER effect blocks are used to adjust the
tone of the low and middle frequency bands, respectively.
Finally, the LIMITER block prevents distortion by
suppressing any rise in volume beyond a specified level.
Connecting external monitor
speakers
To obtain the best results using the BR-1600CD’s Speaker
Modeling feature, it is recommended that you used digitally
connected Roland DS-30A/50A/90A monitor speakers. If
you are using any other type of monitor speakers, please
note that speaker modeling may not produce the desired
result. The DS-30A/50A/90A monitor speakers are to be
connected to the BR-1600CD as shown below.
fig.37-01
Monitor speakers other than the above are to be connected as
follows.
fig.37-02
LINE OUT
Power Amp
BR-1600_R_e.book 123 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
124
Recreating the characteristics of different monitor speakers (Speaker Modeling)
Speaker Modeling patches
At the time of purchase, the BR-1600CD’s Speaker Modeling
already contains 33 preset patches that cannot be overwritten
(P001 through P033), 33 user patches that can be used in any
song (U001 through U033), and 33 song patches that are
stored together with a specific song (S001 through S033).
User patches and song patches can be overwritten.
“Speaker Modeling Patch List” (separate document)
Using Speaker Modeling
1.
Press [SPEAKER MODELING].
This button will light up and the Speaker Modeling
patch screen will appear.
fig.37-03d
* Note that this action will cause insert effects, the Vocal Tool Box,
and the Mastering Tool Kit to be turned off automatically.
2.
Move the cursor to the patch number field and select a
patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The BR-1600CD’s output sound will now be modeled
based on the selected speaker.
“Speaker Modeling Patch List” (separate document)
Turning off Speaker Modeling
Use the following procedure if you want to temporarily turn
off Speaker Modeling.
1.
Press [F1] (ON/OFF) on the Speaker Modeling patch screen.
Speaker Modeling will be turned off.
fig.37-04d
Press [F1] (ON/OFF) once again to turn Speaker
Modeling back on.
fig.37-05d
Modifying Speaker Modeling settings
Each of the effect blocks that make up the Speaker Modeling
feature can be fine-tuned by making the appropriate settings.
Before starting, however, you will need to select the Speaker
Modeling patch that you would like to change.
1.
Press [F2] (EDIT) on the Speaker Modeling patch
screen.
The Speaker Modeling edit screen will appear.
fig.37-06d
The left half of this screen will display the way in which
effect blocks are connected in this patch; the right half
will display the parameter settings for the effect block
currently highlighted by the cursor.
If the TIME/VALUE dial is turned counterclockwise at
this time, the solid lines indicating the effect block at the
current cursor position will switch to dotted lines,
indicating that the corresponding effect has been turned
off. Similarly, if the TIME/VALUE dial is turned
clockwise, the dotted lines will switch back to solid lines,
indicating that the effect has been turned on.
2.
Move the cursor to the effect block you want to edit and
press [F3] (=>PRM.).
The cursor will jump to the parameter area on the right
of the screen, and you will now be able to change the
parameter settings.
Note that you can press CURSOR [ ] or [ ] while on a
parameter setting screen to jump to the parameter setting
screen for the next effect block to the left or right, respectively.
fig.37-06ad
For more detailed information regarding settings, refer
to “Speaker Modeling parameter functions” (p. 127).
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to
change and select a new value using the TIME/VALUE
dial.
fig.37-07d
BR-1600_R_e.book 124 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
125
Recreating the characteristics of different monitor speakers (Speaker Modeling)
Section 2
4.
If you also want to edit other effect blocks, press [F2]
(BLOCK<=) to move the cursor to the left of the screen,
and then repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Note that you can press CURSOR [ ] or [ ] to jump
to the parameter setting screen for the next effect block to
the left or right.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Speaker Modeling
patch screen.
fig.37-08d
In order to indicate that the Speaker Modeling settings
have been temporarily changed, the patch number will
be displayed as “*TMP.” If you select a different patch,
load a different song, or turn off the BR-1600CD while
“*TMP” is being displayed, all of the patch settings will
return to their original condition. As it may not be
possible to restore these settings, due caution should be
observed.
To save your modified settings, carry out the procedure
described below in “Saving Speaker Modeling settings.”
Saving Speaker Modeling
settings (Patch Write)
Modified Speaker Modeling settings are saved by writing
them together under a new patch name.
1.
Press [F1] (NAME) on the Speaker Modeling edit
screen.
fig.37-09d
2.
Move the cursor to the characters in the patch name you
want to change and select new characters using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.37-09d
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Speaker Modeling
edit screen.
4.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY).
The Speaker Modeling Patch Write/Copy screen will
appear.
fig.37-10d
5.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.37-11d
FROM:
This field should be left unchanged at
“*TMP(CURRENT).” If a different message is displayed,
however, move the cursor to this field and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise to restore
“*TMP(CURRENT).”
TO:
This field sets the patch to which your new settings are
to be written. Whenever you call up the Patch Write/
Copy screen, the cursor will be automatically positioned
here.
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
The Speaker Modeling patch will be written. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that writing
has been completed.
7.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
BR-1600_R_e.book 125 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
126
Recreating the characteristics of different monitor speakers (Speaker Modeling)
Copying Speaker Modeling
settings (Patch Copy)
The BR-1600CD’s function for copying patches proves
extremely useful when you want to create a number of effect
patches with slightly different settings.
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY) on the Speaker Modeling
edit screen.
The Speaker Modeling Patch Write/Copy screen will
appear.
fig.37-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the “FROM:” field and select the
patch to be copied using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.37-12ad
FROM:
This field selects the patch to be copied. Although
“*TMP(CURRENT)” may be displayed in this field when
you call up the Patch Write/Copy screen after modifying
patch settings, this may be freely changed.
Note that you can also move the cursor to the bank field
and turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select a new patch
number to be copied.
3.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.37-12bd
TO:
This field selects the patch to be overwritten by copying.
Whenever you call up the Patch Write/Copy screen, the
cursor will be automatically positioned here. Note that
you can also turn the TIME/VALUE dial to select a new
destination patch number.
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
The patch will be copied. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that copying has been
completed.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
It is important to remember that the destination
patch will be fully overwritten by the patch specified
by “FROM:”. As it will not be possible to restore
these, care should be taken to insure that important
patches are not accidentally overwritten in this way.
BR-1600_R_e.book 126 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
127
Section 2
Speaker Modeling parameter functions
This effect simulates the response of a wide variety of
speakers, ranging from high-quality professional monitor
speakers used in studios around the world to speakers from
compact televisions or portable radios.
fig.37-13d
SP Modeling
Bass Cut Filter
Low Freq Trimmer
High Freq Trimmer
Limiter
SP Modeling (speaker modeling)
Speaker Modeling is adjusted to ensure that the best results
can be obtained when you use Roland DS-90A, DS-50A, or
DS-30A powered monitors (sold separately) as the output
speakers for the BR-1600CD.
On/Off OFF, ON
Turns speaker modeling on or off.
Model
Selects the speaker whose characteristics you wish to simulate.
Output Sp.
This parameter is used to specify the actual type of speaker
connected to the BR-1600CD.
DS-90A:
DS-90A speakers are connected.
DS-50A:
DS-50A speakers are connected.
DS-30A:
DS-30A speakers are connected.
Phase
Specifies the phase of the speakers.
NORMAL:
The output phase will be the same as that of the
input.
INVERSE:
The output phase will be the opposite to that of the
input.
Thru
No modeling will be performed.
Spr Flat
Modeling will be used to compensate
for the DS-90, DS-90A, or DS-50A moni-
tors, giving the sound an even wider
range and flatter response.
Pwd. BLK
A standard-model powered monitor
(two-way type, woofer diameter = 170
mm (or 6 1/2 inches)).
Pwd. E-B
Powered monitors characterized by a
bright tone.
Pwd. MAC
Powered monitors characterized by an
extended low range.
SmlCUBE
Small full-range speakers widely used
in recording studios.
Wh.CONE
A sealed two-way speaker widely used
in recording studios and characterized
by its white woofer.
WhTISUE
A milder tone achieved by covering the
tweeters of Wh.CONE speakers with
tissue paper.
Radio
A small pocket-type radio.
SmallTV
The speakers of a 14-inch television.
BoomBox
A radio-cassette recorder.
BoomLoB
A radio-cassette recorder with its Low
Boost function turned on.
BR-1600_R_e.book 127 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
128
Speaker Modeling parameter functions
Bass Cut Filter
This filter cuts out vocal pop and other unwanted low-band
noise.
On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns the Bass Cut Filter on or off.
Cut Off Freq THRU, 20 –2000 Hz
This parameter sets the frequency below which vocal pop and other
undesirable lower-range noises will be filtered out.
Low Freq Trimmer
This trimmer is used to process low frequencies.
On/Off OFF, ON
Switches the low frequency trimmer on or off.
Gain -12–+12 dB
Adjusts the gain (i.e., the amount of boost or cut) for the low
frequency trimmer.
Frequency 20–2000 Hz
Specifies the center frequency for the low frequency trimmer.
High Freq Trimmer
This trimmer is used to process high frequencies.
On/Off OFF, ON
Switches the high frequency trimmer on or off.
Gain -12–+12 dB
Adjusts the gain (i.e., the amount of boost or cut) for the high
frequency trimmer.
Frequency 1.0–20.0 kHz
Specifies the center frequency for the high frequency trimmer.
Limiter
A limiter reduces loud input levels to prevent distortion.
On/Off OFF, ON
Switches the limiter on or off.
Threshold -60–0 dB
Adjust this parameter to match the input signal. Limiting will be
applied to input levels in excess of this level.
Release 0–100
This adjusts the time it takes for limiting to be removed once the
signal level drops below the threshold.
Level -60–+24 dB
This parameter adjusts the overall volume.
BR-1600_R_e.book 128 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
129
Section 2
Using the Mastering Tool Kit
The Mastering Tool Kit
When creating a CD, it is crucial that the overall volume of the song be reduced in order to allow its loudest parts to be recorded
without any degradation of sound quality. However, this reduction in volume can often result in CDs that lack power and punch.
In addition, since our ears are not as sensitive to sound in the lower range of frequencies, it may be difficult to hear these sounds
even if the level meter indicates maximum volume, and this factor also hinders the production of powerful-sounding CDs.
The Mastering Tool Kit contained within the BR-1600CD provides a means of eliminating this type of problem so that you can
easily create great-sounding CDs. When you use this Mastering Tool Kit, you will be able to smooth out volume fluctuations in
your songs and balance the sound in the lower range of frequencies. It is highly recommended, therefore, that you always use the
Mastering Tool Kit to master your songs before creating audio CDs.
Audio CDs can be created without using the Mastering Tool Kit, and you can choose whether or not to use it.
If you are new to the BR-1600CD’s Mastering Tool Kit, refer first of all to “Adjusting volume and compression for CD writing
(Mastering Tool Kit)” (Basic Operation; p. 58). This section provides a more detailed description of the Mastering Tool Kit.
Makeup of the Mastering Tool Kit
The Mastering Tool Kit comprises the following effect blocks.
fig.36-01
Of these, the effect block that plays the most important role is the three-band compressor. Broadly speaking, the frequencies in a
musical performance can separated into the following three bands or regions:
• The low-band, which contains the sounds of the kick drum, bass guitar, and other instruments that provide the basic song
rhythm.
• The middle band, which contains the sounds of the vocals, and the lead guitars and other instruments that play melodies.
• The high-band, which contains the sounds of the hi-hats, cymbals, and the like.
In order to do what is required of them, instruments must be played with varying rhythms and volumes. All of these different
performances are combined to produce the music played by a band (or ensemble).
If a compressor were to be applied over the complete frequency range of such a group performance in order to keep its volume
within the limits suitable for burning to an audio CD, the natural-sounding nature of some of the performances could be
impaired. For example, the volume of the kick drum could cause the compressor to modify the volume of melodic instruments, or
the volume of the lead guitar could cause the compressor to modify the volume of the bass guitar. By dividing the overall
performance into three frequency bands and using a different compressor with each band, volume peaks can be suppressed
without making the performances sound processed or unnatural. In addition to this type of three-band compressor, the BR-
1600CD’s Mastering Tool Kit also features a number of other effect blocks that will come in handy when you are adjusting the
volume and presence of your songs.
Track
9/10
Playback
sound
INPUT
BASS CUT
FILTER
BASS CUT
FILTER BASS CUT
FILTER
ENHANCER
EQ
GAIN
MIXER
LIMITER CLIP/
DITHER
EX-
PANDER COMP-
RESSOR
GAIN
EX-
PANDER COMP-
RESSOR
GAIN
EX-
PANDER COMP-
RESSOR
DIVIDER
MIX
L/R
High-band
Middle band
Low-band
BR-1600_R_e.book 129 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
130
Using the Mastering Tool Kit
Modifying Mastering Tool Kit
settings (Edit)
Each of the effect blocks that make up the Mastering Tool Kit
can be fine-tuned by making the appropriate settings.
Before starting, however, you will need to select the Mastering
Tool Kit patch whose settings you would like to change.
1.
Press [F2] (EDIT) on the Mastering Tool Kit patch screen.
The Mastering Tool Kit edit screen will appear.
fig.36-02d
The left half of this screen will display the way in which
effect blocks are connected in this patch; the right half
will display the parameter settings for the effect block
currently highlighted by the cursor.
2.
Move the cursor to the effect block you want to edit and
press [F3] (=>PRM.).
The cursor will jump to the parameter area on the right
of the screen, and you will now be able to change the
parameter settings.
fig.36-02ad
For more detailed information regarding settings, refer
to “Mastering Tool Kit parameter functions” (p. 134).
3.
Move the cursor to the parameter that you want to change
and select a new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
4.
If you also want to edit other effect blocks, press [F2]
(BLOCK<=) to move the cursor to the left of the screen,
and then repeat Steps 2 and 3.
Note that you can press CURSOR [ ] or [ ] to jump
to the parameter setting screen for the next effect block to
the left or right.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Effects Patch screen.
fig.36-03d
In order to indicate that the Mastering Tool Kit settings
have been temporarily changed, the patch number will
be displayed as “TMP.” If you select a different patch,
load a different song, or turn off the BR-1600CD while
“*TMP” is being displayed, all of the patch settings will
return to their original condition. As it may not be
possible to restore these settings, due caution should be
observed.
To save your modified settings, carry out the procedure
described below in “Saving Mastering Tool Kit settings.”
BR-1600_R_e.book 130 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
131
Using the Mastering Tool Kit
Section 2
Saving Mastering Tool Kit
settings (Patch Write)
Modified effect settings are saved by writing them together
under a new patch name.
1.
Press [F1] (NAME) on the Mastering Tool Kit edit screen.
fig.36-04d
2.
Move the cursor to the characters in the patch name you
want to change and select new characters using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.36-04ad
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Mastering Tool Kit
edit screen.
4.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY).
The Mastering Tool Kit Patch Write/Copy screen will
appear.
fig.36-05d
5.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.36-06d
FROM:
This field should be left unchanged at
“*TMP(CURRENT).” If a different message is displayed,
however, move the cursor to this field and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial counterclockwise to restore
“*TMP(CURRENT).”
TO:
This field sets the patch to which your new settings are
to be written. Whenever you call up the Patch Write/
Copy screen, the cursor will be automatically positioned
here.
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
The Mastering Tool Kit patch will be written. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that writing
has been completed.
7.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Copying Mastering Tool Kit
settings (Patch Copy)
The BR-1600CD’s function for copying patches proves
extremely useful when you want to create a number of effect
patches with slightly different settings.
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY) on the Mastering Tool Kit
edit screen.
The Mastering Tool Kit Patch Write/Copy screen will
appear.
fig.36-07d
2.
Move the cursor to the “FROM:” field and select the
patch to be copied using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.36-07ad
FROM:
This field selects the patch to be copied. Although
“*TMP(CURRENT)” may be displayed in this field when
you call up the Patch Write/Copy screen after modifying
patch settings, this may be freely changed.
3.
Move the cursor to the “TO:” field and select a
destination patch using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.36-07bd
TO:
This field selects the patch to be overwritten by copying.
Whenever you call up the Patch Write/Copy screen, the
cursor will be automatically positioned here.
BR-1600_R_e.book 131 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
132
Using the Mastering Tool Kit
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
The patch will be copied.
When the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that
copying has been completed.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Performing automatic fade-in
and fade-out (Auto Fade In/Out)
The term Fade-In is used to describe the way in which the
volume is gradually raised from silence to the standard level
at the beginning of a song. The opposite effect, where the
volume is gradually reduced to silence at the end of a song, is
referred to as a Fade-Out. Although you can use the Master
fader to fade in or fade out manually, an Auto Fade In/Out
function is available in Mastering mode so that these effects
can be reproduced automatically.
The Auto Fade In/Out function can only be used in
Mastering mode. In addition, this can be used only when
the Mastering Tool Kit is ON (FX: ON is displayed).
Settings made for the Auto Fade In/Out function are
shared by all of the Mastering Tool Kit’s patches and are
stored together with the corresponding song.
Performing automatic fade-in
(Auto Fade In)
1.
Confirm that “FX:ON” is displayed in the Mastering
Tool Kit top screen.
If “FX:OFF” is displayed, press [F1] (OFF=>ON) to
display “FX:ON.”
fig.36-08d
2.
Move the cursor to “AUTO FADE IN” and select “ON”
with the TIME/VALUE dial.
3.
Press [F3] (AUTO FADE).
The Auto Fade In setting screen will appear.
fig.36-09d
4.
Move the cursor to the setting you want to change and
select a new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
START:
This parameter sets the start time for fade in.
When the current position is in front of the START point,
you will not be able to hear the BR-1600CD’s playback as
the volume will be set to zero. The volume will start to
increase little by little when the current position reaches
the START point.
LENGTH:
The parameter sets the time (in seconds) from the start of
fade-in until the standard volume is reached.
CURVE:
This parameter sets the shape of the volume increase
curve during fade-in.
A The volume will be perceived as increasing at a
steady rate.
B The volume will be perceived initially as increasing
at a faster rate, and this rate will level off as the fade-
in progresses.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Mastering Tool Kit
patch screen.
6.
Move the current position to before the START point
and begin playback.
When the current position reaches the START point, the
fade-in will begin.
It is important to remember that the destination
patch will be fully overwritten by the patch specified
by “FROM:”. As it will not be possible to restore
these, care should be taken to insure that important
patches are not accidentally overwritten in this way.
BR-1600_R_e.book 132 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
133
Using the Mastering Tool Kit
Section 2
Performing automatic fade-out
(Auto Fade Out)
1.
Confirm that “FX:ON” is displayed in the Mastering
Tool Kit top screen.
If “FX:OFF” is displayed, press [F1] (OFF=>ON) to
display “FX:ON.”
fig.36-10d
2.
Move the cursor to “AUTO FADE OUT” and select
“ON” with the TIME/VALUE dial.
3.
Press [F3] (AUTO FADE).
The Auto Fade Out setting screen will appear.
fig.36-11d
4.
Move the cursor to the setting you want to change and
select a new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
START:
This parameter sets the start time for fade out.
LENGTH:
The parameter sets the time (in seconds) from the start of
fade-out until the volume reaches zero.
• If the end point of the song is positioned before the point
corresponding to START + LENGTH, the song will end
abruptly mid-way through fade-out. Adjust the START
and LENGTH settings to ensure that the volume
smoothly reduces to zero before the end of the song.
• When the current position is after the point
corresponding to START + LENGTH, you will not be
able to hear the BR-1600CD’s playback as the volume
will be set to zero.
CURVE:
This parameter sets the shape of the volume reduction
curve during fade-out.
A The volume will be perceived as being reduced at a
steady rate.
B The volume will be perceived initially as dropping
at a slower rate, and this rate will increase as the
fade-out progresses.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Mastering Tool Kit
patch screen.
6.
Move the current position to before the START point
and begin playback.
When the current position reaches the START point, the
fade-out will begin.
If you wish to store the Auto Fade In/Out settings,
save the current song (p. 72). Unless the song is
saved, any new settings will be lost when the power
is turned off or a new song is loaded.
BR-1600_R_e.book 133 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
134
Mastering Tool Kit parameter functions
This is a compressor effect that controls the volume level for
each frequency range (lower range, midrange, and upper
range) separately in order to even out the differences
between them.
This allows you to achieve the optimal level when mixing
down to MD or DAT, and when using CD-R disks to create
your own original audio CDs.
Effect of the input “delay time”
With regular compressors, once excessive levels are
detected, there is a momentary delay before the signal is
suppressed. This algorithm circumvents this problem by
using the input sound only for detection of the level,
while a predetermined amount of delay is applied to the
sound that is actually processed and output. The input
delay time is the delay time setting used for this
purpose.
Dividing the signal into separate frequency ranges
To divide the sound into separate frequency ranges, set
the Low-Split Point (Split Freq L) and High-Split Point
(Split Freq H).
Equalizer
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the equalizer effect on or off.
Input Gain -24–+12 dB
Sets the overall volume before passing through the equalizer.
LowType SHLV, PEAK
Sets the lower-band equalizer type to shelving or peak.
Low Gain -12 –+12 dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the lower band.
Low Freq 20 Hz–2.0 kHz
Sets the center frequency for the lower band.
Low Q 0.3–16.0
Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve at the lower
band’s center frequency.
* The Low Q setting is disabled when “SHLV” is selected for the Low Type.
Low-Mid Gain -12–+12 dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the lower-middle band.
Low-Mid Freq 20 Hz–8.0 kHz
Sets the center frequency for the lower-middle band.
Low-Mid Q 0.3–16.0
Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve at the lower-
middle band’s center frequency.
Hi-Mid Gain -12–+12 dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper-middle band.
Hi-Mid Freq 20 Hz–8.0 kHz
Sets the center frequency for the upper-middle band.
Hi-Mid Q 0.3–16.0
Sets the steepness of the frequency response curve at the upper-
middle band’s center frequency.
High Type SHLV, PEAK
Sets the upper-band equalizer type to shelving or peak.
High Gain -12–+12 dB
Sets the amount of boost or cut in the upper band.
High Freq 1.4–20.0 kHz
Sets the center frequency for the upper band.
High Q 0.3–16.0
Sets the frequency response curve steepness at the upper band’s
center frequency.
* The High Q setting is disabled when “SHLV” is selected for the High Type.
Output Level -24–+12 dB
Sets the overall volume level after equalization.
BR-1600_R_e.book 134 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
135
Mastering Tool Kit parameter functions
Section 2
Bass Cut Filter
This filter cuts out vocal pop and other unwanted low-band
noise.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns the Bass Cut Filter on or off.
Cut Off Freq 20 Hz–2.0 kHz
This parameter sets the frequency below which vocal pop and other
undesirable lower-range noises will be filtered out.
Enhancer
This effect makes a sound livelier, and thus, more present in the mix.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This parameter turns the enhancer on or off.
Sensitivity 0–100
Sets the degree to which the enhancer is to be applied.
Frequency 1.0–10.0 kHz
Sets the frequency at which the enhancer will begin to affect the sound.
Mix Level -24–+12 dB
Sets the volume of the effect sound.
Input
This effect divides the original sound into three frequency
bands—namely, low, middle, and high.
Input Gain -24–+12 dB
Sets the overall volume level before the signal passes through the
expander/compressor.
Delay Time 0–10 ms
This parameter sets the amount of time by which the input sound is delayed.
Split Freq L 20–800 Hz
Sets the low-band frequency at which the source sound is split into
low and middle bands.
Split Freq H 1.6–16.0 kHz
Sets the upper-band frequency at which the source sound is split into
middle and high bands.
Expander
This effect expands the dynamic range at a fixed ratio.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns the expander on or off.
ExpL: Thres -80–0 dB
This parameter sets the volume level at which the low-band
expander begins to affect the sound.
ExpL: Ratio 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
Sets the ratio for output increase in the low band when the input
level falls below the Lo threshold.
ExpL: Attack 0–100 ms
Sets the time it takes for the low-band expander to start affecting the
sound once the input level falls below the Lo threshold.
ExpL: Release 50–5000 ms
Sets the time it takes for the low-band expander to stop affecting the
sound once the input level rises above the Lo threshold.
ExpM: Thres -80–0 dB
This sets the volume level at which the midrange expander goes into
effect.
ExpM: Ratio 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This parameter sets the volume level at which the middle-band
expander begins to affect the sound.
ExpM: Attack 0–100 ms
Sets the time it takes for the middle-band expander to start affecting
the sound once the input level falls below the Middle threshold.
ExpM: Release 50–5000 ms
Sets the time it takes for the middle-band expander to stop affecting
the sound once the input level rises above the Middle threshold.
ExpH: Thres -80–0 dB
This parameter sets the volume level at which the high-band
expander begins to affect the sound.
ExpH: Ratio 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
Sets the ratio for output increase in the high band when the input
level falls below the Hi threshold.
ExpH: Attack 0–100 ms
Sets the time it takes for the high-band expander to start affecting the
sound once the input level falls below the Hi threshold.
ExpH: Release 50–5000 ms
Sets the time it takes for the high-band expander to stop affecting the
sound once the input level rises above the Hi threshold.
BR-1600_R_e.book 135 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
136
Mastering Tool Kit parameter functions
Compressor
This effect is used to compress the overall output signal
when the input level exceeds a set value.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns the compressor on or off.
CmpL: Thres -24–0 dB
This parameter sets the volume level at which the low-band
compressor begins to affect the sound.
CmpL: Ratio 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This parameter sets the ratio for suppression of the low-band output
when the input level exceeds the Lo threshold.
CmpL: Attack 0–100 ms
Sets the time it takes for the low-band compressor to start affecting
the sound once the input level exceeds the Lo threshold.
CmpL: Release 50–5000 ms
Sets the time it takes for the low-band compressor to stop affecting
the sound once the input level falls below the Lo threshold.
CmpM: Thres -24–0 dB
This parameter sets the volume level at which the middle-band
compressor begins to affect the sound.
CmpM: Ratio 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This parameter sets the ratio for suppression of the middle-band
output when the input level exceeds the Middle threshold.
CmpM: Attack 0–100 ms
Sets the time it takes for the middle-band compressor to start affecting
the sound once the input level exceeds the Middle threshold.
CmpM: Release 50–5000 ms
Sets the time it takes for the middle-band compressor to stop affecting
the sound once the input level falls below the Middle threshold.
CmpH: Thres -24–0 dB
This parameter sets the volume level at which the high-band
compressor begins to affect the sound.
CmpH: Ratio 1:1.00–1:16.0, 1:INF
This parameter sets the ratio for suppression of the high-band output
when the input level exceeds the Hi threshold.
CmpH: Attack 0–100 ms
Sets the time it takes for the high-band compressor to start affecting
the sound once the input level exceeds the Hi threshold.
CmpH: Release 50–5000 ms
Sets the time it takes for the high-band compressor to stop affecting
the sound once the input level falls below the Hi threshold.
With this compressor, the level is automatically adjusted
to the optimum setting in response to the threshold and
ratio settings. In addition, since lengthening the attack
setting may result in distortion, a buffer (or safety
margin) of -6 dB is implemented. Adjust the mixer level
if so required to compensate for this.
Mixer
The mixer is used to adjust the volume of each frequency
band.
Low Level -80–+6 dB
Sets the volume level for the low band after the signal has passed
through the expander and compressor.
Mid Level -80–+6 dB
Sets the volume level for the middle band after the signal has passed
through the expander and compressor.
High Level -80–+6 dB
Sets the volume level for the upper band after the signal has passed
through the expander and compressor.
Limiter
This effect is used to suppress high-level signals so that
distortion can be prevented.
Effect On/Off OFF, ON
This setting turns the limiter on or off.
Threshold -24–0 dB
Adjust this parameter to match the input signal.
Attack 0–100 ms
Adjusts the time it takes for the limiter to become active once the
input level exceeds the threshold level.
Release 50–5000 ms
This adjusts the time it takes for limiting to be removed once the
signal level drops below the threshold.
Output
This component is used to control the overall output.
Level -80–+6 dB
Sets the volume level of the overall sound after the signal has passed
through the limiter.
Soft Clip Off, On
Soft clipping suppresses the noticeable distortion that may occur
through heavy use of compression and limiting.
Dither OFF, 24–8 BIT
This setting is used to prevent the action of muting sounds from
becoming too noticeable.
BR-1600_R_e.book 136 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
137
Section 2
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
When the effect patch selection screen is displayed, you can assign parameters you wish to control to value knobs VALUE 1
through VALUE 4.
When the effect patch selection screen is displayed, you can assign parameters you wish to control to value knobs VALUE 1
through VALUE 4.
■
Insert Effects
Algorithm: COSM OD GUITAR AMP
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
COSM Overdrive/Distortion
On/Off OD/DS ON/OFF
Type OD/DS TYPE
Drive OD/DS DRIVE
Bass OD/DS BASS
Treble OD/DS TREBLE
Level OD/DS LEVEL
COSM Preamp & Speaker
Simulator
On/Off AMP ON/OFF
Type AMP TYPE
Gain AMP GAIN
Bass AMP BASS
Middle AMP MIDDLE
Treble AMP TREBLE
Presence AMP PRESNC
Level AMP LEVEL
Bright AMP BRIGHT
Gain SW AMP GAIN SW
Speaker SW SP.SIM SP SW
Speaker Type SP.SIM SP TYPE
Mic Setting SP.SIM MIC SET
Mic Level SP.SIM MIC LVL
Direct Level SP.SIM DIR.LVL
Amb Pre-Dly AMB PRE-DLY
Amb Size AMB SIZE
Amb Density AMB DENSITY
Amb HF Damp AMB HF DAMP
Amb Level AMB LEVEL
Equalizer/Wah On/Off FILTER ON/OFF
Effect Type FILTER TYPE
4Band Equalizer
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Wah
Type WAH TYPE
Pedal Pos. WAH PEDAL
Level WAH LEVEL
Mode A.WAH MODE
Polarity A.WAH POLARTY
Sensitivity A.WAH SENS
Frequency A.WAH FREQ
Peak A.WAH PEAK
Rate A.WAH RATE
Depth A.WAH DEPTH
Level A.WAH LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
FX On/Off MOD ON/OFF
FX Select MOD SELECT
Compressor
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Tone COMP TONE
Level COMP LEVEL
Limiter
Threshold LIMITER THRESH.
Release LIMITER REL.
Tone LIMITER TONE
Level LIMITER LEVEL
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
Top ACOUSTC TOP
Body ACOUSTC BODY
Level ACOUSTC LEVEL
Pickup Simulator
Type PICKUP TYPE
Tone PICKUP TONE
Level PICKUP LEVEL
Tremolo
Wave Shape TREMOLO WAVE
Rate TREMOLO RATE
Depth TREMOLO DEPTH
Slow Gear Sensitivity SLOW.G SENS
Rise Time SLOW.G TIME
Defretter
Tone DEFRET TONE
Sensitivity DEFRET SENS
Attack DEFRET ATTACK
Depth DEFRET DEPTH
Resonance DEFRET RESO
Effect Level DEFRET FX.LVL
Direct Level DEFRET DIR.LVL
Phaser
Type PHASER TYPE
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Step PHASER STEP
Step Rate PHASER S.RATE
Effect Level PHASER FX.LVL
Direct Level PHASER DIR.LVL
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Effect Level FLANGER FX.LVL
Direct Level FLANGER DIR.LVL
Pitch Shifter
Voice P.SHIFT VOICE
Mode 1 P.SHIFT MODE1
Pitch 1 P.SHIFT PITCH1
Fine 1 P.SHIFT FINE1
Pre Delay 1 P.SHIFT PREDL1
Feedback 1 P.SHIFT FBK1
Level 1 P.SHIFT LEVEL1
Mode 2 P.SHIFT MODE2
Pitch 2 P.SHIFT PITCH2
Fine 2 P.SHIFT FINE2
Pre Delay 2 P.SHIFT PREDL2
Level 2 P.SHIFT LEVEL2
Direct Level P.SHIFT DIR.LVL
2x2 Chorus
Xover Freq 2CHORUS XOVER
Low Rate 2CHORUS L.RATE
Low Depth 2CHORUS L.DEPTH
Low Pre-Dly 2CHORUS L.PREDLY
Low Level 2CHORUS L.LEVEL
High Rate 2CHORUS H.RATE
High Depth 2CHORUS H.DEPTH
High Pre-Dly 2CHORUS H.PREDLY
High Level 2CHORUS H.LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
BR-1600_R_e.book 137 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
138
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
Algorithm: ACOUSTIC SIM
Algorithm: BASS SIM
Pan
Wave Shape PAN WAVE
Rate PAN RATE
Depth PAN DEPTH
Vibrato
Type VIBRATO TYPE
Rate VIBRATO RATE
Depth VIBRATO DEPTH
Uni-V
Rate UNI.V RATE
Depth UNI.V DEPTH
Level UNI.V LEVEL
Short Delay
Delay Time SHT.DLY TIME
Feedback SHT.DLY FEEDBCK
Effect Level SHT.DLY LEVEL
Humanizer
Vowel1 HUMAN VOWEL1
Vowel2 HUMAN VOWEL2
Rate HUMAN RATE
Depth HUMAN DEPTH
Manual HUMAN MANUAL
Level HUMAN LEVEL
Ring Modulator
Freqency RING.M FREQ
Effect Level RING.M FX.LVL
Direct Level RING.M DIR.LVL
Sub Equalizer
Low Gain SUB EQ LOW
Low-Mid Freq SUB EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q SUB EQ L.MID Q
Low-Mid Gain SUB EQ L.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq SUB EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q SUB EQ H.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain SUB EQ H.MID G
High Gain SUB EQ HIGH
Level SUB EQ LEVEL
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Tap Time DELAY T.TIME
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Hi Cut Freq DELAY HI CUT
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Chorus
On/Off CHORUS ON/OFF
Mode CHORUS MODE
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Hi Cut Freq CHORUS HI CUT
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
On/Off ASIM ON/OFF
Pickup Type ASIM PICKUP
Character ASIM CHAR
Top-Hi ASIM TOP-HI
Top-Mid ASIM TOP-MID
Body ASIM BODY
Level ASIM LEVEL
Compressor
On/Off COMP ON/OFF
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Level COMP LEVEL
4Band Equalizer
On/Off EQ ON/OFF
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Modulation On/Off MOD ON/OFF
Effect Type MOD TYPE
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Chorus
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Phaser
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Pitch Shifter
P.Shift Type P.SHIFT TYPE
Pitch P.SHIFT PITCH
D:E Balance P.SHIFT D:E
Separation P.SHIFT SEP
Doubling
Delay Time DOUBL'N DELAY
Separation DOUBL'N SEP
Effect Level DOUBL'N LEVEL
Tremolo/Pan
Mode TRM/PAN MODE
Rate TRM/PAN RATE
Depth TRM/PAN DEPTH
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Bass Simulator
On/Off B.SIM ON/OFF
Character B.SIM CHAR
Level B.SIM LEVEL
Compressor/Defretter On/Off CMP/DEF ON/OFF
Effect Type CMP/DEF TYPE
Compressor
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Level COMP LEVEL
Defretter
Sensitivity DEFRET SENS
Attack DEFRET ATTACK
Depth DEFRET DEPTH
Level DEFRET LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Modulation On/Off MOD ON/OFF
Effect Type MOD TYPE
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Chorus
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Phaser
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
BR-1600_R_e.book 138 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
139
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
Section 2
Algorithm: COSM COMP GUITAR AMP
Algorithm: ACOUSTIC GUITAR
Algorithm: BASS MULTI
Pitch Shifter
P.Shift Type P.SHIFT TYPE
Pitch P.SHIFT PITCH
D:E Balance P.SHIFT D:E
Separation P.SHIFT SEP
Doubling
Delay Time DOUBL'N DELAY
Separation DOUBL'N SEP
Effect Level DOUBL'N LEVEL
Tremolo/Pan
Mode TRM/PAN MODE
Rate TRM/PAN RATE
Depth TRM/PAN DEPTH
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
COSM Comp/Limiter
On/Off CMP/LM ON/OFF
Type CMP/LM TYPE
Attack CMP/LM ATTACK
Sustain CMP/LM SUST
Threshold CMP/LM THRESH.
Input CMP/LM INPUT
Ratio CMP/LM RATIO
Attack Time CMP/LM ATTACK
Release Time CMP/LM REL.
Tone CMP/LM TONE
Level CMP/LM LEVEL
PreAmp
On/Off AMP ON/OFF
Amp Type AMP TYPE
Volume AMP VOLUME
Bass AMP BASS
Middle AMP MIDDLE
Treble AMP TREBLE
Presence AMP PRESNC
Master AMP MASTER
Bright AMP BRIGHT
Gain AMP GAIN
Speaker Simulator
On/Off SP.SIM ON/OFF
Speaker Type SP.SIM TYPE
Mic Setting SP.SIM MIC SET
Mic Level SP.SIM MIC LVL
Direct Level SP.SIM DIR.LVL
Equalizer/Wah On/Off FILTER ON/OFF
Effect Type FILTER TYPE
4Band Equalizer
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Wah
Wah Type WAH TYPE
Polarity T.WAH POLARTY
Sensitivity T.WAH SENS
Frequency T.WAH FREQ
Peak WAH PEAK
Level WAH LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Acoustic Processor
On/Off AC ON/OFF
Body AC BODY
Mic Distance AC MIC DIST
Level AC LEVEL
Compressor
On/Off COMP ON/OFF
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Level COMP LEVEL
4Band Equalizer
On/Off EQ ON/OFF
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Compressor/Defretter On/Off CMP/DEF ON/OFF
Effect Type CMP/DEF TYPE
Compressor
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Level COMP LEVEL
Defretter
Sensitivity DEFRET SENS
Attack DEFRET ATTACK
Depth DEFRET DEPTH
Level DEFRET LEVEL
Octave
On/Off OCTAVER ON/OFF
Octave Level OCTAVER OCT.LVL
Direct Level OCTAVER DIR.LVL
Enhancer
On/Off ENHANCE ON/OFF
Sensitivity ENHANCE SENS
Frequency ENHANCE FREQ
Mix Level ENHANCE MIX
LowMix Level ENHANCE LO.MIX
Level ENHANCE LEVEL
Equalizer/Wah On/Off FILTER ON/OFF
Effect Type FILTER TYPE
4Band Equalizer
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Wah
Wah Type WAH TYPE
Polarity T.WAH POLARTY
Sensitivity T.WAH SENS
Frequency T.WAH FREQ
Peak WAH PEAK
Level WAH LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
BR-1600_R_e.book 139 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
140
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
Algorithm: COSM BASS AMP
Algorithm: COSM COMP BASS AMP
Modulation On/Off MOD ON/OFF
Effect Type MOD TYPE
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Chorus
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Phaser
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Pitch Shifter
P.Shift Type P.SHIFT TYPE
Pitch P.SHIFT PITCH
D:E Balance P.SHIFT D:E
Separation P.SHIFT SEP
Doubling
Delay Time DOUBL'N DELAY
Separation DOUBL'N SEP
Effect Level DOUBL'N LEVEL
Tremolo/Pan
Mode TRM/PAN MODE
Rate TRM/PAN RATE
Depth TRM/PAN DEPTH
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Compressor
On/Off COMP ON/OFF
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Level COMP LEVEL
PreAmp
On/Off AMP ON/OFF
Amp Type AMP TYPE
Volume AMP VOLUME
Bass AMP BASS
Middle AMP MIDDLE
Treble AMP TREBLE
Master AMP MASTER
Bright AMP BRIGHT
Gain AMP GAIN
Speaker Simulator
On/Off SP.SIM ON/OFF
Speaker Type SP.SIM TYPE
Mic Setting SP.SIM MIC SET
Mic Level SP.SIM MIC LVL
Direct Level SP.SIM DIR.LVL
Equalizer/Wah On/Off FILTER ON/OFF
Effect Type FILTER TYPE
4Band Equalizer
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Wah
Wah Type WAH TYPE
Polarity T.WAH POLARTY
Sensitivity T.WAH SENS
Frequency T.WAH FREQ
Peak WAH PEAK
Level WAH LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Modulation On/Off MOD ON/OFF
Effect Type MOD TYPE
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Chorus
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Phaser
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Pitch Shifter
P.Shift Type P.SHIFT TYPE
Pitch P.SHIFT PITCH
D:E Balance P.SHIFT D:E
Separation P.SHIFT SEP
Doubling
Delay Time DOUBL'N DELAY
Separation DOUBL'N SEP
Effect Level DOUBL'N LEVEL
Tremolo/Pan
Mode TRM/PAN MODE
Rate TRM/PAN RATE
Depth TRM/PAN DEPTH
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
COSM Compressor/Limiter
On/Off CMP/LM ON/OFF
Type CMP/LM TYPE
Attack CMP/LM ATTACK
Sustain CMP/LM SUST
Threshold CMP/LM THRESH.
Input CMP/LM INPUT
Ratio CMP/LM RATIO
Ratio CMP/LM RATIO
Attack Time CMP/LM ATTACK
Release Time CMP/LM REL.
Tone CMP/LM TONE
Level CMP/LM LEVEL
PreAmp
On/Off AMP ON/OFF
Amp Type AMP TYPE
Volume AMP VOLUME
Bass AMP BASS
Middle AMP MIDDLE
Treble AMP TREBLE
Master AMP MASTER
Bright AMP BRIGHT
Gain AMP GAIN
Speaker Simulator
On/Off SP.SIM ON/OFF
Speaker Type SP.SIM TYPE
Mic Setting SP.SIM MIC SET
Mic Level SP.SIM MIC LVL
Direct Level SP.SIM DIR.LVL
Equalizer/Wah On/Off FILTER ON/OFF
Effect Type FILTER TYPE
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
BR-1600_R_e.book 140 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
141
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
Section 2
Algorithm: VOCAL MULTI
Algorithm: VOICE TRANSFORMER
4Band Equalizer
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Wah
Wah Type WAH TYPE
Polarity T.WAH POLARTY
Sensitivity T.WAH SENS
Frequency T.WAH FREQ
Peak WAH PEAK
Level WAH LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Compressor
On/Off COMP ON/OFF
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Level COMP LEVEL
De-esser
On/Off DESSER ON/OFF
Sibilant Lvl DESSER S.LVL
Level DESSER LEVEL
Enhancer
On/Off ENHANCE ON/OFF
Sensitivity ENHANCE SENS
Frequency ENHANCE FREQ
Mix Level ENHANCE MIX
LowMix Level ENHANCE LO.MIX
Level ENHANCE LEVEL
4Band Equalizer
On/Off EQ ON/OFF
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Modulation On/Off MOD ON/OFF
Effect Type MOD TYPE
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Chorus
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Phaser
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Pitch Shifter
P.Shift Type P.SHIFT TYPE
Pitch P.SHIFT PITCH
D:E Balance P.SHIFT D:E
Separation P.SHIFT SEP
Doubling
Delay Time DOUBL'N DELAY
Separation DOUBL'N SEP
Effect Level DOUBL'N LEVEL
Tremolo/Pan
Mode TRM/PAN MODE
Rate TRM/PAN RATE
Depth TRM/PAN DEPTH
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Voice Transformer
On/Off VOICE ON/OFF
Formant1 VOICE FORM1
Formant2 VOICE FORM2
EffectLevel1 VOICE FX1.LVL
EffectLevel2 VOICE FX2.LVL
Direct Level VOICE DIR.LVL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Modulation On/Off MOD ON/OFF
Effect Type MOD TYPE
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Chorus
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Phaser
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Pitch Shifter
P.Shift Type P.SHIFT TYPE
Pitch P.SHIFT PITCH
D:E Balance P.SHIFT D:E
Separation P.SHIFT SEP
Doubling
Delay Time DOUBL'N DELAY
Separation DOUBL'N SEP
Effect Level DOUBL'N LEVEL
Tremolo/Pan
Mode TRM/PAN MODE
Rate TRM/PAN RATE
Depth TRM/PAN DEPTH
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
BR-1600_R_e.book 141 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
142
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
Algorithm: COSM VOCAL COMP
Algorithm: MIC MODELING
Algorithm: STEREO MULTI
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
COSM Compressor/Limiter
On/Off CMP/LM ON/OFF
Type CMP/LM TYPE
Attack CMP/LM ATTACK
Sustain CMP/LM SUST
Threshold CMP/LM THRESH.
Input CMP/LM INPUT
Ratio CMP/LM RATIO
Ratio CMP/LM RATIO
Attack Time CMP/LM ATTACK
Release Time CMP/LM REL.
Tone CMP/LM TONE
Level CMP/LM LEVEL
De-esser
On/Off DESSER ON/OFF
Sibilant Lvl DESSER S.LVL
Level DESSER LEVEL
Enhancer
On/Off ENHANCE ON/OFF
Sensitivity ENHANCE SENS
Frequency ENHANCE FREQ
Mix Level ENHANCE MIX
LowMix Level ENHANCE LOW MIX
Level ENHANCE LEVEL
4Band Equalizer
On/Off EQ ON/OFF
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Mic Converter
On/Off MIC ON/OFF
Input MIC INPUT
Output MIC OUTPUT
Phase MIC PHASE
Bass Cut Filter On/Off BASS CUT ON/OFF
Cut Off Freq BASS CUT FREQ
Distance
On/Off DS ON/OFF
Prox.Fx DS PROXFX
Time DS TIME
Limiter
On/Off LIMITER ON/OFF
Attack LIMITER ATTACK
Release LIMITER REL.
Detect HPF LIMITER D.HPF
Threshold LIMITER THRESH.
Level LIMITER LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Compressor
On/Off COMP ON/OFF
Sustain COMP SUST
Attack COMP ATTACK
Level COMP LEVEL
Ring Modulator
On/Off RING ON/OFF
Frequency RING FREQ
Effect Level RING FX.LVL
Direct Level RING DIR.LVL
Equalizer/Wah On/Off FILTER ON/OFF
Effect Type FILTER TYPE
4Band Equalizer
Low Gain EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q EQ H.MID Q
High Gain EQ HIGH
Level EQ LEVEL
Wah
Wah Type WAH TYPE
Polarity T.WAH POLARTY
Sensitivity T.WAH SENS
Frequency T.WAH FREQ
Peak WAH PEAK
Level WAH LEVEL
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Foot Volume On/Off FOOT ON/OFF
Modulation On/Off MOD ON/OFF
Effect Type MOD TYPE
Flanger
Rate FLANGER RATE
Depth FLANGER DEPTH
Manual FLANGER MANUAL
Resonance FLANGER RESO
Separation FLANGER SEP
Chorus
Rate CHORUS RATE
Depth CHORUS DEPTH
Pre Delay CHORUS PREDLY
Effect Level CHORUS LEVEL
Phaser
Rate PHASER RATE
Depth PHASER DEPTH
Manual PHASER MANUAL
Resonance PHASER RESO
Pitch Shifter
P.Shift Type P.SHIFT TYPE
Pitch P.SHIFT PITCH
D:E Balance P.SHIFT D:E
Separation P.SHIFT SEP
Doubling
Delay Time DOUBL'N DELAY
Separation DOUBL'N SEP
Effect Level DOUBL'N LEVEL
Tremolo/Pan
Mode TRM/PAN MODE
Rate TRM/PAN RATE
Depth TRM/PAN DEPTH
Delay
On/Off DELAY ON/OFF
Type DELAY TYPE
Feedback DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level DELAY LEVEL
Delay Time DELAY TIME
BR-1600_R_e.book 142 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
143
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
Section 2
Algorithm: LO-FI BOX
Algorithm: VO+GT.AMP
Algorithm: VO+AC.SIM
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Lo-Fi
On/Off LO-FI ON/OFF
Effect Type LO-FI TYPE
Tuning LO-FI TUNING
Noise LO-FI NOISE
Filter LO-FI FILTER
D:E Balance LO-FI D:E
Wow Flutter LO-FI WOW
Noise LO-FI NOISE
Filter LO-FI FILTER
D:E Balance LO-FI D:E
Pre Filter LO-FI PRE FLT
Sample Rate LO-FI SMPL.R
Bit LO-FI BIT
Post Filter LO-FI POST FLT
Effect Level LO-FI FX.LVL
Direct Level LO-FI DIR.LVL
ModifyFilter LO-FI MOD FLT
Cutoff Freq LO-FI CUTOFF
Resonance LO-FI RESO
Gain LO-FI GAIN
Noise Suppressor
On/Off NS ON/OFF
Threshold NS THRESH.
Release NS REL.
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Compressor (Mic)
On/Off M:COMP ON/OFF
Sustain M:COMP SUST
Attack M:COMP ATTACK
Level M:COMP LEVEL
4Band Equalizer
On/Off M:EQ ON/OFF
Low Gain M:EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain M:EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq M:EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q M:EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain M:EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq M:EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q M:EQ H.MID Q
High Gain M:EQ HIGH
Level M:EQ LEVEL
Noise Suppressor (Mic)
On/Off M:NS ON/OFF
Threshold M:NS THRESH.
Release M:NS REL.
Delay (Mic)
On/Off M:DELAY ON/OFF
Delay Time M:DELAY TIME
Feedback M:DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level M:DELAY LEVEL
Compressor (Guitar)
On/Off E:COMP ON/OFF
Sustain E:COMP SUST
Attack E:COMP ATTACK
Level E:COMP LEVEL
PreAmp
On/Off E:AMP ON/OFF
Amp Type E:AMP TYPE
Volume E:AMP VOLUME
Bass E:AMP BASS
Middle E:AMP MIDDLE
Treble E:AMP TREBLE
Presence E:AMP PRESNC
Presence E:AMP PRESNC
Master E:AMP MASTER
Bright E:AMP BRIGHT
Gain E:AMP GAIN
Speaker Simulator
On/Off E:SP.SIM ON/OFF
Speaker Type E:SP.SIM TYPE
Mic Setting E:SP.SIM MIC SET
Mic Level E:SP.SIM MIC LVL
Direct Level E:SP.SIM DIR.LVL
Noise Suppressor (Guitar)
On/Off E:NS ON/OFF
Threshold E:NS THRESH.
Release E:NS REL.
Delay (Guitar)
On/Off E:DELAY ON/OFF
Delay Time E:DELAY TIME
Feedback E:DELAY FEEDBCK
Effect Level E:DELAY LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Compressor (Mic)
On/Off M:COMP ON/OFF
Sustain M:COMP SUST
Attack M:COMP ATTACK
Level M:COMP LEVEL
4Band Equalizer (Mic)
On/Off M:EQ ON/OFF
Low Gain M:EQ LOW
Low-Mid Gain M:EQ L.MID G
Low-Mid Freq M:EQ L.MID F
Low-Mid Q M:EQ L.MID Q
Hi-Mid Gain M:EQ H.MID G
Hi-Mid Freq M:EQ H.MID F
Hi-Mid Q M:EQ H.MID Q
High Gain M:EQ HIGH
Level M:EQ LEVEL
Noise Suppressor (Mic)
On/Off M:NS ON/OFF
Threshold M:NS THRESH.
Release M:NS REL.
Delay (Mic)
On/Off M:DLY ON/OFF
Delay Time M:DLY TIME
Feedback M:DLY FEEDBCK
Effect Level M:DLY LEVEL
Acoustic Guitar Simulator
(Guitar)
On/Off E:ASIM ON/OFF
Pickup Type E:ASIM PICKUP
Character E:ASIM CHAR
Top-Hi E:ASIM TOP-HI
Top-Mid E:ASIM TOP-MID
Body E:ASIM BODY
Level E:ASIM LEVEL
Compressor (Guitar)
On/Off E:COMP ON/OFF
Sustain E:COMP SUST
Attack E:COMP ATTACK
Level E:COMP LEVEL
Noise Suppressor (Guitar)
On/Off E:NS ON/OFF
Threshold E:NS THRESH.
Release E:NS REL.
Delay (Guitar)
On/Off E:DLY ON/OFF
Delay Time E:DLY TIME
Feedback E:DLY FEEDBCK
Effect Level E:DLY LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
BR-1600_R_e.book 143 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
144
Effect parameters assigned to VALUE knobs
Algorithm: VO+ACOUSTIC
Algorithm: 8CH COMP EQ
■
Vocal Tool Box
Algorithm: HARMONY SEQUENCE
Algorithm: PITCH CORRECTION
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Compressor (Mic)
On/Off M:COMP ON/OFF
Sustain M:COMP SUST
Attack M:COMP ATTACK
Level M:COMP LEVEL
Noise Suppressor (Mic)
On/Off M:NS ON/OFF
Threshold M:NS THRESH.
Release M:NS REL.
Acoustic Processor
On/Off A:AC ON/OFF
Body A:AC BODY
Mic Distance A:AC MIC.D
Level A:AC LEVEL
Compressor (Guitar)
On/Off A:COMP ON/OFF
Sustain A:COMP SUST
Attack A:COMP ATTACK
Level A:COMP LEVEL
Noise Suppressor (Guitar)
On/Off A:NS ON/OFF
Threshold A:NS THRESH.
Release A:NS REL.
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Low Cut Filter n (n = 1..8)
On/Off L.CUTn ON/OFF
Invert L.CUTn INVERT
Freq L.CUTn FREQ
Compressor n (n = 1..8)
On/Off COMPn ON/OFF
Threshold COMPn THRESH.
Knee COMPn KNEE
Ratio COMPn RATIO
Attack COMPn ATTACK
Release COMPn REL.
Level COMPn LEVEL
3Band Equalizer n (n = 1..8)
On/Off EQn ON/OFF
High Type EQn H.TYPE
High Gain EQn H.GAIN
High Freq EQn H.FREQ
High Q EQn H.Q
Mid Gain EQn M.GAIN
Mid Freq EQn M.FREQ
Mid Q EQn M.Q
Low Type EQn L.TYPE
Low Gain EQn L.GAIN
Low Freq EQn L.FREQ
Low Q EQn L.Q
Level EQn LEVEL
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Common
Input Type COMMON IN.TYPE
Balance COMMON BALANCE
Chorus Send COMMON CHO.SND
Reverb Send COMMON REV.SND
Voice n (n = 1..3)
On/Off VOICEn ON/OFF
Pre Delay VOICEn PREDLY
Pan VOICEn PAN
Human Feel VOICEn HUMAN
Effect Block Parameter Abbreviation
Pitch Correction Type P.CRCT TYPE
Smooth SMOOTH
BR-1600_R_e.book 144 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
145
Section 3 Using Rhythm
Section 3
Using
Rhythm
BR-1600_R_e.book 145 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
146
Makeup of Drum/Bass/Loop Phrase
The BR-1600CD's programmable rhythm section comprises tracks for Drum Patterns, Bass Patterns, and Loop Phrases. When
used, you will be able to have your favorite rhythms automatically played over and over to provide a convenient guide for
recording and practicing. In addition, you can arrange different rhythm performances for the intro, the verse, the chorus, and
other sections in a sequence that matches your song, and this makes it much easier to produce great-sounding demos (Rhythm
Arrangement, p. 148).
This chapter will provide a description of Drum Patterns, Bass Patterns, and Loop Phrases. In addition, rhythm arrangements will
also be described.
Drums
On the BR-1600CD, tracks 15/16 are designated as the drum tracks, and can be used to automatically play drum parts. By
selecting realistic drums sounds from the internal PCM drum samples and by setting a suitable tempo, you can have the BR-
1600CD automatically play drum parts that are perfect for making demo songs.
Drum tracks usually contain a variety of percussion instrument sounds, such as kick drums, snares, hi-hats, etc. The BR-1600CD
features a broad variety of these sounds, which are organized into sets called “drum kits.” There are nine drum kits in all on the
BR-1600CD, and these reflect a wide range of different musical styles.
Furthermore, drum tracks can also be made to automatically play basic drum performances of one or several measures in a
repetitive fashion.
At the time of purchase, the BR-1600CD contains 600 preset drum patterns, which cannot be overwritten. In addition, the BR-
1600CD can also store 999 user drum patterns, which can be used in any song, and 999 song drum patterns, which are stored
together with a specific song. User drum patches and song drum patches can be overwritten.
• For details on how drums are actually used, refer to “Using drums” (p. 149).
• Drums can only be used when Track 15/16 has been set up as a drum track using its track type setting (p. 149).
• Up to five individual drums sounds can be played simultaneously. If an attempt is made to play more than five such sounds
at any one time, any previous sounds that are still being played will be silenced before new sounds are played.
Bass
On the BR-1600CD, tracks 13/14 are designated as the bass tracks, and can be used to automatically play bass parts. By selecting
realistic bass sounds from the internal PCM bass samples and by setting a suitable tempo, you can have the BR-1600CD
automatically play bass parts that are perfect for making demo songs.
The BR-1600CD comes complete with twelve different bass guitar sounds including fingered, picked, and slap bass, thus allowing
you to recreate a wide range of different musical styles and genres.
In addition, bass tracks can also be made to automatically play basic bass performances in a repetitive fashion. The data used to create
these basic bass performances is known as a bass pattern.
At the time of purchase, the BR-1600CD contains 583 preset bass patterns, and these cannot be overwritten. In addition, the BR-1600CD
can also store 999 user bass patterns that can be used in any song and 999 song bass patterns that are saved together with a specific song.
User bass patterns and song bass patterns can be overwritten.
• For details on how bass are actually used, refer to “Using bass” (p. 163).
• Bass can only be used when Track 13/14 has been set up as a bass track using its track type setting (p. 163).
• The BR-1600CD uses mono bass sounds.
• Only one sound can be played simultaneously. If an attempt is made to play more than two such sounds at any one time, any
previous sounds that are still being played will be silenced before new sound is played.
BR-1600_R_e.book 146 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
147
Makeup of Drum/Bass/Loop Phrase
Section 3
Loop Phrases
One method often used when putting songs together involves the creation first of all of a section of basic audio data of one or two
measures in length, and the basic song structure is then formed by repeating this section the required number of times. The term
Loop Phrase is used to describe one of these sections of basic audio data.
The most appropriate Loop Phrases for your tunes can be selected, placed on the Loop Phrase track, and then played back as
many times as you like.
You can also create your own original Loop Phrases using portions of recorded audio tracks or by importing audio data from
commercially available sampling CDs and the like.
fig.20-000
The BR-1600CD can store 400 user Loop Phrases (in banks A through H) for use in any song and 50 song Loop Phrases that are
saved together with a specific song. User Loop Phrases and song Loop Phrases can be overwritten.
At the time of purchase, the BR-1600CD will contains 190 user Loop Phrases that are ready for immediate use.
• For details on how Loop Phrases are actually used, refer to “Using Loop Phrases” (p. 176).
• Loop Phrases can only be used when Track 11/12 has been set up as a Loop Phrase track using its track type setting (p. 176).
Audio data recorded from live performances
Select the portion of the performance
Track
11/12
(Loop Phrase track)
Commercially available
sampling CD-ROMs
Loop Phrase
Tracks 11/12, 13/14, and 15/16 serve both as audio tracks and as tracks for Loop Phrases, Bass Patterns, Drum Patterns,
and respectively. A track type can be set independently for each of these tracks, so for example, if you only want to use
hear a Bass Pattern while the other tracks play recorded performances as normal, this can be easily set up.
BR-1600_R_e.book 147 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
148
Rhythm arrangements
The drum, bass, and Loop Phrase elements described above can only repeat a single basic pattern; nevertheless, they can be
extremely useful when practicing or putting together ideas for songs.
Once you have decided on the structure of your song, however, simple repeating patterns will begin to sound uninteresting, and
you will probably want to use different patterns for sections such as the intro, verse, chorus, fill, and ending.
Luckily, the BR-1600CD’s rhythm arrangement function makes this very easy to do. Using rhythm arrangements, you will be able
to freely arrange a variety of different drum patterns, bass patterns, and Loop Phrases in units of one or more measures.
fig.20-001
For example, you can prepare separate patterns for the intro, the verse, the chorus, the fill, and the ending, and these can then be
arranged in the appropriate order for your song. In addition, a rhythm arrangement also lets you specify a chord progression for
the bass pattern to play along with.
What’s more, rhythm arrangements allow tempos to be set up on a measure-by-measure basis (Tempo Map), and beats can also
be set up in the same way (Beat Map).
At the time of purchase, the BR-1600CD contains 100 preset rhythm arrangements, and these cannot be overwritten. In addition, it
can also store 10 user rhythm arrangements that can be used in any song and 10 song rhythm arrangements that are saved
together with a specific song. User rhythm arrangements and song rhythm arrangements can be overwritten.
Loop Phrases are not used in preset rhythm arrangements—in other words, these arrangements contain only drum patterns
and bass patterns.
Pattern mode and Arrangement mode
In order to allow patterns and rhythm arrangements to be worked on separately, the BR-1600CD provides two different modes
for rhythm sessions—namely, Pattern mode and Arrangement mode.
To use rhythm arrangements, press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN], so the button’s indicator is lighted.
With this, Arrangement mode is activated, and you will be able to use the BR-1600CD’s rhythm arrangement feature. In this mode,
patterns and Loop Phrases arranged to form a rhythm arrangement will provide accompaniment whenever you start playback.
If, on the other hand, you want to activate Pattern mode, press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN],
this time turning off the button’s indicator. In this mode, only the currently selected drum pattern, bass pattern, and/or Loop
Phrase will be played back, and this will be done repetitively.
12 34 56
Time
Measure
IntroDrum
Bass
Loop
Phrase
Pattern 1 Pattern 1
Pattern 1 Pattern 3 Pattern 4 Pattern 4
Pattern 2
Loop Phrase 2Loop Phrase 1
Rhythm
Arrangements
BR-1600_R_e.book 148 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
149
Section 3
Using drums
Setting the track type
To use drums, you must first of all set up Track 15/16 as a
drum track using its track type setting.
fig.20-002
1.
Press [TRACK TYPE SELECT].
The Track Type Select screen will appear.
fig.20-003d
2.
Press [F4].
The track type for Track 15/16 will switch each time this
button is pressed.
fig.20-004d
Track Types
AUDIO:
The track will be used for recorded audio.
DRUMS:
The track will be used for a drum pattern.
METRONOME:
The track will be used to play a metronome.
You should select “DRUMS” here.
The DRUMS indicator from TRACK TYPE SELECT will
light up to indicate that Track 15/16 has been set up for
use as a drum track.
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the top screen.
You will now be able to use drums.
4.
If you wish to store the track type setting, save the
current song (p. 72).
Playing drum sounds
Simply changing the track type may not be sufficient to allow
drums to be played. Use the following procedure in such
cases.
1.
Press the track button for Track 15/16 several times
until it lights up.
Pressing the button repeatedly allows you to cycle
through the available choices, which are: Flashing
→
On
→
Off.
Off:
No drum sounds will be played.
Flashing:
Drum sounds will be played only when the BR-1600CD
is recording or performing playback.
On:
Drum sounds will be played even when the BR-1600CD
is stopped.
2.
Raise the fader for Track 15/16 to a suitable level.
You will now be able to hear the drum sounds.
1
3
2
BR-1600_R_e.book 149 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
150
Using drums
Selecting a drum kit
Now that we can hear the drums, let’s select a drum kit to
work with.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Press [F1] (SETUP).
The dialog for pattern setup will appear.
fig.20-006d
4.
Move the cursor to “Drum Kit” and select a new drum
kit using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Press [PLAY]; the drum pattern is played. Repeat this
process to select the kit that gives the best sound for your
song.
Although playback may stop for a period of 2 to 3
seconds when the drum kit is changed, this is normal
and is not the result of a malfunction.
5.
When you have selected the drum kit you want to use,
press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
If you wish to store the drum kit selection, save the
current song (p. 72).
Selecting drum patterns
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Move the cursor to the drum pattern field and select a
pattern using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Playback of the newly selected drum pattern will start as
soon as the previously selected drum pattern has ended.
4.
When you have selected the drum pattern that you
want to use, press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to
the top screen.
5.
If you wish to store the drum pattern selection, save the
current song (p. 72).
The drum kit selection is common to all drum
patterns. It is not possible to store a different drum
kit for each different pattern.
The user drum patterns and song drum patterns
contained in the BR-1600CD at the time of purchase
are empty; you won’t hear anything if you select one
of them. If you want to hear drum sounds
immediately after setting up the BR-1600CD for the
first time, select a preset drum pattern.
“*TMP” appears for the drum pattern immediately
after its data is recorded or edited. If you try to select
a different drum pattern with the TIME/VALUE
dial while the cursor is positioned above this, the
cursor turns white. If you press [ENTER/YES] at
this point, the cursor reverts to black, and the drum
pattern number is confirmed. If you do not want to
confirm it, press [EXIT/NO]; “*TMP” is indicated
again, and the drum pattern reverts to the state it
was in immediately after editing. This allows you to
avoid inadvertently erasing data you have edited.
BR-1600_R_e.book 150 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
151
Using drums
Section 3
Changing the drum pattern tempo
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (meaning you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Move the cursor to “TEMPO” and select a suitable
tempo using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new setting changes
the playback tempo.
The tempo can be set anywhere within a range of 25.0 to
250.0 BPM. (Beats Per Minute—A value that indicates
the tempo in terms of the number of quarter notes
occurring in one minute.)
4.
After you have set the tempo, press [EXIT/NO] several
times to return to the top screen.
5.
If you wish to store the pattern’s tempo, save the
current song (p. 72).
Setting the tempo using [TAP]
In addition to setting the tempo using [CURSOR] and the
TIME/VALUE dial, you can also set it by tapping your finger
on [TAP] at the desired tempo. (Tap Tempo)
This feature proves extremely useful when you want to
match the playback tempo to that of an audio CD but don’t
know the actual BPM value.
To set the tempo in this way, tap your finger on [TAP] four
times with approximately the same interval between each
tap. The tempo will be set based on the average tapping
interval.
The tempo is common to all drum patterns, bass
patterns, and Loop Phrases.
About the Drum Pattern Beat
Although every drum, bass, and Loop Phrase
pattern has its own beat setting, there is also a
universal beat setting that can be applied to all drum
and bass patterns and Loop Phrases as a whole.
When drum, bass, and Loop Phrase patterns are
played simultaneously in Pattern mode, they are not
played according to any of their individual beat
settings, but instead conform to one beat setting that
is applied to them all.
For more detailed information, refer to “Setting the
Universal Beat for Drums, Bass, and Loop Phrases”
(p. 186).
BR-1600_R_e.book 151 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
152
Creating drum patterns
If you cannot find a drum pattern that suits your song among
the BR-1600CD’s preset drum patterns, you can easily create
an original pattern as described below.
Either one of the following two methods can be used to do
this.
●
Real-time recording
Real-time recording allows you to tap the track buttons in
time with a metronome and to record the performance data
produced. The drum pattern will be repeated over and over,
with new performance data being constantly mixed into it.
Furthermore, the quantize function can be used to fix any
slight deviations in the timing of your performance.
●
Step recording
When you use step recording, individual drum timings are
displayed on a grid representing a single measure, and these
timings can be edited at will. By allowing you to actually see
the drum pattern, this method makes pattern recording a
much simpler task.
Preparing for recording
Before you use either real-time recording or step recording,
you will need to select the drum pattern to be recorded.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Press [F4] (EDIT).
The Drum Pattern Edit screen will appear.
fig.20-010d
4.
Move the cursor to “Pattern” and select the number of
the drum pattern to be recorded using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
If you press [PLAY] at this time, you will be able to hear
the selected drum pattern.
The user drum patterns and song drum patterns
contained in the BR-1600CD at the time of purchase are
empty; you won’t hear anything if you select one of
them.
5.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
number of beats and measures in the drum pattern.
The display for the drum pattern will change to “*TMP.”
fig.20-010ad
BR-1600_R_e.book 152 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
153
Creating drum patterns
Section 3
Creating drum patterns
using real-time recording
When a MIDI keyboard is connected to the MIDI IN
port, you will be able to use this keyboard to perform
real-time recording. Note that there is no need to set a
MIDI channel for the MIDI keyboard in such a case (p.
234).
1.
After carrying out the steps described in “Preparing for
recording,” press [F1] (REALTIME).
The Real-Time Recording standby screen will appear
and the metronome will start.
fig.20-011d
2.
Move the cursor to “BPM” and select a suitable tempo
for recording using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-011ad
Note that this only sets the tempo for recording—the
drum pattern is not recorded at this tempo. (It is not
possible to set a specific tempo for a drum pattern.)
If you tap your finger on [TAP] four or more times, the
tempo will be set accordingly.
3.
Move the cursor to “METRO.LVL” and set the
metronome volume using the TIME/VALUE dial.
4.
Press [PLAY].
Real-time recording will start after a one-measure
countdown.
fig.20-012d
5.
Use the track buttons to play the desired drum pattern
and use the track faders to set the velocity (dynamics)
of the sounds.
The relationship between track buttons and drum
sounds is as follows.
6.
If you want to erase an error in the recorded pattern,
press [F3] (ERASE ON).
fig.20-012ad
The message “ERASE:ON” will appear and drum erase
mode will be activated. In this mode, hold down the
track button corresponding to the drum sound you want
to erase. Any of these drum sounds played in the pattern
while you are pressing the track button will be erased.
When you have finished erasing drum sounds, press [F3]
(ERASE OFF).
7.
Press [STOP] at the point where you want to stop recording.
The Drum Pattern Edit screen will appear once again.
8.
If you want to store the drum pattern that you have just
recorded, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns will
appear.
fig.20-013d
9.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the drum pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
fig.20-013ad
Track button Drum sound Note number
[1] Kick 1 C 2 (36)
[2] Snare 1 D 2 (38)
[3] Closed hi-hat F#2 (42)
[4] Open hi-hat A#2 (46)
[5] Tom 1 (high) F 2 (41)
[6] Tom 2 (mid) A 2 (45)
[7] Tom 3 (low) D 3 (50)
[8] Crash cymbal C#3 (49)
[9/10] Ride cymbal D#3 (51)
[11/12] Claves D#5 (75)
[13/14] Cow bell G#3 (56)
[15/16] High Q D#1 (27)
[V-TRACK]+[1] Kick 2 B 1 (35)
[V-TRACK]+[2] Snare 2 E 2 (40)
[V-TRACK]+[3] Metronome (click) A 1 (33)
[V-TRACK]+[4] Metronome (bell) A#1 (34)
[V-TRACK]+[5] Claves D#5 (75)
[V-TRACK]+[6] Hi-Q D#1 (27)
BR-1600_R_e.book 153 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
154
Creating drum patterns
Only user drum patterns and song drum patterns may
be selected for saving drum pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset drum pattern at this time.
10.
Press [F4] (GO).
The drum pattern will be saved. When the message “Complete!”
appears, it indicates that saving has been completed.
Practicing before recording (Rehearsal)
Whenever rehearsal is turned on, you will be able to play
drum sounds without recording them, even if real-time
recording is in progress. This feature comes in very handy
when you want to practice playing a drum pattern.
1.
Press [F2] (REHEARSAL ON) in real-time recording mode.
The message “REHEARSAL:ON” will appear and
rehearsal mode will be activated.
fig.20-014d
In this mode, you can press a track button to play its drum
sound without the corresponding data being recorded.
2.
When you have finished rehearsing, press [F2] (REHEARSAL
OFF) to return to real-time recording mode.
The message “REHEARSAL:OFF” will appear and real-
time mode will be reactivated. When you now press a
track button to play a drum sound, the corresponding
performance data will be recorded.
Recording in perfect time (Quantize)
With real-time recording, the data generated by pressing a
track button is recorded as is, and any imperfections in
timing will be reflected in the performance data. If you don’t
want to hear these imperfections during playback, you can
use the BR-1600CD’s quantize feature to automatically move
performance data to the nearest quarter note, eighth note,
sixteenth note, etc., before the data is actually recorded.
1.
Move the cursor to “QTZ” on the Real-Time Recording
standby screen.
fig.20-015d
2.
Select a quantization setting using the TIME/VALUE
dial.
fig.20-015ad
QTZ:
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest quarter note.
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest quarter-note triplet.
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest eighth note.
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest eighth-note triplet.
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest sixteenth note.
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest sixteenth-note triplet.
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest thirty-second note.
( ) Moves drum sounds to the nearest thirty-second-
note triplet.
OFF Quantization will not be carried out, and
performance data will be recorded as is.
3.
Press [PLAY].
The BR-1600CD will start recording.
Even during the recording process, you can select a new
quantization setting by changing the “QTZ” value using
the TIME/VALUE dial.
If you select a different drum pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, all of the
newly recorded data will be lost. This data will also
be lost if you turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
BR-1600_R_e.book 154 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
155
Creating drum patterns
Section 3
Creating drum patterns
using step recording
1.
After carrying out the steps described in “Preparing for
recording,” press [F2] (STEP).
The Step Recording screen will appear.
fig.20-016d
“CUR” indicates the current input position (in measures,
beats, and clock units). This value will change whenever
you move the input position using [CURSOR].
In addition, the abbreviated names of the various drum
sounds are displayed on the left-hand side of this screen.
The actual names corresponding to these abbreviations
are as follows.
2.
Press [F2] (>>RES<<) or [F3] (<<RES>>) as many times
as necessary to change the step recording resolution.
fig.20-016aa
[F2] (>>RES<<)
Each time this button is pressed, magnification of the
step recording grid is decreased.
[F3] (<<RES>>)
Each time this button is pressed, magnification of the
step recording grid is increased.
As the degree of grid magnification changes, the
resolution indicated by “RES” changes as follows.
RES:
( ) Allows input in quarter-note units.
( ) Allows input in quarter-note triplet units.
( ) Allows input in eighth-note units.
( ) Allows input in eighth-note triplet units.
( ) Allows input in sixteenth-note units.
( ) Allows input in sixteenth-note triplet units.
( ) Allows input in thirty-second-note units.
( ) Allows input in thirty-second-note triplet units.
OFF Allows input at the finest resolution—i.e., 96
clock units per quarter note.
3.
Move the cursor to the position where a drum sound is
to be input, and then use the TIME/VALUE dial to
insert a “
●
” at that position.
fig.020-016bd
( ) The drum will be played at a high volume.
( ) The drum will be played at a moderately high volume.
( ) The drum will be played at a medium volume.
( ) The drum will be played at a moderately low volume.
( ) The drum will be played at a low volume.
Nothing (empty) No drum sound will be played.
The following buttons can also be used to move the
input position at this time.
[ZERO] Moves the input position to the start of the song.
[FF] Moves the input position forward by one
resolution unit as set using “RES.”
[REW] Moves the input position backward by one
resolution unit as set using “RES.”
When working with long patterns or high resolutions, it is
likely that all of the step recording data will not fit into a
single screen. In such a case, you can press one of the PAGE
SCROLL buttons to scroll the display to the left or the right.
In addition, if you want to program a drum not currently
shown on the left of the screen, move the cursor up or down
accordingly. This action will cause the step-recording grid to
scroll up or down, displaying other drum sounds.
Drum name Note number Abbreviation
High tom D 3 (50) T4
Hi- Mid Tom C 3 (48) T3
Mid tom A 2 (45) T2
Low tom F 2 (41) T1
Crash cymbal C#3 (49) CY
Ride cymbal D#3 (51) RC
Open hi-hat A#2 (46) OH
Closed hi-hat F#2 (42) CH
Snare 1 D 2 (38) S1
Kick 1 C 2 (36) K1
Kick 2 B 1 (35) K2
Cow bell G#3 (56) CB
Claves D#5 (75) CL
Stick G 1 (31) ST
Snare 2 E 2 (40) S2
High Q D#1 (27) HQ
Metronome (click) A 1 (33) M1
Metronome (bell) A#1 (34) M2
BR-1600_R_e.book 155 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
156
Creating drum patterns
When working on drum patterns created using a method
such as real-time recording, drum sounds may be
positioned at a resolution greater than that set using
“RES.” In this type of situation, the “
●
” may appear to
be split, and it will not be possible to edit the
corresponding performance data as is. In order to edit
this type of data, you will first of all need to increase the
resolution to match the drum sound’s input position.
4.
Press [PLAY] to check whether the pattern is as
required.
[PLAY] will light up and the drum pattern will be
played back.
Press [STOP] at the point where you want to stop playback.
5.
If you want to change the drum kit or tempo used for
checking, press [F4] (SETUP).
The Step Recording Setup screen will appear.
fig.20-016ed
6.
Move the cursor to “Tempo” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select a suitable tempo for checking your pattern.
fig.20-016fd
The tempo can be set anywhere within a range of 25.0 to
250.0 BPM. (Beats Per Minute—A value that indicates
the tempo in terms of the number of quarter notes
occurring in one minute.)
Note that the tempo set here is used only for checking that
the drum pattern is as required. In other words, this tempo
will not be saved with the drum pattern. (It is not possible
to set a specific tempo for a drum pattern.)
7.
Move the cursor to “Drum Kit” and select a new drum
kit using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-016gd
8.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The Step Recording Setup screen will be closed and the
original Step Recording screen will appear.
9.
Press [EXIT/NO] to end step recording.
The Drum Pattern Edit screen will appear once again.
fig.20-210d
10.
If you want to store the drum pattern that you have just
recorded, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns will
appear.
fig.20-024d
11.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the drum pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
Only user drum patterns and song drum patterns may
be selected for saving drum pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset drum pattern at this time.
12.
Press [F4] (GO).
The drum pattern will be saved. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that saving has been
completed.
If you select a different drum pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, all of the
newly recorded data will be lost. This data will also
be lost if you turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
BR-1600_R_e.book 156 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
157
Creating drum patterns
Section 3
Correcting drum patterns
(Microscope)
Microscope is used to make detailed corrections to drum
patterns. In specific terms, this function displays a drum
pattern’s performance data in list format so that any of the
corresponding parameters can be corrected as required.
1.
Press [F3] (MICROSCOPE) on the Drum Pattern Edit
screen.
The Microscope screen will appear.
fig.20-025d
Performance data is displayed on this screen as follows.
fig.20-026d_drumsevent.bmp
2.
Move the cursor to the item of performance data to be
modified.
fig.20-026ad
3.
Modify the performance data as described below.
To change a drum sound:
1) Move the cursor to the drum sound field.
fig.20-026bd
2) Select a new drum sound using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The performance data will be updated with this new
drum sound setting.
To change a drum’s volume:
1) Move the cursor to “ACC” field.
fig.20-026cd
2) Set a new velocity value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Larger velocity values produce higher volumes and vice
versa.
To change a drum’s gate time:
1) Move the cursor to “GATE” field.
fig.20-026dd
2) Set a new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The performance data will be updated with this new
gate time setting.
To move an item of performance data:
1) Press [F2] (MOVE).
fig.20-026ed
2) Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the time position
to which the performance data is to be moved.
3) Press [ENTER/YES].
The performance data will be moved to this new
position.
• When the BR-1600CD’s internal drum sounds are
being played, the Gate Time setting is ignored and
all sounds continue for the same amount of time;
accordingly, the Gate Time setting may be left at “1.”
• When the BR-1600CD is playing drum sounds by
transmitting MIDI data to an external drum machine
connected to the MIDI OUT port, it is important that
the gate time be set to match the specifications
described in the drum machine’s manual.
BR-1600_R_e.book 157 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
158
Creating drum patterns
To delete an item of performance data:
Press [F3] (DELETE).
fig.20-026fd
The selected item of performance data will be deleted.
To insert a new item of performance data:
Press [F1] (INSERT).
fig.20-026gd
An item of performance data will be inserted at the
current position.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] to end Microscope editing.
The Drum Pattern Edit screen will appear once again.
fig.20-210d
5.
If you want to store the drum pattern that you have just
corrected, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns will
appear.
fig.20-024d
6.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the drum pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
Only user drum patterns and song drum patterns may
be selected for saving drum pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset drum pattern at this time.
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
The drum pattern will be saved. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that saving has been
completed.
If you select a different drum pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, all of the
corrected data will be lost. This data will also be lost
if you turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
BR-1600_R_e.book 158 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
159
Creating drum patterns
Section 3
Changing the drum pattern’s
groove (Swing)
The Swing function allows you to produce a swing-type
groove in your drum patterns by delaying the timing at
which notes with weaker beats are played.
1.
Move the cursor to “Swing Pos.” on the Drum Pattern
Edit screen.
fig.20-029d
2.
Select the type of note used to generate swing using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
OFF: No swing will be applied.
( ): Swing will be generated in units of eighth notes.
( ): Swing will be generated in units of sixteenth notes.
3.
Move the cursor to “Rate” and set the desired amount
of swing.
fig.20-029ad
50%:
No swing will be applied. Weaker beats will be played
exactly halfway between the stronger beats.
51%–100%:
Swing will be generated in accord with the specified
value. A setting of 100% delays the weak beats by the
greatest possible degree, placing them at almost exactly
the same time position as the stronger beats that follow
them.
fig.20-032
4.
Press [PLAY] to check whether the degree of swing is
correct for your song.
Playback of the drum pattern will start. Press [STOP] to
end playback.
5.
If you want to store the swing setting you have just
made, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns will
appear.
fig.20-024d
6.
Move the cursor to “TO:” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the drum pattern to which the data is to be
saved.
Only user drum patterns and song drum patterns may
be selected for saving drum pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset drum pattern at this time.
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
The swing settings will be saved together with the drum
pattern. When the message “Complete!” appears, it
indicates that saving has been completed.
50%
75%
90%
Weaker
beat Weaker
beat Weaker
beat Weaker
beat
If you select a different drum pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, your new
swing setting will be lost. This setting will also be
lost if you turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
Applying swing does not change the actual
performance data stored in a drum pattern.
Regardless of whether or not swing is actually
applied, performance data will always be displayed
at the same positions when you are using
Microscope.
BR-1600_R_e.book 159 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
160
Creating drum patterns
Changing a drum pattern’s
name
1.
Move the cursor to the pattern name as displayed on
the Drum Pattern Edit screen.
fig.20-032ad
2.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to change
the name character by character.
fig.20-32bd
3.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) to store this new name.
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns will
appear.
fig.20-124d
4.
Move the cursor to “TO:” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the drum pattern to which the data is to be
saved.
Only user drum patterns and song drum patterns may
be selected for saving drum pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset drum pattern at this time.
5.
Press [F4] (GO).
The new name will be saved together with the drum
pattern. When the message “Complete!” appears, it
indicates that saving has been completed.
Copying drum patterns
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) on the Drum Pattern
Edit screen.
2.
Press [F2] (=>COPY).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns will
appear.
fig.20-224d
3.
Move the cursor to the “FROM:” field and select the
drum pattern to be copied using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-032cd
4.
Move the cursor to “TO:” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the drum pattern to which the data is to be
copied.
fig.20-032dd
Only user drum patterns and song drum patterns may
be selected as destinations for copying. In other words,
you will not be able to select a preset drum pattern at
this time.
5.
Press [F4] (GO).
Copying of the drum pattern will begin. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that copying
has been completed.
If you select a different drum pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, the new
name will be lost. This name will also be lost if you
turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
The drum pattern selected as the copy destination
will be overwritten in this process. As it will not be
possible to restore the corresponding data, care
should be taken to ensure that important patterns
are not accidentally overwritten in this way.
BR-1600_R_e.book 160 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
161
Creating drum patterns
Section 3
Deleting drum patterns
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) on the Drum Pattern
Edit screen.
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns will
appear.
fig.20-324d
2.
Press [F3] (=>DELETE).
The Delete screen for drum patterns will appear.
fig.20-037d
3.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the drum pattern to
be deleted and press [F4] (GO).
A confirmation message will appear.
fig.20-038d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES].
Deletion of the drum pattern will begin. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that deletion
has been completed.
Loading drum patterns from the
CD-R/RW drive (SMF Import)
The BR-1600CD allows you to read Standard MIDI Files (or
SMFs) from CD-R/RW discs into user drum patterns and
song drum patterns.
Precautions for SMF import
●
CR-R/RW discs of ISO9660 Level 2, Mode 1 format are
supported for import. It will not be possible to import
data from discs of any other format.
●
SMFs of up to 240 KB in size and 8 measures may be
imported. It will not be possible to import files that
exceed this size and the number of mesures limit.
fig.20-039
1.
Using a PC, burn a CD-R/RW disc containing the SMFs
you want to import.
2.
Insert this CD-R/RW disc into the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/
RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
3.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.20-040d
• Preset drum patterns cannot be deleted.
• As it will not be possible to restore deleted drum
patterns, care should be taken to ensure that
important patterns are not accidentally deleted.
BR-1600_R_e.book 161 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
162
Creating drum patterns
4.
Press [F3] (SMF).
The SMF screen will appear.
fig.20-041d
5.
Move the cursor to the IMPORT icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (IMPORT).
The SMF Import screen will appear, displaying a list of
the SMFs contained on the CD-R/RW.
fig.20-042d
If files are grouped into different folders on the current
CD-R/RW, the folder names will be displayed together
with the folder icon ( ). To view the list of files within
a folder, move the cursor to the corresponding folder
name and press [ENTER/YES].
6.
Move the cursor to the SMF to be imported and press
[F4] (SELECT).
A screen in which you can select the MIDI channel of
what you intend to import will appear.
fig.20-043d
7.
Move the cursor to “MIDI Ch.” and select the MIDI
channel of the data to be imported using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
Only data associated with the specified MIDI channel
will be extracted from the selected SMF and imported as
a drum pattern.
fig.20-043ad
In the case of SMFs supporting the GM, GS, or XG
standards, drum-type performance data is generally
assigned to MIDI channel 10. By setting the MIDI
channel to 10 in such a case, you can ensure that only the
drum data will be extracted from the SMF. (Note that
drum-type data will not necessarily be assigned to
channel 10, and it will be important to confirm the actual
channel in advance.)
8.
Move the cursor to “Type” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “DRUMS.”
9.
Move the cursor to “Pattern” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the drum pattern to which the data is to be
imported.
It will not be possible to select preset drum patterns as
destinations for SMF import.
10.
Press [F4] (GO).
Importing of the selected SMF will begin. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that the
import has been completed.
BR-1600_R_e.book 162 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
163
Section 3
Using bass
Setting the track type
To use bass, you must first of all set up Track 13/14 as a bass
track using its track type setting.
fig.20-044
1.
Press [TRACK TYPE SELECT].
The Track Type Select screen will appear.
fig.20-003d
2.
Press [F3].
The track type for Track 13/14 will switch each time this
button is pressed.
fig.20-046d
Track Types
AUDIO:
The track will be used for recorded audio.
BASS:
The track will be used for bass.
You should select “BASS” here.
The BASS indicator from TRACK TYPE SELECT will
light up to indicate that Track 13/14 has been set up for
use as a bass track.
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the top screen.
You will now be able to use bass.
4.
If you wish to store the track type setting, save the
current song (p. 72).
Playing bass
Simply changing the track type may not be sufficient to allow
bass to be played. Use the following procedure in such a
case.
1.
Press the track button for Track 13/14 several times
until it lights up.
Pressing the button repeatedly allows you to cycle
through the available choices, which are: Flashing
→
On
→
Off.
Off:
No bass sounds will be played.
Flashing:
Bass sounds will be played only when the BR-1600CD is
recording or performing playback.
On:
Bass sounds will be played even when the BR-1600CD is
stopped.
2.
Raise the fader for Track 13/14 to a suitable level.
You will now be able to hear the bass sounds.
1
3
2
BR-1600_R_e.book 163 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
164
Using bass
Selecting bass sounds
Now that we can hear the bass, let’s select a bass sound to
work with.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Press [F1] (SETUP).
The dialog for pattern setup will appear.
fig.20-006d
4.
Move the cursor to “Bass Tone” and use the TIME/
VALUE dial to select a bass sound.
The bass sound selection will change.
fig.20-050d
Although playback may stop for a period of 1 to 2
seconds when the bass sound is changed, this is normal
and is not the result of a malfunction.
5.
When you have selected the bass sound that you want to use,
press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
6.
If you wish to store the bass sound selection, save the
current song (p. 72).
Selecting bass patterns
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Move the cursor to the bass pattern field and select a
pattern using the TIME/VALUE dial or the VALUE 3
knob.
Playback of the newly selected bass pattern will start as
soon as the previously selected bass pattern has ended.
4.
When you have selected the bass pattern that you want
to use, press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the
top screen.
5.
If you wish to store the bass pattern selection, save the
current song (p. 72).
The bass sound selection is common to all bass
patterns. It is not possible to store a different bass
sound for each different pattern.
The user bass patterns and song bass patterns
contained in the BR-1600CD at the time of purchase
are empty; you won’t hear anything if you select one
of them. If you want to hear bass immediately after
setting up the BR-1600CD for the first time, select a
preset bass pattern.
“*TMP” appears for the bass pattern immediately
after its data is recorded or edited. If you try to select
a different bass pattern with the TIME/VALUE dial
while the cursor is positioned above this, the cursor
turns white. If you press [ENTER/YES] at this point,
the cursor reverts to black, and the bass pattern
number is confirmed. If you do not want to confirm
it, press [EXIT/NO]; “*TMP” is indicated again, and
the bass pattern reverts to the state it was in
immediately after editing. This allows you to avoid
inadvertently erasing data you have edited.
BR-1600_R_e.book 164 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
165
Using bass
Section 3
Specifying bass pattern chords
You can specify bass pattern chords as described below to
hear how the bass pattern will sound playing different
chords.
All preset bass patterns have been created based on the
chord C. When you specify a chord, however, the
individual notes that make up the bass pattern will be
automatically adjusted so that the specified chord will
now be played.
Note that simply specifying a chord does not result in
the bass pattern being permanently changed. This action
only causes the final performance to be matched to the
specified chord. As a result, there is no need to worry
about permanently changing bass pattern data by
specifying chords.
Chord specifications are common to all bass patterns. It
is not possible to store a different chord specifications for
each different pattern.
Chord specification is carried out as follows:
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Press [F1] (SETUP).
The dialog for pattern setup will appear.
fig.20-006d
4.
Move the cursor to “Chord” and select the desired
chord using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear the bass performance change to
match the selected chord.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
If you wish to store the chord specification, save the
current song (p. 72).
Changing the bass pattern’s
tempo
The tempo for the playback of bass patterns will be the same
as that used for the playback of drum patterns and Loop
Phrases.
For details on how to specify a tempo, refer to “Changing the
drum pattern tempo” (p. 151).
BR-1600_R_e.book 165 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
166
Creating bass patterns
When you cannot find a suitable bass pattern for your song
among the BR-1600CD’s preset bass patterns, you can easily
create an original pattern as described below. Either one of
the following two methods can be used to do this.
●
Real-time recording
Real-time recording allows you to tap the track buttons in
time with a metronome and to record the performance data
produced. The bass pattern will be repeated over and over,
with new performance data being constantly mixed into it.
Furthermore, a quantize function can be used to fix any
slight deviations in the timing of your performance.
●
Step recording
Use step recording to enter bass notes one by one while the
pattern is not being played back. If you find it difficult to
create satisfactory patterns using real-time recording, use this
function to easily and conveniently produce the desired
results.
Preparing for recording
When a MIDI keyboard is connected to the MIDI IN
port, you will be able to use this keyboard to perform
real-time recording. Note that there is no need to set a
MIDI channel for the MIDI keyboard in such a case (p.
234).
Before you use either real-time recording or step recording,
you will need to select the bass pattern to be recorded.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Press [F3] (EDIT).
The Bass Pattern Edit screen will appear.
fig.20-051d
4.
Move the cursor to the pattern number and select the
number of the bass pattern to be recorded using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-051ad
If you press [PLAY] at this time, you will be able to hear
the selected bass pattern.
The user bass patterns and song bass patterns contained
in the BR-1600CD at the time of purchase are empty; you
won’t hear anything if you select one of them.
5.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
number of beats and measures in the bass pattern.
The display for the bass pattern will change to “*TMP.”
BR-1600_R_e.book 166 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
167
Creating bass patterns
Section 3
Creating bass patterns using
real-time recording
1.
After carrying out the steps described in “Preparing for
recording,” press [F1] (REALTIME).
The Real-Time Recording standby screen will appear
and the metronome will start.
fig.20-052d
2.
Move the cursor to “BPM” and select a suitable tempo
for recording using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-052ad
Note that this only sets the tempo for recording—the
bass pattern is not recorded at this tempo. (It is not
possible to set a specific tempo for a bass pattern.)
If you tap your finger on [TAP] four or more times, the
tempo will be set accordingly.
3.
Move the cursor to “METRO.LVL.” and set the
metronome level using the TIME/VALUE dial.
4.
Press [PLAY].
Real-time recording will start after a one-measure countdown.
fig.20-053d
5.
Use the track buttons to play the desired bass pattern
and use the track fader 1 to set the velocity (dynamics)
of the sounds.
fig.20-053a
The relationship between track buttons and bass notes is
as follows.
Note also that you can use [ ] and [ ] from
CURSOR to shift up or down by one octave accordingly.
Multiple bass notes cannot be played simultaneously. If
a bass note is recorded at the same time position as a
previously recorded note, priority will be given to the
newer note and only this will be retained (in other
words, the previously-recorded note will be deleted).
Note that a short delay may occur between deletion of
the older note and playback of the following notes. This
may make it difficult to record your pattern, and
therefore, care should be taken to ensure that you do not
duplicate performance data in this way.
6.
If you want to erase an error in the recorded pattern,
press [F3] (ERASE ON).
The message “ERASE:ON” will appear and bass erase
mode will be activated. In this mode, hold down the
track button corresponding to the bass note you want to
erase. Any of these bass notes played in the pattern
while you are pressing the track button will be erased.
When you have finished erasing bass sounds, press [F3]
(ERASE OFF).
7.
Press [STOP] at the point where you want to stop
recording.
The Bass Pattern Edit screen will appear once again.
Track button Note number
[1] C 1 (24)
[2] C#1 (28)
[3] D 1 (29)
[4] D#1 (30)
[5] E 1 (31)
[6] F 1 (32)
[7] F#1 (33)
[8] G 1 (34)
[9/10] G#1 (35)
[11/12] A 1 (36)
[13/14] A#1 (37)
[15/16] B 1 (38)
[V-TRACK] + [1] C 2 (39)
[V-TRACK] + [2] C#2 (40)
[V-TRACK] + [3] D 2 (41)
[V-TRACK] + [4] D#2 (42)
[V-TRACK] + [5] E 2 (43)
[V-TRACK] + [6] F 2 (44)
[V-TRACK] + [7] F#2 (45)
[V-TRACK] + [8] G 2 (46)
[V-TRACK] + [9/10] G#2 (47)
[V-TRACK] + [11/12] A 2 (48)
[V-TRACK] + [13/14] A#2 (49)
[V-TRACK] + [15/16] B 2 (50)
BR-1600_R_e.book 167 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
168
Creating bass patterns
8.
If you want to store the bass pattern that you have just
recorded, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for bass patterns will appear.
fig.20-054d
9.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the bass pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
Only user bass patterns and song bass patterns may be
selected for saving bass pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset bass pattern at this time.
10.
Press [F4] (GO).
The bass pattern will be saved. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that saving has been
completed.
Practicing before recording
(Rehearsal)
Whenever rehearsal is turned on, you will be able to play
bass sounds without recording them, even if real-time
recording is in progress. This feature comes in very handy
when you want to practice playing a bass pattern.
1.
Press [F2] (REHEARSAL ON) in real-time recording
mode.
The message “REHEARSAL:ON” will appear and
rehearsal mode will be activated.
fig.20-055d
In this mode, you can press a track button to play its bass
note without the corresponding data being recorded.
2.
When you have finished rehearsing, press [F2]
(REHEARSAL OFF) to return to real-time recording
mode.
The message “REHEARSAL:OFF” will appear and real-
time mode will be reactivated. When you now press a
track button to play a bass note, the corresponding
performance data will be recorded.
Recording in perfect time (Quantize)
With real-time recording, the data generated by pressing a
track button is recorded as is, and any imperfections in
timing will be reflected in this performance data. If you don’t
want to hear these imperfections during playback, you can
use the BR-1600CD’s quantize feature to automatically move
performance data to the nearest quarter note, eighth note,
sixteenth note, etc., before the data is actually recorded.
1.
Move the cursor to “QTZ” on the Real-Time Recording
standby screen.
fig.20-056d
2.
Select a quantization setting using the TIME/VALUE
dial.
fig.20-056a
QTZ:
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest quarter note.
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest quarter-note triplet.
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest eighth note.
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest eighth-note triplet.
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest sixteenth note.
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest sixteenth-note triplet.
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest thirty-second note.
( ) Moves bass notes to the nearest thirty-second-
note triplet.
OFF Quantization will not be carried out, and
performance data will be recorded as is.
3.
Press [PLAY].
The BR-1600CD will start recording.
Even during the recording process, you can select a new
quantization setting by changing the “QTZ” value using
the TIME/VALUE dial.
BR-1600_R_e.book 168 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
169
Creating bass patterns
Section 3
Creating bass patterns using
step recording
1.
After carrying out the steps described in “Preparing for
recording,” press [F2] (STEP).
The Step Recording standby screen will appear.
fig.20-065d
2.
Move the cursor to “RES” and change the step
recording resolution using the TIME/VALUE dial.
RES:
( ) Allows input in quarter-note units.
( ) Allows input in quarter-note triplet units.
( ) Allows input in eighth-note units.
( ) Allows input in eighth-note triplet units.
( ) Allows input in sixteenth-note units.
( ) Allows input in sixteenth-note triplet units.
( ) Allows input in thirty-second-note units.
( ) Allows input in thirty-second-note triplet units.
OFF Allows input at the finest resolution—i.e., 96
clock units per quarter note.
3.
Move the cursor to “GATE” and select the duration of
the note to be input (i.e., the gate time) as a percentage
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
GATE (gate time): 10% to 95%
When the value is lowered, the more staccato the
performance will become.
With certain sounds, this can make the bass seem as if it
is being played with the strings muted. When the value
is raised, the more legato (i.e., less staccato) the
performance will become. Normally, a setting of
approximately 80% will be appropriate.
4.
Move the cursor to “ACC” and set the volume of the
note to be input using the TIME/VALUE dial.
ACC (accent): 1 to 127
The volume is increased as you raise the value, while
lower values result in lower volume. Ordinarily, this can
be set to 100. When you want to add an accent at certain
locations, you can change the value accordingly.
5.
Press CURSOR [ ] and [ ] to shift the input
performance data up or down by one octave.
OCTAVE SHIFT: -2 to +2
[ ]: The data is moved up by one octave.
[ ]: The data is moved down by one octave.
In total, the data can be raised or lowered by a maximum
of two octaves.
6.
Press the track button for the note to be entered.
Performance data will be input each time a track button is
pressed. The length of the performance data is determined
by the length of the note set using “RES.” The duration of
the note played by the performance data is determined by
applying the “GATE” setting to this length.
The volume of the note played by the performance data
will correspond to the “ACC” setting.
7.
Press [F4] (REST) at locations where a rest is to be input.
A rest of the length set by “RES” will be input.
8.
If you want to delete an item of performance data or a rest
that has been input incorrectly, press [F1] (STEP BACK).
The most recently input item of performance data or rest
will be deleted. Each time this button is pressed, the next
newest item of data or rest will be deleted.
9.
Input all of the required performance data and rests by
repeating Steps 2 through 8.
When recording has been completed as far as the end of
the set pattern length, “[END]” will be displayed in the
area for measures, and no further input will be possible.
• A pattern to be used for step recording must be
originally empty. If you select a pattern that already
contains data, the message “Erase OK?” may be
displayed during the procedure described below. In
such a case, press [ENTER/YES] to continue step
recording. All of the pre-existing data will be erased
to allow recording to be carried out in this way. If
you do not want to erase the pattern’s data, press
[EXIT/NO]. Step recording will be canceled and the
display will return to the Bass Pattern Edit screen.
• It will not be possible to restore data that has been
erased in this way. As a result, care should be taken
during step recording to ensure that important
performance data is not accidentally erased.
BR-1600_R_e.book 169 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
170
Creating bass patterns
10.
Press [EXIT/NO] to end step recording.
The Bass Pattern Edit screen will appear once again.
fig.20-066d
11.
If you want to store the bass pattern that you have just
recorded, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for bass patterns will appear.
fig.20-067d
12.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the drum pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
Only user bass patterns and song bass patterns may be
selected for saving bass pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset bass pattern at this time.
13.
Press [F4] (GO).
The bass pattern will be saved. When the message “Complete!”
appears, it indicates that saving has been completed.
Correcting bass patterns
(Microscope)
Microscope is used to made detailed corrections to bass
patterns. In specific terms, this function displays a bass
pattern’s performance data in list format so that any of the
corresponding parameters can be corrected as required.
1.
Press [F3] (MICROSCOPE) on the Bass Pattern Edit
screen.
The Microscope screen will appear.
fig.20-068d
Performance data is displayed on this screen as follows.
fig.20-069d
2.
Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you
want to change and select a new value using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
To change a bass note:
1) Move the cursor to “NOTE” field.
fig.20-069ad
2) Select a new note number using the TIME/VALUE
dial.
The performance data will be updated with this new
note setting.
To change a bass note’s volume:
1) Move the cursor to “ACC” field.
2) Set a new velocity value using the TIME/VALUE
dial.
Larger velocity values produce higher volumes and
vice versa.
If you select a different drum pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, all of the
newly recorded data will be lost. This data will also
be lost if you turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
BR-1600_R_e.book 170 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
171
Creating bass patterns
Section 3
To change a bass note’s gate time:
1) Move the cursor to “GATE” field.
fig.20-069b
2) Set a new value using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The performance data will be updated with this new
gate time setting.
To move an item of performance data:
1) Press [F2] (MOVE).
2) Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the time position
to which the performance data is to be moved.
3) Press [ENTER/YES].
The performance data will be moved to this new
position.
To delete an item of performance data:
1) Press [F3] (DELETE).
The selected item of performance data will be deleted.
To insert a new item of performance data:
1) Press [F1] (INSERT).
An item of performance data will be inserted at the
current position.
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to end Microscope editing.
The Bass Pattern Edit screen will appear once again.
fig.20-151d
4.
If you want to store the bass pattern that you have just
corrected, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for bass patterns will
appear.
fig.20-054d
5.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the bass pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
Only user bass patterns and song bass patterns may be
selected for saving bass pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset bass pattern at this time.
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
The bass pattern will be saved. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that saving has been
completed.
Measure Beat
Tick
If you select a different bass pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, all of the
corrected data will be lost. This data will also be lost
if you turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
BR-1600_R_e.book 171 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
172
Creating bass patterns
Changing the bass pattern’s
groove (Swing)
The Swing function allows you to produce a swing-type
groove in your bass patterns by delaying the timing at which
notes with weaker beats are played.
1.
Move the cursor to “Swing Pos.” on the Bass Pattern
Edit screen.
fig.20-072d
2.
Select the type of note used to generate swing using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
OFF: No swing will be applied.
( ): Swing will be generated in units of eighth notes.
( ): Swing will be generated in units of sixteenth notes.
3.
Move the cursor to “Rate” and set the desired amount
of swing.
50%:
No swing will be applied. Weaker beats will be played
exactly halfway between the stronger beats.
51%–100%:
Swing will be generated in accord with the specified
value. A setting of 100% delays the weak beats by the
greatest possible degree, placing them at almost exactly
the same time position as the stronger beats that follow
them.
fig.20-073
4.
Press [PLAY] to check whether the degree of swing is
correct for your song.
Playback of the drum pattern will start. Press [STOP] to
end playback.
5.
If you want to store the swing setting you have just
made, press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for bass patterns will
appear.
fig.20-054d
6.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the bass pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
Only user bass patterns and song bass patterns may be
selected for saving bass pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset bass pattern at this time.
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
The swing pattern will be saved together with the bass
pattern. When the message “Complete!” appears, it
indicates that saving has been completed.
50%
75%
90%
Weaker
beat Weaker
beat Weaker
beat Weaker
beat
Applying swing does not change the actual
performance data stored in a bass pattern.
Regardless of whether or not swing is actually
applied, performance data will always be displayed
at the same positions when you are using
Microscope.
BR-1600_R_e.book 172 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
173
Creating bass patterns
Section 3
Changing a bass pattern’s name
1.
Move the cursor to the pattern name as displayed on
the Bass Pattern Edit screen.
fig.20-1000d
2.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to change
the name character by character.
3.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) to store this new name.
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for bass patterns will
appear.
fig.20-154d
4.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the bass pattern to
which the data is to be saved.
Only user bass patterns and song bass patterns may be
selected for saving bass pattern data. You will not be
able to select a preset bass pattern at this time.
5.
Press [F4] (GO).
The new name will now be stored together with the bass
pattern, and when the message “Complete!” appears, it
indicates that this operation has been completed.
Copying bass patterns
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) on the Bass Pattern Edit
screen.
2.
Press [F2] (=>COPY).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for bass patterns will
appear.
fig.20-254d
3.
Move the cursor to the “FROM:” field and select the
bass pattern to be copied using the TIME/VALUE dial.
4.
Move the cursor to “TO:” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the bass pattern to which the data is to be
copied.
Only user bass patterns and song bass patterns may be
selected as destinations for copying. In other words, you
will not be able to select a preset bass pattern at this time.
5.
Press [F4] (GO).
Copying of the bass pattern will begin. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that copying
has been completed.
If you select a different bass pattern or load a new
song without saving the current pattern, the new
name setting will be lost. This name will also be lost
if you turn off the BR-1600CD before saving.
The bass pattern selected as the copy destination
will be overwritten in this process. As it will not be
possible to restore the corresponding data, care
should be taken to ensure that important patterns
are not accidentally overwritten in this way.
BR-1600_R_e.book 173 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
174
Creating bass patterns
Deleting bass patterns
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) on the Bass Pattern Edit
screen.
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for bass patterns will
appear.
fig.20-354dp
2.
Press [F3] (=>DELETE).
The Bass Pattern Delete screen will appear.
ig.20-078d_bassfrom.bmp
3.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the bass pattern to
be deleted and press [F4] (GO).
A confirmation message will appear.
fig.20-079d_bassfrom.bmp
4.
Press [ENTER/YES].
Deletion of the bass pattern will begin. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that deletion
has been completed.
Loading bass patterns from the
CD-R/RW drive (SMF Import)
The BR-1600CD allows you to read Standard MIDI Files (or
SMFs) from CD-R/RW discs into user bass patterns and song
bass patterns.
Precautions for SMF import
●
CR-R/RW discs of ISO9660 Level 2, Mode 1 format are
supported for import. It will not be possible to import
data from discs of any other format.
●
SMFs of up to 240 KB in size may be imported. It will not
be possible to import files that exceed this size limit.
fig.20-080
1.
Using a PC, burn a CD-R/RW disc containing the SMFs
you want to import.
2.
Insert this CD-R/RW disc into the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/
RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
3.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.20-081d
4.
Press [F3] (SMF).
The SMF Menu screen will appear.
fig.20-082d
• As it will not be possible to restore deleted bass
patterns, care should be taken to ensure that
important patterns are not accidentally deleted.
• Preset patterns cannot be deleted.
BR-1600_R_e.book 174 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
175
Creating bass patterns
Section 3
5.
Press [F1] (IMPORT).
The SMF Import screen will appear, displaying a list of
the SMFs contained on the CD-R/RW.
fig.20-083d
If files are grouped into different folders on the current
CD-R/RW, the folder names will be displayed together
with the folder icon ( ). To view the list of files within
a folder, move the cursor to the corresponding cursor
name and press [ENTER/YES].
6.
Move the cursor to the SMF to be imported and press
[F4] (SELECT).
A screen will appear to allow the setting of a MIDI
channel for this SMF.
fig.20-084d
7.
Move the cursor to “MIDI Ch.” and select a MIDI
channel for the SMF to be imported using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
fig.20-084ad
Only the data with the corresponding MIDI channel will
be extracted from the selected SMF and imported as a
bass pattern.
In the case of SMFs supporting the GM, GS, or XG
standards, bass-type performance data is generally
assigned to MIDI channel 2. By setting the MIDI channel
to 2 in such a case, you can ensure that only the bass data
will be extracted from the SMF. (Note that bass-type data
will not necessarily be assigned to channel 2, and it will
be important to confirm the actual channel in advance.)
8.
Move the cursor to “Type” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select “BASS.”
fig.20-084bd
9.
Move the cursor to “Pattern” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the bass pattern to which the data is to be
imported.
fig.20-084c
It will not be possible to select preset bass patterns as
destinations for SMF import.
10.
Press [F4] (GO).
Importing of the selected SMF will begin. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that the
import has been completed.
BR-1600_R_e.book 175 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
176
Using Loop Phrases
One method often used when putting songs together
involves the creation first of all of a section of basic audio
data of one or two measures in length—i.e., a Loop Phrase—
and the basic song structure is then formed by repeating this
section the required number of times.
The BR-1600CD supports this type of song creation method
and allows you to freely arrange and play Loop Phrases
within rhythm arrangements.
Setting the track type
To use Loop Phrases, you must first of all set up Track 11/12
as a Loop Phrase track using its track type setting.
fig.20-085
1.
Press [TRACK TYPE SELECT].
The Track Type Select screen will appear.
fig.20-086d
2.
Press [F2] to select “LOOP PHRASE” for Track 11/12
track type.
The track type for Track 11/12 will switch each time this
button is pressed.
fig.20-087d
Track Types
AUDIO:
The track will be used for recorded audio.
LOOP PHRASE:
The track will be used to play a Loop Phrase.
You should select “LOOP PHRASE” here.
The LOOP PHRASE. indicator from TRACK TYPE
SELECT will light up to indicate that Track 11/12 has
been set up for use as a Loop Phrase track.
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the top screen.
You will now be able to use Loop Phrases.
4.
If you wish to store the track type setting, save the
current song (p. 72).
Playing Loop Phrases
Simply changing the track type may not be sufficient to allow
Loop Phrases to be played. Use the following procedure in
such a case.
1.
Press the track button for Track 11/12 several times
until it is flashing.
Pressing the button repeatedly allows you to cycle
through the available choices, which are:
Flashing
→
Off.
Off:
No Loop Phrases will be played.
Flashing:
Loop Phrases will be played only when the BR-1600CD
is recording or performing playback.
2.
Raise the fader for Track 11/12 to a suitable level.
You will now be able to hear Loop Phrase playback.
1
3
2
BR-1600_R_e.book 176 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
177
Using Loop Phrases
Section 3
Selecting a Loop Phrase
A number of different Loop Phrases will have already been
stored on the BR-1600CD at the time of purchase. Let’s now
select one of these phrases to work with.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Move the cursor to the Loop Phrase field and select a
phrase using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-087ad
4.
Press [PLAY] to start playback.
The BR-1600CD will start playback, allowing you to hear
the selected Loop Phrase.
5.
When you have selected the Loop Phrase you want to
use, press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
If you wish to store the Loop Phrase selection, save the
current song (p. 72).
• The song Loop Phrases contained in the BR-1600CD
at the time of purchase are empty; you won’t hear
anything if you select one of them.
• It is important to remember that all user Loop
Phrases and song Loop Phrases will be deleted
whenever you initialize the BR-1600CD’s hard disk
(p. 270).
BR-1600_R_e.book 177 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
178
Using Loop Phrases
Changing the Loop Phrase tempo
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Move the cursor to “TEMPO” and select a suitable
tempo using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new setting changes
the playback tempo.
The tempo can be set anywhere within a range of 25.0 to
250.0 BPM. (Beats Per Minute—A value that indicates
the tempo in terms of the number of quarter notes
occurring in one minute.)
Loop Phrases can be adjusted to any tempo within a
range of 0.75 to 1.5 times its own tempo. Accordingly, if
the adjusted playback speed would result in a tempo
outside this range, the Loop Phrase will be played back
at either the range’s upper or lower limit. In such a case,
Loop Phrase playback will not be synchronized with the
playback of the drums and bass.
The quality of Loop Phrase playback may be reduced
when the adjusted tempo differs considerably from the
original tempo.
4.
After you have set the tempo, press [EXIT/NO] several
times to return to the top screen.
5.
If you wish to store the pattern’s tempo, save the
current song (p. 72).
Setting the tempo using [TAP]
In addition to setting the tempo using [CURSOR] and the
TIME/VALUE dial, you can also set it by tapping your finger
on [TAP] at the desired tempo. (Tap Tempo)
This feature proves extremely useful when you want to
match the playback tempo to that of an audio CD but don’t
know the actual BPM value.
To set the tempo in this way, tap your finger on [TAP] four
times with approximately the same interval between each
tap. The tempo will be set based on the average tapping
interval.
The tempo is common to all drum patterns, bass
patterns, and Loop Phrases.
BR-1600_R_e.book 178 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
179
Section 3
Creating Loop Phrases
Although the BR-1600CD already contains a number of Loop
Phrases at the time of purchase, you can also create your own
original Loop Phrases using portions of recorded audio
tracks or by importing audio data from commercially
available sampling CDs and the like.
Precautions for Loop Phrase creation
●
A single Loop Phrase can be anywhere between 0.5 and
30 seconds in length. Loop Phrase lengths outside this
range are not supported.
●
When a Loop Phrase is created, the number of measures
and the tempo are set to match the length of the phrase.
Specifically, the number of measures is set to one of the
following values.
... 1/32, 1/16, 1/8, 1/7, 1/6, 1/5, 1/4, 1/3, 1/2, 1, 2, 4, 8,
16, 32, 64, 128...
Note that even when Loop Phrase settings are being
modified, it will not be possible to set the length of a
Loop Phrase to any other value.
Using a portion of an audio track
A portion of any one of the current song’s tracks can be used
to create a Loop Phrase.
Once the start and end time positions for the desired portion
of an audio track have been selected, this portion can then be
converted into a Loop Phrase.
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
2.
Move the cursor to “BY TRACK” icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
The Loop Phrase Create By Track screen will be
displayed.
fig.20-091d
3.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the track to be copied.
fig.20-091ed
4.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the copy-destination track.
fig.20-091fd
A through H:
Loop Phrases from user banks A through H. These
phrases will be accessible from any song.
S:
Loop Phrases from the song bank. These phrases are
saved with the song in which they are used.
BR-1600_R_e.book 179 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
180
Creating Loop Phrases
5.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen, and then
use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
start and end time positions of the portion of audio to
be used as the Loop Phrase.
fig.20-092d
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you
select how the positions will be specified (i.e., by
measure, time, or marker).
The following parameters should now be set.
START (Start point):
Use this parameter to specify the start position within
the source track.
END (End point):
Use this parameter to specify the end position within the
source track.
If time values are used to specify the above points and
you then switch the specification method to measures or
markers, a plus (+) character may be displayed to warn
that indicated positions and actual positions are not the
same. If you want to specify points using measures or
markers, this discrepancy can be eliminated by using the
TIME/VALUE dial to make settings in each of the
relevant screens.
If you want to set the Loop Phrase as extending from the
start to the end of the song, press [F3] (SELECT ALL).
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
The BR-1600CD will begin creating the Loop Phrase.
When the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that
the phrase has been successfully created.
Using wave data on a CD-ROM/
R/RW disc (Loop Phrase Import)
If the audio data you want to use for a Loop Phrase is
contained as an AIFF or WAV file on a CD-ROM, CD-R, or
CD-RW disc, this data can be easily imported into a selected
phrase.
Using this function, you will be able to import audio data
from commercially available sampling CDs and from CD-R
or CD-RW discs that you have created using a PC.
Only data of the following format can be imported.
• WAV or AIFF audio
• Mono or stereo
• 8 or 16 bit
• 44.1 kHz sampling rate
• 0.5 seconds to 30 minutes in length.
CD-R/RW discs of ISO9660 Level 2, Mode 1 format are
supported for import. It will not be possible to import
data from discs of any other format.
fig.20-093
The name of the audio data file will be originally
assigned to the destination Loop Phrase. For more
details regarding the method for changing phrase
names, refer to “Specifying and modifying the source
loop phrase (Time Modify)” (p. 182).
1.
Insert a CD-ROM, CD-R, or CD-RW containing audio
data in WAV or AIFF format into the BR-1600CD’s CD-
R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
• If the Loop Phrase selected for creation already
contains data, this will be overwritten by the audio
data from the source track. As it will not be possible
to restore this data, care should be taken to ensure
that important Loop Phrases are not accidentally
overwritten in this way.
• If the current song contains newly recorded audio
data or newly modified settings, the message “Save
Current?” may be displayed during the above
procedure. If you want to store your audio data and
settings, press [ENTER/YES]. If this will not be
necessary, press [EXIT/NO].
If you press [EXIT/NO], a Loop Phrase is created
from the data most recently saved to the imported
source track. If there is no data saved, a silent Loop
Phrase is created.
2
3
4, 6, 8
3, 5, 7
7
1
BR-1600_R_e.book 180 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
181
Creating Loop Phrases
Section 3
2.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
3.
Move the cursor to the IMPORT icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (IMPORT) if the
IMPORT icon is currently displayed.
The Loop Phrase Import screen will appear, displaying a
list of the WAV and AIFF files contained on the CD.
fig.20-095d
If files are grouped into different folders on this disc, the
folder names are displayed together with the folder icon
( ). To view the list of files within a folder, move the
cursor to the corresponding folder name and press
[ENTER/YES].
4.
Press [F1] (TYPE) to change the type of audio file to be
imported.
This button toggles between WAV and AIFF formats.
5.
Position the cursor on the file you want to import.
6.
If you would like to hear the audio contained in the
file, press [F2] (PREVIEW).
The BR-1600CD will play the contents of the audio file (Preview).
Press [ENTER/YES] once again when you want to stop
playback.
7.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and use
the TIME/VALUE dial to select the Loop Phrase to
which the data is to be imported.
fig.20-096d
8.
Press [F4] (GO).
The BR-1600CD will begin importing the selected file
and creating the Loop Phrase.
To cancel writing while this operation is in process, press
[EXIT/NO]. When the message “Cancel?” appears, press
[ENTER/YES] to confirm cancellation. (A certain
amount of time may pass between pressing of [EXIT/
NO] and display of the confirmation message.)
When the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that
the Loop Phrase has been successfully created.
Reading all files at once
1.
Carry out Step 1 through Step 4 above.
2.
Press [F3] (ALL).
All files will be selected.
fig.20-097d
3.
Move the cursor to “TO” and select the bank in which
you want the data to be saved.
A through H:
Loop Phrases from user banks A through H.
S:
Loop Phrases from the song bank. These phrases are
saved with the song in which they are used.
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
The BR-1600CD will begin importing the selected files
and creating the Loop Phrases. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that the Loop Phrases
have all been successfully created.
In this case, the number of measures is set
automatically according to the length of the
imported Loop Phrase such that the BPM for these
measures are as close to 120.0 as possible. For details
regarding the modification of these settings, refer to
“Modifying Loop Phrase settings” (p. 183).
If the Loop Phrase selected for creation already
contains data, this will be overwritten by the audio
data from the source file. As it will not be possible to
restore this data, care should be taken to ensure that
important Loop Phrases are not accidentally
overwritten in this way.
BR-1600_R_e.book 181 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
182
Creating Loop Phrases
Specifying and modifying the
source loop phrase (Time Modify)
You are able to change the playback tempo of an existing
loop phrase and create a new loop phrase from that data.
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
2.
Move the cursor to TIME MODIFY icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
The Loop Phrase Time Modify screen will be displayed.
fig.20-500d
3.
Move the cursor to the “FROM” and select the original
loop phrase with the TIME/VALUE dial.
To modify all of the loop phrases in a bank at once, select
the “ALL” indication.
At this point, if you press [F2] (PREVIEW), the loop phrase
is played back. Press [ENTER/YES] to stop the playback.
4.
Move the cursor to “TO,” then with the TIME/VALUE
dial select the destination for the new loop phrase to be
created after the tempo is modified.
5.
Move the cursor to “NEW BPM” and set the modified
tempo you want using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The loop phrase’s original BPM are indicated under the
cursor position.
• The modified tempo range is 0.75 to 1.5 times that of the
original.
• If you had the “ALL” indicated in Step 3, then the original
BPM is not given.
You can set tempos in a range of 0.75 to 1.5 times the
tempos of the loop phrase in the selected bank. If different
loop phrases in the bank have different tempos, you can
make settings ranging from 0.75 times the fastest of the
tempos in the bank to 1.5 times the slowest tempo. If the
desired tempo cannot be set in the given range, “---” is
indicated for the “NEW BPM” setting, meaning you cannot
modify the tempo of any of the loop phrases in the bank.
Example 1)
The bank only contains loop phrases with a BPM setting
of 100.
100 x 0.75 = 75
100 x 1.5 = 150
→
The allowed settings fall in the range from 75 and
above and 150 and under (i.e., from 75 to 150).
Example 2)
The bank contains loop phrases with varying tempos,
with BPM settings of 100, 120, and 140.
The fastest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 140.
140 x 0.75 = 105
The slowest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 100.
100 x 1.5 = 150
→
The allowed settings fall in the range from 105 and
above and 150 and under (i.e., from 105 to 150).
Example 3)
The bank contains loop phrases with varying tempos,
with BPM settings of 50, 100, and 200.
The fastest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 200.
200 x 0.75 = 150
The slowest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 50.
50 x 1.5 = 75
→
The allowed settings fall in ranges of 150 and above,
and 75 and under; no tempo settings can be made in
these ranges. “---” is indicated for the “NEW BPM”
setting, and you cannot go on to make any tempo
modifications.
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
“Now Converting...” appears in the screen, and creation
of the new loop phrase with the modified tempo begins.
The process is finished when “Complete!” is displayed.
Just as with other loop phrases, you can arrange and use
newly created loop phrases in Rhythm Arrangements.
• If any of the Loop Phrases in the selected bank
already contain data, they will be overwritten by the
audio data from the source files. As it will not be
possible to restore this data, care should be taken to
ensure that important Loop Phrases are not
accidentally overwritten in this way.
• A maximum of 50 files can be read at any one time.
If the number of files exceeds 50, only the first 50
files will be read in the operation described above.
BR-1600_R_e.book 182 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
183
Creating Loop Phrases
Section 3
“Assembling Loop Phrases” (p. 192)
Modifying Loop Phrase settings
When a loop phrase is created, the number of measures is set
automatically according to the length of the Loop Phrase
such that the BPM for these measures are as close to 120.0 as
possible. In addition, the start and end positions for playback
of the Loop Phrase are set to the start and end of the audio
data.
The following procedure can be used to modify any of these
settings.
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
2.
Move the cursor to the EDIT icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (EDIT) if the EDIT icon
is currently displayed.
The Loop Phrase Edit screen will appear.
fig.20-099d
3.
Move the cursor to the Loop Phrase number and select
the phrase to be edited using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-100d
4.
Move the cursor to “MEAS” (length in measures) or
“BEAT,” and modify the setting using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
fig.20-101d
5.
Move the cursor to the start or end position for
playback of the Loop Phrase, and modify the setting
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The displayed values represent the number of samples
from the beginning of the Loop Phrase. On the BR-
1600CD, 44,100 samples correspond to one second of
playback.
The start and end positions of the Loop Phrase can be
modified in units of 16 samples.
It will not be possible to play back Loop Phrases with
less than 0.5 seconds (or 22,064 samples) between the
start and end positions.
Press [F2] (PREVIEW) to start playback of the Loop
Phrase and confirm that settings have been modified as
required.
Press [ENTER/YES] once again when you want to stop
playback.
6.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to change
the name character by character.
7.
If you want to store your modified settings, press [F4]
(GO).
The message “Sure?” will appear.
fig.20-103d
8.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The modified settings will be saved, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
• If additional recordings or edits have been made
with respect to the currently selected song, the
message “Save Current?” may appear. If you want
to modify the loop phrase’s tempo after the results
of such recording and/or editing have been saved,
press [ENTER/YES]. If you press [EXIT/NO], the
recording/editing is lost.
If you load a new song or turn off the BR-1600CD
without saving in this way, all modified settings will
be lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 183 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
184
Creating Loop Phrases
Assigning Loop Phrases to
track buttons
The input of Loop Phrases into rhythm arrangements can be
made much simpler by allocating Loop Phrases to the
buttons for Tracks 1 through 15/16. Note also that Loop
Phrase allocation settings are saved with each specific song.
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
2.
Move the cursor to the BUTTON ASSIGN icon and
press [ENTER/YES].
The screen for allocating Loop Phrases to track buttons
will appear.
fig.20-105d
3.
Move the cursor to the track whose button is to be
assigned a Loop Phrase, and select the Loop Phrase’s
bank and number using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.20-106d
The selected Loop Phrase will now be assigned to the
track button for the selected track.
You can now press this button to play the assigned Loop
Phrase and confirm that all settings are as required.
To stop playback of the Loop Phrase, press the same
track button once again.
4.
If you wish to store the track button allocation, save the
current song (p. 72).
Copying Loop Phrases
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
2.
Move the cursor to the COPY icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
The Loop Phrase Copy screen will appear.
fig.20-108d
3.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the numbers of the
Loop Phrases to be used as the copy source and
destination.
When the cursor is positioned at the copy source or
destination, you will be able to play the corresponding
Loop Phrase by pressing [F2] (PREVIEW).
This function allows you to confirm that your settings
are correct.
Press [ENTER/YES] once again when you want to stop
playback.
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
The Loop Phrase will now be copied, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
It is important to remember that the destination Loop
Phrase will be completely overwritten by the Loop
Phrase specified by “FROM:”. As it will not be possible
to restore the corresponding data, care should be taken
to ensure that important Loop Phrases are not
accidentally overwritten in this way.
5.
If you copied to a Loop Phrase in the song bank, you
should now save the current song (p. 72).
BR-1600_R_e.book 184 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
185
Creating Loop Phrases
Section 3
Copying all Loop Phrases in a bank
1.
When you select the Loop Phrase numbers as the copy
source, turn the TIME/VALUE dial clockwise to select
“ALL.”
2.
Select the bank to which the Loop Phrases are to be
copied.
3.
Press [F4] (GO).
All Loop Phrases in the selected bank will now be
copied.
All Loop Phrases in the copy-destination bank will be
overwritten in this process. As it will not be possible to
restore the corresponding data, care should be taken to
ensure that important Loop Phrases are not accidentally
overwritten in this way.
4.
If you copied to the song bank, you should now save
the current song (p. 72).
Erasing Loop Phrases
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
2.
Move the cursor to the ERASE icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
The Loop Phrase Erase screen will appear.
fig.20-110d
3.
Select the Loop Phrase to be deleted using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
If you press [F2] (PREVIEW) at this time, you will be able
to play the selected Loop Phrase. This function allows
you to confirm that your loop-phrase selection is correct.
Press [ENTER/YES] once again when you want to stop
playback.
If you want to erase all of the Loop Phrases in a specific
bank, move the cursor to the Loop Phrase number field,
and then turn the TIME/VALUE dial clockwise to
display “ALL.”
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
The message “Sure?” will appear.
5.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The Loop Phrase(s) will now be erased, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
It will not be possible to restore data erased in this
way; accordingly, care should be taken to ensure
that important Loop Phrases are not accidentally
erased.
BR-1600_R_e.book 185 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
186
Setting the Universal Beat for Drums, Bass, and Loop Phrases
Although every drum, bass, and Loop Phrase pattern has its
own beat setting, there is also a universal beat setting that
can be applied to all drum and bass patterns and Loop
Phrases as a whole.
When drum, bass, and loop phrase patterns are played
simultaneously in Pattern mode, they are not played
according to any of their individual beat settings, but instead
conform to one beat setting that is applied to them all.
Example 1) Universal Beat Set to 4/4
fig.20-200
Example 2) Universal Beat Set to 5/4
fig.20-201
The universal pattern beat is set at the factory to 4/4. You can
change this setting using the following procedure.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrange mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.20-005d
3.
Press [F1] (SETUP).
The dialog for pattern setup will appear.
fig.20-006d
4.
Move the cursor to “Beat” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to set a beat.
The beat can be set in a range from 1/1 to 8/8.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
If you wish to store the beat setting, save the current
song (p. 72).
2 3 41 212 3 411
2 3 4 511
2 311
2 3 41 2 3 41
2 31 2 31 2 31
2 3 41 2 3 41 2 3 41
Bass Pattern 3 / 4
Drum Pattern 4 / 4
Loop Phrase 5 / 4
The fourth beat is not played,
but is filled by a rest.
The Loop Phrase plays
only through the fourth beat.
2 3 411
2 3 4 511 2 3 4 511 2 3 4 511 2 3 4 511 2 3 4 511
2 311
Bass Pattern 3 / 4
Drum Pattern 4 / 4
Loop Phrase 5 / 4
The fourth and fifth beats are not
played, but are filled by rests.
The fifth beat is not played,
but is filled by a rest.
2 3 4 511 2 3 4 511
2 3 4 511 2 311 2 3 4 511 2 311 2 3 4 511 2 311
2 3 4 511 2 3 411 2 3 4 511 2 3 411 2 3 4 511 2 3 411
BR-1600_R_e.book 186 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
187
Section 3
Using rhythm arrangements
Selecting a rhythm arrangement
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning you’re in Pattern
mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Move the cursor to the rhythm arrangement number
and use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of
the desired rhythm arrangement.
fig.21-02d
The user rhythm arrangements and song rhythm
arrangements contained in the BR-1600CD at the time of
purchase are empty; you won’t hear anything if you select
one of them. Be sure to select a preset rhythm arrangement
here if you want to hear immediate playback.
4.
Press the track buttons for Tracks 11/12 through 15/16
several times until they are lighted.
Pressing a button repeatedly allows you to cycle it
through the possible statuses, which are: Off
→
Flashing
→
Lighted.
Off:
No rhythm arrangement will be played.
Flashing:
Rhythm arrangement will be played only when the BR-
1600CD is recording or performing.
Lighted:
Rhythm arrangement will be always played even when
the BR-1600CD is not recording or performing.
Track 11 and 12 buttons are not lighted. They will only
be dark or flashing.
5.
Raise the faders for Tracks 11/12 through 15/16 to
suitable levels.
These tracks will now be set up for playback of a rhythm
arrangement.
6.
Press [PLAY] to start playback.
The drum pattern and bass pattern comprising the
rhythm arrangement will now be played.
Changing the rhythm
arrangement tempo
Two different methods can be used to set the rhythm
arrangement’s tempo—namely, setting of a fixed tempo for
the overall song and setting of tempos for individual
measures (Tempo Map (p. 198)).
The following section will describe the method for setting a
fixed tempo.
It is important to remember that whenever a fixed tempo
is set, all tempos previously set for individual measures
will be permanently overwritten with this new tempo.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning that you’re in
Pattern mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Press [F1] (EDIT).
The Rhythm Arrangement Edit screen will appear.
fig.21-04d
No Loop Phrases are included in preset rhythm
arrangements, and for this reason, there will be no
playback from the Loop Phrase track (i.e., Track 11/
12). If you would also like to hear a Loop Phrase,
select either a user rhythm arrangement or a song
rhythm arrangement, and then assign a Loop Phrase
to it. (“Assembling Loop Phrases” (p. 192))
BR-1600_R_e.book 187 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
188
Using rhythm arrangements
4.
Move the cursor to “TEMPO” and select a suitable
tempo using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will be able to hear how your new setting changes
the playback tempo.
The tempo can be set anywhere within a range of 25.0 to
250.0 BPM. (Beats Per Minute—A value that indicates
the tempo in terms of the number of quarter notes
occurring in one minute.)
5.
After you have set the tempo, press [EXIT/NO] several
times to return to the top screen.
6.
If you wish to store the rhythm arrangement’s tempo,
save the current rhythm arrangement (p. 195).
The tempo set for Pattern mode (p. 151, p. 165, p. 178)
and the tempo set for Arrangement mode are handled
separately.
Setting the tempo using [TAP]
In addition to setting the tempo using [CURSOR] and the
TIME/VALUE dial, you can also set it by tapping your finger
on [TAP] at the desired tempo. (Tap Tempo)
This feature proves extremely useful when you want to
match the playback tempo to that of an audio CD but don’t
know the actual BPM value.
To set the tempo in this way, tap your finger on [TAP] four
times with approximately the same interval between each
tap. The tempo will be set based on the average tapping
interval.
BR-1600_R_e.book 188 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
189
Section 3
Creating rhythm arrangements
If you cannot find a rhythm arrangement that suits your song
among the BR-1600CD’s preset rhythm arrangements, you
can easily create an original arrangement as described below.
Assembling drum and bass patterns
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning that you’re in
Pattern mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Press [F4] (DRUMS) when you want to assemble a
drum pattern or [F3] (BASS) when you want to
assemble a bass pattern.
The corresponding screen for assembling patterns into
rhythm arrangements will appear.
Drum pattern assembly screen
fig.21-08d
Bass pattern assembly screen
fig.21-09d
These screens allow you to assemble drum patterns and
bass patterns in units of one measure.
4.
Move the cursor to “MEASURE” and select a measure
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
5.
Move the cursor to “PATTERN” or “NAME” and select
a pattern number or name using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.21-10ad
The selected pattern will now be assigned to the selected
measure.
6.
Move the cursor to “LENGTH” and set the length of the
selected pattern as a number of measures.
Note that when the length is changed in this way, the
position of all patterns assigned to subsequent measures
will also change accordingly.
7.
When you have assembled patterns as required, press
[EXIT/NO] to return to the Rhythm Arrangement
Selection screen.
8.
To save your pattern allocations, carry out the
procedure described below in “Modifying all of the
loop phrases in the current rhythm arrangement
(Arrangement Modify)” (p. 195).
Canceling pattern allocations
If you want to cancel the pattern allocations that you have
made, return to the screen for assembling drum or bass
patterns into rhythm arrangements, and then carry out the
following procedure.
1.
Move to the measure containing the pattern to be
removed, and then press either [F2] (DELETE), [F3]
(ERASE), or [F4] (CLEAR ALL).
[F2] (DELETE):
The pattern allocation will be canceled and all subsequent
pattern allocations will be shifted forward by one measure.
[F3] (ERASE):
The pattern allocation will be canceled, leaving an empty
measure where the pattern had been.
[F4] (CLEAR ALL):
Pattern allocations for all measures will be canceled.
• “*TMP” appears for the rhythm arrangement
immediately after its data is recorded or edited. If
you try to select a different rhythm arrangement
with the TIME/VALUE dial while the cursor is
positioned above this, the cursor turns white. If you
press [ENTER/YES] at this point, the cursor reverts
to black, and the rhythm arrangement number is
confirmed. If you do not want to confirm it, press
[EXIT/NO]; “*TMP” is indicated again, and the
rhythm arrangement reverts to the state it was in
immediately after editing. This allows you to avoid
inadvertently erasing data you have edited.
• From now on, you cannot use the Undo function
(Basic Operation; p. 42) for creating or editing
rhythm arrangements. Please make sure to crate or
edit data with a special care.
BR-1600_R_e.book 189 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
190
Creating rhythm arrangements
Inserting patterns
Use the following procedure in the screen for assembling
drum or bass patterns into rhythm arrangements to insert a
new pattern between two that have already been positioned.
1.
Move the cursor to “MEASURE” and select the
measure for insertion using the TIME/VALUE dial.
2.
Press [F1] (INSERT).
An empty pattern of one measure in length will be inserted.
3.
Move the cursor to “PATTERN” or “NAME” and select
a pattern using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Inputting chords
Simply assembling bass patterns into rhythm arrangements
will result in the same bass line being repeated over and
over. By also inputting chords at the correct positions, you
can have you BR-1600CD automatically adjust the bass
performance to notes that match the chord progression.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning that you’re in
Pattern mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Press [F1] (EDIT).
The Rhythm Arrangement Edit screen will appear.
fig.21-11d_arrangeedit.bmp
4.
Press [F1] (CHORD MAP).
The chord input screen will appear.
fig.21-12d
5.
Use track buttons 1 through 15/16 to input the note
names for chords.
In addition, you can also turn the TIME/VALUE dial
while a track button is being held to select different types
of chords.
Selectable chord types
•
- - - - (N.C., non-chord)
Select this type of chord if you want the original Bass
Pattern to be played without a chord setting.
Normally, when a chord type of root “C” is set to “- - -,”
the original performance data is played as is.
However, when the root is any note other than “C” and
non-chord is selected, the original performance data will
be adjusted according. For example, if the root is “D,”
the Bass Pattern will be adjusted up one tone for
playback.
• If you release a track button without making a chord
type selection, “- - - (N.C.)” will be selected
automatically.
Each time you release a track button, the chord input
position will be automatically moved forward by a
single measure.
This function allows you to conveniently enter chord
progressions.
6.
When you have input all of the desired chords, press
[EXIT/NO] to return to the Rhythm Arrangement Edit
screen.
7.
Start playback on the BR-1600CD.
If the current rhythm arrangement contains a bass
pattern, the bass part will be automatically adjusted to
follow the chord progression.
8.
To save your chord progression, carry out the
procedure described below in “Modifying all of the
loop phrases in the current rhythm arrangement
(Arrangement Modify)” (p. 195).
- - - (N.C) Maj m 7 sus4
dim aug M7 M9 add9
6 6(9) 7sus4 7
b
57(13)
9 7b9 7#9 m7 m7
b
5
m6 m6(9) madd9 m9 mM7
mM9 aug7
• Only one chord progression can be saved per
rhythm arrangement.
• Chord sequences input as described above will also
be used for the Vocal Tool Box’s harmony sequence
(p. 119).
BR-1600_R_e.book 190 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
191
Creating rhythm arrangements
Section 3
Changing and moving chords
1.
Move the cursor to the measure/beat/tick field and
change the position using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.21-13d
2.
Move the cursor to the chord field and change the
chord type using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.21-14d
Deleting chords
Use the following procedure to delete any chords that have
been input incorrectly.
1.
On the chord input screen, move the cursor to the chord
you want to delete.
fig.21-16d
2.
Press [F4] (DELETE).
The selected chord will be deleted.
The positions of chords after the deleted chord will not
change as a result of this action.
Inserting chords
Use the following procedure to insert a new chord between
two existing chords.
1.
On the chord input screen, move the cursor to the chord
immediately in front of the insertion position.
fig.21-17d
2.
Press [F1] (NEW).
A chord will be inserted and the cursor will be moved to
this chord.
fig.21-18d
3.
You can now use [CURSOR], the TIME/VALUE dial,
and the track buttons to set the chord’s position, type,
and note names.
You cannot delete the first chord.
BR-1600_R_e.book 191 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
192
Creating rhythm arrangements
Assembling Loop Phrases
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning that you’re in
Pattern mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Press [F2] (LOOP PHRASE).
The screen for allocating Loop Phrases to rhythm
arrangements will appear.
fig.21-20d
This screen allows you to assemble Loop Phrases in units
of one measure.
4.
Move the cursor to “MEASURE” and select a measure
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
5.
Move the cursor to “NO.” and select a Loop Phrase
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.21-21d
The selected Loop Phrase will now be assigned to the
selected measure.
Simplifying Loop Phrase input
When Loop Phrases are assigned to the track buttons,
you will be able to use the track buttons to conveniently
input Loop Phrases. In such a case, the length of the
Loop Phrase will be set as the number of measures that it
contains. For instructions for assigning Loop Phrases to
the track buttons, refer to “Assigning Loop Phrases to
track buttons” (p. 184).
6.
Move the cursor to “POS” and select “TOP” or
“BOTTOM” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
POS (POSITION)
In cases where the Loop Phrase that has been input is
less than one measure in length, this parameter
determines whether it will be aligned with the beginning
or end of the measure.
TOP:
The Loop Phrase is aligned with the beginning of the
measure.
BOTTOM:
The Loop Phrase is aligned with the end of the measure.
7.
Move the cursor to “LEN” and set the length of the
selected Loop Phrase as a number of measures.
Note that when the length is changed in this way, the
position of all Loop Phrases assigned to subsequent
measures will also change accordingly.
8.
Move the cursor to “VOL” and select a suitable volume
for the Loop Phrase using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Although it is quite acceptable to leave the volume at
100, adjustment may need to be carried out when the
volume of the Loop Phrase is much louder or quieter
that than of the other tracks being played.
9.
Move the cursor to “TEMPO MATCH” and select
“ON” or “OFF” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
TEMPO MATCH
ON:
The speed of Loop Phrase playback will be automatically
adjusted to synchronize the Loop Phrase with the rhythm
arrangement’s tempo. This is the standard setting.
OFF:
The Loop Phrase will be played back at its own speed
setting regardless of the rhythm arrangement’s tempo.
• When “ON” has been selected, the speed of Loop Phrase
playback will be automatically adjusted to match the
rhythm arrangement tempo. Loop Phrases can be
adjusted to any tempo within a range of 0.75 to 1.5 times
its own tempo. Accordingly, if the adjusted playback
speed would result in a tempo outside this range, the
Loop Phrase will be played back at either the range’s
upper or lower limit. In such a case, Loop Phrase
playback will not be synchronized with the playback of
the other rhythm arrangement components (i.e., drums
and bass).
• The quality of Loop Phrase playback may be reduced
when the adjusted tempo differs considerably from the
original tempo.
BR-1600_R_e.book 192 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
193
Creating rhythm arrangements
Section 3
• When the rhythm arrangement is set to a faster tempo
than that of the Loop Phrase, it will become necessary to
read hard-disk data for Loop Phrase playback at a faster
rate than normal, and this will increase the probability of
a “Drive Busy!” message being displayed. In such a case,
the Loop Phrase can be copied to an audio track to
reduce the load on the BR-1600CD’s hard disk. For more
details regarding this operation, refer to “Copying a
Loop Phrase from a rhythm arrangement to an audio
track” (p. 193).
10.
Repeat Steps 4 through 9 to arrange Loop Phrases as
required.
11.
Play the song from the beginning.
As the BR-1600CD performs playback, you will be able
to hear Loop Phrases playing along with your song;
however, Loop Phrases will not be played back when the
BR-1600CD is stopped.
12.
To save your Loop Phrase allocations, carry out the
procedure described below in “Modifying all of the
loop phrases in the current rhythm arrangement
(Arrangement Modify)” (p. 195).
Canceling Loop Phrase
allocations
If you want to cancel the Loop Phrase allocations that you
have made, return to the screen for assembling Loop Phrases
into rhythm arrangements, and then carry out the following
procedure.
1.
Move to the measure contain the Loop Phrase to be
removed, and then press either [F2] (DELETE), [F3]
(ERASE), or [F4] (CLEAR ALL).
[F2] (DELETE):
The Loop Phrase allocation will be canceled and all
subsequent Loop Phrase allocations will be shifted
forward by one measure.
[F3] (ERASE):
The Loop Phrase allocation will be canceled, leaving an
empty measure where the Loop Phrase had been.
[F4] (CLEAR ALL):
Loop Phrase allocations for all measures will be
canceled.
Inserting Loop Phrases
Use the following procedure in the screen for assembling
Loop Phrases into rhythm arrangements to insert a new Loop
Phrase between two that have already been positioned.
1.
Move the cursor to “MEASURE” and select the
measure for insertion using the TIME/VALUE dial.
2.
Press [F1] (INSERT).
An empty space of one measure in length will be
inserted.
3.
Move the cursor to “NO.” and select the desired Loop
Phrase using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Copying a Loop Phrase from a rhythm
arrangement to an audio track
When one or more Loop Phrases have been assembled into
the currently selected rhythm arrangement, you can copy the
complete loop-phrase assembly as audio data to one of the
BR-1600CD’s audio tracks.
• The speed of Loop Phrase playback will be automatically
adjusted to the tempo of the rhythm arrangement. Since
this process increases the rate at which data must be read
from the hard disk, the probability of a “Drive Busy!”
message being displayed also increases. This will be
particularly noticeable in cases where the rhythm
arrangement’s tempo is considerably faster than the
Loop Phrase’s original tempo and cases where short
Loop Phrases are played back repeatedly. If, however,
you copy the Loop Phrase arrangement to an audio
track, the load placed on the hard disk during playback
can be reduced, and the “Drive Busy!” message will be
displayed much less frequently.
• Only Loop Phrases can be copied in this way—in other
words, you will not be able to copy drum or bass
patterns to an audio track.
• Even if the tempo is subsequently changed, the playback
speed of audio data created in this way will not be
affected. For this reason, before copying Loop Phrase
arrangements to an audio track, it is important that you
set the tempo carefully and make sure that it will not
need to be adjusted again.
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
[LOOP PHRASE IMPORT] will light up and the Loop
Phrase screen will appear.
BR-1600_R_e.book 193 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
194
Creating rhythm arrangements
fig.21-090d
2.
Move the cursor to the TO TRACK icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (TO TRACK).
A screen for selecting the destination track will appear.
3.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the copy-destination track.
fig.21-23d
4.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and
specify the copy range.
fig.21-24d
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you
select how the positions will be specified (i.e., by
measure, time, or marker).
The following parameters should now be set.
START (Start point):
This parameter is used to specify the start point of the
audio data to be copied.
END (End point):
This parameter is used to specify the end point of the
audio data to be copied.
If time values are used to specify the above points and
you then switch the specification method to measures or
markers, a plus (+) character may be displayed to warn
that indicated positions and actual positions are not the
same. If you want to specify points using measures or
markers, this discrepancy can be eliminated by using the
TIME/VALUE dial to make settings in each of the
relevant screens.
If you want to set the range as extending from the start
of the song to the end of the Loop Phrase(s), press [F3]
(SELECT ALL).
5.
Once you’ve made all the necessary settings, press [F4]
(GO).
The message “Now Copying…” will appear on the
display and copying to the audio track will begin.
To cancel writing while this operation is in process, press
[EXIT/NO]. When the message “Cancel?” appears, press
[ENTER/YES] to confirm cancellation. (A certain
amount of time may pass between pressing of [EXIT/
NO] and display of the confirmation message.)
When the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that
copying has been completed.
Once audio data has been copied to an audio track in this
way, it will not be possible to change its tempo at a later
time.
If you are not happy with the results of a copy operation,
you can use Undo to cancel it. (“Undo” (Basic Operation;
p. 42))
6.
Press the track button for Track 11/12 several times
until it turns off.
The Loop Phrase will now be turned off.
7.
Raise the fader for the copy-destination track to a
suitable level.
8.
Press [PLAY] to start playback.
The copied Loop Phrase will be played back from the
copy-destination track.
9.
If you wish to store the results of the copy operation,
save the current song (p. 72).
Unless the song is saved, the copied audio will be
lost when the BR-1600CD is turned off or a new song
is loaded.
BR-1600_R_e.book 194 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
195
Creating rhythm arrangements
Section 3
Modifying all of the loop phrases in the current
rhythm arrangement (Arrangement Modify)
If you have already set up a rhythm arrangement using loop
phrases, you can modify all of the loop phrases used in that
rhythm arrangement at one time.
1.
Press CD-R/RW [LOOP PHRASE IMPORT].
The Loop Phrase screen will appear.
fig.20-090d
2.
Move the cursor to ARR. MODIFY icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
The Loop Phrase Arrangement Modify screen will be
displayed.
fig.21-500d
3.
Move the cursor to “ARRANGE” and select the rhythm
arrangement whose tempo you want to modify using
the TIME/VALUE dial.
U01–10: User Rhythm Arrangement
S01–10: Song Rhythm Arrangement
You cannot select a preset rhythm arrangement.
4.
Move the cursor to “NEW BPM” and set the modified
tempo you want using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The modified tempo range is 0.75 to 1.5 times that of the
loop phrases contained in the rhythm arrangement. If
different loop phrases have different tempos, you can
make settings ranging from 0.75 times the fastest of the
tempos to 1.5 times the slowest tempo. If the desired
tempo cannot be set in the given range, “---” is indicated
for the “BPM” setting, meaning you cannot modify the
tempo of any of the loop phrases.
Example 1)
The rhythm arrangement only contains loop phrases
with a BPM setting of 100.
100 x 0.75 = 75
100 x 1.5 = 150
→
The allowed settings fall in the range from 75 and
above and 150 and under (i.e., from 75 to 150).
Example 2)
The rhythm arrangement contains loop phrases with
varying tempos, with BPM settings of 100, 120, and 140.
The fastest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 140.
140 x 0.75 = 105
The slowest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 100.
100 x 1.5 = 150
→
The allowed settings fall in the range from 105 and
above and 150 and under (i.e., from 105 to 150).
Example 3)
The rhythm arrangement contains loop phrases
with
varying tempos, with BPM settings of 50, 100, and 200.
The fastest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 200.
200 x 0.75 = 150
The slowest of these tempos is the BPM setting of 50.
50 x 1.5 = 75
→
The allowed settings fall in ranges of 150 and above,
and 75 and under; no tempo settings can be made in
these ranges. “---” is indicated for the “BPM” setting,
and you cannot go on to make any tempo modifications.
5.
Press [F4] (GO).
“Now Converting...” appears in the screen, and creation
of the new loop phrase with the modified tempo begins.
The process is finished when “Complete!” is displayed.
• In this case, the original loop phrases are
overwritten by the modified loop phrases. For
example, if the loop phrases A001, B003, and S005
are used in a rhythm arrangement, the newly
created loop phrases become A001, B003, and S005,
and the original A001, B003, and S005 are deleted.
Take care to note that once loop phrases are
overwritten, the procedure cannot be undone, and
there is no way to recover the previous loop phrases.
• If additional recordings or edits have been made
with respect to the currently selected song, the
message “Save Current?” may appear. If you want
to modify the loop phrase’s tempo after the results
of such recording and/or editing have been saved,
press [ENTER/YES]. If you press [EXIT/NO], the
recording/editing is lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 195 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
196
Creating rhythm arrangements
Naming and saving rhythm
arrangements
The following section describes how to name and save the
rhythm arrangements that you create.
Unless the song is saved, all rhythm arrangement data
will be lost when a different rhythm arrangement is
selected or a new song is loaded. In addition, this data
will also be lost if you turn off the BR-1600CD before
saving your data. It is a good idea, therefore, to regularly
save rhythm arrangements that you intend to use again.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning that you’re in
Pattern mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Press [F1] (EDIT).
The Rhythm Arrangement Edit screen will appear.
fig.21-26d
4.
Move the cursor to the rhythm arrangement name field
and use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to
change the name character by character.
5.
Once you’ve made all the desired modifications, press
[F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for rhythm
arrangements will appear.
fig.21-28d
6.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the rhythm
arrangement to which the data is to be saved.
Only user rhythm arrangements and song rhythm
arrangements may be selected for saving rhythm
arrangement data. You will not be able to select a preset
rhythm arrangement at this time.
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
The rhythm arrangement will be saved. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that saving
has been completed.
Copying a rhythm arrangement
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) on the Rhythm
Arrangement Edit screen.
2.
Press [F2] (COPY).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for rhythm
arrangements will appear.
fig.21-29d
3.
Move the cursor to the “FROM:” field and select the
rhythm arrangement to be copied using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
4.
Move the cursor to “TO:” and use the TIME/VALUE
dial to select the rhythm arrangement to which the data
is to be copied.
Only user rhythm arrangements and song rhythm
arrangements may be selected as copy destinations. In
other words, you will not be able to select a preset
rhythm arrangement at this time.
5.
Press [F4] (GO).
Copying of the rhythm arrangement will begin. When
the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that
copying has been completed.
The rhythm arrangement selected as the copy
destination will be overwritten in this process. As it
will not be possible to restore the corresponding
data, care should be taken to ensure that important
rhythm arrangements are not accidentally
overwritten in this way.
BR-1600_R_e.book 196 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
197
Creating rhythm arrangements
Section 3
Deleting a rhythm arrangement
1.
Press [F4] (WRITE/COPY/DEL) on the Rhythm
Arrangement Edit screen.
2.
Press [F3] (=>DELETE).
The Write/Copy/Delete screen for rhythm
arrangements will appear.
fig.21-30d
3.
Select the rhythm arrangement to be deleted using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.21-31d
4.
Press [F4] (GO).
A confirmation message will appear.
fig.21-32d
5.
If you are sure you want to delete the rhythm
arrangement, press [ENTER/YES].
Press [EXIT/NO] to cancel deletion.
The rhythm arrangement will be deleted. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that the
deletion has been completed.
• Preset rhythm arrangements cannot be deleted.
• As it will not be possible to restore deleted rhythm
arrangements, care should be taken to ensure that
important arrangements are not accidentally
deleted.
BR-1600_R_e.book 197 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
198
Setting tempos and beats for individual measures (Tempo Map/Beat Map)
In addition to setting of a single tempo and beat for an entire
rhythm arrangement, the BR-1600CD can also set these
playback parameters more precisely on a measure-by-
measure basis.
If a single tempo and beat can be used from the
beginning to the end of your rhythm arrangement, there
is no particular need to set up a Tempo Map or a Beat
Map.
Setting tempos for individual
measures (Tempo Map)
The Tempo Map function is used to set tempos for individual
measures. This type of map arranges tempos on a measure-
by-measure basis, and it can be saved together with the
rhythm arrangement.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning that you’re in
Pattern mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Press [F1] (EDIT).
The Rhythm Arrangement Edit screen will appear.
fig.21-34d
4.
Press [F2] (TEMPO MAP).
The Tempo Map screen will appear.
fig.21-35d
If no tempo map has been set for this song, a single
tempo will be created at the start of the map.
5.
Move the cursor to the tempo map entry to be edited.
6.
Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you
want to change and select a new value using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
MEAS:
This parameter sets the measure position for the change
in tempo, and it can be set within a range of 1 to 999. The
position of the first tempo map entry is fixed at “1” and
cannot, therefore, be changed.
You can create up to 50 tempo maps.
If the same tempo is used for multiple consecutive
measures, do not set a separate tempo map for each
measure, but make a single setting for the entire group of
measures.
TEMPO:
This parameter sets the tempo as a BPM (beats per
minute) value with a range of 25.0 to 250.0.
●
Adding new tempo map entries
Press [F1] (NEW). A new entry will be added to the
tempo map immediately after the cursor’s current
position.
●
Deleting tempo map entries
Press [F4] (DELETE). The tempo map entry at the current
cursor position will be deleted. Note that it will not be
possible to delete the first entry in a tempo map.
7.
Once you’ve made all the desired tempo map settings,
press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Rhythm Arrangement
Edit screen.
8.
If you wish to store the edited tempo map, save the
current rhythm arrangement (p. 195).
• Unless the song is saved, all of your edited tempo
map data will be lost when a different rhythm
arrangement is selected or a new song is loaded. In
addition, this data will also be lost if you turn off the
BR-1600CD before saving.
• Whenever a fixed tempo is set for an entire rhythm
arrangement, all tempos previously set in the tempo
map will be permanently overwritten with this new
tempo.
• Tempo map settings will be ignored whenever
SYNC TRACK is being used. To ensure that the
tempo map is used, set “SYNC SOURCE” to
“TEMPO MAP.” (“Synchronizing a MIDI device by
recording its tempo changes on the BR-1600CD
(Sync Track)” (Basic Operation; p. 228))
BR-1600_R_e.book 198 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
199
Setting tempos and beats for individual measures (Tempo Map/Beat Map)
Section 3
Setting beats for individual
measures (Beat Map)
The Beat Map function is used to set beats for individual
measures. This type of map arranges beats on a measure-by-
measure basis, and it can be saved together with the rhythm
arrangement.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted (you’re in
Arrangement mode).
If this button’s indicator is off (meaning that you’re in
Pattern mode), press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is lighted.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Rhythm Arrangement Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-33d
3.
Press [F1] (EDIT).
The Rhythm Arrangement Edit screen will appear.
fig.21-37d
4.
Press [F3] (BEAT MAP).
The Beat Map screen will appear.
fig.21-38d
If no beat map has been set for this song, a single beat
will be created at the start of the map.
5.
Move the cursor to the beat map entry to be edited.
6.
Move the cursor to the parameter whose setting you
want to change and select a new value using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
MEAS:
This parameter sets the measure position for the change
in beat, and it can be set within a range of 1 to 999. The
position of the first time-signature map entry is fixed at
“1” and cannot, therefore, be changed.
You can create up to 50 beat maps.
If the same beat is used for multiple consecutive
measures, do not set a separate beat map for each
measure, but make a single setting for the entire group of
measures.
BEAT:
This parameter sets the beat within a range of 1/1 to 1/8.
●
Adding new time-signature map entries
Press [F1] (NEW). A new entry will be added to the beat
map immediately after the cursor’s current position.
●
Deleting time-signature map entries
Press [F4] (DELETE). The time-signature map entry at
the current cursor position will be deleted. Note that it
will not be possible to delete the first entry in a beat map.
7.
Once you’ve made all the desired beat map settings,
press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Rhythm Arrangement
Edit screen.
8.
If you wish to store the edited beat map, save the
current rhythm arrangement (p. 195).
BR-1600_R_e.book 199 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
200
Using a metronome
The BR-1600CD can be used to play a metronome in place of
a drum performance when recording or practicing.
Setting the track type
To use a metronome, you must first of all set up Track 15/16
as a metronome track using its track type setting.
fig.21-39
1.
Press [TRACK TYPE SELECT].
The Track Type Select screen will appear.
fig.21-40d
2.
Press [F4].
The track type for Track 15/16 will switch each time this
button is pressed.
fig.21-41d
Track Types
AUDIO:
The track will be used for recorded audio.
DRUMS:
The track will be used for drum patterns.
METRONOME:
The track will be used to play a metronome.
You should select “METRONOME” here.
The DRUMS indicator from TRACK TYPE SELECT will
light up to indicate that Track 15/16 has been set up for
use as a metronome track.
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the top screen.
fig.21-42d
The metronome icon will be displayed on the top right of
the screen.
You will now be able to use the metronome.
4.
If you wish to store the track type setting, save the
current song (p. 72).
Playing a metronome
Simply changing the track type may not be sufficient to allow
a metronome to be played. Use the following procedure in
such a case.
1.
Press the track button [15/16] several times until it
lights up.
Pressing the button repeatedly allows you to cycle
through the available choices, which are: Flashing
→
On
→
Off.
Off:
The metronome will not be played.
Flashing in red:
The metronome will be played only when the BR-
1600CD is recording.
Flashing in green:
The metronome will be played when the BR-1600CD is
recording or performing playback.
On:
The metronome will be played even when the BR-
1600CD is stopped.
2.
Raise the fader for Track 15/16 to a suitable level.
You will now be able to hear the metronome.
3
2
1
BR-1600_R_e.book 200 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
201
Using a metronome
Section 3
Selecting metronome sounds
Now that we can hear the metronome, let’s select sounds to
be used.
1.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is extinguished (you’re
in Pattern mode).
If this button’s indicator is lit (which means you’re in
Arrangement mode), press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] to turn it off.
2.
Press PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM [EDIT].
The Pattern Selection screen will appear.
fig.21-43d
3.
Move the cursor to “METRONOME” and select a
sound type using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Available sound types
BEEP:
This sets up a beep-type metronome, with a higher-
pitched beep being used for the first beat of each
measure.
CLICK:
This sets up a click-type metronome, with a louder click
being used for the first beat of each measure.
4.
When you have selected the type of sound you want to
use, press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
5.
If you wish to store the sound-type selection, save the
current song (p. 72).
Selecting outputs for the metronome
The output of metronome playback can be routed to either or
both of the PHONES 1 or PHONES 2 jacks.
At the time of purchase, the BR-1600CD will be set up to output
metronome playback to both of the headphone jacks.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.21-45d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “LINE OUT/Phones1” under
“Metronome” and use the TIME/VALUE to set the
output to be routed to LINE OUT and PHONES 1.
LINE OUT/Phones1: OFF, ON, METRONOME ONLY
OFF:
The metronome will not be output via LINE OUT and
PHONES 1.
The audio form input, playback sound on the Tracks,
drum/bass patterns and Loop Phrases will be output via
these outputs.
ON:
The metronome will be output via LINE OUT and
PHONES 1.
At the same time, the audio form input, playback sound
on the Tracks, drum/bass patterns and Loop Phrases
will be mixed output via these outputs.
METRONOME ONLY:
Only the metronome will be output via LINE OUT and
PHONES 1.
The audio form input, playback sound on the Tracks,
drum/bass patterns and Loop Phrases will not be output
via these outputs.
The sound-type selection will be used both in
Arrangement mode and in Pattern mode.
BR-1600_R_e.book 201 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
202
Using a metronome
4.
Move the cursor to “Phones2” under “Metronome” and
use the TIME/VALUE to set the output to be routed to
PHONES 2.
Phones2: OFF, ON, METRONOME ONLY
OFF:
The metronome will not be output via PHONES 2.
The audio form input, playback sound on the Tracks,
drum/bass patterns and Loop Phrases will be output via
this output.
ON:
The metronome will be output via PHONES 2.
At the same time, the audio form input, playback sound
on the Tracks, drum/bass patterns and Loop Phrases
will be mixed output via this output.
METRONOME ONLY:
Only the metronome will be output via PHONES 2.
The audio form input, playback sound on the Tracks,
drum/bass patterns and Loop Phrases will not be output
via this output.
BR-1600_R_e.book 202 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
203
Section 4 Using the CD-R/RW Drive
Section 4
Using the
CD-R/RW
Drive
BR-1600_R_e.book 203 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
204
Using the CD-R/RW drive to exchange data
The BR-1600CD’s built-in CD-R/RW drive can be used to
exchange data in the following ways:
• Storing of songs and other hard-disk data to CD-R/RW
discs (Backup)
• Reading songs and other backup data back into the hard
disk (Recover)
• Swapping of audio data with a PC
Storing of songs and other hard-disk
data to CD-R/RW discs (Backup)
Although the songs you’ve recorded and created are stored
on the BR-1600CD’s internal hard disk, all of this data would
be lost in the unlikely event that the hard disk was damaged.
For this reason, we recommend that you also save your songs
on CD-R/RW discs (Backup).
Once songs have been backed up in this way, it will also be possible
to read them from the CD-R/RW discs into another BR-1600CD.
Backing up a song (Song Backup)
1.
Insert an empty CD-R/RW disc into the BR-1600CD’s
CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
3.
Press [F1] (BACKUP) or move the cursor to BACKUP,
and then press [ENTER/YES].
The Backup screen will appear.
fig.41-01d
4.
Press [F1] (SONG) or move the cursor to SONG, and
then press [ENTER/YES].
The Song Backup screen will appear.
fig.41-02d
5.
Move the cursor to the song you want to back up and
press [F1] (SELECT).
The song will be selected for backup.
fig.41-02ad
A number of songs can be selected in this way for
backup, and an asterisk (*) will be displayed for each
selected song. To cancel this selection, press [F1] once
again.
If you would like to back up all songs on the hard disk in
a single operation, press [F2] (ALL). All songs will be
selected for backup.
To cancel this selection, press [F2] once again. This
deselects all songs.
BR-1600_R_e.book 204 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
205
Using the CD-R/RW drive to exchange data
Section 4
6.
When you have selected all of the songs you want to
back up, press [F4] (GO).
The message “Write Speed?” will appear.
fig.41-03d
7.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed.
Write Speed:
x2 (352 Kbps) Writes twice as fast.
x4 (704 Kbps) Writes four times as fast.
x8 (1408 Kbps) Writes eight times as fast.
• The range of available write speeds can sometimes be
limited by the type of disc being used. In such cases, the
BR-1600CD will allow you to select only the supported
speeds using the TIME/VALUE dial.
• If you are using CD-R/RW discs intended for high-
speed writing, the frequency of write errors may
increase if the x2 or x4 speed is selected. It is
recommended that you use the x8 speed for high-speed
discs.
8.
Press [ENTER/YES].
If you want to cancel the backup, press [EXIT/NO].
The message “Write Sure?” will appear.
fig.41-04d
9.
Press [ENTER/YES] once again.
The BR-1600CD will begin writing data to the CD-R/RW
disc.
When the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that
the backup has been successfully completed.
Backing up user data (User Backup)
The BR-1600CD allows you to back up the following types of
user data to CD-R/RW discs.
• Insert effect patches
• Mastering Tool Kit patches
• Speaker Modeling patches
• Vocal Tool Box patches
• Rhythm arrangements, drum patterns, bass patterns,
and loop phrases
1.
Insert an empty CD-R/RW disc into the BR-1600CD’s
CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
3.
Press [F1] (BACKUP) or move the cursor to the
BACKUP icon, and then press [ENTER/YES].
The Backup screen will appear.
fig.41-01d
4.
Press [F2] (USER) or move the cursor to USER, and then
press [ENTER/YES].
The User Backup screen will appear.
fig.41-07d
5.
Move the cursor to the type of data you want to back up
and press [F1] (SELECT).
The data will selected for backup.
BR-1600_R_e.book 205 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
206
Using the CD-R/RW drive to exchange data
fig.41-07ad
A number of types of data can be selected in this way for
backup, and an asterisk (*) will be displayed for each
selected type. To cancel a selection, simply press [F1]
once again.
Data that can be backed up:
Effects/Arrangement/Drums&Bass Pattern:
• Insert Effects User Patches
• Vocal Tool Box User Patches
• Mastering User Kit User Patches
• Speaker Modeling User Patches
• User Rhythm Arrangement
• User drum pattern
• User bass pattern
The data described above will all be saved.
Loop Phrase:
User loop phrases will all be saved.
If you would like to back up all such data on the hard
disk in a single operation, press [F2] (ALL). All data
types will be selected for backup.
To cancel this selection, press [F2] once again. This
deselects all data types.
6.
When you have selected all of the data you want to
back up, press [F4] (GO).
The message “Write Speed?” will appear.
fig.41-08d
7.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed.
Write Speed:
x2 (352 Kbps) Writes twice as fast.
x4 (704 Kbps) Writes four times as fast.
x8 (1408 Kbps) Writes eight times as fast.
• The range of available write speeds can sometimes be
limited by the type of disc being used. In such cases, the
BR-1600CD will allow you to select only the supported
speeds using the TIME/VALUE dial.
• If you are using CD-R/RW discs intended for high-speed
writing, the frequency of write errors may increase if the x2
or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that you use the
x8 speed for high-speed discs.
8.
Press [ENTER/YES].
If you want to cancel the backup, press [EXIT/NO].
The message “Write Sure?” will appear.
fig.41-09d
9.
Press [ENTER/YES] once again.
The BR-1600CD will begin writing data to the CD-R/RW
disc. When the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates
that the backup has been successfully completed.
Backing up all data on the hard
disk (HDD Backup)
The BR-1600CD allows you to back up all of the data on the
internal hard disk onto CD-R/RW discs, regardless of the
type of data or the song in which it is used. Data that’s been
backed up this way can later be recovered whenever needed.
Note, however, that this type of backup is limited to the data
contained in the currently selected drive or partition. If you
would also like to back up data from another drive or
partition, you will need to change the current drive first.
Note also that recovered data will be stored on the currently
selected drive.
1.
Insert an empty CD-R/RW disc into the BR-1600CD’s
CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
BR-1600_R_e.book 206 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
207
Using the CD-R/RW drive to exchange data
Section 4
3.
Press [F1] (BACKUP) or move the cursor to BACKUP,
and then press [ENTER/YES].
The Backup screen will appear.
fig.41-01d
4.
Press [F3] (HDD) or move the cursor to HDD, and then
press [ENTER/YES].
The message “HDD Backup OK?” will appear.
fig.41-12d
5.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The message “Write Speed?” will appear.
fig.41-13d
6.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed.
Write Speed:
x2 (352 Kbps) Writes twice as fast.
x4 (704 Kbps) Writes four times as fast.
x8 (1408 Kbps) Writes eight times as fast.
• The range of available write speeds can sometimes be
limited by the type of disc being used. In such cases, the
BR-1600CD will allow you to select only the supported
speeds using the TIME/VALUE dial.
• If you are using CD-R/RW discs intended for high-speed
writing, the frequency of write errors may increase if the x2
or x4 speed is selected. It is recommended that you use the
x8 speed for high-speed discs.
7.
Press [ENTER/YES].
If you want to cancel the backup, press [EXIT/NO].
The message “Write Sure?” will appear.
fig.41-14d
8.
Press [ENTER/YES] once again.
The BR-1600CD will begin writing data to the CD-R/RW
disc. When the message “Complete!” appears, it indicates
that the backup has been successfully completed.
Reading songs and other backup data
back into the hard disk (Recover)
Notes concerning recovery
• You will not be able to select any songs or data types that
have not been saved to the CD-R/RW disc.
• If the current song contains newly recorded audio data or
newly modified settings, the message “Save Current?” may
be displayed during the recovery procedure. If you want to
save your song before starting the recover process, press
[ENTER/YES]; if this will not be necessary, press [EXIT/
NO]. Remember that if you do not save a modified song at
this time, all newly recorded audio data, edited data,
modified mixer settings, etc. will be lost.
• To cancel reading from a CD-R/RW disc, press [EXIT/
NO]. When the message “Cancel?” appears, press
[ENTER/YES] to confirm cancellation. (A certain
amount of time may pass between pressing of [EXIT/
NO] and display of the confirmation message.)
• If the total size of the songs and other data to be
recovered exceeds the amount of space available on the
hard disk, the message “HDD Full!” will be displayed
and the reading of data will not be possible. In such a
case, you should reduce the number of songs or the
volume of data to be recovered, or alternatively, you
should free up some hard disk space by deleting
unneeded data and/or songs.
Reading backup songs back into
the hard disk (Song Recover)
1.
Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing backup songs into
the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until this
indicator stops flashing and turns off before proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
BR-1600_R_e.book 207 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
208
Using the CD-R/RW drive to exchange data
3.
Press [F2] (RECOVER) or move the cursor to
RECOVER, and then press [ENTER/YES].
The Recover screen will appear.
fig.41-16d
4.
Press [F1] (SONG) or move the cursor to SONG, and
then press [ENTER/YES].
A list of the CD-R/RW disc’s backup songs will be
displayed.
fig.41-17d
5.
Move the cursor to the song you want to recover and
press [F1] (SELECT).
The song will selected for recovery.
A number of songs can be selected in this way for
recovery, and an asterisk (*) will be displayed for each
selected song. To cancel this selection, press [F2] once
again.
If you would like to recover all of the songs on the CD-
R/RW disc in a single operation, press [F2] (ALL). All
songs will be selected for recovery.
To cancel this selection, press [F2] once again. This
deselects all songs.
6.
When you have selected all of the songs you want to
recover, press [F4] (GO).
The BR-1600CD will start the recovery process. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that the
recovery has been completed successfully.
Reading backup user data back
into the hard disk (User Recover)
1.
Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing backup user data
into the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
3.
Press [F2] (RECOVER) or move the cursor to
RECOVER, and then press [ENTER/YES].
The Recover screen will appear.
fig.41-16d
4.
Press [F2] (USER) or move the cursor to USER, and then
press [ENTER/YES].
fig.41-20d
5.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the data you want
to recover.
If you select the data that has no backup data, “*EMPTY”
will be displayed.
Data that can be recovered:
ALL
All of the user data on the CD-R/RW disc
EFFECTS
All insert effects patches from the user bank will be
recovered.
MASTERING TOOL KIT
The Mastering Tool Kit’s user bank will be recovered.
SPEAKER MODELING
The Speaker Modeling user bank will be recovered.
VOCAL TOOL BOX
The Vocal Tool Box’s user bank will be recovered.
The recovered songs will be saved in sequence on
the hard disk using the available song numbers.
BR-1600_R_e.book 208 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
209
Using the CD-R/RW drive to exchange data
Section 4
ARRANGEMENT/DRUMS/BASS/LOOP PHRASE
User rhythm arrangements, user drum patterns, user
bass patterns, and user loop phrases will all be
recovered.
ARRANGEMENT
Only user rhythm arrangements will be recovered.
DRUM&BASS PATTERN
Only user drum patterns and user bass patterns will be
recovered.
LOOP PHRASE ALL
User loop phrases from banks A through H will be
recovered.
LOOP PHRASE A–H
Only user loop phrases from the selected bank will be
recovered.
fig.41-21d_recoveruserlphall.bmp
If you select “LOOP PHRASE A–H,” a recovery
destination will appear at the bottom of the display. If
you want to change this setting, move the cursor to
“Destination” and then select a new recovery destination
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
6.
When you have selected all of the data you want to
recover, press [F4] (GO).
The BR-1600CD will start the recovery process. When the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that the
recovery has been completed successfully.
Reading backed-up hard disk contents
back into the hard disk (HDD Recover)
1.
Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing an HDD backup into
the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
3.
Press [F2] (RECOVER) or move the cursor to
RECOVER, and then press [ENTER/YES].
The Recover screen will appear.
fig.41-16d
4.
Press [F3] (HDD) or move the cursor to HDD, and then
press [ENTER/YES].
The message “HDD Recover OK?” will appear.
fig.41-24d
5.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The hard disk will be initialized and then the recovery
process will begin. When the message “Complete!”
appears, it indicates that the recovery has been
completed successfully.
If the hard disk contains any data of the same type
as that being recovered, it will be completely
overwritten in the recovery process. As it will not be
possible to restore this data, care should be taken to
ensure that important data is not accidentally
overwritten in this way.
When HDD Recover is carried out, all data and
songs that you have stored on the hard disk will be
overwritten with the contents of the CD-R/RW and
erased. As it will not be possible to restore data or
songs erased in this way, extra care should be taken.
BR-1600_R_e.book 209 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
210
Copying and writing waveform data
If you have a computer equipped with a CD-R/RW drive,
you can use CD-R/RW discs to transfer waveform data
between multiple BR-1600CDs.
You can, for example, use these discs to copy waveform data
created with the audio software on your computer and then
paste the data to audio tracks. You can also take audio track
data recorded with the BR-1600CD and copy it to your
computer for editing.
Copying waveform data from a computer to
the audio tracks (WAV/AIFF Import)
1.
Using a PC, burn and finalize a CD-R/RW disc
containing the audio data that you want to import.
For instructions on how to write waveform data to CD-
R/RW discs, refer to your computer and CD-R/RW
drive owner’s manuals.
2.
Place the CD-R/RW disc containing the copied hard
disk data in the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
3.
Press [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
4.
Press [F4] (WAVE).
The WAV/AIFF screen will appear.
fig.R16-07
5.
Press [F1] (IMPORT).
A list of the audio data files contained on the current
CD-R/RW disc will appear.
fig.R16-56d
If the WAV files are collected in a folder, then the folder
name and icon ( ) is displayed. To show the WAV
files within the folder, move the cursor to the folder
name and press [ENTER/YES].
fig.R16-94d
6.
To switch the format of the wave file you want to
import, press [F1] (TYPE).
[F1] acts as a toggle, switching the file format between
WAV and AIFF each time it’s pressed.
This procedure requires a computer equipped with a
drive capable of writing to CD-R/RW discs.
To be eligible for import, waveform data must meet
the following criteria. In most cases, you will not be
able to import other kinds of data.
• Use “ISO 9660 Level 2, Mode 1” to write the data to
the CD-R/RW disc.
• Audio data must be of WAV or AIFF format, in
stereo or mono, and with an uncompressed bit
depth of 8 or 16 bits. Furthermore, the sampling rate
must be 44.1 kHz.
• Audio data must be at least 500 ms in length.
• Name waveform data using eight letters followed by
a less than three-character extension.
• The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
BR-1600_R_e.book 210 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
211
Copying and writing waveform data
Section 4
7.
Move the cursor to the waveform data files you want to import.
fig.R16-08ad
At this point, you can hear what the waveform data sounds
like by pressing [F2] (PREVIEW) (WAVE Preview).
Press [ENTER/YES] again to cancel the preview.
8.
Press [F4] (SELECT).
The screen for specifying the import destination appears.
fig.R16-08d
9.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the import-destination track.
fig.R16-08bd
10.
Move the cursor to the right half of the screen and
specify the location of the import-destination.
fig.R16-08cd
Set the following items.
START (Start point):
Specify the starting location of the import-destination track.
END (End point):
Specify the ending location of the import-destination track.
11.
When you have finished making the settings, press [F4] (GO).
Copying of the waveform data begins.
When “Complete!” appears, the import is finished.
To quit copying while the import is still in progress,
press [EXIT/NO]. When the message “Cancel?” appears,
press [ENTER/YES]; the import is cancelled (it may take
some time after you press [EXIT/NO] for the message to
appear). Files imported up to the time the process is
cancelled are usable.
Copying audio track waveform data
to computers (WAV/AIFF Export)
You can write data for specified tracks to a CD-R/RW disc as
waveform data, then import the waveform data to the
computer, using your computer to read the CD-R/RW disc.
You will be unable to use CD-R/RW discs if your
computer is only equipped with a CD-ROM or CD-R
drive. In this case, used CD-R discs.
1.
Place a writable CD-R/RW disc (a blank disc) in the
BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
3.
Press [F4] (WAVE).
The WAV/AIFF screen will appear.
fig.R16-07d
4.
Press [F2] (EXPORT).
The Waveform Data Export screen appears.
fig.R16-10d
• At this time, press [F1] (DISP.FMT.) to switch between
ways to specify the location (measures, time, markers).
• If, after specifying the above parameters in terms of
location you switch to the measure or marker
indication, a “+” may appear if a discrepancy between
the indicated position and the actual position arises.
When using measures or markers to make the
specification, you can use the TIME/VALUE dial in the
respective screen to eliminate the discrepancy.
• If you want the import range to be from the
beginning of the waveform data to the end, press
[F3] (SELECT ALL).
BR-1600_R_e.book 211 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
212
Copying and writing waveform data
5.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the tracks you want to export.
fig.R16-11ad
If there are other tracks with the same settings (range,
location) that you want to export, move the cursor to the
following position, then make the settings with the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.R16-11d
The BR-1600CD is ready for selection of a new track.
Here, you cannot specify a track on top of another track
that has already been specified.
If you want to undo the specification of a track, rotate the
TIME/VALUE dial to the left and “?” appears.
Entries showing “?” are not exported.
By using the TIME/VALUE dial to select “*,” you can
specify that the operation apply to all tracks or all V-
tracks.
If you want the operation to apply to all V-tracks of all
tracks, select “*-*.”
6.
Move the cursor to “TYPE,” then rotate the TIME/
VALUE dial to select the file format you want to export.
fig.R16-11bd
TYPE:
WAV Exports data in WAV format (the format
mainly used with Windows).
AIFF Exports data in WAV format (the format
mainly used with Macintosh).
7.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to set the
time range to be exported.
START (Start Point):
Specifies the export-source track’s start point.
END (End Point):
Specifies the export-source track’s end point.
8.
When you have finished making the settings, press [F4]
(GO).
The message “Write Speed?” appears.
fig.R16-93d
9.
Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set the write speed.
Write Speed:
x2 (352 Kbps) Writes twice as fast.
x4 (704 Kbps) Writes four times as fast.
x8 (1408 Kbps) Writes eight times as fast.
10.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The message “Write Sure?” appears.
To cancel, press [EXIT/NO].
11.
Press [ENTER/YES] again.
Writing to the CD-R/RW disc begins.
When “Complete!” appears, the writing is finished.
The following files will have been written to the CD-R/
RW disc in ISO9660 Level 2, Mode 1 format.
Track 1, V-Track 1 T01___01.WAV or T01___01.AIF
Track 1, V-Track 2 T01___02.WAV or T01___02.AIF
Track 1, V-Track 3 T01___03.WAV or T01___03.AIF
• At this time, press [F1] (DISP.FMT.) to switch
between ways to specify the location (measures,
time, markers).
• If, after specifying the above parameters in terms of
location you switch to the measure or marker
indication, a “+” may appear if a discrepancy
between the indicated position and the actual
position arises. When using measures or markers to
make the specification, you can use the TIME/
VALUE dial in the respective screen to eliminate the
discrepancy.
• If you want the export range to be from the
beginning of the waveform data to the end, press
[F3] (SELECT ALL).
With some media, the range of write speeds may be
limited. In such cases, the values that can be set with
the TIME/VALUE dial may also be limited.
BR-1600_R_e.book 212 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
213
Copying and writing waveform data
Section 4
:
Track 2, V-Track 15 T02__15.WAV or T02__15.AIF
Track 2, V-Track 16 T02__16.WAV or T02__16.AIF
:
Track 3/4, V-Track 1 T0304_01.WAV or T0304_01.AIF
Track 3/4, V-Track 2 T0304_02.WAV or T0304_02.AIF
:
Track 15/16, V-Track 15 T151615.WAV or T151615.AIF
Track 15/16, V-Track 16 T151616.WAV or T151616.AIF
12.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the Top
screen.
13.
Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the
disc.
14.
Use the application on your computer to copy the data
from the CD-R/RW disc.
Playing SMFs using external
MIDI instruments (SMF Player)
You can use the BR-1600CD to read SMFs from CD-R/RW
discs and play these files using MIDI instruments connected
to the MIDI OUT port.
Any SMFs that satisfy the following conditions can be played
in this way.
Format:
0 or 1
File size:
250 KB maximum (Note that this will vary slightly based on
the SMF content.)
System Exclusive:
Packet sizes of 512 bytes or less
1.
Connect a MIDI cable between the MIDI OUT port on
the BR-1600CD and the MIDI IN port on your external
MIDI sound module.
fig.41-25
2.
Insert a CD-R/RW disc containing SMFs into the CD-R/
RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
3.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
4.
Press [F3] (SMF).
The function selection screen for SMFs will appear.
fig.41-27d
BR-1600_R_e.book 213 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
214
Copying and writing waveform data
5.
Press [F1] (PLAYER).
A list of the SMFs contained on the current CD-R/RW
disc will appear.
fig.41-28d
6.
Move the cursor to the SMF to be played and press [F4]
(PLAY).
fig.41-28ad
The message “Now Loading...” will appear and the SMF
will be loaded from the CD-R/RW disc.
When the reading process has been completed, the BR-
1600CD will start playback.
7.
Press [ENTER/YES] at the point where you want to stop
playback.
Erasing data from a CD-RW disc
If you are using CD-RW discs, you will be able to erase
unneeded data from the discs and reuse them for data storage.
1.
Insert the CD-RW disc to be erased into the BR-
1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD screen will appear.
fig.41-05d
3.
Move the cursor to the ERASE icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
The message “Erase Disc?” will appear.
fig.41-31d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES].
Press [EXIT/NO] to cancel deletion.
The data erasure will begin and the state of progress will
be displayed. When the message “Complete!” appears, it
indicates that erasing has been completed.
• This process results in all data being erased from a disc.
• Data erasure is possible only with CD-RW discs.
Data cannot be erased from CD-R discs.
• The amount of time required for erasing data will
depend on the type of CD-RW disc used and the
volume of data that it contains.
• Once erasing has been started, it will not be possible
to cancel this process.
BR-1600_R_e.book 214 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
215
Copying and writing waveform data
Section 4
Setting the time until the CD-R/
RW drive stops (CD Hold Time)
Whenever the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive is used to read
or write data, the drive’s internal motor will continue to spin
for a specific period of time after this process has been
completed. In situations where this becomes a hindrance to
the music making process, you can set a new duration for the
spinning down of the motor.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System Parameter screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “CD Hold Time” and set a suitable
time using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.41-34d
The CD hold time can be set within a range of 1 second
to 32 minutes. At the time of purchase, the hold time will
be set to 32 seconds.
Once the CD-R/RW drive’s motor has stopped, a
certain amount of time will be required for it to
reach a stable operating speed the next time data
needs to be read or written. If the reading and
writing of data will be carried out frequently, you
should set a longer hold time to ensure that the
drive’s motor does not stop between each operation.
BR-1600_R_e.book 215 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
216
Convenient functions for audio CD creation
The following section describes the precautions to be
observed and convenient functions that you can use
whenever creating audio CDs.
Precautions
In addition to CD-R discs, you can also use CD-RW discs
when making audio CDs. However, it may not be possible
for audio CDs created using CD-RW discs to be played on
standard CD players.
Furthermore, even when CD-R discs are used for this purpose,
playback will not be possible on CD players that do not support
this type of media. You should, therefore, confirm that the CD
player to be used is compatible with CD-R discs.
Note that the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive can play commercially
produced audio CDs, CD-R discs, and CD-RW discs.
Setting the time between
songs (Pre-Gap)
Often when you are playing audio CDs on standard CD
players, you will see a countdown in the form of “-3, -2, -1”
on the player’s display before songs start. This duration is
referred to as a Pre-Gap, and it can be freely set during the
CD creation process to allow song lengths to be adjusted
without having to record silence at the end of each.
1.
Press [AUDIO CD WRITE/PLAY].
The Audio CD screen will appear.
fig.40-01d
2.
Press [F1] (WRITE).
The Audio CD Write screen will appear.
fig.40-02d
3.
Move the cursor to the PRE GAP icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (PRE GAP) if the PRE
GAP icon is currently displayed.
The pre-gap setting screen will appear.
fig.40-03d
4.
Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to specify a pre-gap time
in seconds.
For more details regarding basic functions for audio
CD creation, refer to “Writing your finished song to
a CD (Audio CD Write)” (Basic Operation; p. 62).
Whenever a CD is created using the Disc At Once By
Marker function (see Basic Operation; p. 66), the pre-
gap specified here will be ignored and all gaps will
be set to 0 seconds.
BR-1600_R_e.book 216 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
217
Convenient functions for audio CD creation
Section 4
Erasing CD-RW discs (CD-RW Erase)
If you are using CD-RW discs, you will be able to erase
unneeded data from the discs and reuse them for data
storage.
1.
Insert the CD-RW disc to be erased into the BR-
1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press CD-R/RW [DATA SAVE/LOAD].
The Data CD Save/Load screen will appear.
fig.40-04d
3.
Move the cursor to the ERASE icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press the corresponding FUNCTION
button if the ERASE icon is currently displayed.
The message “Erase Disc?” will appear.
fig.40-05d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES]. (If you do not want to erase the
disc, press [EXIT/NO].)
The data erasure will begin and the state of progress will be
displayed. When the message “Complete” appears and the
track buttons begin to flash, the erasure is complete.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the
disc.
• This process results in all data being permanently
erased from a disc. Due caution must be observed—
always check first to make sure you don’t erase a
CD-RW disc that contains important data.
• Data erasure is possible only with CD-RW discs.
Data cannot be erased from CD-R discs.
• In certain cases, a period of several seconds will pass
before the disc is actually ejected.
• Once erasing has been started, it will not be possible
to cancel this process.
• The amount of time required for erasing data will
depend on the type of CD-RW disc used and the
volume of data that it contains.
BR-1600_R_e.book 217 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
218
Convenient functions for audio CD creation
Enabling playback on CD
players (Finalize)
If you intend to play a audio CD that was written using the
BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive on a standard CD player, the
audio CD must be finalized. Audio CD-R/RW discs can be
finalized at any time to enable playback on this type of
player.
1.
Insert the CD-R/RW disc to be finalized into the BR-
1600CD’s CD-R/RW drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press [AUDIO CD WRITE/PLAY].
The Audio CD screen will appear.
fig.40-01d
3.
Press [F3] (FINALIZE).
The message “Finalize OK?” will appear.
fig.40-07d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES].
If you want to cancel finalization, press [EXIT/NO].
Finalization will begin and the state of progress will be
displayed. When the message “Complete” appears and
the track buttons begin to flash, the finalization is
complete.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
Press the CD-R/RW drive’s EJECT button to eject the
disc.
BR-1600_R_e.book 218 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
219
Convenient functions for audio CD creation
Section 4
Importing songs from CDs to
audio tracks (Audio CD Import)
The BR-1600CD allows you to import selected songs from a
audio CD to audio tracks.
1.
Insert a audio CD into the BR-1600CD’s CD-R/RW
drive.
The drive’s access indicator will begin to flash. Wait until
this indicator stops flashing and turns off before
proceeding.
2.
Press [AUDIO CD WRITE/PLAY].
The Audio CD screen will appear.
fig.40-01d
3.
Press [F2] (PLAY/IMP.).
The Audio CD import screen will appear.
fig.40-09d
4.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the number of the
song to be imported.
fig.40-09ad
You can use the normal procedure for audio CD
playback (Basic Operation; p. 70) at this time to hear the
selected song.
5.
Press [F4] (IMPORT).
The Audio CD import screen will appear.
fig.40-09bd
6.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the destination for
import and press [ENTER/YES].
The message “Now Importing...” will appear and import
to the audio track will begin. When the message
“Complete!” appears, it indicates that the import
procedure has been successfully completed.
BR-1600_R_e.book 219 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
220
MEMO
BR-1600_R_e.book 220 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
221
Section 5 Using MIDI
Section 5
Using MIDI
BR-1600_R_e.book 221 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
222
MIDI fundamentals
By using MIDI to connect the BR-1600CD to other MIDI-
capable devices, you can perform the following:
●
Play rhythm guide performances on external MIDI
sound module
●
Synchronize with external MIDI sequencers and rhythm
machines
●
Control MMC-compatible devices from the BR-1600CD
●
Control track volumes automatically via MIDI (MIDI
Fader)
●
Input drum and bass patterns using an external
keyboard (MIDI Recording)
This section provides a basic description of MIDI and
explains the various ways it can be used.
What is MIDI?
MIDI stands for “Musical Instrument Digital Interface.”
MIDI is a global standard devised so that performance data,
program change data, and other similar information could be
exchanged among electronic musical instruments and
computers. If a device is MIDI compatible, it will be able to
exchange performance data with other MIDI compatible
devices, even if they are of a different type or brand.
MIDI connectors
MIDI messages (i.e., the data handled by MIDI) are
exchanged using the following three types of MIDI port.
MIDI IN:
This connector accepts the MIDI messages arriving from
other MIDI devices.
MIDI OUT:
All the MIDI messages from the BR-1600CD are sent out
from this connector.
MIDI THRU:
This connector re-transmits all the MIDI messages that arrive
at the MIDI IN connector.
The BR-1600CD is equipped with a MIDI IN and MIDI
OUT port, but not with a MIDI THRU port.
MIDI channels
The MIDI standard allows data to be exchanged among
multiple MIDI-compatible devices using a single MIDI cable,
and this is made possible by what are known as MIDI
channels.
In simple terms, a MIDI channel is quite similar to a TV
channel. For example, you can change TV channels to watch
programs from a variety of broadcasters. In this type of
situation, information is communicated only when the
channel on the transmitting end matches the channel on the
receiving end.
Likewise, with MIDI as well, if the transmitting device is (for
example) set to MIDI channel 1, MIDI messages will be
received only if the MIDI channel on the receiving end is also
set to 1.
MIDI Implementation Charts
MIDI makes it possible for a vast range of electronic musical
devices to communicate with each other. However, this does
not mean that every MIDI device can handle every single
type of MIDI message. In reality, two MIDI-compatible
devices can only exchange the MIDI messages that are
supported by both.
The user’s manual for any MIDI-compatible device will
contain a MIDI Implementation Chart, and this chart allows
you to quickly find out which MIDI messages the device in
question can transmit and receive.
When two MIDI devices are to be used together, you should
compare their MIDI implementation charts to make sure that
exchange of the required MIDI messages will be possible.
For more detailed information regarding the BR-1600CD’s
MIDI characteristics, refer to “MIDI Implementation” (p.
288).
BR-1600_R_e.book 222 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
223
Section 5
Playing drum and bass patterns on external MIDI sound module
When you play back drum and bass patterns, rhythm
arrangements, and the like, the BR-1600CD will use its
internal drum and bass sounds to reproduce the
programmed performance. However, if you want to use
drum and bass sounds other than those stored internally,
you can transmit performance data via the MIDI OUT port to
have the performance played on a different MIDI sound
module. In this way, you can play back drum and bass
patterns using your favorite sounds.
1.
Using a MIDI cable, connect the BR-1600CD to the MIDI
sound module as shown in the following diagram.
fig.50-01
2.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the MIDI icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (MIDI) if the MIDI icon
is currently displayed.
The MIDI screen will appear.
fig.50-03d
4.
Move the cursor to “Drums Note Channel” and set a
suitable MIDI channel using the TIME/VALUE dial.
OFF: Note messages will not be transmitted
for drums.
1 through 16: Note messages for drums will be
transmitted on the selected MIDI
channel.
5.
Move the cursor to “Bass Note Channel” and set a
suitable MIDI channel using the TIME/VALUE dial.
OFF: Note messages will not be transmitted
for bass.
1 through 16: Note messages for bass will be
transmitted on the selected MIDI channel.
6.
When the required settings have been made, press
[EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
7.
Play the rhythm guide performance.
The rhythm and bass patterns will now both be played
by the MIDI sound module.
If necessary, adjust the volume of the performances on
the MIDI sound module.
The MIDI channel selected here must be the same as
that selected on the MIDI sound module. In the case
of GS sound module, GM sound module, and BOSS
rhythm machines, it is common for channel 10 to be
selected for drum data; accordingly, MIDI channel
10 should probably be selected at this time. For
details regarding the selection of MIDI channels on
the MIDI sound module, refer to the corresponding
user’s manual.
BR-1600_R_e.book 223 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
224
Playing drum and bass patterns on external MIDI sound module
Drum sounds and note numbers
The correspondence between drum sounds and note
numbers is as shown below.
If the drum sounds of your MIDI sound generating device
are not mapped as shown above, you should change the
sounds assigned to the various note numbers.
Refer to the user’s manual for the MIDI sound module for
details on how this is done.
Drum name Note number
Kick 1 C 2 (36)
Snare 1 D 2 (38)
Closed hi-hat F#2 (42)
Open hi-hat A#2 (46)
Crash cymbal C#3 (49)
Ride cymbal D#3 (51)
Tom 1 F 2 (41)
Tom 2 A 2 (45)
Tom 3 C3 (48)
Tom 4 D 3 (50)
Stick G 1 (31)
Cow bell G#3 (56)
Kick 2 B 1 (35)
Snare 2 E 2 (40)
Metronome (click) A 1 (33)
Metronome (bell) A#1 (34)
Claves D#5 (75)
Hi-Q D#1 (27)
BR-1600_R_e.book 224 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
225
Section 5
Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines
You can use the BR-1600CD’s tempo and time position as the
master tempo and master time position so that external MIDI
sequencers and rhythm machines can be synchronized with
its playback (Master Sync). The following three
synchronization methods are available.
●
A MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine can be
synchronized to the rhythm guide’s tempo using the BR-
1600CD’s MIDI timing clock.
●
A MIDI sequencer can be synchronized to the playback
time using MTC.
●
The tempo variations programmed into a MIDI
sequencer or rhythm machine can be recorded as a sync
track on the BR-1600CD, and the sequencer or rhythm
machine can then be played back using the recorded
tempos.
Even in the case of MIDI sequencers that are compatible with
neither MTC nor MMC, synchronization to the rhythm guide
will be possible using the MIDI timing clock if Song Position
Pointers are supported. Note, however, that a tempo map
must be created for the rhythm guide in advance. For more
detailed information, refer to “Setting tempos for individual
measures (Tempo Map)” (p. 198).
Synchronizing a MIDI device to the rhythm’s
tempo using the MIDI timing clock
This is the simplest of the three synchronization methods,
and it can be used to synchronize the majority of MIDI
sequencers and rhythm machines.
In this case, the MIDI timing clock is used as the
synchronization master. Specifically, the MIDI timing clock is
a signal that is transmitted six times per sixteenth note in
accordance with the current tempo. It can be used to notify
MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines of the time elapsed
since the start of the song so that these external devices can
be synchronized.
As the majority of MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines sold
today support MIDI timing clock signals, this method will probably
provide the simplest means of achieving synchronization.
1.
Using a MIDI cable, connect the BR-1600CD to the
MIDI sound module as shown in the following
diagram.
fig.50-04
2.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the SYNC icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SYNC) if the SYNC
icon is currently displayed.
The BR-1600CD does not support operation in slave
mode. In other words, it will not be possible to
synchronize the BR-1600CD to the tempo and time
position of an external MIDI sequencer or rhythm
machine.
BR-1600CD External
rhythm machine
MIDI INMIDI OUT
Master
● Synchronization will be possible
BR-1600CD External
rhythm machine
MIDI OUTMIDI IN
Slave
● Synchronization will not be possible
BR-1600_R_e.book 225 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
226
Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines
The synchronization setting screen will appear.
fig.50-06d
4.
Move the cursor to “Sync Generator” and select “MIDI
CLOCK” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Sync Generator:
This parameter sets the type of synchronization signal
that will be output via the MIDI OUT port. When you
intend to perform synchronized operation of an external
MIDI device using a synchronization signal, ensure that
one of the following types of signal is selected for
transmission.
OFF:
No synchronization signal will be transmitted.
MTC:
MTC (MIDI Time Code) will be transmitted.
MIDI CLOCK:
MIDI timing clock signals will be transmitted based on
the rhythm tempo.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
6.
Start playback on the BR-1600CD.
As playback starts, the MIDI sequencer will also start to
play in sync.
Synchronizing a MIDI sequencer
to the playback time using MTC
The term MIDI Time Code (MTC) refers to a type of time-
synchronization message that is output every frame in order
to allow MIDI sequencers to be synchronized. Since MTC is
based on time and not tempo, it allows extremely precise
synchronization to be achieved. Although this technique is
most often used with video equipment and the like, a large
number of MIDI sequencers are also MTC compatible.
1.
First of all, set up the external MIDI sequencer to
operate based on received MTC signals.
For more information regarding setting methods for the
MIDI sequencer, refer to its user’s manual.
2.
Using a MIDI cable, connect the BR-1600CD to the
MIDI sequencer as shown in the following diagram.
fig.50-07
3.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
4.
Move the cursor to the SYNC icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SYNC) if the SYNC icon
is currently displayed.
The Sync Parameter screen will appear.
BR-1600_R_e.book 226 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
227
Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines
Section 5
fig.50-09d
5.
Move the cursor to “Sync Generator” and select “MTC”
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The BR-1600CD will now be set up to transmit MTC
signals.
6.
Move the cursor to “MTC Type” and select a suitable
MTC type using the TIME/VALUE dial.
You will need to match the BR-1600CD’s MTC type to that
used on the external MIDI sequencer. For more information
regarding setting methods for the MIDI sequencer, refer to
its user’s manual. For more details regarding MTC types,
refer to “About MTC types” below.
7.
Start playback on the BR-1600CD.
As playback starts, the MIDI sequencer will also start to
play in sync.
8.
When the required settings have been made, press
[EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
When using MTC, settings must be made in order to
synchronize the MIDI sequencer to an external MTC
source; when using the MIDI timing clock, settings must
be made in order to synchronize the MIDI sequencer to
an external MIDI timing clock source.
25
25 frames per second frame-rate format. This for-
mat is generally used with SECAM and PAL
type video (as used in Europe and elsewhere),
with audio devices, and with movies.
24
24 frames per second frame-rate format. This for-
mat is generally used with movies in the US.
Drop and non-drop MTC formats
NTSC-type video recorders use two different types
of MTC format - namely, drop and non-drop.
Whereas frames are continuous with the non-drop
format, in order to provide support for NTSC-type
color video, drop format MTC skips two frames
every minute other than the 10th, 20th, 30th, 40th,
and 50th minutes.
Generally speaking, it is easier to work with
continuous frames when creating music or video,
and as a result, non-drop formats are more
commonly used. However, drop-format MTC is
often used in broadcasting facilities where the time
code must be matched to the actual clock time.
BR-1600_R_e.book 227 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
228
Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines
Changing the TIME field display
Whenever you are transmitting MTC signals from the BR-
1600CD in order to synchronize an external MIDI device, you
will be able to change the way in which time is displayed in
the TIME field.
1.
On the Sync Parameter screen, move the cursor to the
“Time Display Format” field and select a time display
format using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Time Display Format
This parameter is used to make settings for the standard
time indicated in the display’s TIME field. Although the
display format is normally set to “ABS,” if necessary,
you can set it to “REL” when you are transmitting MTC
signals from the BR-1600CD in order to synchronize an
external MIDI device.
ABSOLUTE TIME
A specified offset time will be added to the display time.
RELATIVE TIME
The song’s start time is displayed as “00:00:00-00.00.”
2.
Move the cursor to “Time Offset” and select a suitable
offset time using the TIME/VALUE dial.
An offset time is used whenever synchronizing external
MIDI devices to the BR-1600CD using MTC in order to
align the MTC time with respect to the song time.
In specific terms, the offset is determined by subtracting
the desired playback time on the BR-1600CD from the
desired playback time on the MTC-synchronized
external MIDI devices.
For example, the following offset times can be set in
order to have external MIDI devices play back at the
MTC times shown below when the BR-1600CD’s song
time is “01h00m00s00.”
3.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Synchronizing a MIDI device by recording its
tempo changes on the BR-1600CD (Sync Track)
You can use the procedure described below to receive MIDI
timing clock signals from an external MIDI sequencer or
rhythm machine on the BR-1600CD, to detect the tempos of
the MIDI device’s playback, and to automatically create
rhythm tempos based on these.
A tempo recording created in this way is known as a Sync
Track, and when used together with MIDI timing clock
signals, you will be able to synchronize the external MIDI
device to the BR-1600CD while maintaining all of the
originally programmed tempo changes.
●
A sync track must be created before
synchronization is possible.
1.
Set up the MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine as the
synchronization master and enable the transmission of
MIDI timing clock signals.
For more information regarding setting methods for the
MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine, refer to its user’s
manual.
2.
Using a MIDI cable, connect the BR-1600CD to the
MIDI sequencer as shown in the following diagram.
fig.50-10
3.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
BR-1600CD
song time
MTC on MIDI
devices Offset time
01h00m00s00 01h30m00s00 00h30m00s00
01h00m00s00 00h30m00s00 23h30m00s00
Rhythm machine
or MIDI sequencer
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
BR-1600_R_e.book 228 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
229
Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines
Section 5
4.
Move the cursor to the SYNC TRACK icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (SYNC TRACK) if the
SYNC TRACK icon is currently displayed.
The message “Waiting for Clock...” will appear and the
BR-1600CD will enter MIDI Timing Clock Standby
mode.
fig.50-12d
5.
Start playback on the MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine.
The BR-1600CD will start to record MIDI timing clock
signals.
Note that it will not be possible to perform playback or
recording while these signals are being recorded. In
addition, it will also not be possible to play back rhythm
performances.
Tempos in a range of 25 to 250 BPM can be recorded. All
tempos higher than 250 BPM will be recorded as being
250 BPM; similarly, any tempo lower than 25 BPM will
be recorded as 25 BPM.
Approximately 4,000 eighth notes (i.e., approximately
500 measures in 4/4-time) can be recorded in a sync
track. If this limit is reached, the BR-1600CD will
automatically stop recording.
6.
When playback has reached the point at which you
would like to stop recording, stop playback on the
external MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine.
The recording of MIDI timing clock signals will stop
automatically, and the display will return to the top screen.
This completes the process for creating a sync track.
7.
If you wish to store the sync track that has been created,
save the current song (p. 72).
Note that only one sync track can be recorded per song.
●
Let’s now try to synchronize playback of the
MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine to the BR-
1600CD based on the sync track that was
created.
1.
Referring to the user’s manual for the MIDI sequencer
or rhythm machine, set up this device as a
synchronization slave and enable the reception of
MIDI timing clock signals.
2.
Reconnect the MIDI cable as shown below.
fig.50-13
3.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
4.
Move the cursor to the SYNC icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SYNC) if the SYNC
icon is currently displayed.
The synchronization setting screen will appear.
fig.50-15d
5.
Move the cursor to “Sync Source” and select “SYNC
TRACK” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.50-16d
TEMPO MAP:
The original tempo map for the rhythm arrangement
will be used.
SYNC TRACK:
The sync track will be used.
Rhythm machine or
MIDI sequencer
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
BR-1600_R_e.book 229 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
230
Synchronizing external MIDI sequencers and rhythm machines
6.
Move the cursor to “Sync Generator” and select “MIDI
CLOCK” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
The BR-1600CD will now be set up to transmit MIDI
timing clock signals.
7.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
8.
Make sure that PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM
[ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] is lighted.
If this button’s indicator is off, press PROGRAMMABLE
RHYTHM [ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN] so it is
lighted.
9.
Start playback on the BR-1600CD.
As playback starts, the MIDI sequencer or rhythm
machine will also start to play in sync.
Setting the starting time of
synchronization (Sync Offset)
If you wish to synchronize the external MIDI sequencer or
rhythm machine from the middle of the song, do as follows:
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYNC icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (SYNC) if the SYNC
icon is currently displayed.
The synchronization setting screen will appear.
fig.50-06d
3.
Move the cursor to “Sync Offset” and set the time at
which you wish to start synchronization, using the
TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.50-100d
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
Play the BR-1600CD after completing the above settings,
and the external MIDI sequencer or rhythm machine will
start playing from the time you set with the Sync Offset.
“SYNC TRACK” will only be available for selection
when a sync track has been recorded.
• When “SYNC TRACK” has been selected, any
editing of the tempo map (p. 198) on the rhythm
arrangement screen will have no effect.
• Sync track settings are common to all rhythm
arrangements.
The internal drum/bass/loop phrase in the BR-
1600CD will not be played at the earlier time set
with the Sync Offset.
BR-1600_R_e.book 230 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
231
Section 5
Controlling MMC-compatible devices from the BR-1600CD
The following section will describe the settings necessary for
synchronizing a PC-based sequencer application compatible
with MMC and MTC.
In this type of setup, the BR-1600CD will act as master for
both MMC and MTC, and therefore, you will be able to
perform start, stop, rewind, and other similar sequencer
operations remotely from the BR-1600CD.
1.
Using a MIDI cable, connect the BR-1600CD to the PC
as shown in the following diagram.
fig.50-17
2.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the MIDI icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (MIDI) if the MIDI icon
is currently displayed.
The MIDI screen will appear.
fig.50-19d
4.
Move the cursor to “MMC Mode” and select
“MASTER” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
MMC Mode
This parameter is used to set the BR-1600CD’s MMC
operation mode.
OFF: No MMC signals will be transmitted.
MASTER: MMC signals will be transmitted and the
BR-1600CD will operate as master in the
MIDI environment.
For more details regarding the MMC functions
supported by the BR-1600CD, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (p. 288).
5.
Press [EXIT/NO], move the cursor to the SYNC icon,
and then press [ENTER/YES].
Synchronization using MTC will now be possible.
For more details, see Step 4 and subsequent steps from
“Synchronizing a MIDI device to the rhythm’s tempo
using the MIDI timing clock” (p. 225).
6.
Set up the sequencer application for MMC.
The following setting must be made on the sequencer
application to be used. Refer to the user’s manual for the
application in question for details on how this is done.
MTC: Received
MTC type: Match this with the MTC type set for the
BR-1600CD.
MMC: Received
7.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
What is MMC?
An abbreviation of MIDI Machine Control, MMC is
a protocol for the remote control of multiple
recording devices from a single device using MIDI
system exclusive messages. Since the BR-1600CD
supports this protocol, it can be used to start, stop,
rewind, or control connected MIDI devices in a
range of other similar ways.
Note, however, that not all MIDI devices will be
compatible with the BR-1600CD’s MMC
configuration. In such a case, it will not be possible
to carry out remote control as described below.
For more details regarding the MMC functions
supported by the BR-1600CD, refer to “MIDI
Implementation” (p. 288).
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
BR-1600_R_e.book 231 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
232
Controlling track volumes via MIDI (MIDI Fader)
The BR-1600CD can both transmit and receive fader
operations in the form of MIDI signals (MIDI Fader). And in
addition to fader signals, expression pedal signals can also be
transmitted and received in the same way. By using this
function to record and playback fader and expression pedal
operations on an external device such as a MIDI sequencer,
you will be able to carry out remote control of BR-1600CD
mix-downs and other procedures.
Signals can be transmitted and received for the following
types of faders.
• Faders for Tracks 1 through 8 and 9/10 through 15/16
• The MASTER fader
• An expression pedal
Turning MIDI Fader on and off
Use the following procedure to turn the transmission and
reception of fader operations via MIDI on and off. At the
time of purchase, MIDI Fader will be turned off, so you will
need to turn this function on if you intend to use it.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the MIDI icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (MIDI) if the MIDI icon
is currently displayed.
The MIDI screen will appear.
fig50-21d
3.
Move the cursor to “MIDI Fader” and select “ON”
using the TIME/VALUE dial.
Fader operation data will now be transmitted and
received using controller number 7 (i.e., channel
volume).
Operation signals for the INPUT SENS and INPUT
LEVEL knobs cannot be communicated via MIDI.
The MIDI Fader on/off setting will be maintained
when the BR-1600CD is turned off. Note, however,
that if you fail to turn the BR-1600CD off in
accordance with the correct shutdown procedure,
this setting data will be lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 232 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
233
Controlling track volumes via MIDI (MIDI Fader)
Section 5
Setting the MIDI channel for
MIDI Fader
At the time of purchase, the following MIDI channels will be
initially assigned to the BR-1600CD’s faders and expression
pedal.
Tracks 1 through 8: Channels 1 through 8
Track 9/10: Channel 9
Track 11/12: Channel 11
Track 13/14: Channel 13
Track 15/16: Channel 15
MASTER fader Channel 16
Expression pedal OFF
Use the following procedure to change any of these MIDI
channel settings.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the MIDI icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4} (MIDI) if the MIDI icon
is currently displayed.
The MIDI screen will appear.
fig.50-23d
3.
Move the cursor to one of the channel settings (i.e.,
“Track 1 Channel” through “Track 15&16 Channel,”
“Master Fader Channel” and “EXP Pedal Channel”),
and change the channel assignment using the TIME/
VALUE dial.
OFF:
Fader operation data will not be communicated via MIDI.
1 through 16:
This channel will be used to transmit and receive fader
operation data. If the same MIDI channel is set for a
number of different faders, any fader operation data
received on that channel will be used to operate all of the
corresponding faders simultaneously.
Confirming the current fader
positions
When fader operation data is received via MIDI, the setting
for the corresponding fader will change while the actual
fader remains in the same position, and as a result, the
volume level indicated by the fader and the actual volume
level will no longer match.
In such a case, you can use the following procedure to
confirm the fader position and the actual volume level.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the FADER icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (FADER) if the FADER
icon is currently displayed.
A screen showing the various fader positions will
appear.
fig.50-25d
: Position of the fader (i.e., the indicated volume)
: Actual fader setting (i.e., the actual volume level)
Whenever you physically move a fader, the actual fader
setting will be aligned with the fader position, and this
condition is indicated by “ ” in the fader display.
The MIDI channel setting will be maintained when
the BR-1600CD is turned off. Note, however, that if
you fail to turn the BR-1600CD off in accordance
with the correct shutdown procedure, this setting
data will be lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 233 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
234
Inputting drum and bass patterns from a MIDI keyboard (MIDI Recording)
Although the BR-1600CD’s track buttons and faders can be
used to input drum and bass patterns, the input procedure
can be simplified and note volumes can be controlled much
more precisely if you use an external MIDI keyboard for this
purpose.
1.
Connect an external MIDI keyboard as shown below.
fig.50-26
2.
Start real-time drum or bass recording (p. 153, p. 167).
You will now be able to use the MIDI keyboard to input
drum and bass performance data.
MIDI keyboard
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
• In some cases, depending on the range, the BR-
1600CD won’t produce any sound when you press a
key on a MIDI keyboard. This is due to the fact that
only a predetermined range of note numbers have
been assigned sounds, whether it be with drums or
with bass.
For more detailed information, refer to “Drum
sounds and note numbers” (p. 224).
Regardless of the selected sound, furthermore, the
lowest note for bass is C-1 (0), and the highest note is
C5 (72). Note, however, that poor sound quality or
considerable noise may occur with notes below C1
and above C4.
• If the drum and bass sounds are not being played
during Realtime Recording, it may that Note
messages are not being transmitted from the
external MIDI keyboard. After referring to the MIDI
keyboard owner’s manual, make the settings so that
the Note messages are properly transmitted from
the external MIDI keyboard.
BR-1600_R_e.book 234 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
235
Section 5
Using MIDI to Control the Switching of the
Insert Effects (Effects Program Change)
You can use Program Changes received at MIDI IN to switch
insert effects patches. Similarly, you can also have insert
effects patch selections made on the BR-1600CD transmitted
as Program Changes from MIDI OUT.
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the MIDI icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (MIDI) if the MIDI icon
is currently displayed.
The MIDI screen will appear.
fig.50-21d
3.
Move the cursor to “Effects Program Chg.” and use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select whether or not Program
Changes are to be transmitted and received.
fig.50-50d
OFF:
Program Changes are not transmitted or received.
PC ONLY:
Insert Effects patches are switched when a Program
Change is received at MIDI IN. In addition, when an
insert effects patch is selected with the BR-1600CD, that
patch number is transmitted from MIDI OUT as a
Program Change.
PC+BANK:
Bank Select and Program Change messages are received
at MIDI IN. Insert effects patches are switched when
Program Changes are received. Simultaneously, the
insert effects patch bank is switched according to the
Bank Select message received immediately before this.
In addition, when an insert effects patch is selected on
the BR-1600CD, the bank and number for that patch are
transmitted from MIDI OUT as Bank Select and Program
Change messages.
4.
Move the cursor to “Effects Channel” and turn the
TIME/VALUE dial to select the MIDI channel over
which the Program Change messages are to be
transmitted and received.
fig.50-60d
OFF:
Bank Select and Program Change messages are not
transmitted or received.
1–16
Bank Select and Program Change messages are
transmitted and received on the selected channel.
5.
If you wish to store the effects program change setting,
save the current song (p. 72).
Bank Select and Program numbers correspond to the insert
effect patch banks and numbers as shown below.
Bank Select Program
Number
Patch
MSB LSB Bank Number
0
0 1–100 GUITAR P001–P100
1 1–50 MIC P001–P050
2 1–10
MULTI CHANNEL
P001–P010
3 1–50 STEREO P001–P050
4 1–50 SIMUL P001–P050
1
0 1–100 GUITAR U001–U100
1 1–50 MIC U001–U050
2 1–10
MULTI CHANNEL
U001–U010
3 1–50 STEREO U001–U050
4 1–50 SIMUL U001–U050
2
0 1–100 GUITAR S001–S100
1 1–50 MIC S001–S050
2 1–10
MULTI CHANNEL
S001–S010
3 1–50 STEREO S001–S050
4 1–50 SIMUL S001–S050
BR-1600_R_e.book 235 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
236
Controlling external video devices from the BR-1600CD (V-LINK)
What is V-LINK?
V-LINK ( ) is a function that allows you to control
audio and video. When used together with a V-LINK
compatible video device, V-LINK allows you to apply a host
of video effects in an expressive, simple, and highly
enjoyable manner.
What can V-LINK do?
If, for example, you were to combine the BR-1600CD with an
Edirol DV-7PR using V-LINK, you would be able to carry out
the following operations from the BR-1600CD:
●
Remotely set the data required for DV-7PR performances.
●
Switch video segments (i.e., clip or palette) using track buttons.
●
Control image brightness and tone using the VALUE knobs.
●
Automatically control video by recording track button
and VALUE knob operations.
An Edirol UM-1 or UM-1S (sold separately) will be
needed to connect the BR-1600CD with a DV-7PR.
Connecting V-LINK devices
In order to prevent malfunction, speaker damage, and the
like during the connection process, turn down all volumes
and then turn off all devices.
fig.51-01
Connect the BR-1600CD’s MIDI OUT port to the DV-7PR’s
remote terminal using a UM-1.
When using a DV-7PR, start up Presentation Mode on
that device.
Using V-LINK
fig.51-02
1.
Press [V-LINK].
This button will light up, V-LINK will be turned on, and
the V-LINK screen will appear.
fig.51-03d
The required information for V-LINK settings will now be
sent from the BR-1600CD via the MIDI OUT port, and the
DV-7PR will be automatically set up for remote operation.
2.
Operate the track buttons and VALUE knobs while
watching the DV-7PR.
The video playback will be controlled accordingly.
At the time of purchase, the following functions are
assigned to the BR-1600CD’s track buttons and VALUE
knobs.
Pressing a track button:
The DV-7PR or any other connected video device will
play back the clip corresponding to the clip number that
has been assigned to the track button.
Pressing a track button while holding [V-
TRACK]:
A palette can be selected for the connected video device.
Turning the VALUE 1–4 knobs:
The DV-7PR or any other connected video device will
control playback in accordance with the function that
has been assigned to the knob.
3.
To stop the video playback on the DV-7PR, press [F2]
(STOP CLIP).
The video playback will stop.
MIDI OUT
USB
1, 3
2
2
BR-1600_R_e.book 236 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
237
Controlling external video devices from the BR-1600CD (V-LINK)
Section 5
4.
To turn V-LINK off, press [V-LINK] once again.
This button will turn off and the display will return to
the top screen.
Changing V-LINK function
assignments
1.
Press [F1] (ASSIGN).
The screen for assigning V-LINK functions will appear.
fig.51-04d
2.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to change
track-button number assignments.
Clips 1 through 32 (i.e., CL1 through 32) can be allocated
to track buttons.
At the time of purchase, CL1 through CL12 will already
have been assigned to the track buttons for Tracks 1
through 8 and Tracks 9/10 through 15/16.
MIDI Program Change messages 00H through 1FH are
output via the MIDI OUT port for clips 1 through 32.
3.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to change
VALUE-knob function assignments.
The following functions can be assigned to VALUE knobs.
4.
When you have finished making settings, press [EXIT/
NO] to return to the V-LINK screen.
• A certain delay (i.e., approximately 200 to 300 ms)
will occur between actual pressing of the track
button and switching of the video.
• It will not be possible to call up any screen other
than the top screen when V-LINK is turned on.
• If you press a track button while holding down [V-
TRACK], Palette 1 through Palette 12 will be
assigned to the track buttons for Tracks 1 through 8
and Tracks 9/10 through 15/16. Note that it will not
be possible to select palettes numbered 13 or higher
in order to modify assignments.
• Simply specifying a palette will not cause the video
to change; rather, this selection will be implemented
upon the next switching of a clip.
V-LINK function Display MIDI message
transmitted
Playback Speed PLAY SPEED CC 10 (panpot)
Dissolve Time
(i.e., video
switching time)
DISSOLVE CC 5
(portamento time)
Audio Level AUDIO LVL CC 7 (volume)
Color Cb (color
difference signal)
COLOR CB CC 72 (release)
Color Cr (color
difference signal)
COLOR CR CC 71 (resonance)
Brightness BRIGHTNESS CC 74 (cut-off)
Visual Effects 1
(VFX1)
VFX1 CC 1 (modulation)
Visual Effects 2
(VFX2)
VFX2 CC 91 (reverb)
Visual Effects 3
(VFX3)
VFX3 CC94 (celeste)
Visual Effects 4
(VFX4)
VFX4 CC95 (phaser)
Master Fader MASTER CC 73 (attack)
T Bar T BAR CC 11 (expression)
Dual Stream DUAL STREAM CC 64 (hold 1)
BR-1600_R_e.book 237 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
238
Controlling external video devices from the BR-1600CD (V-LINK)
Recording and playing V-LINK
control operations
By recording and playing video control operations carried
out using the track buttons and VALUE knobs, you can
control video in sync with the BR-1600CD’s playback.
Recording control operations
With V-LINK turned on, carry out the following procedure.
1.
Press V-LINK [REC].
V-LINK [REC] will start to flash, indicating that the BR-
1600CD is now ready for V-LINK recording.
“PLAYBACK: ON” is displayed in the upper right of the
screen, indicating that the V-LINK control function is
enabled for recording and playback.
When you press V-LINK [REC], if any control operations
have been previously recorded, they will be deleted.
2.
Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song and then
press [PLAY].
V-LINK recording will start as the BR-1600CD begins
playback.
Use the track buttons and the VALUE dials to carry out
the desired V-LINK controls. All of these control
operations will be recorded.
3.
Press [STOP] at the point where you want to stop V-
LINK recording.
V-LINK [REC] will stop flashing and remain lit; in
addition, the BR-1600CD will end the recording of V-
LINK operations.
Playing recorded control operations
With V-LINK [REC] lit up, carry out the following
procedure.
1.
Press [ZERO] to jump to the start of the song and then
press [PLAY].
The playback of recorded V-LINK control operations
will start as the BR-1600CD begins playback, and the
video device will be controlled automatically.
Although you will be able to perform control operations
using the track buttons and VALUE knobs at this time,
these real-time control signals will become mixed with
the playback of recorded operation signals, and it may
not be possible to achieve the desired effect.
2.
If you want to discontinue automatic V-LINK control,
press [F4] (ON/OFF) to set “PLAYBACK” to “OFF.”
“PLAYBACK: OFF” is displayed in the upper right of the
screen, indicating that the V-LINK control of recording
and playback is turned off.
Automatic V-LINK control will be temporarily stopped,
and only manual real-time control will be accepted.
3.
If you want to restart automatic V-LINK control, press
[F4] (ON/OFF) to set “PLAYBACK” to “ON.”
Erasing recorded control operations
You can use the following procedure to erase all control
operations that have been recorded.
1.
On the V-LINK screen, press [F3] (ERASE).
The message “Erase V-LINK Control?” will appear.
fig50-05d
2.
Press [ENTER/YES].
Press [EXIT/NO] if you do not want to erase this data.
The recorded data will be deleted, and when the
message “Complete!” appears, it indicates that this
operation has been completed.
BR-1600_R_e.book 238 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
239
Section 6 Using USB
Section 6
Using USB
BR-1600_R_e.book 239 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
240
Before Using USB (Overview)
The BR-1600CD is equipped with a USB connector, which
allows you to connect the BR-1600CD directly to a computer,
making it easy to back up your important song data and
exchange files between the BR-1600CD and the computer.
USB, short for “Universal Serial Bus,” is a type of interface
for connecting computers with a variety of peripheral
devices.
Using USB allows you to connect different peripherals using
a single USB cable, and also provides rapid data
transmission.
What’s more, you can connect and disconnect peripherals
with the power on, and the computer can automatically
recognize when devices are connected (you may need to
make settings when connecting certain devices).
Important
■
When you connect the BR-1600CD to your PC using a
USB cable, all folders and files on the BR-1600CD’s hard
disk will be displayed on the PC monitor, and you will
be able to freely modify, delete, or add to these files via
USB. In addition, you will be able to initialize the BR-
1600CD’s hard disk remotely using the PC.
Note, however, that if files and folders are modified,
deleted, or added using the PC, or if the hard disk is
initialized, the BR-1600CD may no longer be able to
function properly, and important data could be lost.
It is crucial, therefore, that no operations other than
those described below be carried out using USB.
Furthermore, BOSS/Roland will accept no responsibility
for the incorrect operation of the BR-1600CD or for the
loss of data resulting from the failure to observe this
precaution.
■
Do not perform the following actions when switching to
USB mode or transmitting data. These operations may
result in your computer not responding to the data.
Data on memory cards may also be corrupted.
Do not:
• Disconnect the USB cable
• Put the computer in suspended (standby) mode or
hibernation, restart, or quit
• Turn off the BR-1600CD’s power
Operations that can be
performed via USB
On the BR-1600CD, USB is used for the following tasks:
●
Backing up the BR-1600CD’s data
●
Reading backup data back into the BR-1600CD from the
PC (Recover)
●
Saving BR-1600CD track data in WAV/AIFF format
(WAV/AIFF Export)
●
Loading WAV/AIFF files in BR-1600CD tracks (WAV/
AIFF Import)
Realtime audio signals and MIDI messages cannot be
handled via the BR-1600CD’s USB connector.
Compatible OS
Windows:
Windows Me/2000/XP
Macintosh:
Mac OS 9.1.x/9.2.x
Mac OS X
Driver:
The BR-1600CD uses a standard DRIVER that is found on
OS. The DRIVER will be installed automatically once
connected with Computer via USB.
Precautions when using Windows XP or Windows 2000
If using Windows XP/2000, log on to Windows as one of
the following users:
• Administrator or other user with the privileges of the
Administrators group
• A user whose account type is Computer Administrator
Note that you will not be able to properly quit the USB
connection if the user name is not one of those described
above.
For more details, consult the system administrator for
the computer you are using.
BR-1600_R_e.book 240 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
241
Before Using USB (Overview)
Section 6
Connecting a computer
Use the USB cable to connect the BR-1600CD to your computer.
Purchase USB cables at computer stores or other retailers.
fig.52-01
If the BR-1600CD's hard disk has been initialized with a
number of different partitions, only the current partition
will be connected to the PC.
Structure of data on the BR-
1600CD’s hard disk
When you connect the BR-1600CD to a PC via USB and
perform USB menu operations, all of the folders and files on
the hard disk will be displayed on the PC monitor.
With certain versions of Windows OS, the “Removable
Disk (*:)” icon may be displayed.
fig.52-02
When you double-click the BR-1600CD icon or the
“Removable Disk (*:)” icon in Windows, or double-click the
BR-1600CD icon in Mac OS, all of the files and folders
contained in the BR-1600CD’s hard disk will be displayed on-
screen.
The structure of the files and folders on the hard disk is as
follows.
fig.52-03
USB cable
USB connector
of your computer
Windows XP
Windows 2000
Macintosh
BR-1600CD
BR-1600CD
Removable disk (*:)
(Ex.)
(Ex.)
(Ex.)
BR-1600CD
BR-1600CD
BR-1600_R_e.book 241 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
242
Backing up the BR-1600CD’s data
With Windows
1.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB
cable.
2.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed.
The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
4.
Move the cursor to “BACKUP” and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (BACKUP).
“Waiting...” appears in the display, and then
“Connecting...” is displayed.
fig.52-06d
When connection with the PC has been established, the
message will change to “Copy Song/Data Files to
computer.”
fig.52-06ed
Shortly after the connection has been established, the BR-
1600CD icon (or the “Removable Disk (*:)” icon will
appear on-screen.
fig.52-07
5.
Double-click the “BR-1600CD” (or “Removable Disk
(*:)”) icon.
The files and folders from the BR-1600CD’s hard disk
will be displayed on the PC monitor.
fig.52-08
6.
Select all of the files and folders and copy them to the
backup folder on the PC.
It is good practice to create a new folder for the storage
of backup data.
7.
Quit the connection to the computer.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure
below
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
BR-1600CD
Removable Disk (*:)
(Ex.)
Extra care should be taken to ensure that each and
every file and folder is selected and copied. If files or
folders are missed, the backup will be incomplete
and subsequent recovery operations may not be
possible.
Task tray
Task bar
BR-1600_R_e.book 242 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
243
Backing up the BR-1600CD’s data
Section 6
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
2) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
8.
Press BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The USB screen will be displayed once again.
• If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, pressing [ENTER/YES] returns the USB menu
screen to the display.
• If you are using an OS other than Windows Me, the BR-
1600CD will automatically return to the USB screen
when “Remove Hardware” is carried out.
9.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
With Macintosh
1.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB
cable.
2.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed.
The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
4.
Move the cursor to “BACKUP” and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (BACKUP).
“Waiting...” appears in the display, and then
“Connecting...” is displayed.
fig.52-06d
When connection with the PC has been established, the
message will change to “Copy Song/Data Files To
Computer.”
fig.52-06ed
Task tray
Task bar
If the current song contains newly recorded audio
data or newly modified settings, the message “Save
Current?” may be displayed during the backup
procedure. If you want to save your song before
starting the backup, press [ENTER/YES]; if this will
not be necessary, press [EXIT/NO]. Remember that
if you do not save a modified song at this time, all
newly recorded audio data, edited data, modified
mixer settings, etc. will be lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 243 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
244
Backing up the BR-1600CD’s data
Shortly after the connection has been established, the BR-
1600CD icon will appear on-screen.
fig.52-07a
5.
Double-click the “BR-1600CD.”
The files and folders from the BR-1600CD’s hard disk
will be displayed on the PC monitor.
fig.52-08
6.
Select all of the files and folders and copy them to the
backup folder on the computer.
It is good practice to create a new folder for the storage
of backup data.
7.
Quit the connection to the computer.
Drug the “BR-1600CD” icon to the Trash.
8.
Press BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The USB screen will be displayed once again.
If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, pressing [ENTER/YES] returns the USB menu
screen to the display.
9.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
BR-1600CD
(Ex.)
If the current song contains newly recorded audio
data or newly modified settings, the message “Save
Current?” may be displayed during the backup
procedure. If you want to save your song before
starting the backup, press [ENTER/YES]; if this will
not be necessary, press [EXIT/NO]. Remember that
if you do not save a modified song at this time, all
newly recorded audio data, edited data, modified
mixer settings, etc. will be lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 244 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
245
Section 6
Reading backup data back into the BR-1600CD from the PC (Recover)
With Windows
1.
Initialize the BR-1600CD’s hard disk. (p. 270)
Note that all of the data on the BR-1600CD’s hard disk
will be deleted as a result of this operation, and if
necessary, you should make a separate backup.
2.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB cable.
3.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
4.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed.
The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
5.
Move the cursor to “RECOVER” and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (RECOVER).
“Waiting...” appears in the display, and then
“Connecting...” is displayed.
fig.52-06d
When connection with the PC has been established, the
message will change to “Copy Song/Data Files to BR-
1600CD.”
fig.52-11ed
Shortly after the connection has been established, the BR-
1600CD icon or the “Removable Disk (*:)” icon will
appear on-screen.
fig.52-07
6.
Open the folder on the PC where you have stored the
backup data.
All of the backup files and folders will appear on-screen.
7.
Select all of the backup files and folders.
8.
Copy them to the “BR-1600CD” (or “Removable Disk
(*:)”) icon on the computer.
All of the files and folders copied in Step 7 will be
returned to the BR-1600CD’s internal hard disk.
9.
Quit the connection to the computer.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure
below
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
BR-1600CD
Removable Disk (*:)
(Ex.)
Extra care should be taken to ensure that each and
every file and folder is selected and copied. If files or
folders are missed, the recovery will be incomplete
and subsequent recovery operations may not be
possible.
During the recovery operation you may encounter
messages asking whether it is all right to overwrite
certain files—you should select “YES” in every
instance. If “NO” is selected even once, the recovery
operation will be incomplete, and this may prevent
the BR-1600CD from operating correctly.
Task tray
Task bar
BR-1600_R_e.book 245 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
246
Reading backup data back into the BR-1600CD from the PC (Recover)
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
2) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
10.
Press BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The message “Now Re-Loading...” will appear on the
BR-1600CD’s display, and the most recently selected
song will be reloaded.
When reloading has been completed, the display will
return to the USB screen.
• If you are using an OS other than Windows Me, the
message “Now Re-Loading...” will appear on the BR-
1600CD’s display immediately after “Remove
Hardware” is carried out, and the most recently selected
song will be reloaded. When reloading has been
completed, the display will return to the USB screen.
• If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, pressing [ENTER/YES] returns the USB menu
screen to the display.
11.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
With Macintosh
1.
Initialize the BR-1600CD’s hard disk. (p. 270)
Note that all of the data on the BR-1600CD’s hard disk
will be deleted as a result of this operation, and if
necessary, you should make a separate backup.
2.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB
cable.
3.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
4.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed. The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
5.
Move the cursor to “RECOVER” and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F2] (RECOVER).
“Waiting...” appears in the display, and then
“Connecting...” is displayed.
fig.52-06d
When connection with the PC has been established, the
message will change to “Copy Song/Data Files To BR-
1600CD.”
fig.52-11ed
Shortly after the connection has been established, the BR-
1600CD icon will appear on-screen.
fig.52-07b
Task tray
Task bar
If the current song contains newly recorded audio
data or newly modified settings, the message “Save
Current?” may be displayed during the recovery
procedure. If you want to save your song before
starting the recover process, press [ENTER/YES];
if this will not be necessary, press [EXIT/NO].
Remember that if you do not save a modified song
at this time, all newly recorded audio data, edited
data, modified mixer settings, etc. will be lost.
BR-1600CD
(Ex.)
BR-1600_R_e.book 246 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
247
Reading backup data back into the BR-1600CD from the PC (Recover)
Section 6
With Mac OS 9.1.x / 9.2.x
6.
Open the folder on the PC where you have stored the
backup data.
All of the backup files and folders will appear on-screen.
7.
Select all of the backup files and folders.
8.
Copy them to the “BR-1600CD” icon on the computer.
All of the files and folders copied in Step 7 will be
returned to the BR-1600CD’s internal hard disk.
9.
Quit the connection to the computer.
Drug the BR-1600CD icon to the Trash.
10.
Press BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The message “Now Re-Loading...” will appear on the
BR-1600CD’s display, and the most recently selected
song will be reloaded.
When reloading has been completed, the display will
return to the USB screen.
If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, pressing [ENTER/YES] returns the USB menu
screen to the display.
11.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
With Mac OS X
6.
Double-click the BR-1600CD icon.
The files and folders from the BR-1600CD’s hard disk
will be displayed on the PC monitor.
fig.52-08ax
7.
Open the folder on the PC where you have stored the
backup data.
All of the backup files and folders will appear on-screen.
8.
Select all of the backup files and folders.
9.
Copy them to the USB folder on the computer.
All of the files and folders copied in Step 8 will be
returned to the BR-1600CD’s internal hard disk.
10.
Quit the connection to the computer.
Drug the BR-1600CD icon to the Trash.
11.
Press BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
“Now Checking...” appears in the BR-1600CD’s display, then
“Now Copying...” is displayed, and the recovery begins.
When the recovery is finished, the message “Now Re-
Loading...” will appear in the display, and the most
recently selected song will be reloaded.
When reloading has been completed, the display will
return to the USB screen.
If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, pressing [ENTER/YES] returns the USB menu
screen to the display.
12.
Press [EXIT/NO] to return to the Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
Extra care should be taken to ensure that each and
every file and folder is selected and copied. If files or
folders are missed, the recovery will be incomplete and
subsequent recovery operations may not be possible.
During the recovery operation you may encounter
messages asking whether it is all right to overwrite
certain files—you should select “YES” in every
instance. If “NO” is selected even once, the recovery
operation will be incomplete, and this may prevent
the BR-1600CD from operating correctly.
If the current song contains newly recorded audio
data or newly modified settings, the message “Save
Current?” may be displayed during the recovery
procedure. If you want to save your song before
starting the recover process, press [ENTER/YES];
if this will not be necessary, press [EXIT/NO].
Remember that if you do not save a modified song
at this time, all newly recorded audio data, edited
data, modified mixer settings, etc. will be lost.
SYSINFO.BR2SONG0001 TEMP USERLPH
TEMPLPH USBUSB USBUSERDATA
Extra care should be taken to ensure that each and
every file and folder is selected and copied. If files or
folders are missed, the recovery will be incomplete and
subsequent recovery operations may not be possible.
During the recovery operation you may encounter
messages asking whether it is all right to overwrite
certain files—you should select “YES” in every
instance. If “NO” is selected even once, the recovery
operation will be incomplete, and this may prevent
the BR-1600CD from operating correctly.
BR-1600_R_e.book 247 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
248
Saving BR-1600CD track data in WAV/AIFF format (WAV/AIFF Export)
You can convert the BR-1600CD’s track data into WAV or
AIFF files and save these on your computer. After converting
your mastered tracks to WAV or AIFF files, you can easily
use your computer to create audio CDs with the data, as well
as load the data into audio applications.
With Windows
1.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB
cable.
2.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed.
The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
4.
Move the cursor to “EXPORT” and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (EXPORT).
The USB Export screen will appear.
fig.52-15ad
5.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
track/V-track to be saved.
When saving in mono
Select the track 1–8.
fig.52-15d
When saving in stereo
Select the track combination 1/2 –15/16.
fig.52-16d
6.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the file format.
WAV: This is an audio format used primarily with
Windows.
AIFF: This audio format is used primarily with
Macintosh.
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins.
The correspondence between tracks and converted file
names is as follows.
(Mono) (Stereo)
Track 1, V-Track 1 Track 1/2, V-Track 1
T01_ _ _01.WAV or T0102 _01.WAV or
T01_ _ _01.AIF T0102 _01.AIF
Track 1, V-Track 2 Track 1/2, V-Track 2
T01_ _ _02.WAV or T0102 _02.WAV or
T01_ _ _02.AIF T0102 _02.AIF
::
Track 8, V-Track 15 Track 15/16, V-Track 15
T08_ _ 15.WAV or T1516_15.WAV or
T08_ _ 15.AIF T1516_15.AIF
Track 8, V-Track 16 Track 15/16, V-Track 16
T08_ _ 16.WAV or T1516_16.WAV or
T08_ _ 16.AIF T1516_16.AIF
When the conversion is complete, the message “Copy 1
Wave File In BR-1600CD’s USB Folder To Computer”
will appear.
Shortly after the “BR-1600CD” (or “Removable Disk
(*:)”) icon is added to the computer.
fig.52-07
8.
Double-click the “BR-1600CD” (or “Removable Disk
(*:)”) icon.
All of the files and folders from the BR-1600CD’s hard
disk will be displayed on the PC monitor.
fig.52-18
BR-1600CD
Removable Disk (*:)
(Ex.)
BR-1600_R_e.book 248 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
249
Saving BR-1600CD track data in WAV/AIFF format (WAV/AIFF Export)
Section 6
9.
Click the USB folder.
fig.52-19
10.
Drag the WAV or AIFF file to the computer’s folder and
drop it in the folder.
11.
Quit the connection to the computer.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure
below
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
2) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
12.
Press the BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The file type selection screen will be displayed once
again.
WAV or AIFF files will be automatically deleted from
the BR-1600CD’s internal hard disk.
• If you are using an OS other than Windows Me, the BR-
1600CD will automatically return to the USB screen
when “Remove Hardware” is carried out.
• If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, pressing [ENTER/YES] returns the file format
selection screen to the display.
13.
When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the
Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
Task tray
Task bar
BR-1600_R_e.book 249 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
250
Saving BR-1600CD track data in WAV/AIFF format (WAV/AIFF Export)
With Macintosh
1.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB
cable.
2.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed.
The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
4.
Move the cursor to “EXPORT” and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (EXPORT).
The USB Export screen will appear.
fig.52-15ad
5.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
track/V-track to be saved.
When saving in mono
Select the track 1–8.
fig.52-15d
When saving in stereo
Select the track combination 1/2 –15/16.
fig.52-16d
6.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
file format.
WAV: This is an audio format used primarily with
Windows.
AIFF: This audio format is used primarily with
Macintosh.
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
Conversion of the WAV or AIFF file begins.
The correspondence between tracks and converted file
names is as follows.
(Mono) (Stereo)
Track 1, V-Track 1 Track 1/2, V-Track 1
T01_ _ _01.WAV or T0102 _01.WAV or
T01_ _ _01.AIF T0102 _01.AIF
Track 1, V-Track 2 Track 1/2, V-Track 2
T01_ _ _02.WAV or T0102 _02.WAV or
T01_ _ _02.AIF T0102 _02.AIF
::
Track 8, V-Track 15 Track 15/16, V-Track 15
T08_ _ 15.WAV or T1516_15.WAV or
T08_ _ 15.AIF T1516_15.AIF
Track 8, V-Track 16 Track 15/16, V-Track 16
T08_ _ 16.WAV or T1516_16.WAV or
T08_ _ 16.AIF T1516_16.AIF
When the conversion is complete, the message “Copy 1
Wave File In BR-1600CD’s USB Folder To Computer”
will appear.
Shortly after the “BR-1600CD” icon is added to the
computer.
fig.52-07a
8.
Double-click the “BR-1600CD” icon.
All of the files and folders from the BR-1600CD’s hard
disk will be displayed on the PC monitor.
fig.52-08a
9.
Double-click the USB folder.
fig.52-19a
BR-1600CD
(Ex.)
BR-1600_R_e.book 250 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
251
Saving BR-1600CD track data in WAV/AIFF format (WAV/AIFF Export)
Section 6
10.
Drag the WAV or AIFF file to the computer’s folder and
drop it in the folder.
11.
Quit the connection to the computer.
Drug the “BR-1600CD” icon to the Trash.
12.
Press the BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The file type selection screen will be displayed once
again.
WAV or AIFF files will be automatically deleted from
the BR-1600CD’s internal hard disk.
If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, pressing [ENTER/YES] returns the file format
selection screen to the display.
13.
When you have finished exporting the WAV or AIFF
file(s), press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the
Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
BR-1600_R_e.book 251 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
252
Loading WAV/AIFF files in BR-1600CD tracks (WAV/AIFF Import)
You can take WAV or AIFF files on your computer, such as
files created with audio software applications, and load them
to the BR-1600CD’s tracks.
●
Wave data in the following formats can be imported.
You cannot import wave data in other formats.
• WAV or AIFF format
• Mono or Stereo
• 8-bit or 16-bit
• Sampling Rate: 44.1 kHz
●
Add the extension “WAV” to imported WAV files and
the extension “AIF” to imported AIFF files.
●
Compressed WAV files or AIFF files cannot be loaded.
●
Extremely short waveform data (less than approximately
1 sec) cannot be loaded.
●
The loop point settings within an AIFF file will be
ignored.
With Windows
1.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB
cable.
2.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed.
The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
4.
Move the cursor to the IMPORT icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (IMPORT).
The USB Import screen will appear.
fig.52-22d
5.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
track and the V-Track to be loaded.
When loading to the tracks in mono
Select the track 1–8.
fig.52-23d
When loading to the tracks in stereo
Select the track combination 1/2–15/16.
fig.52-24d
6.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the measure or position in the track from which
loading is to start.
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you
switch among the specification methods for positions
(i.e., by bar, time, or marker).
fig.52-25d
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
When the connection is complete, the message “Copy 1
Wave File In Computer To BR-1600CD’s USB Folder”
will appear.
After several moments, the BR-1600CD icon or the
“Removable Disk (*:)” icon will appear on the PC monitor.
fig.52-07
8.
Click the BR-1600CD icon or the “Removable Disk (*:)” icon.
The files and folders from the BR-1600CD’s hard disk
will be displayed on the PC monitor.
In some cases, a certain amount of time will pass before
the hard disk is displayed.
BR-1600CD
Removable Disk (*:)
(Ex.)
BR-1600_R_e.book 252 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
253
Loading WAV/AIFF files in BR-1600CD tracks (WAV/AIFF Import)
Section 6
9.
Double-click the USB folder.
The USB folder opens. Confirm that the USB folder is
empty. The presence of any files in the USB folder will
prevent proper importation of WAV and AIFF files, so
be sure to delete any such files.
10.
Drag and drop the WAV or AIFF file to be imported on
the computer to the USB folder.
Only one file can be imported at a time in each import
operation. Do not drag and drop more than one file at a
time. The import procedure cannot be carried out
correctly when two or more files are present in the USB
folder.
11.
Quit the connection to the computer.
With Windows XP
In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
If this procedure fails to eject the disk, use the procedure
below
1) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
2) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
With Windows 2000/Me
1) In My Computer, right-click on the “BR-1600CD” icon
(or “Removable Disk (*:)” icon) to “Eject” the disk.
2) Click the icon in the task tray, then click the
“Stop USB Disk-drive (*:)” message displayed there.
fig.52-100
3) Click [OK] in the “Safe To Remove Hardware” dialog
box that appears.
12.
Press BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The WAV and/or AIFF files will be converted into audio
track data.
When this process has been completed, the USB Import
screen will be displayed once again. The WAV and/or
AIFF files will then be automatically deleted.
With certain OS, conversion will start automatically
without [EXIT/NO] having to be pressed.
13.
Press BR-1600CD’S [EXIT/NO] several times to return
to the Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, press [ENTER/YES].
With Macintosh
1.
Connect your computer and the BR-1600CD with a USB
cable.
2.
Confirm that the recorder is stopped, then press
[UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the USB icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F4] (USB) if the USB icon is
currently displayed.
The USB screen will appear.
fig.52-05d
Task tray
Task bar
Task tray
Task bar
If the current song contains newly recorded audio
data or newly modified settings, the message “Save
Current?” may be displayed during the import
procedure. If you want to save your song before
starting the import, press [ENTER/YES]; if this will
not be necessary, press [EXIT/NO]. Remember that
if you do not save a modified song at this time, all
newly recorded audio data, edited data, modified
mixer settings, etc. will be lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 253 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
254
Loading WAV/AIFF files in BR-1600CD tracks (WAV/AIFF Import)
4.
Move the cursor to the IMPORT icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F3] (IMPORT).
The USB Import screen will appear.
fig.52-22d
5.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to select the
track to be loaded.
When loading to the tracks in mono
Select the track 1–8.
fig.52-23d
When loading to the tracks in stereo
Select the track combination 1/2–15/16.
fig.52-24d
6.
Use [CURSOR] and the TIME/VALUE dial to specify
the measure or position in the track from which
loading is to start.
Pressing [F1] (DISP.FMT.) at this time will allow you
switch among the specification methods for positions
(i.e., by bar, time, or marker).
fig.52-25d
7.
Press [F4] (GO).
When the connection is complete, the message “Copy 1
Wave File In Computer To BR-1600CD’s USB Folder”
will appear.
After several moments, the BR-1600CD icon will appear
on the PC monitor.
fig.52-07a
8.
Double-click the BR-1600CD icon.
The files and folders from the BR-1600CD's hard disk
will be displayed on the PC monitor.
In some cases, a certain amount of time will pass before
the hard disk is displayed.
9.
Double-click the USB folder.
The USB folder opens.
Confirm that the USB folder is empty. The presence of
any files in the USB folder will prevent proper
importation of WAV and AIFF files, so be sure to delete
any such files.
10.
Drag and drop the WAV or AIFF file to be imported on
the computer to the USB folder.
Only one file can be imported at a time in each import
operation. Do not drag and drop more than one file at a
time. The import procedure cannot be carried out
correctly when two or more files are present in the USB
folder.
11.
Quit the connection to the computer.
Drug the BR-1600CD icon to the Trash.
12.
Press BR-1600CD’s [EXIT/NO].
The WAV and/or AIFF files will be converted into audio
track data.
When this process has been completed, the USB Import
screen will be displayed once again. The WAV and/or
AIFF files will then be automatically deleted.
13.
Press BR-1600CD’S [EXIT/NO] several times to return
to the Top screen.
At this point, you can safely disconnect the USB cable
from the BR-1600CD and the computer.
If you press [EXIT/NO] without quitting the connection
to the computer, “Disconnect USB, OK?” appear. In this
case, press [ENTER/YES].
BR-1600CD
(Ex.)
If the current song contains newly recorded audio
data or newly modified settings, the message “Save
Current?” may be displayed during the import
procedure. If you want to save your song before
starting the import, press [ENTER/YES]; if this will
not be necessary, press [EXIT/NO]. Remember that
if you do not save a modified song at this time, all
newly recorded audio data, edited data, modified
mixer settings, etc. will be lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 254 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
255
Section 7 Other Convenient Functions
Section 7
Other
Convenient
Functions
BR-1600_R_e.book 255 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
256
Tuning instruments (Tuner)
The BR-1600CD features an integrated chromatic tuner and
this allows you to conveniently tune instruments.
Setting the reference pitch
Before you can use the tuner, you will first of all have to set
its reference pitch (or frequency).
This pitch is used to define the frequency for A4 (i.e., A above
middle C on a piano keyboard). At the time of purchase, a
frequency of 440 Hz is set for A4 in the BR-1600CD, and if this is
suitable, there will be no need to change the setting.
However, in situations where an ensemble is to be recorded,
it is often necessary to tune all instruments in the ensemble to
the instrument that is most difficult to tune (for example, the
piano), and the reference pitch of this instrument will not
necessarily be 440 Hz.
In order to accommodate this type of situation, the BR-
1600CD allows you to change the tuner’s reference pitch as
described below.
fig.53-01
1.
Press [TUNER ON/OFF]
The Tuner screen will appear.
fig.53-02d
2.
Turn the TIME/VALUE dial to modify the reference pitch.
Setting range: 435 to 445 Hz
At the time of purchase, the reference pitch will be set to 440 Hz.
3.
When you have made the required setting, press
[TUNER ON/OFF] once again or press [EXIT/NO].
The tuner will be turned off.
4.
If you wish to store the modified settings, save the
current song (p. 72).
Tuning
The following describes the tuning procedure using the
example of a guitar or bass guitar.
1.
Connect the guitar or bass to a BR-1600CD input source
and confirm that audio is being received.
See “Connecting other devices” (Basic Operation; p. 6).
2.
Press [TUNER ON/OFF]
The Tuner screen will appear.
fig.53-02d
The name of the note is displayed on the left of the
screen, and the reference pitch is displayed just above
this. Tuning guides are displayed on the left and right of
the meter showing the difference between the correct
note and the note being played.
3.
Play the string that you want to tune.
The closest note to that string’s pitch will be displayed.
4.
If the displayed note is not correct for the string being
played, you will first of all have to carry out rough
tuning to have the correct note displayed.
Correct notes for standard tuning are as follows.
1, 3
3
2
7th
string
6th
string
5th
string
4th
string
3rd
string
2nd
string
1st
string
Guitar B E A D G B E
Bass B E A D G
• The reference pitch setting will be saved to each
song.
• The reference pitch set for the tuner will also be used
as the reference pitch for rhythm arrangement bass
patterns (p. 163).
BR-1600_R_e.book 256 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
257
Tuning instruments (Tuner)
Section 7
5.
While monitoring the tuning guides, fine-tune each
string in such a way that both of these guides turn on
when the string is played.
When the difference between the played note and the
correct note is within ±50 cents, the tuning guides
indicate the magnitude of this difference.
For example, when the right tuning guide is lit, it
indicates that the string’s pitch is higher (or sharper)
than the correct pitch, and you should loosen the
corresponding peg. On the other hand, when the left
tuning guide is lit, it indicates that the string’s pitch is
lower (or flatter) than the correct pitch, and you should
tighten the corresponding peg.
When the pitch is higher than the displayed note
fig.53-04d
When the pitch matches the displayed note
fig.53-02d
When the pitch is lower than the displayed note
fig.53-04bd
6.
Repeat Steps 4 through 5 to tune all of the instrument’s
strings.
7.
When you have tuned all of the strings, press [TUNER
ON/OFF] or press [EXIT/NO].
The tuner will be turned off.
Precautions for tuner usage
• Neither playback nor recording is possible while the
tuner is being used. Effects will also be inactive at
this time.
• Ensure that only the sound to be tuned is played. If
any other sounds are included in the audio input, it
will not be possible to use the tuner correctly.
• The tuner will not be able to correctly determine
pitches when the level of the input source is too high
or too low. If you are having trouble tuning an
instrument, try adjusting its input volume using the
corresponding INPUT SENS knob.
BR-1600_R_e.book 257 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
258
Automatically adjusting the input volume balance (Level Calibration)
The INPUT SENS knobs (p. 24) are normally used to adjust the
volume of input. However, it is often difficult to achieve a
satisfactory balance using these knobs alone. For example, when
drums are to be recorded using a number of different
microphones, the different sound characteristics of each of the
drums will make it seem as if they are at different volumes.
In this and other similar cases, you can use the BR-1600CD’s
Level Calibration function to automatically adjust the
volume balance of the various input sources.
Automatically adjusting the
volume balance
fig.53-05
1.
Perform an initial adjustment of input volumes as
described in “Adjusting the input source volume
(Input Sensitivity)” (Basic Operation; p. 25).
2.
Press [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO TRACKS].
MULTI-TRACK:
All input sources are selected in MULTI-TRACK mode. When
this mode is used, each source will be recorded on the
corresponding track (i.e., 1 through 8 or 9/10 through 15/16).
STEREO TRACKS:
All input sources are selected in STEREO TRACKS
mode. In this case, the audio from the input sources will
be mixed in stereo and then recorded on the track
selected for recording.
3.
Press [LEVEL CALIBRATION].
This button will light up, and the message “PLAY
INSTRUMENTS” will appear.
fig.53-06d
4.
Play the instruments connected to the input for 2 or 3
seconds each.
Be sure to play each instrument at the average intensity
at which it is to be recorded.
Note that it is also acceptable for all instruments to be
played together at this time.
5.
When all of the instruments have been played, press
[F4] (CALCULATE).
When this process has finished, the message
“Complete!” will appear and the display will
automatically return to the top screen.
6.
Play the instruments once again to make sure that the
volume balance is correct.
7.
If this balance is satisfactory, proceed to recording.
Restoring the original
volume balance
If you are not satisfied with the automatically adjusted
balance of input source volumes, you can use the following
procedure to restore the volumes to their original levels.
fig.53-07
1.
Press [LEVEL CALIBRATION].
This button will light up, and the message “PLAY
INSTRUMENTS” will appear.
fig.53-06d
2.
Press [F2] (RESET).
The message “Reset Calibration OK?” will appear.
fig.53-09d
32
5
1
2
3
BR-1600_R_e.book 258 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
259
Automatically adjusting the input volume balance (Level Calibration)
Section 7
3.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The message “Complete!” will appear and the volumes will
be returned to their levels before automatic adjustment.
4.
To carry out automatic adjustment once again, repeat
the procedure described in “Automatically adjusting
the volume balance.”
Manually adjusting the input
volume balance
Even if Level Calibration is carried out, it is possible that you
will not be happy with the resulting volume balance. In
addition, you may sometimes want to balance volumes in a
fully manual fashion without using Level Calibration.
Use the following procedure in either of these cases to adjust
the balance of input volumes.
fig.53-14
1.
Confirm that [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO TRACKS]
from INPUT SELECT is currently turned on, and then
press [LEVEL CALIBRATION].
[LEVEL CALIBRATION] will light up and the message
“PLAY INSTRUMENTS” will appear.
fig.53-06d
2.
Press [F3] (MANUAL).
Levels will be displayed for each input.
fig.53-100d
3.
Use the value knobs VALUE1 through VALUE4 to
adjust the input levels.
At 0, the volume is reduced to the minimum level; at 100,
the audio source is input to the BR-1600CD without its
volume being changed; and at 127, the input volume is
doubled (i.e., increased by 6 dB).
To adjust the volumes for INPUT 5 through INPUT 8,
press the [ ] PAGE SCROLL button to display the
corresponding levels.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
• Adjustment of the balance of input levels is only
possible when [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO
TRACKS] has been selected from INPUT SELECT.
• The input level adjustment will be lost when you
turn off the BR-1600CD.
BR-1600_R_e.book 259 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
260
Muting individual inputs
Although you will be able to record eight inputs whenever
either [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO TRACKS] has been
selected from INPUT SELECT, you may in certain cases
prefer not to record some of these input sources.
In such a case, you can use Level Calibration’s muting
function to turn muting on and off using a single button.
1.
Confirm that [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO TRACKS]
from INPUT SELECT is currently turned on, and then
press [LEVEL CALIBRATION].
[LEVEL CALIBRATION] will light up and the message
“PLAY INSTRUMENTS” will appear.
fig.53-06d
2.
Press [F3] (MANUAL).
Levels will be displayed for each input.
fig.53-100d
3.
Turn muting for input sources on and off using the
FUNCTION buttons [F1] through [F4].
When muting has been turned on for an input source,
“MUTE” will be displayed.
fig.53-200d
If the same FUNCTION button is pressed once again, the
corresponding input level will be displayed as a value,
and muting will be turned off.
To switch the muting status for INPUT 5 through INPUT
8, press the [ ] PAGE SCROLL button to display the
corresponding levels.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
These settings for muting will be lost when the BR-
1600CD is turned off. Muting for all tracks will be
initially off when the BR-1600CD is turned on again.
BR-1600_R_e.book 260 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
261
Section 7
Inputting audio with no loss of quality (Digital In Assign)
The BR-1600CD is equipped with a coaxial-type, DIGITAL
IN connector. You can use this connector to input audio
signals as is from a BOSS GT-6, a CD player, an MD player,
or any other type of digital device that features a coaxial-
type, digital out connector; furthermore, this type of audio
input is free from the type of sound quality degradation that
is characteristic of analog lines.
1.
Connect the digital out connector of your external
digital device to the BR-1600CD's DIGITAL IN
connector as shown below.
fig.53-07a
2.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility Menu screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System Parameter screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
4.
Move the cursor to “Digital In Assign” and use the
TIME/VALUE dial to select a destination for the digital
input.
Digital In Assign
OFF:
Digital signals coming from the DIGITAL IN connector
will be ignored and will not be input.
INPUT:
The audio signals entering via the DIGITAL IN
connector will be routed to the inputs specified by the
current Input Select status (Basic Operation; p. 24).
When [GUITAR/BASS] or [VOCAL] from INPUT SELECT
is currently turned on, the left and right audio signals from
the DIGITAL IN connector will be input as a mono mix.
Alternatively, if [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO TRACKS]
from INPUT SELECT is currently turned on, the left and
right audio signals from the DIGITAL IN connector will
be routed to INPUT 1 and INPUT 2 respectively.
Note that while input is being accepted from the
DIGITAL IN port, no analog signals will be routed to the
inputs selected here.
SUB-MIX
The audio signals entering via the DIGITAL IN
connector will be mixed with the signal being output via
the LINE OUT jacks.
As these signals are routed directly to the output, it will
not be possible to apply effects or to record them.
In addition, you will not be able to adjust the volume of
these signals using the INPUT SENS knobs, the INPUT
LEVEL knob, or the MASTER fader.
5.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top screen.
6.
Adjust the volume of the input signal using the INPUT
LEVEL knob.
CD/MD Player
DIGITAL IN
DIGITAL OUT
• Only a coaxial cable can be used with the BR-
1600CD's DIGITAL IN connector. Optical cables
cannot be used for this purpose.
• You will not be able to adjust the volume of the
digital input signal using the INPUT SENS knobs.
• The digital input signal must be of S/PDIF format
with a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz. No other types of
digital audio can be input.
• When a digital signal is being input, the BR-1600CD
will synchronize with this signal, adjusting its
recording and playback speed to match any error or
fluctuation in the signal. Please note that as a result,
poor quality input signals can produce skipping or
fluctuation in the BR-1600CD's audio output, and
noise may also be produced.
BR-1600_R_e.book 261 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
262
Creating a master tape protected from digital copying
When you are digitally mixing-down audio from the BR-
1600CD to a DAT recorder or another similar digital device,
you can use the following procedure to prohibit the creation
of digital copies from the mix-down tape.
fig.53-10
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System Parameter screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “Digital Copy Protect” and select
“ON” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.53-12d
Digital Copy Protect
This parameter specifies whether or not it will be
possible to create digital copies from a digitally mixed-
down master tape.
OFF: Digital copies may be made.
ON: Digital copies may not be made.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
5.
Mix down your song(s) from the BR-1600CD to a DAT
recorder or another similar digital device.
It will not be possible to use this master tape to create
digital copies on another similar digital recording
device.
1
2
4
2, 3
3
Certain DAT recorders do not support SCMS or
digital connection with CD players. If you set
“Digital Copy Protect” to “ON,” you will not be able
to record your songs to this type of DAT recorder
via the BR-1600CD’s digital output. Be sure to set
“Digital Copy Protect” to “OFF” in such a case.
BR-1600_R_e.book 262 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
263
Section 7
Changing the content of the level meter display (Pre/Post Fader)
Normally, the level meters for the tracks, which are
displayed on the top screen, will indicate the levels that the
various signals have after they have passed through the
corresponding faders (i.e., the post-fader volumes).
You can, however, use the following procedure to have the
levels that the signals are at before they pass through the
faders (i.e., pre-fader volumes) be displayed.
fig.53-13
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System Parameter screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “Level Display” and select “PRE
FADER” using the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.53-16d
PRE FADER:
The levels that signals have prior to reaching the faders
are displayed.
POST FADER:
The levels that signals have after passing through the
faders are displayed. This is the setting on the BR-
1600CD at the time of purchase.
4.
Press [EXIT/NO] several times to return to the top
screen.
1
2
4
2, 3
3
BR-1600_R_e.book 263 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
264
Using condenser microphones (Phantom Power)
Most condenser microphones need a supply of power known
as phantom power in order to operate.
Accordingly, the BR-1600CD can supply phantom power at
+48 V to condenser microphones connected to any of the
XLR-type connectors for INPUT 1 through INPUT 8.
fig.53-17
1.
Before proceeding, turn INPUT SENS knobs 1 through
8 fully counter-clockwise in order to reduce the input
volumes, and then move the MASTER fader and
INPUT LEVEL knobs all the way down.
If any of these volumes is not reduced, a loud click may
be output when the phantom power is turned on or off.
2.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System Parameter screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
4.
Move the cursor to “Phantom” and select “ON” using
the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.53-20d
ON: Phantom power will be supplied.
OFF: Phantom power will not be supplied.
Note that when turned on, phantom power will be
supplied to all XLR connectors for INPUT 1 through
INPUT 8.
Phantom power
Condenser microphones generally contain a pair of
thin opposing electrodes. When a voltage is applied
across these electrodes, any vibration resulting from
incoming audio will be output as electrical waves.
However, since these waves are very weak, they
must be boosted using amplification circuitry within
the microphone itself. Phantom power is used to
drive this amplification circuitry.
Certain types of condenser microphone use internal
batteries as a source of power; accordingly, there
will be no need to supply phantom power in such a
case.
21, 5
3
3, 4
1, 5
4
BR-1600_R_e.book 264 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
265
Using condenser microphones (Phantom Power)
Section 7
5.
Slowly raise the INPUT SENS knobs, the MASTER
fader and INPUT LEVEL knobs, and confirm that an
audio signal is being received from the condenser
microphone(s).
6.
To turn off the phantom power, repeat Steps 1 through
3, and then set “Phantom” to “OFF” in Step 4.
BR-1600_R_e.book 265 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
266
Mixing audio-device output with the BR-1600CD’s output (Audio Sub Mix)
The Audio Sub Mix function treats the audio sources for
INPUT 7 and INPUT 8 as a stereo input and allows this input
to be directly mixed with the audio being output via the
LINE OUT jacks.
Accordingly, you can use this function to mix the BR-
1600CD’s audio output with audio from an external audio
device without having to prepare a separate mixer.
Note that when Audio Sub Mix is activated, you will not be
able to apply effects to the audio coming from INPUT 7 and
INPUT 8. In addition, it will not be possible to record this
audio to tracks.
Audio Sub Mix is set up as described below.
fig.53-21
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the SYSTEM icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can press [F1] (SYSTEM) if the
SYSTEM icon is currently displayed.
The System Parameter screen will appear.
fig.10-03d
3.
Move the cursor to “Sub Mixer” and select “ON” using
the TIME/VALUE dial.
fig.53-24d
1
2
2, 3
3
Precautions for Audio Sub Mix usage
• The Audio Sub Mix setting is returned to “OFF”
whenever the BR-1600CD is turned on.
• When either [MULTI-TRACK] or [STEREO
TRACKS] has been selected from INPUT SELECT,
INPUT 7 and INPUT 8 will give priority to track
recording; therefore, the Audio Sub Mix function
will remain inactive even if it is turned on.
BR-1600_R_e.book 266 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
267
Section 7
Initializing all BR-1600CD settings (Initialize)
The Initialize function allows you to return all of the
following BR-1600CD parameters to their original settings.
●
Global Parameters
• Reference Pitch in Tuner parameters
• System parameters
• Sync parameters
• MIDI parameters
• Marker parameters
• Scene parameters
• Scrub and Preview parameters
●
Mixer Parameters
• Track Compressor, EQ, Pan
• Loop Effects
• Input Select
• Level Calibration
• Recording Mode
●
Effect Patch Data
• User patches from all insert effect banks
• Vocal Tool Box user patches
• Mastering Tool Kit user patches
• Speaker Modeling user patches
fig.53-28
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
Icons representing the various things that can be
initialized will appear.
fig.53-30d
GLOBAL icon
fig.53-30d
When this icon is selected
• Reference Pitch in Tuner parameters
• System parameters
• Sync parameters
• MIDI parameters
• Marker parameters
• Scene parameters
• Scrub and Preview parameters
will be initialized and returned to the values they had at
the time of purchase.
1
2, 3,
4, 5
2, 3
BR-1600_R_e.book 267 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
268
Initializing all BR-1600CD settings (Initialize)
MIXER icon
fig.53-33d
When this icon is selected,
• Track Compressor, EQ, Pan
• Loop Effects
• Input Select
• Level Calibration
• Recording Mode
will be returned to the values they normally have
immediately after Song New (Basic Operation; p. 22) is
performed.
EFFECTS icon
fig.53-32d
When this icon is selected,
• User patches from all insert effect banks
• Vocal Tool Box user patches
• Mastering Tool Kit user patches
• Speaker Modeling user patches
will be initialized and returned to their values at the time
of purchase (i.e., the values for preset patches).
ALL icon
fig.53-34d
When this icon is selected, all global parameters, effect
patches, and mixer parameters will be initialized.
In addition, all data for song markers, Tempo Maps,
Sync Tracks, scenes, and the like will be cleared. The
display contrast will also be returned to the factory
default contrast setting.
3.
Move the cursor to the icon for the parameters to be
initialized and press [ENTER/YES].
Alternatively, you can push the FUNCTION button
below the relevant icon.
The message “Initialize *** OK?” will appear.
Example:) When GLOBAL icon is selected
fig.53-35d
4.
Press [ENTER/YES].
The message “Sure?” will appear.
fig.53-36d
5.
Press [ENTER/YES] once again.
The BR-1600CD will start the initialization process.
When this process has finished, the message
“Complete!” will appear and you’ll automatically be
returned to the top screen.
Precautions for initialization
• Press [EXIT/NO] if you want to cancel an
initialization process.
• In certain cases, the message “Save Current?” will
appear during the initialization procedure, and this
indicates that the current song contains audio that
has been newly recorded or edited, or modified
parameters that have not yet been saved. If you
want to save your song before starting the
initialization process, press [ENTER/YES]; if this
will not be necessary, press [EXIT/NO]. If you
proceed without saving your song, all of the new
recordings, audio edits, and new parameter settings
will be permanently lost.
BR-1600_R_e.book 268 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
269
Section 7
Performing hard disk operations
Viewing information about the
hard disk (Hard Disk Information)
To display the hard disk data use the following procedure.
fig.53-28
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the HDD icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
The Hard Disk screen will appear.
fig.54-02d
3.
Move the cursor to the INFO icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
The size of each partition appears.
fig.54-03d
The capacity of the hard disk is displayed in units of 1
MB (i.e., 1,04,576 bytes).
The currently selected partition is indicated by an
asterisk (“*”).
4.
If you want to switch the partition being used, move
the cursor to the partition you want to use, then press
[ENTER/YES].
The message “Now Loading...” appears.
When “Complete!” appears, the switch is completed.
1
2,3,4
2,3,4
BR-1600_R_e.book 269 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
270
Performing hard disk operations
Initializing the hard disk
(Disk Initialize)
The appropriate settings for the internal hard disk were
made before the BR-1600CD left the factory, so it is ready for
immediate use.
If for any reason the hard disk can no longer be written to or
read from, or if you immediately want to delete all data from
the disk, you can carry out Disk Initialize.
fig.53-28
1.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
2.
Move the cursor to the HDD icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
The Hard Disk screen will appear.
fig.54-02d
3.
Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
The message “FORMAT MODE: NORMAL” appears.
fig.54-04d
4.
Use the TIME/VALUE dial to select the initialization
mode.
NORMAL
This is the usual format. The hard disk is formatted as a
single partition. The maximum partition size is 40 GB.
* When you execute the initialize on a 80 GB hard disk, this
create two partitions, each containing 40 GB. You cannot
create a 80 GB partition.
SURFACE SCAN
The entire hard disk is formatted as “NORMAL” after all
of the storage sectors of the hard disk are checked.
With a 80 GB hard disk, such checking takes roughly 6
hours to complete.
If you press [EXIT/NO] while the check is still in
progress, the check is stopped at that point, and
formatting continues in “NORMAL” mode.
DIV 2 through 8
This separates the hard disk into drives (partitions) of
equal size. You cannot set the drives so that they are of
different sizes.
Example) When using “DIV 5” in formatting the
partitions on a 80 GB hard disk.
80GB / 5 = 16 GB
This creates five partitions, each containing 16 GB.
The maximum size for a single partition is 40 GB.
Initialization is set to “NORMAL” at the factory.
5.
Press [F4] (GO).
The message “Sure?” appears.
fig.54-05d
• Take care to note that all data on the hard disk is lost
when you execute Disk Initialize. The demo songs
programmed at the factory are also deleted.
• We recommend creating a backup of your data on a
CD-R/RW disc or other media as your situation
requires.
15
2,3,6
4
6
2,3
BR-1600_R_e.book 270 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
271
Performing hard disk operations
Section 7
6.
Press [ENTER/YES]. (If you wish to cancel the
initialization, press [EXIT/NO]).
“Now Initializing...” appears in the display, and
initialization begins.
After the initialization is completed properly, the
message “Complete!” will appear and the top screen
returns to the display.
A new song “SONG 001” will be created on the hard
disk.
Initializing only one of
multiple partitions
Now you can specify a single partition for initialization when
using multiple partitions.
fig.53-28
1.
First, select the drive you want to initialize.
See the step 4 in the “Viewing information about the
hard disk (Hard Disk Information)” (p. 269).
2.
Press [UTILITY].
The Utility screen will appear.
fig.12-12d
3.
Move the cursor to the HDD icon and press [ENTER/
YES].
The Hard Disk screen will appear.
fig.54-02d
4.
Move the cursor to the INITIALIZE icon and press
[ENTER/YES].
The Hard disk Initialize screen will appears.
fig.54-04d
5.
Rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set “Format Mode” to
“ONLY CURRENT PARTITION.”
Take care to note that selecting anything other than
“ONLY CURRENT PARTITION” will result in the entire
hard disk being initialized.
6.
Press [F4] (GO).
The message “Sure?” appears.
7.
Press [ENTER/YES].
“Now Initializing...” appears, and initialization of the
drive begins. The process is finished when “Complete!”
appears.
The state of progress of the initialization will be
shown on the display, and you should not turn off
the BR-1600CD until this procedure has been
completed. Failure to observe this precaution could
considerably reduce the life span of the hard disk or
could result in it being permanently damaged.
26
3,4,7
5
3,4
BR-1600_R_e.book 271 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
272
MEMO
BR-1600_R_e.book 272 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
273
Appendices
Appendices
BR-1600_R_e.book 273 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
274
Troubleshooting
If the BR-1600CD does not function as you expect, please check
the following points before assuming that a malfunction has
occurred. If this does not resolve the problem, contact a nearby
Roland service center or your dealer.
Problems with the sound
No sound
❍
Is the power of the BR-1600CD and of the connected
equipment turned on?
❍
Is the optical cable connected correctly?
❍
Are any audio cables broken?
❍
Has the volume of the connected amp or mixer been
lowered?
❍
Has the master fader or headphone volume of the
BR-1600CD been lowered?
❍
Was the heel end of the expression pedal all the way
down?
❍
Are you attempting to play back a short phrase of
less than 0.5 seconds? (Phrases of 0.5 seconds or
less cannot be played.)
❍
Has the Mastering Tool Kit Auto Fade In/Out function
been set to ON while the BR-1600CD is being used in
Mastering mode?
When the Auto Fade In/Out function is set to ON,
sounds may not be played, depending on the location of
the playback.
❍
Has the “Metronome” system parameter been set
correctly?
If “METRONOME ONLY” has been set, no audio other
than the metronome will be heard.
The volume level of the instrument
connected to INPUT/MIC or GUITAR
BASS jack is too low.
❍
Could you be using a connection cable that contains
a resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor.
A specific track cannot be heard
❍
Has the track volume been lowered?
In some cases the actual volume level may not match the
position of the fader, for example when the scene has
been switched. If so, move the fader up and down so that
the volume level will match the fader position.
❍
Has the track been muted? (The REC TRACK
indicator will be blinking in green.)
❍
Is the V-Track setting for a different V-Track?
❍
Has the track type been set correctly?
❍
Is the BR-1600CD in Mastering mode?
In Mastering mode, sounds are output only from Tracks
9/10.
The input cannot be heard
❍
Has the sound source been correctly connected to
either an input jack or connector?
If a connection is made to both the 1/4” phone mono
jack and the XLR connector, priority will be given to the
1/4” phone mono jack.
The INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack (or XLR connector) and the
GUITAR/BASS jack share the same internal circuitry,
and when a connection has been made to both of these
input jacks, the GUITAR/BASS jack will be selected
automatically.
❍
Did you adjust the SENS knob?
❍
Has INPUT SELECT been muted? (The INPUT
SELECT indicator will be dark.)
❍
Has the INPUT LEVEL knob been set to “MIN”?
❍
If [F3] (MANUAL) was selected on the Level
Calibration screen (“Manually adjusting the input
volume balance” (p. 259)), were the input levels set
correctly?
Check whether the input level has been set to 0 or
whether the corresponding track has been set to
“MUTED.”
❍
If you are using a condenser microphone, is
phantom power turned on?
❍
Is the BR-1600CD in Mastering mode?
Input-source sounds are not output in Mastering mode.
Use with the BR-1600CD switched to Input mode.
❍
Was the heel end of the expression pedal all the way
down?
Can’t use the expression pedal to
control an effect
❍
Is the minimum volume set to “0” or to an
appropriate value? (p. 84)
❍
Is the effect (Foot Volume, Pitch Shifter, Wah, Vibtaro)
that you wish to control from the expression pedal
turned on?
The expression pedal can control all of the above effects
simultaneously.
❍
Is the type (P.Shift Type, Wah Type) of the effect you
wish to control set to “PEDAL” ?
BR-1600_R_e.book 274 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
275
Troubleshooting
Appendices
Cannot record
❍
Does the hard disk have insufficient remaining
capacity?
❍
Has the recording mode (INPUT, BOUNCE,
MASTERING) been selected correctly?
❍
Has the Scrub Playback function been turned on?
Digital input cannot be received from an
external device, or digital recording on
an external device is not possible
❍
Does the sampling rate of the BR-1600CD match that
of the digital audio device?
Set the digital audio device to a sampling rate of 44.1 kHz.
❍
Does the digital signal format match?
Your digital audio device may use a non-standard digital
signal format. Connect the BR-1600CD to a digital audio
device that supports CP-1201 or S/P DIF.
❍
In cases where digital input cannot be received:
Is Digital In Assign (p. 261) set to "OFF"?
The recorded sound contains noise or
distortion
❍
Is the input sensitivity set appropriately?
If the input sensitivity is too high, the recorded sound
will be distorted. If it is too low, the input sound will be
buried in noise. Adjust the SENS knob so that the level
meter moves as much as possible without causing the
PEAK indicator to light.
❍
Are the effect settings appropriate?
Using overdrive, distortion, or compression with the
insert effects may increase noise and distortion.
❍
Are the equalizer settings appropriate?
Some equalizer settings can cause the sound to distort
even though the PEAK indicator does not light. Readjust
the equalizer.
❍
Are the track output levels appropriate?
If you hear noise or distortion after bouncing tracks, the
output level of the tracks was too high.
❍
Is a mic with high output impedance connected
directly to the BR-1600CD?
The BR-1600CD is designed with a wide margin of
headroom. Also, since the MIC 1 and MIC 2 jacks are low
impedance inputs, the recording level may be too low,
depending on the response of some mics. In such cases,
connect the mic via a mic preamp to the BR-1600CD, so
that they can be boosted to line level before recording.
Problems with the hard disk
Hard disk data was damaged
If hard disk data has been damaged, the following causes are
possible. Please initialize the hard disk (using physical
formatting) once again. (p. 270)
❍
Was the power turned off while the disk drive was
operating?
❍
Was a strong physical shock applied to the disk
drive?
Little available space remaining on the
hard disk
❍
Do you have numerous recorded songs and/or loop
phrases stored on the hard disk?
❍
Is [SIMUL], [STEREO TRACKS] or [MULTI-TRACK]
selected for the INPUT SELECT, or are stereo tracks
selected for the recording tracks?
Recording with stereo tracks halves the remaining
recording time, and this is indicated in the display.
If [MULTI-TRACK] is selected and recording is carried
out on all 8 tracks, only 1/8th of the original recording
time will be available.
❍
Was the drive partitioned into multiple drives
(partitions) when it was initialized?
Problems with the CD-R/RW drive
Cannot remove the CD-R/RW disc
❍
Is the power turned on?
The CD-R/RW disc cannot be removed unless the power
is turned on.
❍
CIs a screen for reading from, or writing to CD-R/RW
discs showing in the display?
It is not possible to eject the disc when you’re in a screen
for reading/writing CD-R/RW discs. Press [EXIT] a
number of times to return to the top screen, then press
the EJECT button again.
Cannot read from/write to CD-R/RW
discs
❍
Is the BR-1600CD in a level position?
❍
Was a strong physical shock applied to the CD-R/RW
drive?
❍
Is the disc correctly placed in the CD-R/RW drive?
❍
Are you using the right type of CD-R/RW disc?
BR-1600_R_e.book 275 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
276
Troubleshooting
❍
Are you using a CD-R disc that has already been
written to, or a CD-RW disc that may be too old?
❍
Is the CD-R/RW drive being “force ejected?”
Pressing a straightened paper clip or similar object into
the “emergency eject hole” in the CD-R/RW drive’s
front side forces ejection of the CD-R/RW disc.
However, the CD-R/RW drive may not operate correctly
after this is done. Should this be the case, turn off the
power, then turn it back on again.
Synchronization problems
Cannot synchronize
When using MTC to synchronize the BR-1600CD with a
MIDI sequencer, the BR-1600CD must be the master device.
❍
Is the MIDI cable connected correctly?
❍
Is the MIDI cable broken?
❍
Has the sync generator been set to the desired
synchronization method (MTC or MIDI Clock)?
(p. 226)
❍
If you are synchronizing with MTC, has the other
device been set to the same MTC type? (p. 227)
❍
Has the MIDI sequencer been set correctly?
❍
Is the MIDI sequencer ready to play back?
❍
Does the other device support the MMC commands
of the BR-1600CD?
Cannot record MIDI Clock (cannot use
the sync track)
❍
Is the external MIDI sequencer set to transmit MIDI
Clock/Start/Stop?
Cannot control faders using MIDI
❍
Is the MIDI cable connecting the external MIDI
sequencer connected correctly?
❍
Have you made the settings that enable the external
MIDI sequencer to record and play back the fader
information transmitted from the BR-1600CD?
Fader messages are transmitted and received using
Control Change #7 (Volume). The external MIDI
sequencer must be set so it is able to transmit and receive
such MIDI messages.
Problems with USB
The message “Waiting...” does not
turn off
❍
Is the USB cable properly connected?
❍
Is your computer's operating system compatible with
the BR-1600CD?
Windows: Windows Me/2000 /XP
Macintosh: Mac OS 9.1.x, 9.2.x, Mac OS X
Other problems
When the power is turned on, the
previous data has not been saved
correctly
It is possible that the power of the BR-1600CD was turned off
without using the POWER switch. The lost data cannot be
recovered.
BR-1600_R_e.book 276 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
277
Appendices
Error Messages
Blank Disc!
Cause: Disc in the CD-R/RW drive contains no data.
Action: Load a CD-R/RW disc that has data written on it.
Cannot Select Same Track!
Cause: You attempted to select the same track more than
once during Track Edit (p. 56–p. 63), WAV/AIFF
Export (p. 248), or another procedure.
Action: Select a different track.
CD Full!
Cause: The CD-R/RW disc is full, and no more data can
be written to it. Additionally, when creating an
audio CD, the total time of the tracks exceeds the
capacity of the CD-R/RW disc.
Action: Reduce the amount of data or number of songs to
be written, then try again.
CD Read Error!
Cause: An error occurred while reading data from the
CD-R/RW disc.
Action: This may be due to a low-quality or dated disc. Try
using a new CD-R/RW disc.
CD Write Error!
Cause: An error occurred while writing data to the CD-R/
RW disc.
Action: This may be due to a low-quality or dated disc. Try
using a new CD-R/RW disc.
Clock Error!
Cause: Reception of the MIDI timing clock was
interrupted during recording of the Sync Track.
Action: Make sure that the MIDI cable is connected
correctly and check whether the external MIDI
device was turned off during the recording
process.
Data Too Large!
Cause 1: You attempted to import an SMF exceeding 250
KB.
Action 1: Prepare the SMF to be loaded so that it is no more
than 250 KB.
Cause 2: You attempted to create a loop phrase using
waveform data thirty minutes or longer.
Action 2: Use waveform data less than thirty minutes long.
Data Too Short!
Cause 1: You attempted to load a waveform file lasting 0.5
seconds or less.
Action 1: Prepare the waveform file so that it is longer than
0.5 seconds.
Cause 2: You attempted to write an audio CD with a track
that is less than four seconds in length.
Action 2: Prepare tracks being written to audio CDs so that
they are at least four seconds long.
Cause 3: You attempted to create a loop phrase using
waveform data less than 0.5 seconds in length.
Action 3: Use waveform data that is at least 0.5 seconds long.
Data Type Not Supported!
Cause: You are attempting to load a file or disc in an
incompatible format.
Action: Use a file in a compatible format.
Digital In Unlock.
Cause: Signal lock with the digital input source was
interrupted.
Action: Make sure that the digital-audio input cable is
connected correctly and check whether the external
digital-audio device has been turned off.
Disc Not Ready!
Cause: There is no CD-R/RW disc in the drive.
Action: Place a CD-R/RW disc in the drive.
Drive Busy!
Cause: The data on the hard disk has become fragmented,
causing delays in reading and writing data.
Action 1: Reduce the number of tracks that are played back
simultaneously. Use track bouncing (or other
means) to combine tracks, or erase or cut data from
tracks which you do not need to play back, and
then try the playback again.
Action 2: Reduce the number of tracks that are being
recorded simultaneously.
Action 3: If using the drum and bass patterns or loop
phrases, press the Track button, causing the
button's indicator to go out.
* In cases of unfavorable disk access conditions, such as when
track editing, punch-in recording, etc. is used to connect
phrases (musical data) of several seconds.
BR-1600_R_e.book 277 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
278
Error Messages
Event Memory Full!
Cause: The BR-1600CD has used up all the events that
can be handled by one song.
Action: Perform the Song Optimize operation. (p. 70)
Finalized Disc!
Cause: Data has already been written to the CD-R/RW
disc, and the data has been finalized.
Action: Place a CD-R/RW disc that has not been finalized
in the drive.
HDD Damaged! Can't Access HDD.
Cause: Data could not be read from or written to the hard
disk.
Action: There is a possibility that the hard disk has been
damaged. Shut down the BR-1600CD as instructed
and send it for repair.
HDD Full!
Cause: There is insufficient free space on the hard disk.
Action 1: Erase unneeded data.
Action 2: Perform the Song Optimize operation. (p. 70)
HDD Read Error!
Cause: An error occurred while reading data from the
hard disk.
Action: The hard disk must be initialized (p. 270).
HDD Write Error!
Cause: An error occurred while writing data to the hard
disk.
Action: The hard disk must be initialized. Also, the song
data you had been attempting to save will be lost.
Insert Disc #***!
Cause: During recovery of backup data located on
multiple CD-R/RW discs, the disc of the
requested number was not placed in the drive.
Action: Place the disc with the requested number in the
drive.
Lack of Events!
Cause: It is not possible to execute Undo or Redo if
fewer than 200 events remain.
Action: Perform the Song Optimize operation. (p. 70)
Marker Memory Full!
Cause: The BR-1600CD has used up all the marker
memory (100 markers) that can be handled by one
song.
Action: Delete unneeded markers.
Medium Error!
Cause: There is a problem with the CD-R/RW disc or
hard disk. Alternatively, the disc on the CD-R/
RW drive is unreadable.
Action 1: Confirm that the correct type of disc is placed in
the CD-R/RW drive.
Action 2: Use a new CD-R/RW disc.
Action 3: Use the following procedure to initialize the hard
disk.
MIDI Error!
Cause 1: Active Sensing is on, and it has detected that no
MIDI message transmissions have taken place for
more than approximately 400 ms.
Action 1: Check the external MIDI device connected to MIDI
IN to make sure it is turned on, and that the
settings are correct. Also, confirm that the MIDI
cable has not been disconnected.
Cause 2: Processing has been overloaded due to high
volumes of MIDI messages received from the
external MIDI device.
Action 2: Reduce the amount of MIDI messages transmitted
by the external MIDI device.
No Data!
Cause 1: You attempted to modify marker or scene data
when none existed.
Cause 2: You attempted to create an audio CD with no data
in the tracks or songs, or you attempted to export
a WAV or AIFF file.
Action: First create data.
No File!
Cause 1: During a USB import operation, no file was
copied from the PC to the USB folder.
Action 1: Copy the file from the PC to the USB folder.
Cause 2: The copied file is not of WAV or AIFF format.
Action 2: Copy a file of WAV or AIFF format.
BR-1600_R_e.book 278 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
279
Error Messages
Appendices
Not Blank Disc!
Cause: The CD-R/RW disc already has data written to it.
Action: Place a CD-R/RW disc with no data written to it (a
blank disc) in the CD-R/RW drive.If using a CD-
RW disc, you can erase the data on the disc in
order to create a blank disc (p. 214).
Not CD-RW Disc!
Cause: The disc is not a CD-R/RW disc, so the data
cannot be erased.
Action: Use a CD-R/RW disc.
Pattern Memory Full!
Cause: The total number of sounds in the drum and bass
patterns has exceeded 10,000.
Action: Delete unneeded patterns (p. 161, p. 174).
Protected Song!
Cause: Since Song Protect is ON, the operation cannot be
executed.
Action: Turn Song Protect Off. (p. 71)
Select Track!
Cause: You attempted to execute a track editing
operation without specifying the track to which
the operation will apply.
Action: Specify the track, and then execute the editing
operation.
Select Data!
Cause: The data or files upon which the operation is to
be performed have not yet been specified.
Action: Select data or files and repeat the operation.
Set Location!
Cause: No target data or file has been selected yet.
Action: Select the data before continuing.
Stop Recorder!
Cause: The operation you attempted cannot be done
while the recorder is running (playing or
recording).
Action: Press [STOP] to stop playback or recording.
Sync Track Full!
Cause: All of the remaining memory was used up during
the Sync Track recording process.
Action: No further recording will be possible. Reduce the
recording time and repeat the recording process.
Too Many Songs!
Cause 1: The song creation operation would result in the
number of songs exceeding 999.
Action 1: Erase unneeded songs (p. 69) and repeat the song
creation process.
Cause 2: The import operation would result in the number
of songs exceeding 999.
Action 2: Erase unneeded songs (p. 69) and repeat the song
import operation.
Too Long Name!
Cause: The names of files and folders on the current CD-
R/RW disc are too long.
Action: Add up the lengths of all file names and folder
names, and then modify these names to reduce the
total number of characters to 236 or less.
Too Many Tracks!
Cause: You attempted to write more than 99 tracks to the
audio CD being created.
Action: Reduce the number of tracks you are writing to 99
or fewer tracks.
Wrong Disc!
Cause: A disc other than the required CD-R/RW disc is
placed in the drive.
Action: Place a CD-R/RW disc in the drive.
BR-1600_R_e.book 279 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
280
Operation of the INPUT SELECT buttons
The INPUT SELECT buttons are used to select which of the
BR-1600CD’s input sources is to be activated. Furthermore,
whenever an input source is selected using one of these
buttons, a suitable insert effect will be selected automatically.
●
If a lit INPUT SELECT button is pressed, that button will
turn off and the corresponding input source will be
muted. If pressed again, the button will light up and
muting will be canceled.
●
If an INPUT SELECT button is pressed while another is
lit, the input source selection will be switched
accordingly.
The following section describes the action of the BR-1600CD
for various input source selections.
[GUITAR/BASS]
[GUITAR/BASS] will light up to indicate that the input
source connected to either the GUITAR/BASS jack or the
INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack has been selected. (Note that priority
will be given to the GUITAR/BASS jack when an instrument
is connected to it.)
An effect will be automatically selected from the insert
effects’ guitar bank, and this will be applied to either the
GUITAR/BASS or INPUT 1/MIC 1 input source. If the effect
is off at this time, it will be turned on automatically.
In addition, a mono track will be automatically selected as
the recording track. (However, if a stereo track was
previously selected, a stereo track will again be selected at
this time.)
* Adaptive Focus (AF) will be activated for recording in this case.
What is Adaptive Focus (AF)?
Adaptive Focus is a unique Roland technology that
allows the signal noise (S/N) ratios of AD and DA
converters to be vastly improved.
[VOCAL]
[VOCAL] will light up to indicate that the input source
connected to the INPUT 2/MIC 2 jack has been selected.
An effect will be automatically selected from the insert
effects’ microphone bank, and this will be applied to the
INPUT 2/MIC 2 input source. If the effect is off at this time, it
will be turned on automatically.
In addition, a mono track will be automatically selected as
the recording track. (However, if a stereo track was
previously selected, a stereo track will again be selected at
this time.)
[SIMUL]
[GUITAR/BASS] and [VOCAL] will light up, indicating that
the input source connected to either the GUITAR/BASS jack
or the INPUT 1 / MIC 1 jack has been selected together with
the input source connected to the INPUT 2 / MIC 2 jack.
(When an instrument is connected to the GUITAR/BASS
jack, the INPUT 1 / MIC 1 jack will be deactivated.)
An effect will be automatically selected from the insert
effects' SIMUL bank, and this will be applied both to the
GUITAR/BASS or INPUT 1 / MIC 1 input source and to the
INPUT 2 / MIC 2 input source. If the effect is off at this time,
it will be turned on automatically.
In addition, two tracks will be simultaneously selected as the
recording tracks. (However, if a single track was previously
selected, a single track will again be selected at this time.)
If the track button corresponding to one of the selected pair
of tracks is pressed, the number of recording tracks will be
switched to one. If the track button corresponding to a single
selected recording track is pressed, the number of recording
tracks will be switched to two.
[MULTI-TRACK]
[MULTI-TRACK] will light up to indicate that the input
sources connected to INPUT 1/MIC 1 through INPUT 8/
MIC 8 have been selected. (Note that when an instrument is
connected to the GUITAR/BASS jack, priority will be given
to this jack over the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack.)
When this mode is used, each source will be recorded on the
corresponding track (i.e., 1 through 8 or 9/10 through 15/16).
(Track buttons 1 through 8 or 9/10 through 15/16 will all
turn red and start to flash.)
An effect will be automatically selected from the insert effects’
multi-channel bank, and this will be applied to the input sources. If
the effect is off at this time, it will be turned on automatically.
The INPUT LEVEL knob can be used to adjust the overall
volume of the input sources while maintaining the balance
between them. To adjust the volume of a specific input
source, use the corresponding INPUT SENS knob.
[STEREO TRACKS]
[STEREO TRACKS] will light up to indicate that the input
sources connected to INPUT 1/MIC 1 through INPUT 8/
MIC 8 have been selected. (Note that when an instrument is
connected the GUITAR/BASS jack, priority will be given to
this jack over the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack.)
The input audio for these sources will be mixed and recorded
to a stereo track. (However, if a mono track was previously
selected, a mono track will again be selected at this time.)
An effect will be automatically selected from the insert effects’
stereo bank, and this will be applied to the input sources. If the
effect is off at this time, it will be turned on automatically.
The INPUT LEVEL knob can be used to adjust the volume of
the mixed audio sources. To adjust the volume of a specific
input source, use the corresponding INPUT SENS knob.
BR-1600_R_e.book 280 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
281
Operation of the INPUT SELECT buttons
Appendices
Internal connection diagrams for each INPUT SELECT condition
The internal connections for input audio signals change as described below in response to the current INPUT SELECT condition.
When [GUITAR/BASS] is selected
When the recording track is mono
fig.92-01
When the recording track is stereo
fig.92-02
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
L
R
Input 1
Pan
Reverb
INPUT
LEVEL
Insert
Effects
Recording track (mono)
GUITAR /
BASS
INPUT 1 /
MIC 1
INPUT
SENS 1
Impedance
Conversion
Input 1
Reverb Send
PEAK
Input 1
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
L
R
If an instrument is connected to the GUITAR/BASS jack, the
INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be deactivated.
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
L
R
Input 1
Pan
Reverb
INPUT
LEVEL
Insert
Effects
Recording track (even)
Recording track (odd)
GUITAR /
BASS
INPUT 1 /
MIC 1
INPUT
SENS 1
Impedance
Conversion
Input 1
Reverb Send
L
R
L
R
PEAK
Input 1
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
If an instrument is connected to the GUITAR/BASS jack, the
INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be deactivated.
BR-1600_R_e.book 281 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
282
Operation of the INPUT SELECT buttons
When [VOCAL] is selected
When the recording track is mono
fig.92-03
When the recording track is stereo
fig.92-04
When [SIMUL] is selected
When the recording track is mono
fig.92-03
When the recording track is stereo
fig.92-04
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
L
R
Input 2
Pan
Reverb
INPUT
LEVEL
Insert
Effects
Recording track (mono)
INPUT 2 / MIC 2
INPUT
SENS 2
Input 2
Reverb Send
PEAK
Input 2
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
L
R
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
L
R
Input 2
Pan
Reverb
INPUT
LEVEL
Insert
Effects
Recording track (even)
Recording track (odd)
INPUT 2 / MIC 2
INPUT
SENS 2
Input 2
Reverb Send
L
R
L
R
PEAK
Input 1
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
GUITAR/BASS
INPUT1/MIC1
If an instrument is connected to
the GUITAR/BASS jack,
the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be
deactivated.
INPUT SENS 1
INPUT LEVEL
L
R
PEAK 1 L
R
INPUT2/MIC2
PEAK 2
INPUT SENS 2
Recording track
L
R
L
R
L
R
Reverb
LINE OUT & PHONES
Impedance
Conversion
Insert
Effects
Input 1
Pan
Input 2
Pan
Input 1
Reverb Send
Input 2
Reverb Send
Input 1
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
Input 2
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
GUITAR/BASS
INPUT1/MIC1
LINE OUT & PHONES
If an instrument is connected to
the GUITAR/BASS jack,
the INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be
deactivated.
INPUT SENS 1
INPUT LEVEL
Insert
Effects Recording track (even) L
R
PEAK 1 L
R
Impedance
Conversion
INPUT2/MIC2
PEAK 2
INPUT SENS 2
Recording track (odd)
L
R
L
R
L
R
Reverb
Input 1
Pan
Input 2
Pan
Input 1
Reverb Send
Input 2
Reverb Send
Input 1
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
Input 2
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
BR-1600_R_e.book 282 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
283
Operation of the INPUT SELECT buttons
Appendices
When [MULTI-TRACK] is selected
fig.92-05
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
Reverb
Recording track 1 or 9
GUITAR /
BASS
INPUT 1 /
MIC 1
INPUT
SENS 1
Impedance
Conversion
Input 1 pan
PEAK
L
R
Input 1
Reverb send
Input 1
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
Recording track 2 or 10
VOCAL /
INPUT 2 / MIC 2
INPUT
SENS 2
Input 2 pan
L
R
Input 2
Reverb send
Input 2
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
Recording track 3 or 11
INPUT 3 / MIC 3
INPUT
SENS 3
Input 3 pan
L
R
Input 3
Reverb send
Input 3
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
Recording track 4 or 12
INPUT 4 / MIC 4
INPUT
SENS 4
Input 4 pan
L
R
Input 4
Reverb send
Input 4
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
Recording track 5 or 13
INPUT 5 / MIC 5
INPUT
SENS 5
Input 5 pan
L
R
Input 5
Reverb send
Input 5
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
Recording track 6 or 14
INPUT 6 / MIC 6
INPUT
SENS 6
Input 6 pan
L
R
Input 6
Reverb send
Input 6
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
Recording track 7 or 15
INPUT 7 / MIC 7
INPUT
SENS 7
Input 7 pan
L
R
Input 7
Reverb send
Input 7
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
Recording track 8 or 16
INPUT 8 / MIC 8
INPUT
SENS 8
Input 8 pan
L
R
Input 8
Reverb send
Input 8
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
L
R
INPUT
LEVEL
Level
Calibration
Insert
Effects
LR
L
R
L
R
L
R
Either Tracks 1 through 8 or Tracks 9/10
through 15/16 can be selected for recording.
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
PEAK
If an instrument is connected to
the GUITAR/BASS jack, the
INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack will be
deactivated.
BR-1600_R_e.book 283 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
284
Operation of the INPUT SELECT buttons
When [STEREO TRACKS] is selected
fig.92-06
GUITAR /
BASS
INPUT 1 /
MIC 1
INPUT
SENS 1
Impedance
Conversion
Input 1 Pan
PEAK
VOCAL /
INPUT 2 / MIC 2
INPUT
SENS 2 Input 2 Pan
PEAK
INPUT 3 / MIC 3
INPUT
SENS 3 Input 3 Pan
PEAK
INPUT 4 / MIC 4
INPUT
SENS 4 Input 4 Pan
PEAK
INPUT 5 / MIC 5
INPUT
SENS 5 Input 5 Pan
PEAK
INPUT 6 / MIC 6
INPUT
SENS 6 Input 6 Pan
PEAK
INPUT 7 / MIC 7
INPUT
SENS 7 Input 7 Pan
PEAK
INPUT 8 / MIC 8
INPUT
SENS 8 Input 8 Pan
PEAK
Level
Calibration
Insert
Effects
INPUT
LEVEL
Insert
Effects
L
R
* When insert effects are connected to INPUT 1-8
* When insert effects are connected
to INPUT 1-8
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
L
R
Reverb
Chorus
Recording track (even)
Recording track (odd)
Input
Reverb Send
L
R
Input 1
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
■ When the recording track is stereo
■ When the recording track is mono
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
L
R
Reverb
Chorus
Recording track (mono)
Input
Reverb Send
L
R
Input 1
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling Send
1
2
1
2
If an instrument is connected to the
GUITAR/BASS jack, the INPUT 1/MIC 1
jack will be deactivated.
BR-1600_R_e.book 284 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
285
Appendices
REC MODE (Recording Mode) Operations
The BR-1600CD offers three different recording modes,
which you can choose from depending on the way in which
you want to carry out recording.
●
INPUT mode:
In this mode, input sources are recorded to tracks.
●
BOUNCE mode:
In this mode, audio recorded on various tracks is mixed onto
a stereo track.
●
MASTERING mode:
In this mode, the volume and compression of songs recorded
onto stereo tracks are adjusted in order to create CDs with
higher levels of sound quality.
These three modes are referred to as Recording Modes.
By pressing [REC MODE] you can cycle through the choices
for the recording mode, in this order:
INPUT
→
BOUNCE
→
MASTERING.
The currently selected recording mode can be determined by
noticing which REC MODE indicator is lighted.
Input sources will be muted while recording modes are
being changed. Note also that the mode selection is not
possible while the BR-1600CD is playing or recording
audio.
BR-1600CD operations in the various modes are as follows:
INPUT
In INPUT mode, input sources are recorded to tracks.
Although replay from other recorded tracks will be heard
during recording, only the input sources will be recorded to
the selected tracks.
Furthermore, when an insert effect is applied to the input
sources, the mixture of the direct sound and the effected
sound will be recorded. In contrast, the effected sound is not
recorded in the case of loop effects, and only the direct sound
is recorded.
BOUNCE
In BOUNCE mode, audio recorded on various tracks is
mixed onto a stereo or mono track. (The term bounce or
ping-pong is used to describe this type of operation.)
All track playback, rhythm guide performances, and other
audio that can be heard via the LINE OUT jack or the
PHONES 1 jack will be recorded to the selected track. As a
result, moving the MASTER fader will cause the volume of
the recorded audio to also change. If a metronome is being
played, this too will be included in the recording, and the
appropriate care should be taken.
All inputs are automatically muted during recording in
BOUNCE mode. However, if an INPUT SELECT button is
pressed at this time, muting for the corresponding input
source(s) will be canceled, and its input audio will also be
recorded together with the track playback.
MASTERING
In MASTERING mode, the Mastering Tool Kit is applied to
the audio recorded on Track 9/10, the volume and
compression of this audio are adjusted, and it is re-recorded
on the same track.
All input sources are muted in MASTERING mode, and this
muting cannot be canceled. In addition, the rhythm guide
and all tracks other than Track 9/10 are also muted at this
time.
When recording is carried out, the audio from Track 9/10 is
passed through the Mastering Tool Kit, and the resultant
audio is recorded to a different V-Track on Track 9/10. This
V-Track is marked as the final mastering track so that it may
be easily recognized and selected when the mastered audio is
to be written to a music CD later on.
Note that this mode has been provided as an addition to
allow the volume and compression of audio tracks to be
adjusted before they are written to music CDs. If you want to
create music CDs that use the recorded tracks as they are, it
will be sufficient to create a mixdown of these tracks onto a
stereo track using BOUNCE mode, and there will be no need
to use MASTERING mode. Accordingly, you can choose
whether or not this mode is to be used.
BR-1600_R_e.book 285 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
286
REC MODE (Recording Mode) Operations
Internal connection diagrams for each recording mode
The internal connections for audio tracks change as described below in response to the current REC MODE condition.
When INPUT or BOUNCE is selected
fig.93-01
Chorus/
Delay/
Doubling
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
Reverb
LR
L
R
L
RL
R
Track9/10
Pan
Track9/10
Fader
Track9/10
Equalizer
Insert
Effects
L
R
Track9/10
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
Track9/10
Reverb Send
L
R
Track 9
Track 10
Level Meter
(Pre Fader)
Level Meter
(Post Fader)
When insert effects are connected
to Track 9/10
Track
11/12 Pan
Track11/12
Fader
Track11/12
Equalizer
Insert
Effects
L
R
Track11/12
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
Track11/12
Reverb Send
L
R
Track 11
Track 12
Loop Phrase
Level Meter
(Pre Fader)
Level Meter
(Post Fader)
When insert effects are connected
to Track 11/12
Track
13/14 Pan
Track13/14
Fader
Track13/14
Equalizer
Insert
Effects
L
R
Track13/14
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
Track13/14
Reverb Send
L
R
Track 13
Track 14
Level Meter
(Pre Fader)
Level Meter
(Post Fader)
When insert effects are connected to
Track 13/14
Track
15/16 Pan
Track15/16
Fader
Track15/16
Equalizer
Insert
Effects
L
R
Track15/16
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
Track15/16
Reverb Send
L
R
Track 15
Track 16
Level Meter
(Pre Fader)
Level Meter
(Post Fader)
When insert effects are connected to
Track 15/16
Track1
Pan
L
R
Track1
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
Track1
Reverb Send
L
R
Track 1
Level Meter
(Pre Fader)
Level Meter
(Post Fader)
When insert effects are connected
to Track 1
Track1
Fader
Track1
Equalizer
Insert
Effects
Track1
Compressor
Track8
Pan
L
R
Track8
Chorus/Delay/Doubling
Send
Track8
Reverb Send
L
R
Track 8
Level Meter
(Pre Fader)
Level Meter
(Post Fader)
When insert effects are connected
to Track 8
Track8
Fader
Track8
Equalizer
Insert
Effects
Track8
Compressor
Drums
Metronome
Bass
Selection using the track type for Track 11/12
Selection using the track type for Track 13/14
Selection using the track type for Track 15/16
1
1
2
Master
Fader
Insert
Effects
When insert effects are connected
to Master
AUDIO SUB MIX
L
R
L
R
To the recording
track for bouncing
2
BR-1600_R_e.book 286 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
287
REC MODE (Recording Mode) Operations
Appendices
When MASTERING is selected
fig.93-02
LINE OUT
&
PHONES
L
R
Mastering
Tool Kit
Track9/10
Fader
Track 9
Track 10
Level Meter
(Pre Fader)
Level Meter
(Post Fader)
Master
Fader
AUDIO SUB MIX
L
R
L
R
V-Track on Track 9/10
to be subjected to
mastering
V-Track on Track 9/10 where
the mastered audio will be
recorded
BR-1600_R_e.book 287 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
288
DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO Date: Oct. 1, 2003
MIDI Implementation
Model: BR-1600CD Version: 1.00
1. Receive data
■
Channel Voice Messages
●
Note off
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
8nH kkH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
kk= Note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
vv = Note off velocity: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
●
Note on
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
9nH kkH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH(ch.1 - ch.16)
kk= Note number: 00H - 7FH(0 - 127)
vv = Note on velocity: 01H - 7FH(1 - 127)
* Received via drums MIDI channel when the MIDI parameter “Drums Note Ch.” is set to
1-16; plays drum sound.
* Received via bass MIDI channel when the MIDI parameter “Bass Note Ch.” is set to 1-16;
plays bass sound.
* Drum sounds correspond to note numbers as follows.
Drum name Note number
Hi-Q D#1 (27)
Stick G 1 (31)
Metronome (click) A 1 (33)
Metronome (bell) A#1 (34)
Kick 2 B 1 (35)
Kick 1 C 2 (36)
Snare 1 D 2 (38)
Snare 2 E 2 (40)
Tom 1 F 2 (41)
Closed hi-hat F#2 (42)
Tom 2 A 2 (45)
Open hi-hat A#2 (46)
Tom 3 C3 (48)
Crash cymbal C#3 (49)
Tom 4 D 3 (50)
Ride cymbal D#3 (51)
Cow bell G#3 (56)
Claves D#5 (75)
●
Control Change
❍
Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 00H 00H
BnH 20H llH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm,ll = Bank number: 00 00H - 7F 7FH (bank.1 - bank.16384)
* When the MIDI parameter Effects Program Chg. is set to PC+BANK, this is transmitted
via the MIDI channel selected in the Effects Channel setting when insert effects patches
are switched.
❍
Volume (Controller number 7)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 07H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Volume: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
* Received via each track’s MIDI channel when the MIDI parameter “MIDI Fader SW” is
set to ON; controls the track volume.
❍
Expression (Controller number 11)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 0BH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Expression: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
* Received via the MIDI channel set for the EXP PEDAL when the MIDI parameter “MIDI
Fader SW” is set to ON; controls the effects in the same manner as operating the EXP
PEDAL.
●
Program Change
Status 2nd byte
CnH ppH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
pp = Program number: 00H - 7FH (prog. 1 - prog. 128)
* When the MIDI parameter Effects Program Chg. is set to PC ONLY or PC+BANK, this is
received via the MIDI channel selected in the Effects Channel setting and is used to
switch the insert effects.
* Bank Select and Program numbers correspond to the insert effect patch banks and
numbers as shown below.
■
Channel Mode Messages
❍
All Sound OFF (Controller number 120)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 78H 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
* Received via drums MIDI channel when the MIDI parameter “Drums Note Ch.” is set to
1-16; mutes the playing drum sounds.
* Received via bass MIDI channel when the MIDI parameter “Bass Note Ch.” is set to 1-16;
mutes the playing drum sounds.
❍
Reset All Controllers (Controller number 121)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 79H 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
* Received via each track’s MIDI channel and the MIDI channel set for the EXP PEDAL
when the MIDI parameter “MIDI Fader SW” is set to ON.
* When this message is received, the track volume and EXP PEDAL are reset as shown
below.
Track volume: 100
EXP PEDAL: 127
❍
All Note Off (Control number 123)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 7BH 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
* Received via bass MIDI channel when the MIDI parameter “Bass Note Ch.” is set to 1-16;
turns the playing bass note off.
Bank Select Program
Number
Patch
MSB LSB Bank Number
00H
00H 00H–63H GUITAR P001–P100
01H 00H–31H MIC P001–P050
02H 00H–09H MULTI CH P001–P010
03H 00H–31H STEREO P001–P050
04H 00H–31H SIMUL P001–P050
01H
00H 00H–63H GUITAR U001–U100
01H 00H–31H MIC U001–U050
02H 00H–09H MULTI CH U001–U010
03H 00H–31H STEREO U001–U050
04H 00H–31H SIMUL U001–U050
02H
00H 00H–63H GUITAR S001–S100
01H 00H–31H MIC S001–S050
02H 00H–09H MULTI CH S001–S010
03H 00H–31H STEREO S001–S050
04H 00H–31H SIMUL S001–S050
BR-1600_R_e.book 288 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
289
MIDI Implementation
Appendices
■
System Realtime Message
●
Timing Clock
Status
F8H
* Received during creation of sync tracks in the Sync Track screen.
●
Start
Status
FAH
* Received when creation of the sync track begins in the Sync Track screen.
●
Stop
Status
FCH
* Received when creation of the sync track is finished in the Sync Track screen.
●
Active Sensing
Status
FEH
* When Active Sensing is received, the unit will begin monitoring the intervals of all
further messages. While monitoring, if the interval between messages exceeds
approximately 400 ms, the same processing will be carried out as when Reset All
Controllers is received, and message interval monitoring will be halted.
■
System Exclusive Message
Status Data byte Status
F0H iiH,ddH,......,eeH F7H
F0H: System Exclusive Message status
ii = ID number: an ID number (manufacturer ID) to indicate the manufacturer whose
Exclusive message this is. Roland’s manufacturer ID is 41H.
ID numbers 7EH and 7FH are extensions of the MIDI standard;
Universal Non-realtime Messages (7EH) and Universal Realtime
Messages (7FH).
dd,...,ee = data: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
F7H: EOX (End Of Exclusive)
■
Universal Non-realtime System Exclusive Messages
●
Identity Request Message
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7EH,dev,06H,01H F7H
Byte Explanation
F0H Exclusive status
7EH ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)
dev Device ID (dev: 10H - 1FH, 7FH)
06H Sub ID#1 (General Information)
01H Sub ID#2 (Identity Request)
F7H EOX (End Of Exclusive)
* Only a device ID of 7FH or message matching the BR-1600CD’s device ID is received.
* When this message is received, Identity Reply message (p. 292) will be transmitted.
About Device ID
Exclusive messages are not assigned to any particular MIDI channel. Instead, they have
their own special control parameter called device ID. The Roland exclusive messages use
device IDs to specify various devices.
How to set the device ID:
1. Press [UTILITY], move the cursor to [MIDI], then press [ENTER/YES].
The MIDI settings screen appears.
2. Move the cursor to “Device ID,” then rotate the TIME/VALUE dial to set the device
ID.
The Device ID can be set to any number from 17 to 32. It was set to 17 at the factory.
2. Data Transmission
■
Channel Voice Messages
●
Note off
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
8nH kkH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
kk = Note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
vv = Note off velocity: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
●
Note on
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
9nH kkH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
kk = Note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
vv = Note on velocity: 01H - 7FH (1 - 127)
* Transmitted by drum pattern using the selected MIDI channel number when the MIDI
parameter “Drums Note Ch.” is set to 1-16.
* Transmitted by bass pattern using the selected MIDI channel number when the MIDI
parameter “Bass Note Ch.” is set to 1-16.
* Transmitted according to the content of the SMF during playback of SMFs.
* Notes sounded by the drum pattern correspond to note numbers as follows.
Rhythm Guide Tone Note Number
Hi-Q D#1 (27)
Stick G 1 (31)
Metronome (click) A 1 (33)
Metronome (bell) A#1 (34)
Kick 2 B 1 (35)
Kick 1 C 2 (36)
Snare 1 D 2 (38)
Snare 2 E 2 (40)
Tom 1 F 2 (41)
Closed hi-hat F#2 (42)
Tom 2 A 2 (45)
Open hi-hat A#2 (46)
Tom 3 C3 (48)
Crash cymbal C#3 (49)
Tom 4 D 3 (50)
Ride cymbal D#3 (51)
Cow bell G#3 (56)
Claves D#5 (75)
●
Polyphonic Key Pressure
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
AnH kkH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
kk = note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
vv = Polyphonic Key Pressure: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
* Transmitted according to the content of the SMF during playback of SMFs.
●
Control Change
* Transmitted according to the content of the SMF during playback of SMFs.
❍
Bank Select (Controller number 0, 32)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 00H mmH
BnH 20H llH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm, ll = Bank number: 00 00H - 7F 7FH (bank.1 - bank.16384)
* When the MIDI parameter Effects Program Chg. is set to PC+BANK, this is transmitted
via the MIDI channel selected in the Effects Channel setting when insert effects patches
are switched.
* For the correspondence between Bank Select/Program numbers and the insert effect
patch banks/numbers, see p. 288.
❍
Modulation (Controller number 1)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 01H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Modulation depth: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
BR-1600_R_e.book 289 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
290
MIDI Implementation
❍
Breath type (Controller number 2)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 02H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Foot Type (Controller number 4)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 04H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Portamento Time (Controller number 5)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 05H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Portamento Time: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Data Entry (Controller number 6, 38)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 06H mmH
BnH 26H llH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm, ll = the value of the parameter specified by RPN/NRPN
mm = MSB, ll = LSB
❍
Volume (Controller number 7)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 07H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Volume: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
* When the MIDI parameter “MIDI Fader SW” is set to ON, this is transmitted via the
MIDI channel set for a track when the corresponding track fader is moved, even if the
SMF is not played.
❍
Balance (Controller number 8)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 08H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Balance: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Panpot (Controller number 10)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 0AH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Panpot: 00H - 40H - 7FH (left - center - right)
❍
Expression (Controller number 11)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 0BH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Expression: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
* When the MIDI parameter “MIDI Fader SW” is set to ON, this is transmitted via the
MIDI channel set for the EXP PEDAL when the EXP PEDAL is operated, even if the SMF
is not played.
❍
Hold 1 (Controller number 64)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 40H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0- 63 =OFF,64- 127 =ON
❍
Portamento (Controller number 65)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 41H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0- 63 =OFF,64- 127=ON
❍
Sostenuto (Controller number 66)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 42H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0- 63 =OFF,64- 127=ON
❍
SOFT (Controller number 67)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 43H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0- 63 =OFF,64- 127=ON
❍
Legato Foot Switch (Controller number 68)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 44H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127) 0- 63 =OFF,64- 127=ON
❍
HOLD 2 (Controller number 69)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 45H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Resonance (Controller number 71)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 47H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv= Resonance value (relative change):00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
❍
Release Time (Controller number 72)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 48H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Release Time value (relative change): 00H - 40H - 7FH (-64 - 0 - +63)
❍
Attack time (Controller number 73)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 49H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Attack time value (relative change): 00H - 40H - 7FH (- 64 - 0 - +63)
❍
Cutoff (Controller number 74)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 4AH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Cutoff value (relative change): 00H - 40H - 7FH (- 64 - 0 - +63)
❍
Decay Time (Controller number 75)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 4BH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Decay Time value (relative change): 00H - 40H - 7FH (- 64 - 0 - +63)
❍
Vibrate Rate (Controller number 76)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 4CH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Vibrate Rate value (relative change): 00H - 40H - 7FH (- 64 - 0 - +63)
❍
Vibrate Depth (Controller number 77)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 4DH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Vibrate Depth value (relative change):00H - 40H - 7FH (- 64 - 0 - +63)
❍
Vibrate Delay (Controller number 78)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 4EH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Vibrate Delay value (relative change):00H - 40H - 7FH (- 64 - 0 - +63)
❍
General Purpose Controller 5 (Controller number 80)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 50H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
BR-1600_R_e.book 290 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
291
MIDI Implementation
Appendices
❍
General Purpose Controller 6 (Controller number 81)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 51H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
General Purpose Controller 7 (Controller number 82)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 52H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
General Purpose Controller 8 (Controller number 83)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 53H vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Control value: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Portamento control (Controller number 84)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 54H kkH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
kk = source note number: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Effect 1 (Reverb Send Level) (Controller number 91)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 5BH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = reverb send level: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
Effect 3 (Chorus Send Level) (Controller number 93)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 5DH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = chorus send level: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
❍
RPN MSB/LSB (Controller number 100, 101)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 65H mmH
BnH 64H llH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm = upper byte (MSB) of parameter number specified by RPN
ll = lower byte (LSB) of parameter number specified by RPN
●
Program Change
Status 2nd byte
CnH ppH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
pp = Program number: 00H - 7FH (prog.1 - prog.128)
* Transmitted according to the content of the SMF during playback of SMFs.
* When the MIDI parameter Effects Program Chg. is set to PC ONLY or PC+BANK, this is
transmitted via the MIDI channel selected in the Effects Channel setting when insert
effects patches are switched.
* For the correspondence between Bank Select/Program numbers and the insert effect
patch banks/numbers, see p. 288.
●
Channel Pressure
Status 2nd byte
DnH vvH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
vv = Channel Pressure: 00H - 7FH (0 - 127)
* Transmitted according to the content of the SMF during playback of SMFs.
●
Pitch Bend Change
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
EnH llH mmH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm, ll = Pitch Bend value: 00 00H - 40 00H - 7F 7FH (- 8192 - 0 - +8191)
* Transmitted according to the content of the SMF during playback of SMFs.
■
Channel Mode Messages
* Transmitted according to the content of the SMF during playback of SMFs.
●
All Sound Off (Controller number 120)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 78H 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
●
Reset All Controllers (Controller number 121)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 79H 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
●
All Notes Off (Controller number 123)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 7BH 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
●
Omni Off (Controller number 124)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 7CH 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
●
Omni On (Controller number 125)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 7DH 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
●
Mono (Controller number 126)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 7EH mmH
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - ch.16)
mm = mono number: 00H - 10H (0 - 16)
●
Poly (Controller number 127)
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
BnH 7FH 00H
n = MIDI channel number: 0H - FH (ch.1 - 16)
■
System Common Messages
●
Quarter Frame Messages
Status Second
F1H mmH (= 0nnndddd)
nnn = Message type: 0 = Frame count LS nibble
1 = Frame count MS nibble
2 = Seconds count LS nibble
3 = Seconds count MS nibble
4 = Minutes count LS nibble
5 = Minutes count MS nibble
6 = Hours count LS nibble
7 = Hours count MS nibble
dddd = 4 bit nibble data: 0H - FH (0 - 15)
* If the Sync parameter “Sync Generator” is set to “MTC,” quarter frame messages of the
time code type specified by “MTC Type” will be transmitted when the BR-1600CD is
running (recording or playing). The transmitted time counts are summed to “SMPTE
(MTC) Offset Time” as the song top is “00:00:00:00”.
Bit Field is assigned as follows.
Frame Count xxxyyyyy
xxx Reserved (000)
yyyyy Frame No. (0-29)
BR-1600_R_e.book 291 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
292
MIDI Implementation
Seconds Count xxyyyyyy
xx Reserved (00)
yyyyyy Seconds (0-59)
Minutes Count xxyyyyyy
xx Reserved (00)
yyyyyy Minutes (0-59)
Hours Count xyyzzzzz
x Reserved (0)
yy Time Code Type
* The time code types defined by the MIDI specification correspond to the BR-1600CD
Sync parameter “MTC Type” as follows.
MIDI specification setting “MTC Type” setting
0 = 24 Frames / Sec 24
1 = 25 Frames / Sec 25
2 = 30 Frames / Sec (Drop Frame) 29D
3 = 30 Frames / Sec (Non Drop Frame 29N or 30
zzzzz Hours
●
Song Position Pointer
Status 2nd byte 3rd byte
F2H mmH nnH
mm, nn=Song position point: 00H 00H - 7FH 7FH
* The current position is transmitted by the Song Position Pointer Message when the BR-
1600CD is stopped, or the locate operation has been performed, if the SYNC parameter
“Sync Generator” is set to “MIDI CLOCK.”
■
System Realtime Messages
●
Timing Clock
Status
F8H
* Transmitted when “Sync Generator” is “MIDI CLOCK” in the SYNC parameter.
●
Start
Status
FAH
* Transmitted when “Sync Generator” is “MIDI CLOCK” in the SYNC parameter.
●
Continue
Status
FBH
* Transmitted when “Sync Generator” is “MIDI CLOCK” in the SYNC parameter.
●
Stop
Status
FCH
* Transmitted when “Sync Generator” is “MIDI CLOCK” in the SYNC parameter.
●
Active Sensing
Status
FEH
* This is transmitted at intervals of approximately 200 msec.
■
System Exclusive Messages
●
Universal System Exclusive Message
❍
Identity Reply Message
* Receiving Identity Request Message, the BR-1600CD send this message.
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7EH, dev, 06H, 02H, 41H, 71H, 01H F7H
00H, 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H, 00H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7EH ID number (Universal Non-realtime Message)
dev Device ID (dev: 10H - 1FH)
06H Sub ID#1 (General Information)
02H Sub ID#2 (Identity Reply)
41H ID number (Roland)
71H 01H Device family code
00H 00H Device family number code
00H 00H 00H 00H Software revision level
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
For instructions on setting the device ID, refer to “How to set the device ID:” (p. 289).
❍
MIDI Machine Control Command
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 06H, aaH, ..., bbH F7H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive Status
7FH Universal System Exclusive Realtime Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
06H MMC command message
aaH command
: :
bbH command
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
❍
STOP (MCS)
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 06H, 01H F7H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7FH Universal System Exclusive Realtime Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
06H MMC command message
01H STOP (MCS)
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
* If the transport switch [STOP] was pressed, the BR-1600CD transmits this message.
❍
DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 06H, 03H F7H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7FH Universal System Exclusive Realtime Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
06H MMC command message
03H DEFERRED PLAY (MCS)
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
* If the transport switch [PLAY] was pressed, the BR-1600CD transmits this message.
❍
RECORD STROBE
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 06H, 06H F7H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7FH Universal System Exclusive Realtime Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
06H MMC command message
06H RECORD STROBE
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
* Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks begins.
BR-1600_R_e.book 292 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
293
MIDI Implementation
Appendices
❍
RECORD EXIT
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 06H, 07H F7H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7FH Universal System Exclusive Realtime Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
06H MMC command message
07H RECORD EXIT
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
* Transmitted when recording to the audio tracks ends.
❍
MMC RESET
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 06H, 0DH F7H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7FH Universal System Exclusive Realtime Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
06H MMC command message
0DH MMC RESET
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
* When powered on the BR-1600CD transmits this message.
❍
LOCATE [MCP]
Format2—LOCATE [TARGET]
Status Data byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 06H, 44H, 06H, 01H, F7H
hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7FH Universal System Exclusive Realtime Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
06H MMC command message
44H LOCATE (MCP)
06H Byte count
01H “TARGET” sub-Command
hrH, mnH, scH, frH, ffH
Standard Time Specification with subframes
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
* If the efficient Maker of the locate switch is pressed or when moved, the BR-1600CD
transmits this message.
●
MIDI Time Code Command
❍
Full Message
Basic operation of quarter frame messages will be handled.
Status Data Byte Status
F0H 7FH, Dev, 01H, 01H, hrH, mnH, scH, frH F7H
Byte Remarks
F0H Exclusive status
7FH Realtime Universal System Exclusive Header
Dev Device ID (7FH)
01H sub-ID #1 (MIDI Time code)
01H sub-ID #2 (Full message)
hrH hours and type: 0 yy zzzzz
yy type:
00 = 24 Flame/sec
01 = 25 Flame/sec
10 = 30 Flame/sec (Drop Format)
11 = 30 Flame/sec (Non Drop Format)
zzzzz: Hours (00 - 23)
mnH Minutes (00 - 59)
scH Seconds (00 - 59)
frH Frames (00 - 29)
F7H EOX (End of Exclusive)
* This message is transmitted when the song position moves.
3. Supplementary material
●
Decimal/Hexadecimal table
(hexadecimal values are indicated by a following “H”)
MIDI uses 7-bit hexadecimal values to indicate data values and the address and size of
exclusive messages. The following table shows the correspondence between decimal and
hexadecimal numbers.
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+
| D | H || D | H || D | H || D | H |
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+
| 0 | 00H || 32 | 20H || 64 | 40H || 96 | 60H |
| 1 | 01H || 33 | 21H || 65 | 41H || 97 | 61H |
| 2 | 02H || 34 | 22H || 66 | 42H || 98 | 62H |
| 3 | 03H || 35 | 23H || 67 | 43H || 99 | 63H |
| 4 | 04H || 36 | 24H || 68 | 44H || 100 | 64H |
| 5 | 05H || 37 | 25H || 69 | 45H || 101 | 65H |
| 6 | 06H || 38 | 26H || 70 | 46H || 102 | 66H |
| 7 | 07H || 39 | 27H || 71 | 47H || 103 | 67H |
| 8 | 08H || 40 | 28H || 72 | 48H || 104 | 68H |
| 9 | 09H || 41 | 29H || 73 | 49H || 105 | 69H |
| 10 | 0AH || 42 | 2AH || 74 | 4AH || 106 | 6AH |
| 11 | 0BH || 43 | 2BH || 75 | 4BH || 107 | 6BH |
| 12 | 0CH || 44 | 2CH || 76 | 4CH || 108 | 6CH |
| 13 | 0DH || 45 | 2DH || 77 | 4DH || 109 | 6DH |
| 14 | 0EH || 46 | 2EH || 78 | 4EH || 110 | 6EH |
| 15 | 0FH || 47 | 2FH || 79 | 4FH || 111 | 6FH |
| 16 | 10H || 48 | 30H || 80 | 50H || 112 | 70H |
| 17 | 11H || 49 | 31H || 81 | 51H || 113 | 71H |
| 18 | 12H || 50 | 32H || 82 | 52H || 114 | 72H |
| 19 | 13H || 51 | 33H || 83 | 53H || 115 | 73H |
| 20 | 14H || 52 | 34H || 84 | 54H || 116 | 74H |
| 21 | 15H || 53 | 35H || 85 | 55H || 117 | 75H |
| 22 | 16H || 54 | 36H || 86 | 56H || 118 | 76H |
| 23 | 17H || 55 | 37H || 87 | 57H || 119 | 77H |
| 24 | 18H || 56 | 38H || 88 | 58H || 120 | 78H |
| 25 | 19H || 57 | 39H || 89 | 59H || 121 | 79H |
| 26 | 1AH || 58 | 3AH || 90 | 5AH || 122 | 7AH |
| 27 | 1BH || 59 | 3BH || 91 | 5BH || 123 | 7BH |
| 28 | 1CH || 60 | 3CH || 92 | 5CH || 124 | 7CH |
| 29 | 1DH || 61 | 3DH || 93 | 5DH || 125 | 7DH |
| 30 | 1EH || 62 | 3EH || 94 | 5EH || 126 | 7EH |
| 31 | 1FH || 63 | 3FH || 95 | 5FH || 127 | 7FH |
+——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————++——————+——————+
D: decimal
H: hexadecimal
Decimal expressions such as used for MIDI channel, Bank Select, and Program Change will
be the value 1 greater than the decimal value given in the above table.
Since each MIDI byte carries 7 significant data bits, each byte can express a maximum of 128
different values. Data for which higher resolution is required must be transmitted using two
or more bytes. For example a value indicated as a two-byte value of aa bb HH would have a
value of aa x 128 + bb.
For a signed number (+/-), 40H = -64, 00H = 0, and 3FH = +63. (i.e., the decimal equivalent
will be 64 less than the decimal value given in the above table.) For a two-byte signed
number, 40 00H = -8192, 00 00H = 0, and 3F 7FH = +8191.
Hexadecimal notation in two 4-bit units is used for data indicated as `nibbled’. The nibbled
two-byte value of 0a 0b H would be a x 16 + b.
<Example1>
What is the decimal equivalent of 5AH?
From the above table, 5AH = 90.
<Example2>
What is the decimal equivalent of the 7-bit hexadecimal values 12 34H?
From the above table, 12H = 18 and 34H = 52
Thus, 18 x 128 + 52 = 2356
<Example3>
What is the decimal equivalent of the nibbled expression 0A 03 09 0DH?
From the above table, 0AH = 10, 03H = 3, 09H = 9, 0DH = 13
Thus, the result is ((10 x 16 + 3) x 16 + 9) x 16 + 13 = 41885
<Example4>
What is the nibbled equivalent of the decimal number 1258?
16 ) 1258
16 ) 78...10
16 ) 4...14
0... 4
From the above table, 0=00H, 4=04H, 14=0EH, 10=0AH
Thus the result is 00 04 0E 0AH
BR-1600_R_e.book 293 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
294
MIDI Implementation
MIDI Implementation Chart
Function...
Basic
Channel
Mode
Note
Number :
Velocity
After
Touch
Pitch Bend
Control
Change
Program
Change
System Exclusive
System
Common
System
Real Time
Aux
Messages
Notes
Transmitted Recognized Remarks
Default
Changed
Default
Messages
Altered
True Voice
Note On
Note Off
Key's
Channel's
0, 32
0–119
7
11
: True Number
: Quarter Frame
: Song Position
: Song Select
: Tune Request
: Clock
: Commands
Start
Continue
Stop
: All Sound Off
: Reset All Controllers
: Local On/Off
: All Notes Off
: Omni On/Off
: Mono/Poly
: Active Sensing
: System Reset
1–16
1–16
X
X
1–127
64
1–127 *1
0–127
O
O
*1
*1
O*1
O
O
O
O
*1
*2
*2
O
X
O
O
O
0–127
*1
O
O
O
X
X
*4
*5
O
O
O
O
*5
*5
*5
*5
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
X
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
1–16
1–16
Memorized
X
X
X
1–127
X
X
0–127
DRUMS: 27–75, BASS: 0–72
X
X
X
O
0–99
O*3
*7
X
X
X
X
O
O
X
O
*6
*6
*6
O
O
X
O
X
X
O
X
*8
*2
*8
* 1 When SMF playbacked, transmit in case of SMF.
* 2 MIDI: MIDI Folder SW = ON only
* 3 Identity Request only
* 4 Sync: Sync Generator = MTC only
* 5 Sync: Sync Generator = MIDI CLOCK only
* 6 Sync Track Recording only
* 7 Effects PC Ch, Drums Note Ch, or Bass Note Ch only
* 8 Bass = ON and Bass Note Ch only
DIGITAL RECORDING STUDIO
Model
BR-1600CD
Date : Oct. 1, 2003
Version : 1.00
MIDI Implementation Chart
**************
**************
Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY
Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY
Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO
Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO
O : Yes
X : No
*2
*2
Bank Select
Volume
Expression
BR-1600_R_e.book 294 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
295
Appendices
Specifications
BR-1600CD: Digital Recording Studio
●
Tracks
Track: 16 V-Track: 256 (16 V-Tracks per each Track)
* Up to 8 tracks can be recorded simultaneously, and up to 16
tracks can be played back simultaneously.
●
Maximum Useful Capacity/Recording Time
Internal Hard Disk:
80 G bytes (recording time; 240 hours) (conversion in one track)
* The above-listed recording time is approximate. Times may be
slightly shorter depending on the number of songs and size of
imported loop phrase that were created.
* The above-listed recording time is the total for all the tracks
that are used. If each of the sixteen tracks contain an equal
amount of data, the length of the resulting song will be
approximately 1/16 of the above.
●
Signal Processing
AD Conversion: 24 bit, AF Method (Guitar/Bass)
24 bit,
Δ∑
Modulation (VOCAL)
24 bit,
Δ∑
Modulation (MULTI-TRACK)
24 bit,
Δ∑
Modulation (STEREO TRACKS)
DA Conversion: 24 bit,
Δ∑
Modulation
Internal Processing: 24 bit (digital mixer section)
Recording Data: 16 bit linear
●
Sample Rate
44.1 kHz
●
Frequency Response
20 Hz–20 kHz (+1/-3 dB)
●
Total Distortion
0.025% or less
(INPUT SENS: CENTER, 1 kHz at nominal output level)
●
Nominal Input Level (Variable)
GUITAR/BASS jack: -10 dBu
MIC 1–8 jacks (XLR): -40 dBu
INPUT 1–8 jacks: -10 dBu
●
Input Impedance
GUITAR/BASS jack: 1 M
Ω
MIC 1–8 jacks (XLR): 12.5 k
Ω
(HOT-COLD)
6.5 k
Ω
(HOT-GND, COLD-GND)
INPUT 1–8 jacks: 22 k
Ω
●
Nominal Output Level
LINE OUT jack: -10 dBu
●
Output Impedance
LINE OUT jack: 2 k
Ω
PHONES 1, 2 jack: 100
Ω
●
Recommended Load Impedance
LINE OUT jack: 20 k
Ω
or greater
PHONES 1, 2 jack: 8–50
Ω
●
Residual Noise Level
LINE OUT jack: -90 dBu or less
(INPUT SELECT: GUITAR/BASS, input terminated with 1 k
Ω
,
INPUT SENS: CENTER, IHF-A, typ.)
●
Interface
DIGITAL IN: S/PDIF 16–24 bit (coaxial type)
DIGITAL OUT: S/PDIF 16–24 bit (coaxial type)
USB connector (B type)
●
Display
130 x 36 mm (Backlit LCD)
●
Connectors
MIDI IN connector
MIDI OUT connector
USB connector
DIGITAL IN connector (coaxial type)
DIGITAL OUT connector (coaxial type)
FOOT SW jack (1/4 inch phone type)
EXP PEDAL jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type)
LINE OUT jacks (RCA Phono type)
INPUT 1–8 jacks (unbalanced, 1/4 inch phone type)
MIC 1–8 jacks (balanced, XLR type)
PHONES 1 jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type)
PHONES 2 jack (Stereo 1/4 inch phone type)
GUITAR/BASS jack (1/4 inch phone type)
BR-1600_R_e.book 295 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
296
Specifications
●
Power Supply
DC 12 V; Supply AC Adaptor (Roland PSB-7U)
●
Current Draw
3 A
●
Dimensions
494 (W) x 339 (D) x 99 (H) mm
19-1/2 (W) x 13-3/8 (D) x 3-15/16 (H) inches
●
Weight
4.9 kg / 10 lbs 13 oz (Excluding AC Adaptor)
●
Accessories
AC Adaptor: PSB-7U
Owner’s Manual (“Basic Operation,” “Owner’s Manual”)
Data List (Insert Effect Patch List, etc.)
Roland Service (information sheet)
CD-ROM “DISCRETE DRUMS”
●
Options
Expression Pedal: EV-5 (Roland)
Foot Volume/Expression
: FV-500L/FV-500H
Foot Switch: FS-5U
Pedal Switch: DP-2 (Roland)
* 0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms
In the interest of product improvement, the
specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject
to change without prior notice.
BR-1600_R_e.book 296 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
297
Index
Symbols
*TMP ....................
78
,
121
,
125
,
130
,
152
,
166
,
177
,
179
,
189
*TMP(CURRENT) ..........................
81
–
82
,
121
,
125
–
126
,
131
+ ............................................................
57
,
59
,
62
–
63
,
194
,
211
=>COPY .........................................................................
160
,
173
=>DELETE ............................................................
161
,
174
,
197
=>PRM. ...........................................................
78
,
120
,
124
,
130
Numerics
123... ...........................................................................................
81
12STAGE .................................................................................
101
1-PEDAL .................................................................................
102
1-VOICE ..................................................................................
102
1x10” ..........................................................................................
96
1x12” ..........................................................................................
96
2-MONO .................................................................................
102
2-ST (2-stereo) ........................................................................
102
2x12” ..........................................................................................
96
2x2 Chorus .........................................................................
85
,
92
3 Band Equalizer ......................................................................
91
3Band Equalizer .......................................................................
89
4 Band Equalizer ......................................................................
91
4Band Equalizer ................................................................
85
–
89
4Band Equalizer/Wah .....................................................
86
–
88
4STAGE ...................................................................................
101
4x12” ..........................................................................................
96
5150DRV ...................................................................................
95
60S FUZ .....................................................................................
94
7STRING .................................................................................
106
8CH COMP EQ ........................................................................
89
8STAGE ...................................................................................
101
8x12” ..........................................................................................
96
A
A<=>a .......................................................................................
81
ABSOLUTE TIME ..................................................................
228
AC ...................................................................................
103
–
104
ac ..............................................................................................
104
ACC .......................................................................
157
,
169
–
170
Accent ......................................................................................
169
Access indicator .......................................................................
30
ACOUSTIC GUITAR ..............................................................
86
Acoustic Guitar Simulator ........................................
85
,
89
–
90
Acoustic Processor .....................................................
86
,
89
–
90
ACOUSTIC SIM .......................................................................
85
Adjusting chorus ................................................................... 114
Adjusting delay ...................................................................... 114
Adjusting doubling ............................................................... 115
Adjusting reverb .................................................................... 113
AF method ................................................................................ 24
AIFF ............................................................... 180, 212, 248, 250
AIFF file .................................................................................. 210
AKGC3K ................................................................................. 100
Algorithm .......................................................................... 77, 85
ALL ........................................................................ 181, 185, 208
ALL icon ................................................................................. 268
Amb Density ............................................................................ 96
Amb HF Damp ........................................................................ 96
Amb Level ................................................................................ 96
Amb Pre-Dly ............................................................................ 96
Amb Size ................................................................................... 96
Ambience .................................................................................. 96
AMERCAN ............................................................................... 94
AMG ............................................................................... 103–104
amg .......................................................................................... 104
Amp Type ............................................................................... 103
ARRANGEMENT .................................................................. 209
Arrangement mode ............................................................... 148
Arrangement/Drums&Bass Pattern ................................... 206
ARRANGEMENT/DRUMS/BASS/LOOP PHRASE ...... 209
ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN ................................... 148, 187
ARRANGEMENT/PATTERN button ................................. 28
ATTACK ................................................................................. 109
Attack ............................................................ 93–94, 96, 99, 136
Attack Time .............................................................................. 94
AUDIO ................................................... 27, 149, 163, 176, 200
Audio CD creation ................................................................ 216
Audio CD import ................................................................... 219
Audio CD import screen ...................................................... 219
Audio CD screen .......................................................... 216, 219
Audio CD Write screen ......................................................... 216
AUDIO CD WRITE/PLAY .................................................. 216
AUDIO CD WRITE/PLAY button ....................................... 29
Audio level ............................................................................. 237
AUDIO LVL ........................................................................... 237
Audio sub mix ........................................................................ 266
AUDIO TRACK MIXER faders 1–8, 9/10–15/16 ............... 27
AUTO FADE ................................................................. 132–133
AUTO FADE IN ..................................................................... 132
Auto Fade In setting screen .................................................. 132
Auto Fade In/Out ................................................................. 132
AUTO FADE OUT ................................................................. 133
Auto Fade Out setting screen .............................................. 133
AUTO PUNCH [ON/OFF] .................................................... 44
AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT ....................................................... 26
Auto punch in/out .................................................................. 43
AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [IN] ............................................... 43
AUTO PUNCH IN/OUT [OUT] ........................................... 43
Auto Scene ................................................................... 50, 52–53
Auto wah ................................................................................ 106
AW .................................................................................. 106–107
BR-1600_R_e.book 297 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
298
Index
B
Back up ........................................................................................
6
Backing chorus .......................................................................
119
BACKUP ........................................................................
204
,
242
Backup .....................................................................................
204
Backup screen ........................................................................
204
Balance ....................................................................................
121
BANK
GUITAR ..............................................................................
85
MIC ......................................................................................
87
MULTI-CHANNEL ..........................................................
89
SIMUL .................................................................................
88
Bank ....................................................................................
76
–
77
BASS ...............................................................................
163
,
189
Bass ...........................................................
94
–
95
,
103
,
146
,
163
Bass Cut Filter ..................................................
88
,
92
,
128
,
135
BASS MULTI ............................................................................
86
Bass pattern ...................................................................
146
,
164
BASS SIM ..................................................................................
85
Bass Simulator ...................................................................
85
,
92
Bass sound ..............................................................................
164
Bass Tone ................................................................................
164
BD-2 ...........................................................................................
94
BEAT ..............................................................................
183
,
199
Beat ..................................................................
38
,
186
,
198
–
199
BEAT MAP .............................................................................
199
Beat map ........................................................................
198
–
199
Beat Map screen .....................................................................
199
BEEP ........................................................................................
201
BG DRV .....................................................................................
95
BG LEAD .........................................................................
95
,
103
BG RHY .....................................................................................
95
BG STK ....................................................................................
104
bg stk .......................................................................................
104
BIPHASE .................................................................................
101
Bit ...............................................................................................
99
BLOCK<= ...............................................................
78
,
125
,
130
BLUES ..............................................................................
95
,
103
BLUES OD ................................................................................
94
Body ...........................................................................................
90
BoomBox .................................................................................
127
BoomLoB ................................................................................
127
BOOSTER .................................................................................
94
BOSSCmp .................................................................................
94
BOTTOM ................................................................................
192
BOUNCE ..........................................................................
25
,
285
BPF ..................................................................................
100
,
107
BPM ......................................................
151
,
153
,
167
,
178
,
188
BR-1600CD icon .....................................................................
241
BRIGHT ............................................................................
96
,
113
Bright ................................................................................
95
, 103
BRIGHTNESS ......................................................................... 237
Brightness ............................................................................... 237
BUTTON ASSIGN ................................................................. 184
BY TRACK .............................................................................. 179
C
CALCULATE ......................................................................... 258
CANCEL ................................................................................... 79
CD Hold Time ........................................................................ 215
CD hold time .......................................................................... 215
CD player ................................................................................ 216
CD Track ................................................................................... 49
CD-R disc .................................................................................... 7
CD-R/RW ........................................................................ 29, 203
CD-R/RW disc ........................................................................... 7
Compatibility ....................................................................... 8
Inserting ................................................................................ 8
Precautions ........................................................................... 7
Removing ............................................................................. 8
CD-R/RW drive .............................................................. 30, 275
CD-R/RW drive’s internal motor ....................................... 215
CD-RW disc ................................................................................ 7
CD-RW erase .......................................................................... 217
CENTER ........................................................................... 96, 104
Character ............................................................................ 90, 92
Chord ....................................................................................... 165
Deleting ............................................................................. 191
Inputting ........................................................................... 190
Inserting ............................................................................ 191
Chord input screen ................................................................ 190
CHORD MAP ......................................................................... 190
Chord progression ........................................................ 148, 190
Chord specifications .............................................................. 165
Chord type .............................................................................. 190
CHORUS ................................................................................. 114
Chorus .................................................... 74, 85, 87–88, 92, 112
Chorus Edit ............................................................................. 114
Chorus Send ........................................................................... 121
CHORUS/DELAY button .................................... 27, 114–115
Chorus/Delay Edit screen .................................................... 114
CLEAN .................................................................................... 103
CLEANTW ............................................................................... 95
CLEAR ALL .................................................................. 189, 193
CLEAR button ................................................................... 25, 48
CLICK ...................................................................................... 201
Clip .......................................................................................... 236
CmpH Attack ......................................................................... 136
CmpH Ratio ........................................................................... 136
CmpH Release ........................................................................ 136
CmpH Thres ........................................................................... 136
CmpL Attack .......................................................................... 136
CmpL Ratio ............................................................................ 136
CmpL Release ........................................................................ 136
CmpL Thres ............................................................................ 136
CmpM Attack ......................................................................... 136
CmpM Ratio ........................................................................... 136
CmpM Release ....................................................................... 136
CmpM Thres .......................................................................... 136
COLOR CB ............................................................................. 237
Color Cb .................................................................................. 237
BR-1600_R_e.book 298 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
299
Index
COLOR CR .............................................................................
237
Color Cr ...................................................................................
237
Color difference signal ..........................................................
237
COMMON ..............................................................................
120
COMP button ..................................................................
27
,
109
Compatible OS .......................................................................
240
Compressor ...................................
74
,
85
,
88
–
89
,
93
,
108
,
136
Compressor Edit screen ........................................................
109
Compressor screen ................................................................
109
Compressor/Defretter .....................................................
85
–
86
Condenser microphone ........................................................
264
Connecting V-LINK devices ................................................
236
Connectors ................................................................................
35
Control Surface ........................................................................
24
Copy
Bass pattern ......................................................................
173
Drum pattern ...................................................................
160
Loop phrase .....................................................................
184
Rhythm arrangement .....................................................
196
COPY + INS icon .....................................................................
57
COPY icon .................................................................
56
,
68
,
184
Copying ..............................................................................
56
,
82
Copyright ...........................................................................
5
,
219
Cord hook .................................................................................
32
COSM ........................................................................................
74
COSM BASS AMP ...................................................................
86
COSM COMP BASS AMP ......................................................
87
COSM COMP GUITAR AMP ................................................
86
COSM Comp/Limiter ................................................
86
–
87
,
94
COSM OD GUITAR AMP ......................................................
85
COSM Overdrive/Distortion .........................................
85
,
94
COSM PreAmp&Speaker ................................................
85
,
95
COSM VOCAL COMP ...........................................................
87
Create By Track screen .........................................................
179
CRUNCH .........................................................................
95
,
103
CRY WAH ..............................................................................
106
CS ...............................................................................................
93
Current position ......................................................................
38
Cursor ........................................................................................
39
CURSOR buttons .....................................................................
29
CURVE ...........................................................................
132
–
133
CUT icon ...................................................................................
62
Cut Off Freq ...................................................................
128
,
135
Cutoff Freq ..............................................................................
100
D
D:E Balance ......................................................................
99
,
102
DARK ...............................................................................
96
,
113
Data CD screen ......................................................................
204
DATA SAVE/LOAD ............................................................
204
DATA SAVE/LOAD button ..................................................
29
DC IN (AC adaptor) jack .................................................
32
,
37
D-Comp ....................................................................................
94
De-esser ..............................................................................
87
,
96
DEFAULT ......................................................................
113
–
115
Defretter .......................................................................
85
–86, 96
DELAY .................................................................................... 114
Delay .............................................................. 75, 85–89, 97, 112
Delay Time ............................................................. 97, 104, 135
Delay time ............................................................................... 114
DELAY TYPE ......................................................................... 115
DELETE ......................................... 81, 158, 171, 189, 191, 193
Delete
Bass pattern ...................................................................... 174
Drum pattern ................................................................... 161
DELETE button ................................................................. 26, 43
Delete screen for drum patterns .......................................... 161
Deleting ..................................................................................... 62
DENSITY ................................................................................ 113
DEPTH .................................................................................... 114
Depth .................................................. 92, 96, 98, 101, 105–107
Detect HPF ................................................................................ 99
DIGITAL ................................................................................... 99
Digital copy ............................................................................ 262
Digital Copy Protect .............................................................. 262
Digital In Assign .................................................................... 261
DIGITAL IN connector ............................................ 32, 35, 261
DIGITAL OUT connector ................................................ 32, 36
Direct Level ..................................... 96, 98, 100–102, 104, 106
Disc At Once By Marker ......................................................... 49
Disc tray .................................................................................... 30
Disk Initialize ......................................................................... 270
Disk memory used for the song ............................................ 67
DISP.FMT. .................... 57, 59, 61, 63–64, 180, 194, 211, 252
Display ...................................................................................... 31
DISSOLVE .............................................................................. 237
Dissolve time .......................................................................... 237
Distance .............................................................................. 88, 97
DISTORT ................................................................................... 94
Dither ....................................................................................... 136
DIV ........................................................................................... 270
DOUBLING ............................................................................ 115
Doubling ................................................ 75, 85, 87–88, 97, 112
Doubling effect ......................................................................... 97
DOWN .................................................................................... 107
DR-20 ....................................................................................... 100
Drive .......................................................................................... 94
Drive Busy! ............................................................................. 193
Driver ...................................................................................... 240
Drop format ............................................................................ 227
Drum Kit ........................................................................ 150, 156
Drum pattern ....................................................... 146, 150, 152
DRUM&BASS PATTERN ..................................................... 209
DRUMS ................................................................. 149, 189, 200
Drums ............................................................................. 146, 149
Drums Note Channel ............................................................ 223
DRV STK ................................................................................... 95
DS-30A ........................................................................... 123, 127
DS-50A .................................................................................... 127
DS-90A .................................................................................... 127
BR-1600_R_e.book 299 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
300
Index
DST+ ..........................................................................................
94
DUAL STREAM .....................................................................
237
Dual stream ............................................................................
237
DV-7PR ...................................................................................
236
Dynamic microphone ...........................................................
264
E
EDIT ...........................................................................................
77
EDIT button ..............................................................................
28
EDITED .....................................................................................
67
Editing .......................................................................................
56
Effect block .............................................................
77
,
123
,
129
Effect block connection ...........................................................
79
Effect Level ........................................
92
,
96
–
98
,
100
–
101
,
104
Effect Level1 ...........................................................................
106
Effect Level2 ...........................................................................
106
Effect On/Off ....................................
90
–
92
,
94
–
106
,
134
–
136
Effect Patch ...............................................................................
76
Effect Patch Copy ....................................................................
82
Effect Patch Write ....................................................................
81
Effect Type ..............................................................................
106
EFFECTS .................................................................................
208
Effects ...............................................................................
74
,
206
EFFECTS button ...............................................................
25
,
77
Effects Channel ......................................................................
235
Effects Edit screen ....................................................................
77
EFFECTS icon .........................................................................
268
Effects Location screen ...........................................................
82
Effects Patch screen .................................................................
77
Effects Patch Write/Copy screen ..........................................
81
Effects Program Change .......................................................
235
Effects Program Chg. ............................................................
235
Eight times as fast ................................................
205
–
207
,
212
Eject ...............................................................
242
,
245
,
249
,
253
EJECT button ............................................................................
30
Electric condenser microphone ...........................................
265
Emergency eject hole ..............................................................
30
END (End point) ........................
57
,
59
,
63
–
64
,
180
,
194
,
211
ENHANCE ...............................................................................
90
Enhancer .............................................................
86
–
87
,
98
,
135
ENTER/YES button ................................................................
29
EQ button .........................................................................
27
,
110
Equalizer .................................................................
74
,
108
,
134
Equalizer Edit screen ............................................................
110
Equalizer screen .....................................................................
110
Equalizer/Wah ........................................................................
85
ERASE ...................................................................
189
,
193
, 238
Erase
CD-RW disc ............................................................. 214, 217
Loop phrase ..................................................................... 185
ERASE icon .............................................. 63, 69, 185, 214, 217
ERASE OFF .................................................................... 153, 167
ERASE ON ..................................................................... 153, 167
Erasing ...................................................................................... 63
Error message ......................................................................... 277
EV-5 ........................................................................................... 84
EXCHANGE icon .................................................................... 60
Exchanging ............................................................................... 60
EXIT/NO button ..................................................................... 29
EXP Pedal Channel ................................................................ 233
EXP PEDAL jack ............................................................... 33, 84
Expander ................................................................................. 135
ExpH Attack ........................................................................... 135
ExpH Ratio ............................................................................. 135
ExpH Release ......................................................................... 135
ExpH Thres ............................................................................. 135
ExpL Attack ............................................................................ 135
ExpL Ratio .............................................................................. 135
ExpL Release .......................................................................... 135
ExpL Thres .............................................................................. 135
ExpM Attack ........................................................................... 135
ExpM Ratio ............................................................................. 135
ExpM Release ......................................................................... 135
ExpM Thres ............................................................................ 135
Expression pedal ............................................................. 84, 274
Extension ................................................................................ 252
F
Fade in ..................................................................................... 132
Fade-out .................................................................................. 132
FADER icon ............................................................................ 233
Fader position ........................................................................ 233
FAST ........................................................................................ 102
FAT .......................................................................................... 106
FAT MCH ................................................................................. 95
FEEDBACK ............................................................................ 114
Feedback ................................................................. 97, 102, 104
FF button ................................................................................... 26
Filter ........................................................................................... 99
Final Mastering Track ...................................................... 46–47
FINALIZE ............................................................................... 218
Finalize .................................................................................... 218
Fine .......................................................................................... 102
FL ............................................................................................... 98
Flanger .................................................................. 85, 87–88, 98
Flanging effect .......................................................................... 98
Flashing green .......................................................................... 27
Flashing orange ........................................................................ 27
Flashing orange and green ..................................................... 27
Flashing red .............................................................................. 27
Flat .................................................................................... 97, 100
FOOT SW jack .......................................................................... 33
Foot switch ............................................................................... 43
Foot Volume ...................................................................... 85–88
Foot Volume On/Off .............................................................. 98
Formant ................................................................................... 106
Formant1 ................................................................................. 106
Formant2 ................................................................................. 106
Four times as fast ................................................. 205–207, 212
Frame ................................................................................ 38, 227
BR-1600_R_e.book 300 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
301
Index
Frames .......................................................................................
31
Freq .....................................................................................
92
,
99
Frequency ..............................................
98
,
104
,
107
,
128
,
135
Fretless bass ..............................................................................
96
FROM ......................................
81
–
82
,
121
–
122
,
125
–
126
,
131
FROM (From point) .........................................................
57
,
59
Front Panel ...............................................................................
34
FULLRNG .................................................................................
95
FUNCTION buttons ................................................................
38
FX ...............................................................................................
85
G
Gain .................................................................
95
,
100
,
103
,
128
Gain SW ....................................................................................
95
GATE .....................................................................
157
,
169
,
171
Gate time .................................................................................
169
GLOBAL icon .........................................................................
267
GM .........................................................................
162
,
175
,
223
Ground terminal ......................................................................
33
GS ...........................................................................
162
,
175
,
223
Guitar bank ...............................................................................
76
GUITAR/BASS ...............................................................
24
,
280
GUITAR/BASS effects ............................................................
74
GUITAR/BASS jack .........................................................
34
–
35
GUV DS .....................................................................................
94
H
H TO HF .................................................................................
101
H TO S .....................................................................................
101
HALL .......................................................................................
113
HARD ...............................................................................
93
,
109
Hard disk ...........................................................................
6
,
275
Emergency ............................................................................
6
Precaution ............................................................................
6
Setup .....................................................................................
6
Hard disk capacity ..................................................................
70
Hard Disk Information .........................................................
269
Hard Disk screen ...................................................................
269
Harmony Sequence ...............................................
75
,
116
,
119
Harmony Sequence edit screen ...........................................
120
HD ACCESS indicator ............................................................
29
HDD backup ..........................................................................
206
HDD icon ..............................................................
207
,
209
,
269
HDD recover ..........................................................................
209
Hed.Dy ....................................................................................
100
HF DAMP ......................................................................
113
–
114
Hi Cut Freq ........................................................................
92
,
97
HI.FEML ........................................................................
118
,
121
HI.MALE .......................................................................
118, 121
HIGH .............................................................................. 103, 110
High Depth ............................................................................... 93
High Freq ......................................................................... 91, 134
High Freq Trimmer ............................................................... 128
HIGH FREQUENCY ............................................................. 111
HIGH GAIN ........................................................................... 111
High Gain ............................................................... 91, 105, 134
High Level ....................................................................... 93, 136
High Pre-Dly ............................................................................ 93
HIGH Q ................................................................................... 111
High Q .............................................................................. 91, 134
High Rate .................................................................................. 93
HIGH TYPE ............................................................................ 110
High Type ........................................................................ 91, 134
High-speed writing ...................................................... 205–207
Hi-Mid Freq ............................................................ 91, 105, 134
Hi-Mid Gain ........................................................... 91, 105, 134
Hi-Mid Q ................................................................. 91, 105, 134
Hour .......................................................................................... 38
HPF .......................................................................................... 100
HU ............................................................................................. 98
Hum to Half-tone .................................................................. 101
Hum to Single ........................................................................ 101
Human Feel ............................................................................ 120
Humanizer ......................................................................... 85, 98
Humbucking-style ................................................................. 101
HVY MTL ................................................................................. 94
I
IMPORT ................................................................ 175, 210, 219
IMPORT icon ................................................ 162, 181, 252, 254
IN button ................................................................................... 26
INFO icon ........................................................................ 67, 269
Information ............................................................................... 31
Initialize .................................................................................. 267
INITIALIZE icon .................................................................... 267
INPUT ..................................................................... 25, 261, 285
Input ........................................................................ 94, 100, 135
INPUT 1 .................................................................................... 83
INPUT 1/MIC 1 jack ............................................................... 35
INPUT 1-8 ................................................................................. 83
INPUT 2/MIC 2 jack ............................................................... 35
INPUT 3/MIC 3 jack through INPUT 8/MIC 8 jack
................... 35
Input Gain ...................................................................... 134–135
Input jacks ................................................................................ 35
INPUT LEVEL knob ................................................................ 25
INPUT MIX (NORMAL) ........................................................ 83
INPUT MIX (REC DRY) ......................................................... 83
INPUT SELECT ...................................................................... 280
INPUT SELECT buttons ......................................................... 24
INPUT SENS knobs ................................................................. 24
Input Type .............................................................................. 120
INPUT/MIC jacks (1 through 8) ........................................... 33
Input/Track level meters ....................................................... 31
INSERT ..................................................... 79, 81, 158, 171, 190
Insert
Loop phrase ..................................................................... 193
Insert effect ............................................................................... 76
Insert effect algorithm list ...................................................... 85
Insert effect connection ........................................................... 82
BR-1600_R_e.book 301 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
302
Index
Insert effects .............................................................................
74
INSERT icon .............................................................................
61
Inserting ....................................................................................
61
Internal connection .......................................................
281
,
286
INVERSE ........................................................................
100
,
127
Invert .........................................................................................
99
ISO9660 .........................................................
161
,
174
,
180
,
212
J
Jacks ...........................................................................................
35
JAZZCMB .................................................................................
95
JC-120 ......................................................................
95
,
103
–
104
JUMBO ......................................................................................
90
K
KNEE .......................................................................................
109
Knee ...........................................................................................
93
L
LEADSTK .................................................................................
95
LEN ..........................................................................................
192
LENGTH .........................................................
61
,
132
–
133
,
189
Length in measures ...............................................................
183
LEVEL .....................................................................................
115
Level ...........................
90
–
96
,
98
–
99
,
101
–
102
,
105
–
107
,
128
LEVEL CALIBRATION ........................................................
258
Level calibration ....................................................................
258
LEVEL CALIBRATION button .............................................
24
Level Display .........................................................................
263
LIGHT .....................................................................................
106
Limiter ..................................................
85
,
88
,
94
,
99
,
128
,
136
LINE OUT jacks ................................................................
33
,
36
LINE OUT/Phones1 .............................................................
201
LINK OFF .................................................................................
80
LINK ON .........................................................................
80
,
110
LO.FEML .......................................................................
118
,
121
LO.MALE ......................................................................
118
,
120
LOCATION .....................................................................
82
,
119
Location ....................................................................................
49
LO-FI BOX ................................................................................
88
Lo-Fi Box ............................................................................
88
,
99
Loop effects .....................................................................
74
,
112
LOOP PHRASE .............................................................
176
,
192
Loop Phrase ..........................................................
147
,
176
,
206
LOOP PHRASE A–H ............................................................
209
LOOP PHRASE ALL .............................................................
209
Loop phrase creation ............................................................
179
Loop Phrase Edit screen .......................................................
183
Loop Phrase Erase screen .....................................................
185
LOOP PHRASE IMPORT ..................................................... 179
Loop phrase import ............................................................... 180
LOOP PHRASE IMPORT button .......................................... 29
Loop Phrase screen ................................................................ 179
Loop Recording ....................................................................... 45
LOW ............................................................................... 103, 110
LOW CUT ...................................................................... 113–114
Low Cut Filter .......................................................................... 99
Low Depth ................................................................................ 92
Low Freq .......................................................................... 91, 134
Low Freq Trimmer ................................................................ 128
LOW FREQUENCY .............................................................. 111
LOW GAIN ............................................................................ 111
Low Gain ................................................................ 91, 105, 134
Low Level ........................................................................ 92, 136
Low Mix Level ......................................................................... 98
Low Pre-Dly ............................................................................. 92
LOW Q .................................................................................... 111
Low Q ............................................................................... 91, 134
Low Rate ................................................................................... 92
LOW TYPE ............................................................................. 111
Low Type .................................................................................. 91
Low-Cut Filter .......................................................................... 89
Low-Mid Freq ........................................................ 91, 105, 134
Low-Mid Gain ........................................................ 91, 105, 134
Low-Mid Q ............................................................. 91, 105, 134
LowType ................................................................................. 134
LPF .................................................................................. 100, 107
Lrg.Cn ...................................................................................... 100
Lrg.Dy ..................................................................................... 100
M
Macintosh ............................................ 240, 243, 246, 250, 253
MANUAL ..................................................... 102, 106, 259–260
Manual ............................................................................. 98, 101
Manual punch in/out ............................................................. 42
MARK button .................................................................... 25, 48
MARKER .................................................................................. 25
Marker ................................................................................ 31, 48
MARKER icon .......................................................................... 49
Marker Name ........................................................................... 49
Marker screen .................................................................... 49–50
Marker Stop .............................................................................. 50
MASTER ................................................................. 83, 231, 237
Master ...................................................................................... 103
MASTER fader ......................................................................... 29
Master fader ........................................................................... 237
Master Fader Channel ........................................................... 233
Master level meter ................................................................... 31
Master sync ............................................................................. 225
MASTERING ................................................................... 25, 285
MASTERING TOOL KIT ...................................................... 208
Mastering Tool Kit .......................................................... 75, 129
Patch copy ........................................................................ 131
Patch write ....................................................................... 131
MASTERING TOOL KIT button ........................................... 27
Mastering Tool Kit edit screen ............................................. 130
Mastering Tool Kit parameter ............................................. 134
Mastering Tool Kit Patch Write/Copy screen ................... 131
MATCH ......................................................................... 103–104
match ....................................................................................... 104
MAX ............................................................................... 113–115
BR-1600_R_e.book 302 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
303
Index
Maximum useful Capacity ...................................................
295
MCH DRV ................................................................................
95
MCH LEAD ..............................................................................
95
MEAS ....................................................................
183
,
198
–
199
MEASURE .....................................................................
189
,
192
Measure .............................................................
31
,
38
,
198
–
199
MEDIUM ................................................................
93
,
102
,
109
METAL ...........................................................................
103
–
104
METAL D ................................................................................
103
METRO.LVL ...........................................................................
153
METRO.LVL. ..........................................................................
167
METRONOME .....................................................
149
,
200
–
201
Metronome .............................................................................
200
Output ...............................................................................
201
Sound ................................................................................
201
Metronome icon .......................................................................
31
METRONOME ONLY .................................................
201
–
202
MIC bank ..................................................................................
76
Mic Converter .................................................................
88
,
100
Mic Distance .............................................................................
90
MIC effects ................................................................................
74
Mic Level .........................................................................
96
,
104
MIC MODELING ....................................................................
88
Mic Setting .......................................................................
96
,
104
Microphone pre-amp ............................................................
265
MICROSCOPE ..............................................................
157
,
170
Microscope ....................................................................
157
,
170
MID ..........................................................................................
110
Mid Freq ....................................................................................
91
MID FREQUENCY ................................................................
111
MID GAIN ..............................................................................
111
Mid Gain ...................................................................................
91
Mid Level ................................................................................
136
MID Q .....................................................................................
111
Mid Q ........................................................................................
91
MIDDLE .........................................................................
103
–
104
Middle ..............................................................................
95
,
103
MIDI ........................................................................................
222
MIDI cable ..............................................................................
222
MIDI channel .........................................................................
222
MIDI CLOCK .........................................................................
226
MIDI connector ...............................................................
36
,
222
MIDI Fader .............................................................................
232
MIDI icon .......................................................................
223
,
231
MIDI Implementation Chart ................................................
222
MIDI IN ...................................................................................
222
MIDI IN connector ...........................................................
32
,
36
MIDI indicator .........................................................................
29
MIDI keyboard .......................................................................
234
MIDI OUT ...............................................................................
222
MIDI OUT connector .......................................................
32
,
36
MIDI screen ...................................................................
223
,
231
MIDI sequencer ......................................................................
225
MIDI sound module ..............................................................
223
MIDI THRU ............................................................................ 222
MIDI time code ...................................................................... 226
MIDI timing clock .................................................................. 225
MIN ................................................................................ 113–115
Min.Cn .................................................................................... 100
Minute ....................................................................................... 38
Mix Level ......................................................................... 98, 135
Mixer ....................................................................................... 136
MIXER icon ............................................................................. 268
MMC ........................................................................................ 231
MMC Mode ............................................................................ 231
Mode ................................................................ 92, 102, 105, 107
Model ...................................................................................... 127
Modify Filter .......................................................................... 100
Modulation ........................................................................ 87–88
MONO ....................................................................................... 92
MOVE ...................................................................... 79, 157, 171
MOVE + INS icon .................................................................... 58
MOVE icon ............................................................................... 58
Moving ...................................................................................... 58
MS ............................................................................................ 103
MS (1) ........................................................................................ 95
MS (1+2) .................................................................................... 95
MS HI-G .................................................................................... 95
MS STK .................................................................................... 104
ms stk ...................................................................................... 104
MT-2 .......................................................................................... 94
MTC ................................................................................ 226–227
MTC Type ............................................................................... 227
MTL STK ................................................................................... 95
MTLLEAD ................................................................................ 95
MUF FUZ .................................................................................. 94
Multi-channel bank ................................................................. 76
MULTI-CHANNEL effects .................................................... 74
MULTI-TRACK .............................................................. 25, 280
Mute ......................................................................................... 260
N
N.C. .......................................................................................... 190
NAME ..................................................................... 81, 125, 131
Name ......................................................................................... 49
Bass pattern ...................................................................... 173
Drum pattern ................................................................... 160
Rhythm arrangement ...................................................... 196
NAME icon ............................................................................... 72
NEW ........................................................................................ 191
NO. ................................................................................. 192–193
No. ............................................................................................. 49
Noise .......................................................................................... 99
Noise Suppressor ...................................................... 85–89, 100
Non-chord .............................................................................. 120
Non-chord (- - -) ..................................................................... 190
Non-drop format ................................................................... 227
NORMAL .............................................. 96, 100, 113, 127, 270
Normalize ................................................................................. 65
NORMALIZE icon ................................................................... 65
BR-1600_R_e.book 303 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
304
Index
Normalize screen .....................................................................
65
NOTE .......................................................................................
170
O
OCT FUZ ..................................................................................
94
Octave ..............................................................................
86
,
100
Octave Level ...........................................................................
100
OD-1 ..........................................................................................
94
OD-2 ..........................................................................................
94
ON/OFF .................................................................................
124
On/Off ............................................................
93
,
120
,
127
–
128
ON/OFF button .......................................................................
26
ONLY CUR. PARTITION. ...................................................
271
OPTIMIZE icon ........................................................................
70
ORG ...........................................................................................
96
OUT button ..............................................................................
26
Output ............................................................................
100
,
136
Output jacks .............................................................................
36
Output Level ..........................................................................
134
Output Sp. ..............................................................................
127
P
P.SHIFT ...................................................................................
102
P.Shift Type ............................................................................
102
PAGE SCROLL buttons ..........................................................
39
Palette ......................................................................................
236
Pan .....................................................................
85
,
97
,
101
,
120
PAN button ..............................................................................
27
Panel Descriptions ...................................................................
24
PAN-SQR ................................................................................
105
PAN-TRI .................................................................................
105
Parametric ...............................................................................
105
Partition ..................................................................................
271
Patch name .............................................................
81
,
121
,
131
Patch number ...........................................................................
77
PATTERN ...............................................................................
189
Pattern mode ..........................................................................
148
Pattern name .................................................................
160
,
173
Pattern Selection screen ...............................................
150
,
164
Pattern setup .................................................................
150
,
164
PC ONLY ................................................................................
235
PC+BANK ..............................................................................
235
PEAK ...............................................................
91
,
110
–
111
,
134
Peak .........................................................................................
107
PEAK indicators ......................................................................
24
PEDAL ..................................................................
102
,
106
–
107
Pedal Pos .................................................................................
106
Pedal wah ...............................................................................
106
Pedal-type pitch shifter ........................................................
102
PERCENT .................................................................................
66
PH ............................................................................................
101
Phantom ..................................................................................
264
Phantom power .....................................................................
264
Phase ...............................................................................
100
,
127
Phaser ..................................................................
85
,
87
–
88
,
101
PHONES 1 jack ........................................................................
34
PHONES 1 VOLUME knob ...................................................
34
PHONES 1/2 jacks ..................................................................
36
PHONES 2 jack ........................................................................
34
PHONES 2 VOLUME knob ................................................... 34
Phones2 ................................................................................... 202
PIC ........................................................................................... 101
Pickup Simulator ............................................................ 85, 101
Pickup Type .............................................................................. 90
PIEZO ........................................................................................ 90
Pitch ......................................................................................... 102
PITCH CORRECTION .......................................................... 117
Pitch Correction ..................................................... 75, 116–117
Pitch Correction Edit screen ................................................. 118
Pitch shift ................................................................................ 102
Pitch Shifter ........................................................ 85, 87–88, 102
Pitch Shifter pedal ................................................................... 84
PLATE ..................................................................................... 113
PLAY ....................................................................................... 214
PLAY button ............................................................................. 26
PLAY SPEED .......................................................................... 237
PLAY/IMP. ............................................................................ 219
PLAYBACK ............................................................................ 238
Playback speed ....................................................................... 237
PLAYER ........................................................................... 99, 214
Playing SMFs .......................................................................... 213
Polarity .................................................................................... 107
POS .......................................................................................... 192
Position ................................................................................... 192
POST FADER ......................................................................... 263
Post Filter .................................................................................. 99
Post-fader ................................................................................ 263
Power supply ........................................................................... 37
POWER switch ......................................................................... 32
Pre Delay ................................................................. 92, 102, 120
PRE FADER ............................................................................ 263
Pre Filter .................................................................................... 99
PRE GAP icon ........................................................................ 216
PreAmp .............................................................................. 86–88
Preamp .................................................................................... 103
PRE-DELAY .................................................................. 113–114
Pre-fader ................................................................................. 263
Pre-gap .................................................................................... 216
Pre-gap setting screen ........................................................... 216
Presence ........................................................................... 95, 103
Preset bass patterns ............................................................... 146
Preset drum pattern .............................................................. 146
Preset patch ..................................................................... 76, 117
Preset rhythm arrangement ........................................ 148, 187
PREVIEW ...................................................... 181, 183–185, 211
Preview ..................................................................................... 54
Preview Switch ........................................................................ 55
PROCRNC ................................................................................ 95
PROGRAMMABLE RHYTHM ............................................ 187
Programmable rhythm ......................................................... 146
BR-1600_R_e.book 304 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
305
Index
PROTECTED ............................................................................
67
Protecting ..................................................................................
71
Prox.Fx ......................................................................................
97
Proximity effect ........................................................................
97
PS .............................................................................................
102
Punch in ....................................................................................
42
Punch In/Out ...........................................................................
42
Punch out ..................................................................................
42
Pwd. BLK ................................................................................
127
Pwd. E-B .................................................................................
127
Pwd. MAC ..............................................................................
127
Q
QTZ .................................................................................
154
,
168
Quantize .........................................................................
154
,
168
R
Rack160 .....................................................................................
94
RADIO ......................................................................................
99
Radio .......................................................................................
127
Range .......................................................................................
234
Range of note numbers .........................................................
234
RATE .......................................................................................
114
Rate ..........................................
92
,
98
,
101
,
105
–
107
,
159
,
172
RATIO .....................................................................................
109
Ratio ....................................................................................
93
–
94
REALTIME .............................................................................
153
Real-time recording .....................................
152
–
153
,
166
–
167
Rear Panel .................................................................................
32
REC button ...............................................................................
27
REC MODE ............................................................................
285
REC MODE button ..................................................................
25
REC MODE indicators ............................................................
25
Recording mode .....................................................................
285
Recording time .......................................................................
295
Recording V-LINK control operations ...............................
238
RECOVER ......................................................................
208
,
245
Recover ....................................................................................
207
Recover screen .......................................................................
208
Reference pitch .......................................................................
256
Rehearsal ........................................................................
154
,
168
REHEARSAL OFF ........................................................
154
,
168
REHEARSAL ON .........................................................
154
,
168
RELATIVE TIME ...................................................................
228
RELEASE ................................................................................
109
Release .............................................................
93
,
100
,
128
,
136
Release Time .............................................................................
94
Removable Disk .....................................................................
241
Removing song protection .....................................................
71
Repeat ........................................................................................
45
REPEAT button ........................................................................
26
RES ..................................................................................
155
,
169
RESET ......................................................................................
258
Resonance .........................................................
96
,
98
,
100
–
101
REST ........................................................................................
169
Rest ..........................................................................................
120
Reverb ..............................................................................
74
,
112
REVERB button ............................................................... 27, 113
Reverb Edit ............................................................................. 113
Reverb Edit screen ................................................................. 113
REVERB SEND ...................................................................... 115
Reverb Send ............................................................................ 121
Reverb Send screen ............................................................... 113
REW button .............................................................................. 26
RF ORNG .................................................................................. 95
RF RED ...................................................................................... 95
RF VNTG .................................................................................. 95
Rhythm arrangement ................................................... 148, 187
Rhythm machine ................................................................... 225
Ring Modulator ........................................................ 85, 88, 104
Rise Time ................................................................................ 104
R-MAN ...................................................................................... 94
ROOM ..................................................................................... 113
ROTECT icon ........................................................................... 71
S
S TO H ..................................................................................... 101
S/PDIF .................................................................................... 261
Safe To Remove Hardware ........................ 242, 246, 249, 253
Sample Rate .............................................................................. 99
Sampling CD ................................................................. 147, 180
Saving ........................................................................................ 81
Saving a song ........................................................................... 72
Scene ................................................................................... 50–51
SCENE icon .............................................................................. 51
Scene screen .............................................................................. 51
SCMS .......................................................................... 5, 219, 262
Scroll Bar ................................................................................... 39
Scrub .......................................................................................... 54
Scrub FROM/TO
FROM .................................................................................. 55
TO ........................................................................................ 55
Scrub/Preview screen ............................................................. 55
SCRUB/PRV. icon ................................................................... 55
SDD .......................................................................................... 104
SEARCH button ................................................................ 25, 48
Second ....................................................................................... 38
Security Slot (SECURITY LOCK) .......................................... 33
SELECT ALL ....................................... 57, 59, 63–64, 194, 211
Sensitivity ................................................ 96, 98, 104, 107, 135
Separation .................................................................. 97–98, 102
SEQ .......................................................................................... 105
SETUP ............................................................................ 156, 164
SG ............................................................................................. 104
SHLV ............................................................... 91, 110–111, 134
Short Delay ...................................................................... 85, 104
Short delay .............................................................................. 115
Sibilant Level ............................................................................ 96
SIMUL .............................................................................. 24, 280
Simul bank ................................................................................ 76
BR-1600_R_e.book 305 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
306
Index
SIMUL effects ...........................................................................
74
SINGLE .....................................................................................
97
Single to Hum ........................................................................
101
Single-coil ...............................................................................
101
Size of each partition .............................................................
269
SLDN ................................................................................
95
,
103
SLOW ......................................................................................
102
Slow Gear .........................................................................
85
,
104
SMALL ....................................................................................
104
SmallTV ...................................................................................
127
SMF ................................................................
161
–
162
,
174
,
213
SMF import ....................................................................
161
,
174
SMF Import screen .......................................................
162
,
175
SMF player .............................................................................
213
Sml.Cn .....................................................................................
100
Sml.Dy .....................................................................................
100
SmlCUBE ................................................................................
127
Smooth ....................................................................................
118
SOFT .................................................................................
93
,
109
Soft Clip ..................................................................................
136
Song backup ...........................................................................
204
Song Backup screen ...............................................................
204
Song bass pattern ...................................................................
146
Song Copy ................................................................................
68
Song drum pattern ................................................................
146
Song Erase ................................................................................
69
SONG icon ................................................................................
67
Song Information .....................................................................
67
Song Information screen .........................................................
67
Song loop phrase ..........................................................
147
,
177
Song Menu screen ...................................................................
67
Song Name ........................................................................
31
,
72
Song name ................................................................................
67
Song Name screen ...................................................................
72
Song number ............................................................................
67
Song Optimize .........................................................................
70
Song patch .......................................................................
76
,
117
Song Protect ..............................................................................
71
Song protection ........................................................................
67
Song recover ...........................................................................
207
Song rhythm arrangement ..........................................
148
,
187
Song Save ..................................................................................
72
SP Modeling ...........................................................................
127
SPEAKER MODELING ........................................................
208
Speaker Modeling ...........................................................
75
,
123
Patch copy ........................................................................
126
Patch write .......................................................................
125
SPEAKER MODELING button .............................................
28
Speaker Modeling edit screen .............................................
124
Speaker Modeling parameter ..............................................
127
Speaker Modeling patch .......................................................
124
Speaker Modeling patch screen ...........................................
124
Speaker Modeling Patch Write/Copy screen ...................
126
Speaker Simulator ....................................................
86
–
88
,
104
Speaker SW ...............................................................................
95
Speaker Type ...................................................................
96
,
104
Split Freq H .............................................................................
135
Split Freq L .............................................................................
135
Spr Flat ....................................................................................
127
START ............................................................................
132
–
133
START (Start point) .............
57, 59, 61, 63–64, 180, 194, 211
STD ............................................................................................ 90
Steady green ............................................................................. 27
Steady red ................................................................................. 27
STEP ................................................................................ 155, 169
Step .......................................................................................... 101
STEP BACK ............................................................................ 169
Step Rate ................................................................................. 101
Step recording .............................................. 152, 155, 166, 169
STEREO ..................................................................................... 92
Stereo bank ............................................................................... 76
STEREO effects ........................................................................ 74
Stereo Link .............................................................. 80, 110–111
STEREO MULTI ....................................................................... 88
STEREO TRACKS ........................................................... 25, 280
STKCRNC ................................................................................. 95
STOP button ............................................................................. 26
Sub Equalizer .................................................................. 85, 105
Sub Mixer ................................................................................ 266
Sub-frame .................................................................................. 38
SUB-MIX ................................................................................. 261
Supported combinations of effects ........................................ 75
SURFACE SCAN ................................................................... 270
Sustain ................................................................................ 93–94
Swing .............................................................................. 159, 172
Swing Pos. ..................................................................... 159, 172
Sync Generator ....................................................................... 226
SYNC icon ...................................................................... 225–226
Sync Offset .............................................................................. 230
Sync Source ............................................................................. 229
SYNC TRACK ........................................................................ 229
Sync track ................................................................................ 228
SYNC TRACK icon ................................................................ 229
Synchronization setting screen ............................................ 226
Synchronize ................................................................... 225, 276
T
T BAR ...................................................................................... 237
T bar ......................................................................................... 237
TAP ........................................................................ 151, 178, 188
TAP button ............................................................................... 28
Tap tempo ............................................................. 151, 178, 188
Tap Time ................................................................................... 97
TEMPO .......................................................... 151, 178, 188, 198
Tempo ............................................................................ 156, 198
Bass pattern ...................................................................... 165
Drum pattern ................................................................... 151
Loop phrase ..................................................................... 178
Rhythm arrangement ...................................................... 187
TEMPO MAP ......................................................................... 198
BR-1600_R_e.book 306 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
307
Index
Tempo map ............................................................................
198
Tempo Map screen ................................................................
198
TEMPO MATCH ...................................................................
192
Three-band compressor ........................................................
129
Three-band equalizers ...................................................
74
,
108
THRESHOLD .........................................................................
109
Threshold ...........................................
93
–
94
,
99
–
100
,
128
,
136
THRU ........................................................................................
99
TIME ...............................................................................
113
–
114
Time ....................................................................................
31
,
97
Time Display Format ............................................................
228
Time Offset .............................................................................
228
TIME/VALUE dial ...........................................................
29
,
40
TIMES (copy time) ...................................................................
57
TMP ...........................................................................................
78
TO ............................................
81
–
82
,
121
–
122
,
125
–
126
,
131
TO (To point) .....................................................................
57
,
59
TO TRACK icon .....................................................................
194
TONE .......................................................................................
113
Tone ...............................................................
93
–
94
,
96
,
99
,
101
TOP ..........................................................................................
192
Top .............................................................................................
90
Top screen .................................................................................
38
Top-Hi .......................................................................................
90
Top-Mid ....................................................................................
90
TOUCH ...................................................................................
107
Touch wah ..............................................................................
106
TRACK 1 ...................................................................................
83
Track 1 Channel .....................................................................
233
TRACK 1/2 ..............................................................................
83
Track 15&16 Channel ............................................................
233
TRACK 1-8 ................................................................................
83
TRACK 9-16 .....................................................................
83
,
110
Track buttons 1–8, 9/10–15/16 ..............................................
27
Track Copy ...............................................................................
56
Track Copy screen ...................................................................
57
Track Cut ..................................................................................
62
Track Cut screen ......................................................................
62
Track Edit .................................................................................
56
Track Erase ...............................................................................
63
Track Erase screen ...................................................................
63
Track Exchange ........................................................................
60
Track Exchange screen ............................................................
60
Track faders ..............................................................................
27
TRACK icon .............................................................................
56
Track Insert ...............................................................................
61
Track Insert screen ..................................................................
61
Track Level ...............................................................................
51
FADER ................................................................................
51
SCENE ................................................................................
51
Track Move ...............................................................................
58
Track Move screen ..................................................................
58
TRACK MUTE button ............................................................
28
Track Name ..............................................................................
47
Track screen ..............................................................................
56
Track status ..............................................................................
27
Track type .....................................................
149, 163, 176, 200
TRACK TYPE indicators ........................................................ 29
TRACK TYPE SELECT ............................... 149, 163, 176, 200
TRACK TYPE SELECT button ............................................... 29
Track Type Select screen ............................. 149, 163, 176, 200
Track types ............................................................................... 29
Treble ................................................................................ 95, 103
Tremolo ............................................................................ 85, 105
Tremolo/Pan ...................................................... 85, 87–88, 105
TRM/PAN .............................................................................. 105
TRM-SQR ................................................................................ 105
TRM-TRI ................................................................................. 105
Troubleshooting ..................................................................... 274
TSCREAM ................................................................................. 94
Tuner ....................................................................................... 256
TUNER ON/OFF .................................................................. 256
TUNER ON/OFF button ........................................................ 25
Tuner screen ........................................................................... 256
Tuning .............................................................................. 99, 256
TURBO OD ............................................................................... 94
Turntable ................................................................................... 99
TWEED ..................................................................................... 95
Twice as fast ......................................................... 205–207, 212
TWIN ....................................................................................... 104
twin .......................................................................................... 104
TYPE ............................................................................... 113–115
Type .................................................... 94–95, 97, 101, 106, 118
U
UM-1 ........................................................................................ 236
UM-1S ...................................................................................... 236
UNDO/REDO button ............................................................. 29
Uni-V ................................................................................ 85, 105
Universal serial bus ............................................................... 240
Unneeded data ......................................................................... 70
UP ............................................................................................ 107
USB .......................................................................... 37, 240, 276
Host ..................................................................................... 37
Hub ...................................................................................... 37
USB cable .................................................................................. 37
USB connector ................................................................... 32, 37
USB icon .................................................................................. 242
USB screen .............................................................................. 242
User backup ............................................................................ 205
User Backup screen ............................................................... 205
User bass pattern ................................................................... 146
User drum pattern ................................................................. 146
User loop phrase ........................................................... 147, 177
User patch ........................................................................ 76, 117
User recover ........................................................................... 208
User rhythm arrangement ........................................... 148, 187
UTILITY button ....................................................................... 29
UV ............................................................................................ 105
BR-1600_R_e.book 307 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
308
Index
V
VALUE 1/PAN, VALUE 2, VALUE 3, and VALUE 4 knobs
...........
40
VALUE knobs ...................................................................
29
,
78
VB .............................................................................................
106
VFX1 ........................................................................................
237
VFX2 ........................................................................................
237
VFX3 ........................................................................................
237
VFX4 ........................................................................................
237
Vibrato ..............................................................................
85
,
106
Vibrato pedal ............................................................................
84
Video device ...........................................................................
236
Visual effects 1 .......................................................................
237
Visual effects 2 .......................................................................
237
Visual effects 3 .......................................................................
237
Visual effects 4 .......................................................................
237
V-LINK ....................................................................................
236
V-LINK button .........................................................................
28
V-LINK REC ...........................................................................
238
V-LINK REC button ................................................................
28
Vnt.Cn .....................................................................................
100
VO CLEAN ...............................................................................
95
VO DRV ..................................................................
95
,
103
–
104
vo drv ......................................................................................
104
VO LEAD ..................................................................................
95
VO WAH ................................................................................
106
VO+AC.SIM .............................................................................
89
VO+ACOUSTIC ......................................................................
89
VO+GT.AMP ............................................................................
88
Voc.Dy .....................................................................................
100
VOCAL ............................................................................
24
,
280
VOCAL MULTI .......................................................................
87
VOCAL TOOL BOX ..............................................................
208
Vocal Tool Box ................................................................
75
,
116
Patch copy ........................................................................
122
Patch write .......................................................................
121
VOCAL TOOL BOX button .................................
27
,
117
,
119
Vocal Tool Box Write/Copy screen ...........................
121
–
122
Voice ........................................................................................
102
Voice character .......................................................................
106
VOICE TRANSFORMER ........................................................
87
Voice Transformer ..........................................................
87
,
106
VOICE1 ...................................................................................
120
VOL .........................................................................................
192
Volume ....................................................................................
103
Volume pedal ...........................................................................
84
Volume-swell effect ...............................................................
104
Vowel ........................................................................................
98
Vowel1 ......................................................................................
98
Vowel2 ......................................................................................
98
VtgRack .....................................................................................
94
V-Track ......................................................................................
46
V-TRACK button .....................................................................
28
W
WAH .......................................................................................
106
Wah .............................................................................
85
–
88
,
106
Wah pedal .................................................................................
84
Wah Type ................................................................................
107
WAV ..............................................................
180
,
212
,
248
,
250
WAV file .................................................................................
210
WAV/AIFF export .......................................................
211
,
248
WAV/AIFF import ......................................................
210
,
252
WAV/AIFF screen ................................................................ 210
Wave Shape ................................................................... 101, 105
Waveform Data Export screen ............................................. 211
Wh.CONE ............................................................................... 127
WhTISUE ................................................................................ 127
Windows .............................................. 240, 242, 245, 248, 252
Wow Flutter ............................................................................. 99
WRITE ..................................................................................... 216
Write Speed .......................................................... 205–207, 212
WRITE/COPY ........................ 81–82, 121–122, 125–126, 131
WRITE/COPY/DEL .................................................... 153, 196
Write/Copy/Delete screen for drum patterns ................. 153
X
XG ................................................................................... 162, 175
Xover Freq ................................................................................ 92
Z
ZERO button ............................................................................ 26
BR-1600_R_e.book 308 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
309
MEMO
BR-1600_R_e.book 309 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
For EU Countries
BR-1600_R_e.book 310 ページ ２００７年１２月６日　木曜日　午前９時５２分
This product complies with the requirements of European Directive 89/336/EEC.
For EU Countries
For Canada
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Règlement sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.
NOTICE
AVIS
For the USA
FEDERAL COMMUNICATIONS COMMISSION
RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE STATEMENT
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential
installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in
accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee
that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or
television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
– Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
– Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
– Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected.
– Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Unauthorized changes or modification to this system can void the users authority to operate this equipment.
This equipment requires shielded interface cables in order to meet FCC class B Limit.
IMPORTANT: THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE.
BLUE:
BROWN:
As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying
the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows:
The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.
The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.
Under no circumstances must either of the above wires be connected to the earth terminal of a three pin plug.
NEUTRAL
LIVE
For the U.K.
2
USING THE UNIT SAFELY
001
• Before using this unit, make sure to read the
instructions below, and the Owner’s Manual.
...........................................................................................................
002c
• Do not open (or modify in any way) the unit or its
AC adaptor.
...........................................................................................................
003
• Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts
within it (except when this manual provides
specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer
all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland
Service Center, or an authorized Roland
distributor, as listed on the “Information” page.
...........................................................................................................
004
• Never use or store the unit in places that are:
• Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct
sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating
duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or
are
• Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are
• Humid; or are
• Exposed to rain; or are
• Dusty; or are
• Subject to high levels of vibration.
...........................................................................................................
007
• Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is
level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on
stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces.
...........................................................................................................
008c
• Be sure to use only the AC adaptor supplied with
the unit. Also, make sure the line voltage at the
installation matches the input voltage specified on
the AC adaptor’s body. Other AC adaptors may
use a different polarity, or be designed for a
different voltage, so their use could result in
damage, malfunction, or electric shock.
..........................................................................................................
008e
• Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also,
the supplied power cord must not be used with
any other device.
..........................................................................................................
009
• Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord,
nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can
damage the cord, producing severed elements and
short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock
hazards!
..........................................................................................................
010
• This unit, either alone or in combination with an
amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be
capable of producing sound levels that could
cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for
a long period of time at a high volume level, or at
a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience
any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should
immediately stop using the unit, and consult an
audiologist.
..........................................................................................................
011
• Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material,
coins, pins); or liquids of any kind (water, soft
drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit.
..........................................................................................................
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of injury or material
damage should the unit be used
improperly.
* Material damage refers to damage or
other adverse effects caused with
respect to the home and all its
furnishings, as well to domestic
animals or pets.
Used for instructions intended to alert
the user to the risk of death or severe
injury should the unit be used
improperly.
The ● symbol alerts the user to things that must be
carried out. The specific thing that must be done is
indicated by the design contained within the circle. In
the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet.
The symbol alerts the user to important instructions
or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is
determined by the design contained within the
triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for
general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger.
The symbol alerts the user to items that must never
be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that
must not be done is indicated by the design contained
within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it
means that the unit must never be disassembled.
Owner’s Manual
*03343912-10*
03343912 07-12-AN
Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the BOSS BR-1600CD Digital Recording Studio.
Before using this unit, carefully read the sections entitled: “USING THE UNIT SAFELY” and “IMPORTANT
NOTES” (Owner’s manual p. 2–3; p. 4–5). These sections provide important information concerning the proper
operation of the unit. Additionally, in order to feel assured that you have gained a good grasp of every feature
provided by your new unit, Basic Operation and Owner’s manual should be read in its entirety.
The manuals should be saved and kept on hand as a convenient reference.
■
How to use this manual
The BR-1600CD Owner’s manual consists of two volumes “
Basic Operation
” and “
Owner’s Manual
.”
“
Basic Operation
” explains the sequence of turning on this unit, recording, playback, mixing down and
making an original Audio CD. To use the BR-1600CD, please read this book first.
“
Owner’s Manual
” covers the functions which are not mentioned in “Basic Operation.” Please read it for
finer settings and more sophisticated use of the BR-1600CD.
■
Printing conventions in this manual
• Text or numerals enclosed in square brackets [ ] indicate buttons.
[PLAY]
PLAY button
[CURSOR]
CURSOR button
• Reference such as (p. **) indicate pages in this manual to which you can refer.
Copyright © 2003 BOSS CORPORATION
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced in any form without the written permission of BOSS CORPORATION.
Section 2
Using
Effects
Section 3
Using
Rhythm
Section 4
Using the
CD-R/RW Drive
Section 5
Using
MIDI
Section 6
Using
USB
Section 7
Other
Convenient
Functions
AppendicesSection 1
Advanced
Use

Navigation menu